This preview shows pages 1–7. Sign up to view the full content.
This preview has intentionally blurred sections. Sign up to view the full version.
View Full DocumentThis preview has intentionally blurred sections. Sign up to view the full version.
View Full DocumentThis preview has intentionally blurred sections. Sign up to view the full version.
View Full Document
Unformatted text preview: Instructor’s Solutions Manual
to accompany A First Course in Abstract Algebra
Seventh Edition John B. Fraleigh
University of Rhode Island Preface
This manual contains solutions to all exercises in the text, except those oddnumbered exercises for which fairly lengthy complete solutions are given in the answers at the back of the text. Then reference is simply given to the text answers to save typing. I prepared these solutions myself. While I tried to be accurate, there are sure to be the inevitable mistakes and typos. An author reading proof rends to see what he or she wants to see. However, the instructor should ﬁnd this manual adequate for the purpose for which it is intended. Morgan, Vermont July, 2002 J.B.F i ii CONTENTS
0. Sets and Relations 1 I. Groups and Subgroups
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Introduction and Examples 4 Binary Operations 7 Isomorphic Binary Structures 9 Groups 13 Subgroups 17 Cyclic Groups 21 Generators and Cayley Digraphs 24 II. Permutations, Cosets, and Direct Products
8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Groups of Permutations 26 Orbits, Cycles, and the Alternating Groups 30 Cosets and the Theorem of Lagrange 34 Direct Products and Finitely Generated Abelian Groups Plane Isometries 42 37 III. Homomorphisms and Factor Groups
13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Homomorphisms 44 Factor Groups 49 FactorGroup Computations and Simple Groups Group Action on a Set 58 Applications of GSets to Counting 61 53 IV. Rings and Fields
18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Rings and Fields 63 Integral Domains 68 Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorems 72 The Field of Quotients of an Integral Domain 74 Rings of Polynomials 76 Factorization of Polynomials over a Field 79 Noncommutative Examples 85 Ordered Rings and Fields 87 V. Ideals and Factor Rings
26. Homomorphisms and Factor Rings 27. Prime and Maximal Ideals 94 28. Gr¨bner Bases for Ideals 99 o 89 iii VI. Extension Fields
29. 30. 31. 32. 33. Introduction to Extension Fields Vector Spaces 107 Algebraic Extensions 111 Geometric Constructions 115 Finite Fields 116 103 VII. Advanced Group Theory
34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. Isomorphism Theorems 117 Series of Groups 119 Sylow Theorems 122 Applications of the Sylow Theory Free Abelian Groups 128 Free Groups 130 Group Presentations 133 124 VIII. Groups in Topology
41. 42. 43. 44. Simplicial Complexes and Homology Groups 136 Computations of Homology Groups 138 More Homology Computations and Applications 140 Homological Algebra 144 IX. Factorization
45. Unique Factorization Domains 148 46. Euclidean Domains 151 47. Gaussian Integers and Multiplicative Norms 154 X. Automorphisms and Galois Theory
48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. Automorphisms of Fields 159 The Isomorphism Extension Theorem Splitting Fields 165 Separable Extensions 167 Totally Inseparable Extensions 171 Galois Theory 173 Illustrations of Galois Theory 176 Cyclotomic Extensions 183 Insolvability of the Quintic 185 187 164 APPENDIX Matrix Algebra iv 0. Sets and Relations 1 0. Sets and Relations
√ √ 1. { 3, − 3} 2. The set is empty. 3. {1, −1, 2, −2, 3, −3, 4, −4, 5, −5, 6, −6, 10, −10, 12, −12, 15, −15, 20, −20, 30, −30, 60, −60} 4. {−10, −9, −8, −7, −6, −5, −4, −3, −2, −1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11} 5. It is not a welldeﬁned set. (Some may argue that no element of Z+ is large, because every element exceeds only a ﬁnite number of other elements but is exceeded by an inﬁnite number of other elements. Such people might claim the answer should be ∅.) 6. ∅ 7. The set is ∅ because 33 = 27 and 43 = 64. 9. Q 8. It is not a welldeﬁned set. 10. The set containing all numbers that are (positive, negative, or zero) integer multiples of 1, 1/2, or 1/3. 11. {(a, 1), (a, 2), (a, c), (b, 1), (b, 2), (b, c), (c, 1), (c, 2), (c, c)} 12. a. It is a function. It is not onetoone since there are two pairs with second member 4. It is not onto B because there is no pair with second member 2. b. (Same answer as Part(a).) c. It is not a function because there are two pairs with ﬁrst member 1. d. It is a function. It is onetoone. It is onto B because every element of B appears as second member of some pair. e. It is a function. It is not onetoone because there are two pairs with second member 6. It is not onto B because there is no pair with second member 2. f. It is not a function because there are two pairs with ﬁrst member 2. 13. Draw the line through P and x, and let y be its point of intersection with the line segment CD. 14. a. φ : [0, 1] → [0, 2] where φ(x) = 2x c. φ : [a, b] → [c, d] where φ(x) = c + b. φ : [1, 3] → [5, 25] where φ(x) = 5 + 10(x − 1)
d−c b−a (x − a) 15. Let φ : S → R be deﬁned by φ(x) = tan(π (x − 1 )). 2 16. a. ∅; cardinality 1 b. ∅, {a}; cardinality 2 c. ∅, {a}, {b}, {a, b}; cardinality 4 d. ∅, {a}, {b}, {c}, {a, b}, {a, c}, {b, c}, {a, b, c}; cardinality 8 17. Conjecture: P (A) = 2s = 2A . Proof The number of subsets of a set A depends only on the cardinality of A, not on what the elements of A actually are. Suppose B = {1, 2, 3, · · · , s − 1} and A = {1, 2, 3, · · · , s}. Then A has all the elements of B plus the one additional element s. All subsets of B are also subsets of A; these are precisely the subsets of A that do not contain s, so the number of subsets of A not containing s is P (B ). Any other subset of A must contain s, and removal of the s would produce a subset of B . Thus the number of subsets of A containing s is also P (B ). Because every subset of A either contains s or does not contain s (but not both), we see that the number of subsets of A is 2P (B ). 2 0. Sets and Relations We have shown that if A has one more element that B , then P (A) = 2P (B ). Now P (∅) = 1, so if A = s, then P (A) = 2s . 18. We deﬁne a onetoone map φ of B A onto P (A). Let f ∈ B A , and let φ(f ) = {x ∈ A  f (x) = 1}. Suppose φ(f ) = φ(g ). Then f (x) = 1 if and only if g (x) = 1. Because the only possible values for f (x) and g (x) are 0 and 1, we see that f (x) = 0 if and only if g (x) = 0. Consequently f (x) = g (x) for all x ∈ A so f = g and φ is one to one. To show that φ is onto P (A), let S ⊆ A, and let h : A → {0, 1} be deﬁned by h(x) = 1 if x ∈ S and h(x) = 0 otherwise. Clearly φ(h) = S , showing that φ is indeed onto P (A). 19. Picking up from the hint, let Z = {x ∈ A  x ∈ φ(x)}. We claim that for any a ∈ A, φ(a) = Z . Either / a ∈ φ(a), in which case a ∈ Z , or a ∈ φ(a), in which case a ∈ Z . Thus Z and φ(a) are certainly / / diﬀerent subsets of A; one of them contains a and the other one does not. Based on what we just showed, we feel that the power set of A has cardinality greater than A. Proceeding naively, we can start with the inﬁnite set Z, form its power set, then form the power set of that, and continue this process indeﬁnitely. If there were only a ﬁnite number of inﬁnite cardinal numbers, this process would have to terminate after a ﬁxed ﬁnite number of steps. Since it doesn’t, it appears that there must be an inﬁnite number of diﬀerent inﬁnite cardinal numbers. The set of everything is not logically acceptable, because the set of all subsets of the set of everything would be larger than the set of everything, which is a fallacy. 20. a. The set containing precisely the two elements of A and the three (diﬀerent) elements of B is C = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} which has 5 elements. i) Let A = {−2, −1, 0} and B = {1, 2, 3, · · ·} = Z+ . Then A = 3 and B  = ℵ0 , and A and B have no elements in common. The set C containing all elements in either A or B is C = {−2, −1, 0, 1, 2, 3, · · ·}. The map φ : C → B deﬁned by φ(x) = x + 3 is one to one and onto B , so C  = B  = ℵ0 . Thus we consider 3 + ℵ0 = ℵ0 . ii) Let A = {1, 2, 3, · · ·} and B = {1/2, 3/2, 5/2, · · ·}. Then A = B  = ℵ0 and A and B have no elements in common. The set C containing all elements in either A of B is C = {1/2, 1, 3/2, 2, 5/2, 3, · · ·}. The map φ : C → A deﬁned by φ(x) = 2x is one to one and onto A, so C  = A = ℵ0 . Thus we consider ℵ0 + ℵ0 = ℵ0 . b. We leave the plotting of the points in A × B to you. Figure 0.14 in the text, where there are ℵ0 rows each having ℵ0 entries, illustrates that we would consider that ℵ0 · ℵ0 = ℵ0 . 21. There are 102 = 100 numbers (.00 through .99) of the form .##, and 105 = 100, 000 numbers (.00000 through .99999) of the form .#####. Thus for .##### · · ·, we expect 10ℵ0 sequences representing all numbers x ∈ R such that 0 ≤ x ≤ 1, but a sequence trailing oﬀ in 0’s may represent the same x ∈ R as a sequence trailing of in 9’s. At any rate, we should have 10ℵ0 ≥ [0, 1] = R; see Exercise 15. On the other hand, we can represent numbers in R using any integer base n > 1, and these same 10ℵ0 sequences using digits from 0 to 9 in base n = 12 would not represent all x ∈ [0, 1], so we have 10ℵ0 ≤ R. Thus we consider the value of 10ℵ0 to be R. We could make the same argument using any other integer base n > 1, and thus consider nℵ0 = R for n ∈ Z+ , n > 1. In particular, 12ℵ0 = 2ℵ0 = R. 22. ℵ0 , R, 2R , 2(2
R ) , 2(2 (2R ) ) 23. 1. There is only one partition {{a}} of a oneelement set {a}. 24. There are two partitions of {a, b}, namely {{a, b}} and {{a}, {b}}. 0. Sets and Relations 3 25. There are ﬁve partitions of {a, b, c}, namely {{a, b, c}}, {{a}, {b, c}}, {{b}, {a, c}}, {{c}, {a, b}}, and {{a}, {b}, {c}}. 26. 15. The set {a, b, c, d} has 1 partition into one cell, 7 partitions into two cells (four with a 1,3 split and three with a 2,2 split), 6 partitions into three cells, and 1 partition into four cells for a total of 15 partitions. 27. 52. The set {a, b, c, d, e} has 1 partition into one cell, 15 into two cells, 25 into three cells, 10 into four cells, and 1 into ﬁve cells for a total of 52. (Do a combinatorics count for each possible case, such as a 1,2,2 split where there are 15 possible partitions.) 28. Reﬂexive: In order for x R x to be true, x must be in the same cell of the partition as the cell that contains x. This is certainly true. Transitive: Suppose that x R y and y R z . Then x is in the same cell as y so x = y , and y is in the same cell as z so that y = z . By the transitivity of the set equality relation on the collection of cells in the partition, we see that x = z so that x is in the same cell as z . Consequently, x R z . 29. Not an equivalence relation; 0 is not related to 0, so it is not reﬂexive. 30. Not an equivalence relation; 3 ≥ 2 but 2 3, so it is not symmetric. 31. It is an equivalence relation; 0 = {0} and a = {a, −a} for a ∈ R, a = 0. 32. It is not an equivalence relation; 1 R 3 and 3 R 5 but we do not have 1 R 5 because 1 − 5 = 4 > 3. 33. (See the answer in the text.) 34. It is an equivalence relation; 1 = {1, 11, 21, 31, · · ·}, 2 = {2, 12, 22, 32, · · ·}, · · · , 10 = {10, 20, 30, 40, · · ·}. 35. (See the answer in the text.) 36. a. Let h, k, and m be positive integers. We check the three criteria. Reﬂexive: h − h = n0 so h ∼ h. Symmetric: If h ∼ k so that h − k = ns for some s ∈ Z, then k − h = n(−s) so k ∼ h. Transitive: If h ∼ k and k ∼ m, then for some s, t ∈ Z, we have h − k = ns and k − m = nt. Then h − m = (h − k ) + (k − m) = ns + nt = n(s + t), so h ∼ m. b. Let h, k ∈ Z+ . In the sense of this exercise, h ∼ k if and only if h − k = nq for some q ∈ Z. In the sense of Example 0.19, h ≡ k (mod n) if and only if h and k have the same remainder when divided by n. Write h = nq1 + r1 and k = nq2 + r2 where 0 ≤ r1 < n and 0 ≤ r2 < n. Then h − k = n(q1 − q2 ) + (r1 − r2 ) and we see that h − k is a multiple of n if and only if r1 = r2 . Thus the conditions are the same. c. a. 0 = {· · · , −2, 0, 2, · · ·}, 1 = {· · · , −3, −1, 1, 3, · · ·} b. 0 = {· · · , −3, 0, 3, · · ·}, 1 = {· · · , −5, −2, 1, 4, · · ·}, 2 = {· · · , −1, 2, 5, · · ·} c. 0 = {· · · , −5, 0, 5, · · ·}, 1 = {· · · , −9, −4, 1, 6, · · ·}, 2 = {· · · , −3, 2, 7, · · ·}, 3 = {· · · , −7, −2, 3, 8, · · ·}, 4 = {· · · , −1, 4, 9, · · ·} 4 1. Introduction and Examples 37. The name twototwo function suggests that such a function f should carry every pair of distinct points into two distinct points. Such a function is onetoone in the conventional sense. (If the domain has only one element, the function cannot fail to be twototwo, because the only way it can fail to be twototwo is to carry two points into one point, and the set does not have two points.) Conversely, every function that is onetoone in the conventional sense carries each pair of distinct points into two distinct points. Thus the functions conventionally called onetoone are precisely those that carry two points into two points, which is a much more intuitive unidirectional way of regarding them. Also, the standard way of trying to show that a function is onetoone is precisely to show that it does not fail to be twototwo. That is, proving that a function is onetoone becomes more natural in the twototwo terminology. 1. Introduction and Examples
1. i3 = i2 · i = −1 · i = −i 2. i4 = (i2 )2 = (−1)2 = 1 3. i23 = (i2 )11 · i = (−1)11 · i = (−1)i = −i 4. (−i)35 = (i2 )17 (−i) = (−1)17 (−i) = (−1)(−i) = i 5. (4 − i)(5 + 3i) = 20 + 12i − 5i − 3i2 = 20 + 7i + 3 = 23 + 7i 6. (8 + 2i)(3 − i) = 24 − 8i + 6i − 2i2 = 24 − 2i − 2(−1) = 26 − 2i 7. (2 − 3i)(4 + i) + (6 − 5i) = 8 + 2i − 12i − 3i2 + 6 − 5i = 14 − 15i − 3(−1) = 17 − 15i 8. (1 + i)3 = (1 + i)2 (1 + i) = (1 + 2i − 1)(1 + i) = 2i(1 + i) = 2i2 + 2i = −2 + 2i 9. (1 − i)5 = 15 + 5 14 (−i) + 5·4 13 (−i)2 + 5·4 12 (−i)3 + 5 11 (−i)4 + (−i)5 = 1 − 5i + 10i2 − 10i3 + 5i4 − i5 = 1 2 ·1 2 ·1 1 1 − 5i − 10 + 10i + 5 − i = −4 + 4i √ √ √ √ √ √ 10. 3 − 4i = 32 + (−4)2 = 9 + 16 = 25 = 5 11. 6+4i = 62 + 42 = 36 + 16 = 52 = 2 13 √ 12. 3 − 4i = 32 + (−4)2 = 25 = 5 and 3 − 4i = 5( 3 − 4 i) 5 5 √ √ 1 1 13.  − 1 + i = (−1)2 + 12 = 2 and − 1 + i = 2(− √2 + √2 i) √ √ 5 14. 12 + 5i = 122 + 52 = 169 and 12 + 5i = 13( 12 + 13 i) 13 √ √ 15.  − 3 + 5i = (−3)2 + 52 = 34 and − 3 + 5i = 34(− √3 + √5 i) 34 34 16. z 4 (cos 4θ + i sin 4θ) = 1(1 + 0i) so z  = 1 and cos 4θ = 1 and sin 4θ = 0. Thus 4θ = 0 + n(2π ) so π θ = n π which yields values 0, π , π, and 32 less than 2π . The solutions are 2 2 π π z1 = cos 0 + i sin 0 = 1, z2 = cos + i sin = i, 2 2 3π 3π z3 = cos π + i sin π = −1, and z4 = cos + i sin = −i. 2 2 17. z 4 (cos 4θ + i sin 4θ) = 1(−1 + 0i) so z  = 1 and cos 4θ = −1 and sin 4θ = 0. Thus 4θ = π + n(2π ) so ππ π θ = π + n π which yields values π , 34 , 54 , and 74 less than 2π . The solutions are 4 2 4 π π 1 1 3π 3π 1 1 + i sin = √ + √ i, z2 = cos + i sin = − √ + √ i, 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 5π 1 7π 1 5π 1 7π 1 z3 = cos + i sin = − √ − √ i, and z4 = cos + i sin = √ − √ i. 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 z1 = cos 1. Introduction and Examples 5 18. z 3 (cos 3θ + i sin 3θ) = 8(−1 + 0i) so z  = 2 and cos 3θ = −1 and sin 3θ = 0. Thus 3θ = π + n(2π ) so π π θ = π + n 23 which yields values π , π, and 53 less than 2π . The solutions are 3 3 √ √ π 1 3 π i) = 1 + 3i, z2 = 2(cos π + i sin π ) = 2(−1 + 0i) = −2, z1 = 2(cos + i sin ) = 2( + 3 3 2 2 and √ √ 5π 5π 1 3 z3 = 2(cos + i sin ) = 2( − i) = 1 − 3i. 3 3 2 2 19. z 3 (cos 3θ + i sin 3θ) = 27(0 − i) so z  = 3 and cos 3θ = 0 and sin 3θ = −1. Thus 3θ = 3π/2 + n(2π ) π π so θ = π + n 23 which yields values π , 76 , and 11π less than 2π . The solutions are 2 2 6 √ √ π π 7π 7π 31 33 3 z1 = 3(cos + i sin ) = 3(0 + i) = 3i, z2 = 3(cos + i sin ) = 3(− − i) = − −i 2 2 6 6 2 2 2 2 and √ √ 11π 11π 31 33 3 z3 = 3(cos + i sin ) = 3( − i) = − i. 6 6 2 2 2 2 20. z 6 (cos 6θ + i sin 6θ) = 1 + 0i so z  = 1 and cos 6θ = 1 and sin 6θ = 0. Thus 6θ = 0 + n(2π ) so π π π π θ = 0 + n 26 which yields values 0, π , 23 , π, 43 , and 53 less than 2π . The solutions are 3 √ π 1 3 π z1 = 1(cos 0 + i sin 0) = 1 + 0i = 1, z2 = 1(cos + i sin ) = + i, 3 3 2 2 √ 3 2π 2π 1 z3 = 1(cos + i sin ) = − + i, z4 = 1(cos π + i sin π ) = −1 + 0i = −1, 3 3 2 2 √ √ 4π 4π 1 3 5π 5π 1 3 i, z6 = 1(cos + i sin ) = − i. z5 = 1(cos + i sin ) = − − 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 21. z 6 (cos 6θ + i sin 6θ) = 64(−1 + 0i) so z  = 2 and cos 6θ = −1 and sin 6θ = 0. Thus 6θ = π + n(2π ) π πππ so θ = π + n 26 which yields values π , π , 56 , 76 , 32 and 11π less than 2π . The solutions are 6 62 6 √ √ 31 π π + i) = 3 + i, z1 = 2(cos + i sin ) = 2( 2 2 6 6 π π z2 = 2(cos + i sin ) = 2(0 + i) = 2i, 2 2 √ √ 5π 31 5π z3 = 2(cos + i) = − 3 + i, + i sin ) = 2(− 2 2 6 6 √ √ 31 7π 7π − i) = − 3 − i, z4 = 2(cos + i sin ) = 2(− 2 2 6 6 3π 3π z5 = 2(cos + i sin ) = 2(0 − i) = −2i, 2 2 √ √ 11π 11π 31 z6 = 2(cos + i sin ) = 2( − i) = 3 − i. 6 6 2 2 22. 10 + 16 = 26 > 17, so 10 +17 16 = 26 − 17 = 9. 23. 8 + 6 = 14 > 10, so 8 +10 6 = 14 − 10 = 4. 24. 20.5 + 19.3 = 39.8 > 25, so 20.5 +25 19.3 = 39.8 − 25 = 14.8. 25.
1 2 + 7 8 = 11 8 > 1, so 1 2 +1 7 8 = 11 8 − 1 = 3. 8 26. 3π 4 + 3π 2 = 9π 4 > 2π, so 3π 4 +2π 3π 2 = 9π 4 − 2π = π . 4 6 1. Introduction and Examples √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 27. 2 2 + 3 2 = 5 2 > 32 = 4 2, so 2 2 +√32 3 2 = 5 2 − 4 2 = 2. 28. 8 is not in R6 because 8 > 6, and we have only deﬁned a +6 b for a, b ∈ R6 . 29. We need to have x + 7 = 15 + 3, so x = 11 will work. It is easily checked that there is no other solution. 30. We need to have x + solution.
3π 2 = 2π + 3π 4 = 11π 4, so x = 5π 4 will work. It is easy to see there is no other 31. We need to have x + x = 7 + 3 = 10, so x = 5 will work. It is easy to see that there is no other solution. 32. We need to have x + x + x = 7 + 5, so x = 4 will work. Checking the other possibilities 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6, we see that this is the only solution. 33. An obvious solution is x = 1. Otherwise, we need to have x + x = 12 + 2, so x = 7 will work also. Checking the other ten elements, in Z12 , we see that these are the only solutions. 34. Checking the elements 0, 1, 2, 3 ∈ Z4 , we ﬁnd that they are all solutions. For example, 3+4 3+4 3+4 3 = (3 +4 3) +4 (3 +4 3) = 2 +4 2 = 0. 35. ζ 0 ↔ 0, ζ 3 = ζ 2 ζ ↔ 2 +8 5 = 7 , ζ 4 = ζ 2 ζ 2 ↔ 2 +8 2 = 4, 6 = ζ 3 ζ 3 ↔ 7 + 7 = 6, 7 = ζ 3ζ 4 ↔ 7 + 4 = 3 ζ ζ 8 8 36. ζ 0 ↔ 0, ζ 2 = ζζ ↔ 4 +7 4 = 1, ζ 3 = ζ 2 ζ ↔ 1 +7 4 = 5 , 5 = ζ 3 ζ 2 ↔ 5 + 1 = 6, 6 = ζ 3ζ 3 ↔ 5 + 5 = 3 ζ ζ 7 7 ζ 5 = ζ 4 ζ ↔ 4 +8 5 = 1 , ζ 4 = ζ 2 ζ 2 ↔ 1 +7 1 = 2, 37. If there were an isomorphism such that ζ ↔ 4, then we would have ζ 2 ↔ 4 +6 4 = 2 and ζ 4 = ζ 2 ζ 2 ↔ 2 +6 2 = 4 again, contradicting the fact that an isomorphism ↔ must give a onetoone correpondence. 38. By Euler’s fomula, eia eib = ei(a+b) = cos(a + b) + i sin(a + b). Also by Euler’s formula, eia eib = (cos a + i sin a)(cos b + i sin b) = (cos a cos b − sin a sin b) + i(sin a cos b + cos a sin b). The desired formulas follow at once. 39. (See the text answer.) 40. a. We have e3θ = cos 3θ + i sin 3θ. On the other hand, e3θ = (eθ )3 = (cos θ + i sin θ)3 = cos3 θ + 3i cos2 θ sin θ − 3 cos θ sin2 θ − i sin3 θ = (cos3 θ − 3 cos θ sin2 θ) + i(3 cos2 θ sin θ − sin3 θ). Comparing these two expressions, we see that cos 3θ = cos3 θ − 3 cos θ sin2 θ. b. From Part(a), we obtain cos 3θ = cos3 θ − 3(cos θ)(1 − cos2 θ) = 4 cos3 θ − 3 cos θ. 2. Binary Operations 7 2. Binary Operations
1. b ∗ d = e, c ∗ c = b, [(a ∗ c) ∗ e] ∗ a = [c ∗ e] ∗ a = a ∗ a = a 2. (a ∗ b) ∗ c = b ∗ c = a and a ∗ (b ∗ c) = a ∗ a = a, so the operation might be associative, but we can’t tell without checking all other triple products. 3. (b ∗ d) ∗ c = e ∗ c = a and b ∗ (d ∗ c) = b ∗ b = c, so the operation is not associative. 4. It is not commutative because b ∗ e = c but e ∗ b = b. 5. Now d ∗ a = d so ﬁll in d for a ∗ d. Also, c ∗ b = a so ﬁll in a for b ∗ c. Now b ∗ d = c so ﬁll in c for d ∗ b. Finally, c ∗ d = b so ﬁll in b for d ∗ c. 6. d ∗ a = (c ∗ b) ∗ a = c ∗ (b ∗ a) = c ∗ b = d. In a similar fashion, substituting c ∗ b for d and using the associative property, we ﬁnd that d ∗ b = c, d ∗ c = c, and d ∗ d = d. 7. It is not commutative because 1 − 2 = 2 − 1. It is not associative because 2 = 1 − (2 − 3) = (1 − 2) − 3 = −4. 8. It is commutative because ab + 1 = ba + 1 for all a, b ∈ Q. It is not associative because (a ∗ b) ∗ c = (ab + 1) ∗ c = abc + c + 1 but a ∗ (b ∗ c) = a ∗ (bc + 1) = abc + a + 1, and we need not have a = c. 9. It is commutative because ab/2 = ba/2 for all a, b ∈ Q. It is associative because a ∗ (b ∗ c) = a ∗ (bc/2) = [a(bc/2)]/2 = abc/4, and (a ∗ b) ∗ c = (ab/2) ∗ c = [(ab/2)c]/2 = abc/4 also. 10. It is commutative because 2ab = 2ba for all a, b ∈ Z+ . It is not associative because (a ∗ b) ∗ c = 2ab ∗ c = bc ab 2(2 )c , but a ∗ (b ∗ c) = a ∗ 2bc = 2a(2 ) . 11. It is not commutative because 2 ∗ 3 = 23 = 8 = 9 = 32 = 3 ∗ 2. It is not associative because c a ∗ (b ∗ c) = a ∗ bc = a(b ) , but (a ∗ b) ∗ c = ab ∗ c = (ab )c = abc , and bc = bc for some b, c ∈ Z+ . 12. If S has just one element, there is only one possible binary operation on S ; the table must be ﬁlled in with that single element. If S has two elements, there are 16 possible operations, for there are four places to ﬁll in a table, and each may be ﬁlled in two ways, and 2 · 2 · 2 · 2 = 16. There are 19,683 operations on a set S with three elements, for there are nine places to ﬁll in a table, and 39 = 19, 683. With n elements, there are n2 places to ﬁll in a table, each of which can be done in n ways, so there 2 are n(n ) possible tables. 13. A commutative binary operation on a set with n elements is completely determined by the elements on or above the main diagonal in its table, which runs from the upper left corner to the lower right corner. The number of such places to ﬁll in is n+
2 n2 − n n2 + n = . 2 2 Thus there are n(n +n)/2 possible commutative binary operations on an nelement set. For n = 2, we obtain 23 = 8, and for n = 3 we obtain 36 = 729. 14. It is incorrect. Mention should be made of the underlying set for ∗ and the universal quantiﬁer, for all, should appear. A binary operation ∗ on a set S is commutative if and only if a ∗ b = b ∗ a for all a, b ∈ S . 8 15. The deﬁnition is correct. 2. Binary Operations 16. It is incorrect. Replace the ﬁnal S by H . 17. It is not a binary operation. Condition 2 is violated, for 1 ∗ 1 = 0 and 0 ∈ Z+ . / 18. This does deﬁne a binary operation. 19. This does deﬁne a binary operation. 20. This does deﬁne a binary operation. 21. It is not a binary operation. Condition 1 is violated, for 2 ∗ 3 might be any integer greater than 9. 22. It is not a binary operation. Condition 2 is violated, for 1 ∗ 1 = 0 and 0 ∈ Z+ . / 23. a. Yes. b. Yes. a −b ba a −b ba + c −d dc c −d dc = = a + c −(b + d) . b+d a+c ac − bd −(ad + bc) . ad + bc ac − bd 24. F T F F F T T T T F 25. (See the answer in the text.) 26. We have (a ∗ b) ∗ (c ∗ d) = (c ∗ d) ∗ (a ∗ b) = (d ∗ c) ∗ (a ∗ b) = [(d ∗ c) ∗ a] ∗ b, where we used commutativity for the ﬁrst two steps and associativity for the last. 27. The statement is true. Commutativity and associativity assert the equality of certain computations. For a binary operation on a set with just one element, that element is the result of every computation involving the operation, so the operation must be commutative and associative. ∗ab a b a The statement is false. Consider the operation on {a, b} deﬁned by the table. Then baa (a ∗ a) ∗ b = b ∗ b = a but a ∗ (a ∗ b) = a ∗ a = b. 28. 29. It is associative. Proof: [(f + g ) + h](x) = (f + g )(x) + h(x) = [f (x) + g (x)] + h(x) = f (x) + [g (x) + h(x)] = f (x) + [(g + h)(x)] = [f + (g + h)](x) because addition in R is associative. 30. It is not commutative. Let f (x) = 2x and g (x) = 5x. Then (f − g )(x) = f (x) − g (x) = 2x − 5x = −3x while (g − f )(x) = g (x) − f (x) = 5x − 2x = 3x. 31. It is not associative. Let f (x) = 2x, g (x) = 5x, and h(x) = 8x. Then [f − (g − h)](x) = f (x) − (g − h)(x) = f (x) − [g (x) − h(x)] = f (x) − g (x) + h(x) = 2x − 5x + 8x = 5x, but [(f − g ) − h](x) = (f − g )(x) − h(x) = f (x) − g (x) − h(x) = 2x − 5x − 8x = −11x. 32. It is commutative. Proof: (f · g )(x) = f (x) · g (x) = g (x) · f (x) = (g · f )(x) because multiplication in R is commutative. 33. It is associative. Proof: [(f · g ) · h](x) = (f · g )(x) · h(x) = [f (x) · g (x)] · h(x) = f (x) · [g (x) · h(x)] = [f · (g · h)](x) because multiplication in R is associative. 3. Isomorphic Binary Structures 9 34. It is not commutative. Let f (x) = x2 and g (x) = x + 1. Then (f ◦ g )(3) = f (g (3)) = f (4) = 16 but (g ◦ f )(3) = g (f (3)) = g (9) = 10. 35. It is not true. Let ∗ be + and let ∗ be · and let S = Z. Then 2 + (3 · 5) = 17 but (2 + 3) · (2 + 5) = 35. 36. Let a, b ∈ H . By deﬁnition of H , we have a ∗ x = x ∗ a and b ∗ x = x ∗ b for all x ∈ S . Using the fact that ∗ is associative, we then obtain, for all x ∈ S, (a ∗ b) ∗ x = a ∗ (b ∗ x) = a ∗ (x ∗ b) = (a ∗ x) ∗ b = (x ∗ a) ∗ b = x ∗ (a ∗ b). This shows that a ∗ b satisﬁes the deﬁning criterion for an element of H , so (a ∗ b) ∈ H . 37. Let a, b ∈ H . By deﬁnition of H , we have a ∗ a = a and b ∗ b = b. Using, one step at a time, the fact that ∗ is associative and commutative, we obtain (a ∗ b) ∗ (a ∗ b) = [(a ∗ b) ∗ a] ∗ b = [a ∗ (b ∗ a)] ∗ b = [a ∗ (a ∗ b)] ∗ b = [(a ∗ a) ∗ b] ∗ b = (a ∗ b) ∗ b = a ∗ (b ∗ b) = a ∗ b. This show that a ∗ b satisﬁes the deﬁning criterion for an element of H , so (a ∗ b) ∈ H . 3. Isomorphic Binary Structures
1. i) φ must be one to one. ii) φ[S ] must be all of S . iii) φ(a ∗ b) = φ(a) ∗ φ(b) for all a, b ∈ S . 2. It is an isomorphism; φ is one to one, onto, and φ(n + m) = −(n + m) = (−n) + (−m) = φ(n) + φ(m) for all m, n ∈ Z. 3. It is not an isomorphism; φ does not map Z onto Z. For example, φ(n) = 1 for all n ∈ Z. 4. It is not an isomorphism because φ(m + n) = m + n + 1 while φ(m) + φ(n) = m + 1 + n + 1 = m + n + 2. 5. It is an isomorphism; φ is one to one, onto, and φ(a + b) =
a+b 2 = a 2 + b 2 = φ(a) + φ(b). 6. It is not an isomorphism because φ does not map Q onto Q. φ(a) = −1 for all a ∈ Q. 7. It is an isomorphism because φ is one to one, onto, and φ(xy ) = (xy )3 = x3 y 3 = φ(x)φ(y ). 8. It is not an isomorphism because φ is not one to one. All the 2 × 2 matrices where the entries in the second row are double the entries above them in the ﬁrst row are mapped into 0 by φ. 9. It is an isomorphism because for 1 × 1 matrices, [a][b] = [ab], and φ([a]) = a so φ just removes the brackets. 10. It is an isomorphism. For any base a = 1, the exponential function f (x) = ax maps R one to one onto R+ , and φ is the exponential map with a = 0.5. We have φ(r + s) = 0.5(r+s) = (0.5r )(0.5s ) = φ(r)φ(s). 11. It is not an isomorphism because φ is not one to one; φ(x2 ) = 2x and φ(x2 + 1) = 2x. 12. It is not an isomorphism because φ is not one to one: φ(sin x) = cos 0 = 1 and φ(x) = 1. 13. No, because φ does not map F onto F . For all f ∈ F , we see that φ(f )(0) = 0 so, for example, no function is mapped by φ into x + 1. 10 3. Isomorphic Binary Structures 14. It is an isomorphism. By calculus, φ(f ) = f , so φ is the identity map which is always an isomorphism of a binary structure with itself. 15. It is not an isomorphism because φ does not map F onto F . Note that φ(f )(0) = 0 · f (0) = 0. Thus there is no element of F that is mapped by φ into the constant function 1. 16. a. For φ to be an isomorphism, we must have m ∗ n = φ(m − 1) ∗ φ(n − 1) = φ((m − 1) + (n − 1)) = φ(m + n − 2) = m + n − 1. The identity element is φ(0) = 1. b. Using the fact that φ−1 must also be an isomorphism, we must have m ∗ n = φ−1 (m + 1) ∗ φ−1 (n + 1) = φ−1 ((m + 1) + (n + 1)) = φ−1 (m + n + 2) = m + n + 1. The identity element is φ−1 (0) = −1. 17. a. For φ to be an isomorphism, we must have m ∗ n = φ(m − 1) ∗ φ(n − 1) = φ((m − 1) · (n − 1)) = φ(mn − m − n + 1) = mn − m − n + 2. The identity element is φ(1) = 2. b. Using the fact that φ−1 must also be an isomorphism, we must have m ∗ n = φ−1 (m + 1) ∗ φ−1 (n + 1) = φ−1 ((m + 1) · (n + 1)) = φ−1 (mn + m + n + 1) = mn + m + n. The identity element is φ−1 (1) = 0. 18. a. For φ to be an isomorphism, we must have a∗b=φ a+1 3 ∗φ b+1 3 =φ a+1 b+1 + 3 3 =φ a+b+2 3 = a + b + 1. The identity element is φ(0) = −1. b. Using the fact that φ−1 must also be an isomorphism, we must have 1 a ∗ b = φ−1 (3a − 1) ∗ φ−1 (3b − 1) = φ−1 ((3a − 1) + (3b − 1)) = φ−1 (3a + 3b − 2) = a + b − . 3 The identity element is φ−1 (0) = 1/3. 19. a. For φ to be an isomorphism, we must have a∗b=φ a+1 3 ∗φ b+1 3 =φ a+1 b+1 · 3 3 =φ ab + a + b + 1 9 = ab + a + b − 2 . 3 The identity element is φ(1) = 2. b. Using the fact that φ−1 must also be an isomorphism, we must have 2 a ∗ b = φ−1 (3a − 1) · φ−1 (3b − 1) = φ−1 ((3a − 1) · (3b − 1)) = φ−1 (9ab − 3a − 3b + 1) = 3ab − a − b + . 3 The identity element is φ−1 (1) = 2/3. 3. Isomorphic Binary Structures 11 20. Computing φ(x ∗ y ) is done by ﬁrst executing the binary operation ∗ , and then performing the map φ. Computing φ(x) ∗ φ(y ) is done by ﬁrst performing the map φ, and then executing the binary operation ∗ . Thus, reading in left to right order of peformance, the isomorphism property is (binary operation)(map) = (map)(binary operation) which has the formal appearance of commutativity. 21. The deﬁnition is incorrect. It should be stated that S, ∗ and S , ∗ are binary structures, φ must be one to one and onto S , and the universal quantiﬁer “for all a, b ∈ S ” should appear in an appropriate place. Let S, ∗ and S , ∗ be binary structures. A map φ : S → S is an isomorphism if and only if φ is one to one and onto S , and φ(a ∗ b) = φ(a) ∗ φ(b) for all a, b ∈ S . 22. It is badly worded. The “for all s ∈ S ” applies to the equation and not to the “is an identity for ∗”. Let ∗ be a binary operation on a set S . An element e of S is an identity element for ∗ if and only if s ∗ e = e ∗ s = s for all s ∈ S . 23. Suppose that e and e are two identity elements and, viewing each in turn as an identity element, compute e ∗ e in two ways. 24. a. Let ∗ be a binary operation on a set S . An element eL of S is a left identity element for ∗ if and only if eL ∗ s = s for all s ∈ S . b. Let ∗ be a binary operation on a set S . An element eR of S is a right identity element for ∗ if and only if s ∗ eR = s for all s ∈ S . A onesided identity element is not unique. Let ∗ be deﬁned on S by a ∗ b = a for all a, b ∈ S . Then every b ∈ S is a right identity. Similarly, a left identity is not unique. If in the proof of Theorem 3.13, we replace e by eL and e by eL everywhere, and replace the word “identity” by “left identity”, the ﬁrst incorrect statement would be, “However, regarding eL as left identity element, we must have eL ∗ eL = eL .” 25. No, if S ∗ has a left identity element eL and a right identity element eR , then eL = eR . Proof Because eL is a left identity element we have eL ∗ eR = eR , but viewing eR as right identity element, eL ∗ eR = eL . Thus eL = eR . 26. Onetoone: Suppose that φ−1 (a ) = φ−1 (b ) for a , b ∈ S . Then a = φ(φ−1 (a )) = φ(φ−1 (b )) = b , so φ−1 is one to one. Onto: Let a ∈ S . Then φ−1 (φ(a)) = a, so φ−1 maps S onto S . Homomorphism property: Let a , b ∈ S . Now φ(φ−1 (a ∗ b )) = a ∗ b . Because φ is an isomorphism, φ(φ−1 (a ) ∗ φ−1 (b , )) = φ(φ−1 (a )) ∗ φ(φ−1 (b )) = a ∗ b 12 3. Isomorphic Binary Structures also. Because φ is one to one, we conclude that φ−1 (a ∗ b ) = φ−1 (a ) ∗ φ−1 (b ). 27. Onetoone: Let a, b ∈ S and suppose (ψ ◦ φ)(a) = (ψ ◦ φ)(b). Then ψ (φ(a)) = ψ (φ(b)). Because ψ is one to one, we conclude that φ(a) = φ(b). Because φ is one to one, we must have a = b. Onto: Let a ∈ S . Because ψ maps S onto S , there exists a ∈ S such that ψ (a ) = a . Because φ maps S onto S , there exists a ∈ S such that φ(a) = a . Then (ψ ◦ φ)(a) = ψ (φ(a)) = ψ (a ) = a , so ψ ◦ φ maps S onto S . Homomorphism property: Let a, b ∈ S . Since φ and ψ are isomorphisms, (ψ ◦ φ)(a ∗ b) = ψ (φ(a ∗ b)) = ψ (φ(a) ∗ φ(b)) = ψ (φ(a)) ∗ ψ (φ(b)) = (ψ ◦ φ)(a) ∗ (ψ ◦ φ)(b). 28. Let S, ∗ , S , ∗ and S , ∗ be binary structures. Reﬂexive: Let ι : S → S be the identity map. Then ι maps S one to one onto S and for a, b ∈ S , we have ι (a ∗ b) = a ∗ b = ι (a) ∗ ι (b), so ι is an isomorphism of S with itself, that is S S . Symmetric: If S S and φ : S → S is an isomorphism, then by Exercise 26, φ−1 : S → S is an isomorphism, so S S. Transitive: Suppose that S S and S S , and that φ : S → S and ψ : S → S are isomorphisms. By Exercise 27, we know that ψ ◦ φ : S → S is an isomorphism, so S S . 29. Let S, ∗ and S , ∗ be isomorphic binary structures and let φ : S → S be an isomorphism. Suppose that ∗ is commutative. Let a , b ∈ S and let a, b ∈ S be such that φ(a) = a and φ(b) = b . Then a ∗ b = φ(a) ∗ φ(b) = φ(a ∗ b) = φ(b ∗ a) = φ(b) ∗ φ(a) = b ∗ a , showing that ∗ is commutative. 30. Let S, ∗ and S , ∗ be isomorphic binary structures and let φ : S → S be an isomorphism. Suppose that ∗ is associative. Let a , b , c ∈ S and let a, b, c ∈ S be such that φ(a) = a , φ(b) = b and φ(c) = c . Then (a ∗ b ) ∗ c = (φ(a) ∗ φ(b)) ∗ φ(c) = φ(a ∗ b) ∗ φ(c) = φ((a ∗ b) ∗ c)) = φ(a ∗ (b ∗ c)) = φ(a) ∗ φ(b ∗ c) = φ(a) ∗ (φ(b) ∗ φ(c)) = a ∗ (b ∗ c ), showing that ∗ is associative. 31. Let S, ∗ and S , ∗ be isomorphic binary structures and let φ : S → S be an isomorphism. Suppose that S has the property that for each c ∈ S there exists x ∈ S such that x ∗ x = c. Let c ∈ S , and let c ∈ S such that φ(c) = c . Find x ∈ S such that x ∗ x = c. Then φ(x ∗ x) = φ(c) = c , so φ(x) ∗ φ(x) = c . If we denote φ(x) by x , then we see that x ∗ x = c , so S has the analagous property. 32. Let S, ∗ and S , ∗ be isomorphic binary structures and let φ : S → S be an isomorphism. Suppose that S has the property that there exists b ∈ S such that b ∗ b = b. Let b = φ(b). Then b ∗ b = φ(b) ∗ φ(b) = φ(b ∗ b) = φ(b) = b , so S has the analogous property. 33. Let φ : C → H be deﬁned by φ(a + bi) = a −b ba for a, b ∈ R. Clearly φ is one to one and onto H . 4. Groups a. We have φ((a + bi) + (c + di)) = φ((a + c) + (b + d)i) = c −d dc = φ(a + bi) + φ(c + di). ac − bd −(ad + bc) ad + bc ac − bd a + c −(b + d) b+d a+c = a −b ba 13 + b. We have φ((a + bi) · (c + di)) = φ((ac − bd) + (ad + bc)i) = a −b ba · c −d dc = φ(a + bi) · φ(c + di). = 34. Let the set be {a, b}. We need to decide whether interchanging the names of the letters everywhere in the table and then writing the table again in the order a ﬁrst and b second gives the same table or a diﬀerent table. The same table is obtained if and only if in the body of the table, diagonally opposite entries are diﬀerent. Four such tables exist, since there are four possible choices for the ﬁrst row; Namely, the tables ∗ a b a a b b a b ∗ a b a a a b b b ∗ a b a b b b a a ∗ a b a b a b b. a and The other 12 tables can be paired oﬀ into tables giving the same algebraic structure. One table of each pair is listed below. The number of diﬀerent algebraic structures is therefore 4 + 12/2 = 10. ∗ a b a a a b a a ∗ a b a a a b a b ∗ a b a a b b a a ∗ a b a a a b b a ∗ a b a b a b a a ∗ a b a a b b b a 4. Groups
1. No. G3 fails. 6. No. G2 fails. 7. The group U1000 , · of solutions of z 1000 = 1 in C under multiplication has 1000 elements and is abelian. ·8 1 3 5 7 1 1 3 5 7 3 3 1 7 5 5 5 7 1 3 7 7 5 3 1 2. Yes 3. No. G1 fails. 4. No. G3 fails. 5. No. G1 fails. 8. 9. Denoting the operation in each of the three groups by ∗ and the identity element by e for the moment, the equation x ∗ x ∗ x ∗ x = e has four solutions in U, · , one solution in R, + , and two solutions in R∗ , · . 10. a. Closure: Let nr and ns be two elements of nZ. Now nr + ns = n(r + s) ∈ nZ so nZ is closed under addition. Associative: We know that addition of integers is associative. 14 4. Groups Identity: 0 = n0 ∈ nZ, and 0 is the additive identity element. Inverses: For each nm ∈ nZ, we also have n(−m) ∈ nZ and nm + n(−m) = n(m − m) = n0 = 0. b. Let φ : Z → nZ be deﬁned by φ(m) = nm for m ∈ Z. Clearly φ is one to one and maps Z onto nZ. For r, s ∈ Z, we have φ(r + s) = n(r + s) = nr + ns = φ(r) + φ(s). Thus φ is an isomorphism of Z, + with nZ, + . 11. Yes, it is a group. Addition of diagonal matrices amounts to adding in R entries in corresponding positions on the diagonals, and that addition is associative. The matrix with all entries 0 is the additive identity, and changing the sign of the entries in a matrix yields the additive inverse of the matrix. 12. No, it is not a group. Multiplication of diagonal matrices amounts to muliplying in R entries in corresponding positions on the diagonals. The matrix with 1 at all places on the diagonal is the identity element, but a matrix having a diagonal entry 0 has no inverse. 13. Yes, it is a group. See the answer to Exercise 12. 14. Yes, it is a group. See the answer to Exercise 12. 15. No. The matrix with all entries 0 is upper triangular, but has no inverse. 16. Yes, it is a group. The sum of uppertriangular matrices is again upper triangular, and addition amounts to just adding entries in R in corresponding positions. 17. Yes, it is a group. Closure: Let A and B be upper triangular with determinant 1. Then entry cij in row i and column j in C = AB is 0 if i > j , because for each product aik bkj where i > j appearing in the computation of cij , either k < i so that aik = 0 or k ≥ i > j so that bkj = 0. Thus the product of two uppertriangular matrices is again upper triangular. The equation det(AB ) = det(A) · det(B ), shows that the product of two matrices of determinant 1 again has determinant 1. Associative: We know that matrix multiplication is associative. Identity: The n × n identity matrix In has determinant 1 and is upper triangular. Inverse: The product property 1 = det(In ) = det(A−1 A) = det(A−1 ) · det(A) shows that if det(A) = 1, then det(A−1 ) = 1 also. 18. Yes, it is a group. The relation det(AB ) = det(A) · det(B ) show that the set of n × n matrices with determinant ±1 is closed under multiplication. We know matrix multiplication is associative, and det(In ) = 1. As in the preceding solution, we see that det(A) = ±1 implies that det(A−1 ) = ±1, so we have a group. 19. a. We must show that S is closed under ∗, that is, that a + b + ab = −1 for a, b ∈ S . Now a + b + ab = −1 if and only if 0 = ab + a + b + 1 = (a + 1)(b + 1). This is the case if and only if either a = −1 or b = −1, which is not the case for a, b ∈ S . b. Associative: We have a ∗ (b ∗ c) = a ∗ (b + c + bc) = a + (b + c + bc) + a(b + c + bc) = a + b + c + ab + ac + bc + abc and (a ∗ b) ∗ c = (a + b + ab) ∗ c = (a + b + ab) + c + (a + b + ab)c = a + b + c + ab + ac + bc + abc. 4. Groups Identity: 0 acts as identity elemenr for ∗, for 0 ∗ a = a ∗ 0 = a. Inverses:
−a a+1 15 acts as inverse of a, for a∗ −a −a a(a + 1) − a − a2 0 −a =a+ +a = = = 0. a+1 a+1 a+1 a+1 a+1 c. Because the operation is commutative, 2 ∗ x ∗ 3 = 2 ∗ 3 ∗ x = 11 ∗ x. Now the inverse of 11 is 11/12 by Part(b). From 11 ∗ x = 7, we obtain x= e e a b c a a e c b b b c e a c c b a e −11 −11 −11 + 84 − 77 −4 1 −11 ∗7= +7+ 7= = =− . 12 12 12 12 12 3 e e a b c a a e c b b b c a e c c b e a e e a b c a a b c e b b c e a c c e a b 20. e a b c e a b c e a b c Table I Table II Table III Table I is structurally diﬀerent from the others because every element is its own inverse. Table II can be made to look just like Table III by interchanging the names a and b everywhere to obtain e e b a c b b e c a a a c b e c c a e b e b a c and rewriting this table in the order e, a, b, c. a. The symmetry of each table in its main diagonal shows that all groups of order 4 are commutative. b. Table III gives the group U4 , upon replacing e by 1, a by i, b by 1, and c by −i. c. Take n = 2. There are four 2 × 2 diagonal matrices with entries ±1, namely E= 10 01 ,A = −1 0 01 ,B = 10 0 −1 , and C = −1 0 0 −1 . If we write the table for this group using the letters E, A, B, C in that order, we obtain Table I with the letters capitalized. 21. A binary operation on a set {x, y } of two elements that produces a group is completely determined by the choice of x or y to serve as identity element, so just 2 of the 16 possible tables give groups. For a set {x, y, z } of three elements, a group binary operation is again determined by the choice x, y , or z to serve as identity element, so there are just 3 of the 19,683 binary operations that give groups. (Recall that there is only one way to ﬁll out a group table for {e, a} and for {e, a, b} if you require e to be the identity element.) 22. The orders G1 G3 G2 , G3 G1 G2 , and G3 G2 G1 are not acceptable. The identity element e occurs in the statement of G3 , which must not come before e is deﬁned in G2 . 16 4. Groups 23. Ignoring spelling, punctuation and grammar, here are some of the mathematical errors. a. The statement “x = identity” is wrong. b. The identity element should be e, not (e). It would also be nice to give the properties satisﬁed by the identity element and by inverse elements. c. Associativity is missing. Logically, the identity element should be mentioned before inverses. The statement “an inverse exists” is not quantiﬁed correctly: for each element of the set, an inverse exists. Again, it would be nice to give the properties satisﬁed by the identity element and by inverse elements. d. Replace “ such that for all a, b ∈ G” by “ if for all a ∈ G”. Delete “under addition” in line 2. The element should be e, not {e}. Replace “= e” by “= a” in line 3. 24. We need only make a table that has e as an identity element and has an e in each row and each column of the body of the table to satisfy axioms G2 and G3 . Then we make some row or column ∗eab eeab contain some element twice, and it can’t be a group, so G1 must fail. aaeb bbae 25. F T T F F T T T F T 26. Multiply both sides of the equation a ∗ b = a ∗ c on the left by the inverse of a, and simplify, using the axioms for a group. 27. Show that x = a ∗ b is a solution of a ∗ x = b by substitution and the axioms for a group. Then show that it is the only solution by multiplying both sides of the equation a ∗ x = b on the left by a and simplifying, using the axioms for a group. 28. Let φ : G → G be a group isomorphism of G, ∗ onto G , ∗ , and let a, a ∈ G such that a ∗ a = e. Then φ(e) = φ(a ∗ a ) = φ(a) ∗ φ(a ). Now φ(e) is the identity element of G by Theorem 3.14. Thus the equation φ(a) ∗ φ(a ) = φ(e) shows that φ(a) and φ(a ) are inverse pairs in G , which was to be shown. 29. Let S = {x ∈ G  x = x}. Then S has an even number of elements, because its elements can be grouped in pairs x, x . Because G has an even number of elements, the number of elements in G but not in S (the set G − S ) must be even. The set G − S is nonempty because it contains e. Thus there is at least one element of G − S other than e, that is, at least one element other than e that is its own inverse. 30. a. We have (a ∗ b) ∗ c = (a b) ∗ c (ab)c =  abc. We also have a ∗(b ∗ c) = a ∗ ( bc) = a bc =  abc, so ∗ is associative. b. We have 1 ∗ a = 1 a = a for all a ∈ R∗ so 1 is a left identity element. For a ∈ R∗ , 1/ a is a right inverse. c. It is not a group because both 1/2 and 1/2 are right inverse of 2. d. The onesided deﬁnition of a group, mentioned just before the exercises, must be all left sided or all right sided. We must not mix them. 31. Let G, ∗ be a group and let x ∈ G such that x ∗ x = x. Then x ∗ x = x ∗ e, and by left cancellation, x = e, so e is the only idempotent element in a group. 5. Subgroups 17 32. We have e = (a ∗ b) ∗ (a ∗ b), and (a ∗ a) ∗ (b ∗ b) = e ∗ e = e also. Thus a ∗ b ∗ a ∗ b = a ∗ a ∗ b ∗ b. Using left and right cancellation, we have b ∗ a = a ∗ b. 33. Let P (n) = (a ∗ b)n = an ∗ bn . Since (a ∗ b)1 = a ∗ b = a1 ∗ b1 , we see P (1) is true. Suppose P (k ) is true. Then (a ∗ b)k+1 = (a ∗ b)k ∗ (a ∗ b) = (ak ∗ bk ) ∗ (a ∗ b) = [ak ∗ (bk ∗ a)] ∗ b = [ak ∗ (a ∗ bk ] ∗ b = [(ak ∗ a) ∗ bk ] ∗ b = (ak+1 ∗ bk ) ∗ b = ak+1 ∗ (bk ∗ b) = ak+1 ∗ bk+1 . This completes the induction argument. 34. The elements e, a, a2 , a3 , · · · , am aren’t all diﬀerent since G has only m elements. If one of a, a2 , a3 , · · · , am is e, then we are done. If not, then we must have ai = aj where i < j . Repeated left cancellation of a yields e = aj −i . 35. We have (a ∗ b) ∗ (a ∗ b) = (a ∗ a) ∗ (b ∗ b), so a ∗ [b ∗ (a ∗ b)] = a ∗ [a ∗ (b ∗ b)] and left cancellation yields b ∗ (a ∗ b) = a ∗ (b ∗ b). Then (b ∗ a) ∗ b = (a ∗ b) ∗ b and right cancellation yields b ∗ a = a ∗ b. 36. Let a ∗ b = b ∗ a. Then (a ∗ b) = (b ∗ a) = a ∗ b by Corollary 4.17. Conversely, if (a ∗ b) = a ∗ b , then b ∗ a = a ∗ b . Then (b ∗ a ) = (a ∗ b ) so (a ) ∗ (b ) = (b ) ∗ (a ) and a ∗ b = b ∗ a. 37. We have a∗b∗c = a∗(b∗c) = e, which implies that b∗c is the inverse of a. Therefore (b∗c)∗a = b∗c∗a = e also. 38. We need to show that a left identity element is a right identity element and that a left inverse is a right inverse. Note that e ∗ e = e. Then (x ∗ x) ∗ e = x ∗ x so (x ) ∗ (x ∗ x) ∗ e = (x ) ∗ (x ∗ x). Using associativity, [(x ) ∗ x ] ∗ x ∗ e = [(x ) ∗ x ] ∗ x. Thus (e ∗ x) ∗ e = e ∗ x so x ∗ e = x and e is a right identity element also. If a ∗ a = e, then (a ∗ a) ∗ a = e ∗ a = a . Multiplication of a ∗ a ∗ a = a on the left by (a ) and associativity yield a ∗ a = e, so a is also a right inverse of a. 39. Using the hint, we show there is a left identity element and that each element has a left inverse. Let a ∈ G; we are given that G is nonempty. Let e be a solution of y ∗ a = a. We show at e ∗ b = b for any b ∈ G. Let c be a solution of the equation a ∗ x = b. Then e ∗ b = e ∗ (a ∗ c) = (e ∗ a) ∗ c = a ∗ c = b. Thus e is a left identity. Now for each a ∈ G, let a be a solution of y ∗ a = e. Then a is a left inverse of a. By Exercise 38, G is a group. 40. It is easy to see that G, ∗ is a group, because the order of multiplication in G is simply reversed: (a ∗ b) ∗ c = a ∗ (b ∗ c) follows at once from c · (b · a) = (c · b) · a, the element e continues to act as identity element, and the inverse of each element is unchanged. Let φ(a) = a for a ∈ G, where a is the inverse of a in the group G, · . Uniqueness of inverses and the fact that (a ) = a show at once that φ is one to one and onto G. Also, φ(a · b) = (a · b) = b · a = a ∗ b = φ(a) ∗ φ(b), showing that φ is an isomorphism of G, · onto G, ∗ . 41. Let a, b ∈ G. If g ∗ a ∗ g = g ∗ b ∗ g , then a = b by group cancellation, so ig is a onetoone map. Because ig (g ∗ a ∗ g ) = g ∗ g ∗ a ∗ g ∗ g = a, we see that ig maps G onto G. We have ig (a ∗ b) = g ∗ a ∗ b ∗ g = g ∗ a ∗ (g ∗ g ) ∗ b ∗ g = (g ∗ a ∗ g ) ∗ (g ∗ b ∗ g ) = ig (a) ∗ ig (b), so ig satisﬁes the homomorphism property also, and is thus an isomorphism. 5. Subgroups
1. Yes 2. No, there is no identity element. 3. Yes 4. Yes 5. Yes 6. No, the set is not closed under addition. 7. Q+ and {π n  n ∈ Z} 18 5. Subgroups 8. No. If det(A) = det(B ) = 2, then det(AB ) = det(A)det(B )= 4. The set is not closed under multiplication. 9. Yes 10. Yes, see Exercise 17 of Section 4. 11. No. If det(A) = det(B ) = 1, then det(AB ) = det(A)det(B ) = 1. The set is not closed under multiplication. 12. Yes, see Exercise 17 of Section 4. 13. Yes. Suppose that (AT )A = In and (B T )B = In . Then we have (AB )T AB = B T (AT A)B = B T In B = B T B = In , so the set of these matrices is closed under multiplication. Since InT = In and In In = In , the set contains the identity. For each A in the set, the equation (AT )A = In shows that A has an inverse AT . The equation (AT )T AT = AAT = In shows that AT is in the given set. Thus we have a subgroup. ˜ 14. a) No, F is not closed under addition. 15. a) Yes b) Yes ˜ b) No, it is not even a subset of F . b) Yes b) Yes b) No, it is not closed under multiplication. 16. a) No, it is not closed under addition. 17. a) No, it is not closed under addition. 18. a) No, it is not closed under addition. 19. a) Yes ˜ b) No, the zero constant function is not in F . G2 < G1 , G2 ≤ G2 , G2 < G4 , G2 < G7 , G2 < G8 G6 ≤ G5 , G 6 ≤ G6 G9 < G3 , G9 < G5 , G9 ≤ G9
11 c. 1, π, π 2 , π , π2 20. G1 ≤ G1 , G1 < G4 G4 ≤ G4 G5 ≤ G5 G3 ≤ G3 , G3 < G5 G7 < G1 , G7 < G4 , G7 ≤ G7 G8 < G1 , G8 < G4 , G8 < G7 , G8 ≤ G8 21. a. 50, 25, 0, 25, 50 1n 01
1 b. 4, 2, 1, 2 , 1 4 22. 0 −1 −1 0 , 10 01 23. All the matrices for n ∈ Z. 4n 0 0 4n or 24. All the matrices 0 −22n+1 −22n+1 0 3n 0 0 2n for n ∈ Z. 25. All matrices of the form for n ∈ Z. 26. G1 is cyclic with generators 1 and 1. G4 is cyclic with generators 6 and 6. G2 is not cyclic. G3 is not cyclic. 1 G5 is cyclic with generators 6 and 6 . G6 is not cyclic. To get the answers for Exercises 27  35, the student computes the given element to succesive powers (or summands). The ﬁrst power (number of summands) that gives the identity element is the order of the cyclic subgroup. After students have studied Section 9, you might want to come back here and show them the easy way to handle the row permutations of the identity matrix in Exercises 33  35 by writing the permutation as a product of disjoint cycles. For example, in Exercise 35, row 1 is in row 4 place, row 4 is in row 2 place, and row 2 is in row 1 place, corresponding to the cycle (1,4,2). Row 3 is left ﬁxed. 27. 4 28. 2 29. 3 30. 5 31. 4 32. 8 33. 2 34. 4 35. 3 5. Subgroups +6 0 1 36. a. 2 3 4 5 d. 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 0 2 2 3 4 5 0 1 3 3 4 5 0 1 2 4 4 5 0 1 2 3 5 5 0 1 2 3 4 b. 0 2 3 1 = {0} = 4 = {0, 2, 4} = {0, 3} = 5 = Z6 19 c. 1 and 5 1=5
3 33 33 3 2=4 3 33 3 3 33 0 37. Incorrect, the closure condition must be stated. A subgroup of a group G is a subset H of G that is closed under the induced binary operation from G, contains the identity element e of G, and contains the inverse h−1 of each h ∈ H . 38. The deﬁnition is correct. 39. T F T F F F F F T F 40. In the Klein 4group, the equation x2 = e has all four elements of the group as solutions. 41. Closure: Let a, b ∈ H so that φ(a), φ(b) ∈ φ[H ]. Now (a ∗ b) ∈ H because H ≤ G. Since φ is an isomorphism, φ(a) ∗ φ(b) = φ(a ∗ b) ∈ φ[H ], so φ[H ] is closed under ∗ . Identity: By Theorem 3.14, e = φ(e) ∈ φ[H ]. Inverses: Let a ∈ H so that φ(a) ∈ φ[H ]. Then a−1 ∈ H because H is a subgroup of G. We have e = φ(e) = φ(a−1 ∗ a) = φ(a−1 ) ∗ φ(a), so φ(a)−1 = φ(a−1 ) ∈ φ[H ]. 42. Let a be a generator of G. We claim φ(a) is a generator of G . Let b ∈ G . Because φ maps G onto G , there exists b ∈ G such that φ(b) = b . Because a generates G, there exists n ∈ Z such that b = an . Because φ is an isomorphism, b = φ(b) = φ(an ) = φ(a)n . Thus G is cyclic. 43. Closure: Let S = {hk  h ∈ H, k ∈ K } and let x, y ∈ S . Then x = hk and y = h k for some h, h ∈ H and k, k ∈ K . Because G is abelian, we have xy = hkh k = (hh )(kk ). Because H and K are subgroups, we have hh ∈ H and kk ∈ K , so xy ∈ S and S is closed under the induced operation. Identity: Because H and K are subgroups, e ∈ H and e ∈ K so e = ee ∈ S . Inverses: For x = hk , we have h−1 ∈ H and k −1 ∈ K because H and K are subgroups. Then h−1 k −1 ∈ S and because G is abelian, h−1 k −1 = k −1 h−1 = (hk )−1 = x−1 , so the inverse of x is in S . Hence S is a subgroup. 44. If H is empty, then there is no a ∈ H . 45. Let H be a subgroup of G. Then for a, b ∈ H , we have b−1 ∈ H and ab−1 H because H must be closed under the induced operation. Conversely, suppose that H is nonempty and ab−1 ∈ H for all a, b ∈ H . Let a ∈ H . Then taking b = a, we see that aa−1 = e is in H . Taking a = e, and b = a, we see that ea−1 = a−1 ∈ H . Thus H contains the identity element and the inverse of each element. For closure, note that for a, b ∈ H , we also have a, b−1 ∈ H and thus a(b−1 )−1 = ab ∈ H . 20 5. Subgroups 46. Let B = {e, a, a2 , a3 , · · · , an−1 } be a cyclic group of n elements. Then a−1 = an−1 also generates G, because (a−1 )i = (ai )−1 = an−i for i = 1, 2, · · · , n − 1. Thus if G has only one generator, we must have n − 1 = 1 and n = 2. Of course, G = {e} is also cyclic with one generator. 47. Closure: Let a, b ∈ H . Because G is abelian, (ab)2 = a2 b2 = ee = e so ab ∈ H and H is closed under the induced operation. Identity: Because ee = e, we see e ∈ H . Inverses: Because aa = e, we see that each element of H is its own inverse. Thus H is a subgroup. 48. Closure: Let a, b ∈ H . Because G is abelian, (ab)n = an bn = ee = e so ab ∈ H and H is closed under the induced operation. Identity: Because en = e, we see that e ∈ H . Inverses: Let a ∈ H . Because an = e, we see that the inverse of a is an−1 which is in H because H is closed under the induced operation. Thus H is a subgroup of G. 49. Let G have m elements. Then the elements a, a2 , a3 , · · · , am+1 cannot all be diﬀerent, so ai = aj for some i < j . Then multiplication by a−i shows that e = aj −i , and we can take j − i as the desired n. 50. Let a ∈ H and let H have n elements. Then the elements a, a2 , a3 , · · · , an+1 are all in H (because H is closed under the operation) and cannot all be diﬀerent, so ai = aj for some i < j . Then multiplication by a−i shows that e = aj −i so e ∈ H . Also, a−1 ∈ H because a−1 = aj −i−1 . This shows that H is a subgroup of G. 51. Closure: Let x, y ∈ Ha . Then xa = ax and ya = ay . We then have (xy )a = x(ya) = x(ay ) = (xa)y = (ax)y = a(xy ), so xy ∈ Ha and Ha is closed under the operation. Identity: Because ea = ae = a, we see that e ∈ Ha . Inverses: From xa = ax, we obtain xax−1 = a and then ax−1 = x−1 a, showing that x−1 ∈ Ha , which is thus a subgroup. 52. a. Closure: Let x, y ∈ HS . Then xs = sx and ys = sy for all s ∈ S . We then have (xy )s = x(ys) = x(sy ) = (xs)y = (sx)y = s(xy ) for all s ∈ S , so xy ∈ HS and HS is closed under the operation. Identity: Because es = se = s for all s ∈ S , we see that e ∈ HS . Inverses: From xs = sx for all s ∈ S , we obtain xsx−1 = s and then sx−1 = x−1 s for all s ∈ S , showing that x−1 ∈ HS , which is thus a subgroup. b. Let a ∈ HG . Then ag = ga for all g ∈ G; in particular, ab = ba for all b ∈ HG because HG is a subset of G. This shows that HG is abelian. 53. Reﬂexive: Let a ∈ G. Then aa−1 = e and e ∈ H since H is a subgroup. Thus a ∼ a. Symmetric: Let a, b ∈ G and a ∼ b, so that ab−1 ∈ H . Since H is a subgroup, we have (ab−1 )−1 = ba−1 ∈ H , so b ∼ a. Transitive: Let a, b, c ∈ G and a ∼ b and b ∼ c. Then ab−1 ∈ H and bc−1 ∈ H so (ab−1 )(bc−1 ) = ac−1 ∈ H , and a ∼ c. 54. Closure: Let a, b ∈ H ∩ K . Then a, b ∈ H and a, b ∈ K . Because H and K are subgroups, we have ab ∈ H and ab ∈ K , so ab ∈ H ∩ K . Identity: Because H and K are subgroups, we have e ∈ H and e ∈ K so e ∈ H ∩ K . Inverses: Let a ∈ H ∩ K so a ∈ H and a ∈ K . Because H and K are subgroups, we have a−1 ∈ H and a−1 ∈ K , so a−1 ∈ H ∩ K . 6. Cyclic Groups 21 55. Let G be cyclic and let a be a generator for G. For x, y ∈ G, there exist m, n ∈ Z such that x = am and y = bn . Then xy = am bn = am+n = an+m = an am = yx, so G is abelian. 56. We can show it if G is abelian. Let a, b ∈ G so that an , bn ∈ Gn . Then an bn = (ab)n because G is abelian, so Gn is closed under the induced operation. Also e = en ∈ Gn . Finally (an )−1 = (a−1 )n ∈ Gn , so Gn is indeed a subgroup of G. 57. Let G be a group with no proper nontrivial subgroups. If G = {e}, then G is of course cyclic. If G = {e}, then let a ∈ G, a = e. We know that a is a subgroup of G and a = {e}. Because G has no proper nontrivial subgroups, we must have a = G, so G is indeed cyclic. 6. Cyclic Groups
1. 42 = 9·4+6, q = 4, r = 6 4. 50 = 8 · 6 + 2, q = 6, r = 2 2. −42 = 9(−5)+3, q = −5, r = 3 5. 8 6. 8 7. 60 3. −50 = 8(−7)+6, q = −7, r = 6 8. 1, 2, 3, and 4 are relative prime to 5 so the answer is 4. 9. 1, 3, 5, and 7 are relatively prime to 8 so the answer is 4. 10. 1, 5, 7, and 11 are relatively prime to 12 so the answer is 4. 11. 1, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23, 29, 31, 37, 41, 43, 47, 49, 53,and 59 are relatively prime to 60 so the answer is 16. 12. There is one automorphism; 1 must be carried into the only generator which is 1. 13. There are 2 automorphisms; 1 can be carried into either of the generators 1 or 5 14. There are 4 automorphisms; 1 can be carried into any of the generators 1, 3, 5, or 7. 15. There are 2 automorphisms; 1 can be carried into either of the generators 1 or 1. 16. There are 4 automorphisms; 1 can be carried into any of the generators 1, 5, 7, or 11. 17. gcd(25, 30) = 5 and 30/5 = 6 so 25 has 6 elements. 18. gcd(30, 42) = 6 and 42/6 = 7 so 30 has 7 elements. 19. The polar angle for i is π/2, so it generates a subgroup of 4 elements. √ 20. The polar angle for (1 + i)/ 2 is π/4, so it generates a subgroup of 8 elements. 21. The absolute value of 1 + i is √ 2, so it generates an inﬁnite subgroup of ℵ0 elements. 22 22. Subgroup diagram: Z12 2 d d d d d 6. Cyclic Groups 23. (See the answer in the text.) 3 4 d 6 {0} 24. Subgroup diagram: Z8 2 4 {0} 25. 1, 2, 3, 6 26. 1, 2, 4, 8 27. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12 28. 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20 29. 1, 17 30. Incorrect; n must be minimal in Z+ with that property. An element a of a group G has order n ∈ Z+ if an = e and am = e for m ∈ Z+ where m < n. 31. The deﬁnition is correct. 32. T F F F T F F F T T 33. The Klein 4group f) The Klein 4group is an example. g) 9 generates Z20 . 34. R, + 35. Z2 36. No such example exists. Every inﬁnite cyclic group is isomorphic to Z, + which has just two generators, 1 and 1. 37. Z8 has generators 1, 3, 5, and 7. 38. i and −i √ 1 39. Corresponding to polar angles n(2π/6) for n = 1 and 5, we have 2 (1 ± i 3). 40. Corresponding to polar angles n(2π/8) for n = 1,7,3, and 5, we have
1 √ (1 2 ± i) and 1 √ (−1 2 ± i). √ √ 41. Corresponding to polar angles n(2π/12) for n = 1,11,5, and 7, we have 1 ( 3 ± i) and 1 (− 3 ± i). 2 2 42. Expressing two elements of the group as powers of the same generator, their product is the generator raised to the sum of the powers, and addition of integers is commutative. 6. Cyclic Groups 23 43. Asuming the subgroup isn’t just {e}, let a be a generator of the cyclic group, and let n be the smallest positive integer power of a that is in the subgroup. For am in the subgroup, use the division algorithm for n divided by m and the choice of n to argue that n = qm for some integer q , so that am = (an )q . 44. By the homomorphism property φ(ab) = φ(a)φ(b) extended by induction, we have φ(an ) = (φ(a))n for all n ∈ Z+. By Theorem 3.14, we know that φ(a0 ) = φ(e) = e . The equation e = φ(e) = φ(aa−1 ) = φ(a)φ(a−1 ) shows that φ(a−1 ) = (φ(a))−1 . Extending this last equation by induction, we see that φ(a−n ) = (φ(a))−n for all negative integers −n. Because G is cyclic with generator a, this means that for all g = an ∈ G, φ(g ) = φ(an ) = [φ(a)]n is completely determined by the value φ(a). 45. The equation (n1 r + m1 s) + (n2 r + m2 s) = (n1 + n2 )r + (m1 + m2 )s shows that the set is closed under addition. Because 0r + 0s = 0, we see that 0 is in the set. Because [(−m)r + (−n)s] + (mr + ns) = 0, we see that the set contains the inverse of each element. Thus it is a subgroup of Z. 46. Let n be the order of ab so that (ab)n = e. Multiplying this equation on the left by b and on the right by a, we ﬁnd that (ba)n+1 = bea = (ba)e. Cancellation of the ﬁrst factor ba from both sides shows that (ba)n = e, so the order of ba is ≤ n. If the order of ba were less than n, a symmetric argument would show that the order of ab is less than n, contrary to our choice of n. Thus ba has order n also. 47. a. As a subgroup of the cyclic group Z, + , the subgroup G = rZ ∩ sZ is cyclic. The positive generator of G is the least common multiple of r and s. b. The least common multiple of r and s is rs if and only if r and s are relative prime, so that they have no common prime factor. c. Let d = ir + js be the gcd of r and s, and let m = kr = qs be the least common multiple of r and s. Then md = mir + mjs = qsir + krjs = (qi + kj )rs, so rs is a divisor of md. Now let r = ud and let s = vd. Then rs = uvdd = (uvd)d, and uvd = rv = su is a multiple of r and s, and hence uvd = mt. Thus rs = mtd = (md)t, so md is divisor of rs. Hence md = rs. 48. Note that every group is the union of its cyclic subgroups, because every element of the group generates a cyclic subgroup that contains the element. Let G have only a ﬁnite number of subgroups, and hence only a ﬁnite number of cyclic subgroups. Now none of these cyclic subgroups can be inﬁnite, for every inﬁnite cyclic group is isomorphic to Z which has an inﬁnite number of subgroups, namely Z, 2Z, 3Z, · · ·. Such subgroups of an inﬁnite cyclic subgroup of G would of course give an inﬁnite number of subgroups of G, contrary to hypothesis. Thus G has only ﬁnite cyclic subgroups, and only a ﬁnite number of those. We see that the set G can be written as a ﬁnite union of ﬁnite sets, so G is itself a ﬁnite set. 49. The Klein 4group V is a counterexample. 50. Note that xax−1 = e because xax−1 = e would imply that xa = x and a = e, and we are given that a has order 2. We have (xax−1 )2 = xax−1 xax−1 = xex−1 = xx−1 = e. Because a is given to be the unique element in G of order 2, we see that xax−1 = a, and upon multiplication on the right by x, we obtain xa = ax for all x ∈ G. 51. The positive integers less that pq and relatively prime to pq are those that are not multiples of p and are not multiples of q . There are p − 1 multiples of q and q − 1 multiples of p that are less than pq . Thus there are (pq − 1) − (p − 1) − (q − 1) = pq − p − q + 1 = (p − 1)(q − 1) positive integers less than pq and relatively prime to pq . 24 7. Generators and Cayley Digraphs 52. The positive integers less than pr and relatively prime to pr are those that are not multiples of p. There are pr−1 − 1 multiples of p less than pr . Thus we see that there are (pr − 1) − (pr−1 − 1) = pr − pr−1 = pr−1 (p − 1) positive integers less than pr and relatively prime to pr . 53. It is no loss of generality to supppose that G = Zn and that we are considering the equation mx = 0 for a positive integer m dividing n. Clearly 0, n/m, 2n/m, · · · , (m − 1)n/m are m solutions of mx = 0. If r is any solution in Zn of mx = 0, then n is a divisor of mr, so that mr = qn. But then r = q (n/m) < n, so that q must be one of 0, 1, 2, · · · , m − 1, and we see that the solutions exhibited above are indeed all the solutions. 54. There are exactly d solutions, where d is the gcd of m and n. Working in Zn again, we see that 0, n/d, 2n/d, · · · , (d − 1)n/d are solutions of mx = 0. If r is any solution, then n divides mr so that mr = nq and r = nq/m. Write m = m1 d and n = n1 d so that the gcd of m1 and n1 is 1. Then r = nq/m can be written as r = n1 dq/m1 d = n1 q/m1 . Since m1 and n1 are relatively prime, we conclude that m1 divides q ; let q = m1 s. Then r = n1 q/m1 = n1 m1 s/m1 = n1 s = (n/d)s. Since r < n, we have n1 s < n = n1 d so s < d. consequently, s must be one of the numbers 0, 1, 2, · · · , d − 1 and we see that the solutions exhibited above are indeed all the solutions. 55. All positive integers less than p are relatively prime to p because p is prime, and hence they all generate Zp . Thus Zp has no proper cyclic subgroups, and thus no proper subgroups, because as a cyclic group, Zp has only cyclic subgroups. 56. a. Let a be a generator of H and let b be a generator of K . Because G is abelian, we have (ab)rs = (ar )s (bs )r = er es = e. We claim that no lower power of ab is equal to e, for suppose that (ab)n = an bn = e. Then an = b−n = c must be an element of both H and K , and thus generates a subgroup of H of order dividing r which must also be a subgroup of K of order dividing s. Because r and s are relatively prime, we see that we must have c = e, so an = bn = e. But then n is divisible by both r and s, and because r and s are relatively prime, we have n = rs. Thus ab generates the desired cyclic subgroup of G of order rs. b. Let d be the gcd of r and s, and let s = dq so that q and r are relatively prime and rq = rs/d is the least common multiple of r and s (see Exercise 47c). Let a and b be generators of H and K respectively. Then  a  = r and  bd  = q where r and q are relatively prime. Part(a) shows that the element abd generates a cyclic subgroup of order rq which is the least common multiple of r and s. 7. Generators and Cayley Digraphs
1. 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 4. 0, 6, 12, 18, 24, 30 2. 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 3. 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 5. · · · , −24, −18, −12, −6, 0, 6, 12, 18, 24, · · · 6. · · · , −15, −12, −9, −6, −3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, · · · 7. a: Starting at the vertex a2 b, we travel three solid lines in the direction of the arrow, arriving at a3 b. b. Starting at the vertex ab, we travel three solid lines in the direction of the arrow and then one dashed line, arriving at a2 . c. Starting at the vertex b, we travel two solid lines in the direction of the arrow and then one dashed line, arriving at a2 . 7. Generators and Cayley Digraphs e e a b c d f a a c d e f b b b f e d c a c c e f a b d d d b a f e c f f d c b a e 25 8. e a b c e e a b c a a e c b b b c e a c c b a e 9. (See the answer in the text.) e a 10. b c d f 11. Choose a pair of generating directed arcs, call them arc1 and arc2. Start at any vertex of the digraph, and see if the sequences arc1, arc2 and arc2, arc1 lead to the same vertex. (This corresponds to asking if the two corresponding group generators commute.) The group is commutative if and only if these two sequences lead to the same vertex for every pair of generating directed arcs. 12. It is not commutative, for a followed by b leads to ab, while b followed by a leads to a3 b. 13. If more than one element of the cyclic group is used to generate the Cayley digraph, it may not be obvious from the digraph that the group is cyclic. See, for example, Figure 7.9, where 5 actually generates the group Z6 having these digraphs generated by 2 and 3. 14. No, it does not contain the identity 0. 15. (See the answer in the text.) 16. Here is a Cayley digraph. 0 e ¡d ¡ ed ¡
ed ¡ ! ed d ¡ e e5 d 3¡ E rr d ¨¨¨ j rd B rr ¨ ¨ d ¨ r c d2 6r ¨ ¨ T drr % ¨ d ¨ d rrr ¨¨ ' d 1 ¡7 d ee © ¡ s de ¡ d u ¡ de de ¡ e¡ d 2 E 5 E 4 17. a. Starting from the vertex representing the identity, every path though the graph that terminates at that same vertex represents a product of generators or their inverses that is equal to the identity and thus gives a relation. b. a4 = e, b2 = e, (ab)2 = e. 18. The diagram in Figure 7.13a which represents the Klein 4group, and a square with solid clockwise arrows edges which represents Z4 . 19. Generalizing Figure 7.13b, form a regular 2ngon with alternately solid and dashed edges, without arrows. The four properties listed after Example 7.10 in the text are satisﬁed and the digraph represent a nonabelian group of order 2n for n ≥ 3. 26 8. Groups of Permutations 8. Groups of Permutations
1. 4. 123456 123654 123456 516243 2. 5. 123456 241563 123456 261543 3. 123456 341625 6. Starting with 1 and applying σ repeatedly, we see that σ takes 1 to 3 to 4 to 5 to 6 to 2 to 1, so σ 6 is the smallest possible power of σ that is the identity permutation. It is easily checked that σ 6 carries 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 to themselves also, so σ 6 is indeed the identity and  σ  = 6. 7. τ 2 = 123456 432156 and it is clear that (τ 2 )2 is the identity. Thus we have  τ 2  = 2. 8. Because σ 6 is the identity permutation (see Exercise 6), we have σ 100 = (σ 6 )16 σ 4 = σ 4 = 123456 652134 . 9. We ﬁnd that µ2 is the identity permutation, so µ100 = (µ2 )50 is also the identity permutation. 10. {Z, 17Z, 3Z, π } is a subcollection of isomorphic groups, as are {Z6 , G}, {Z2 , S2 }, {S6 }, {Q}, {R, R+ }, {R∗ }, {Q∗ }, and {C∗ }. 11. {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} 12. {1, 2, 3, 4} 13. {1, 5} 14. We see that , ρ, and ρ2 give the three positions of the triangle in Fig. 8.9 obtained by rotations. The permutations φ, ρφ, and ρ2 φ amount geometrically to turning the triangle over (φ) and then rotating it to obtain the other three positions. 15. A similar labeling for D4 is , ρ, ρ2 , ρ3 , φ, ρφ, ρ2 φ, ρ3 φ where their φ is our µ1 . They correspond to our elements in the order ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 , ρ3 , µ1 , δ1 , µ2 , δ2 . 16. σ may have the action of any of the six possible permutations of the set {1, 2, 4}, so there are six possibilities for σ . 17. There are 4 possibilities for σ (1), then 3 possibilities for σ (3), then 2 possibilities for σ (4), and then 1 possibility for σ (5), for 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 = 24 possibilities in all. 18. a. ρ1 = ρ2 = {ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 } and µ1 = {ρ0 , µ1 }. S3
d d d b. {ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 } {ρ0 , µ1 } { ρ0 , µ 2 } { ρ0 , µ 3 } d d d {ρ0 } 19. (See the answer in the text.) 20. This group is not isomorphic to S3 because it is abelian and S3 is nonabelian. It is isomorphic to Z6 . 8. Groups of Permutations ρ0 ρ0 ρ ρ2 ρ3 ρ4 ρ5 ρ ρ ρ2 ρ3 ρ4 ρ5 ρ0 ρ2 ρ2 ρ3 ρ4 ρ5 ρ0 ρ ρ3 ρ3 ρ4 ρ5 ρ0 ρ ρ2 ρ4 ρ4 ρ5 ρ0 ρ ρ2 ρ3 ρ5 ρ5 ρ0 ρ ρ2 ρ3 ρ4 27 ρ0 ρ ρ2 ρ3 ρ4 ρ5 21. (See the answer in the text.) 22. We list matrices in order corresponding to the permutations ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 , ρ3 , µ1 , µ2 , δ1 , δ2 of D4 . Thus 1234 the ﬁfth matrix listed, which corresponds to µ1 = is the matrix obtained from the 2143 identity by interchanging row 1 with row 2 and row 3 with row 4. 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 23. The identity and ﬂipping over on the vertical axis that falls on the vertical line segment of the ﬁgure give the only symmetries. The symmetry group is isomorphic to Z2 . 24. As symmetries other than the identity, the ﬁgure admits a rotation through 180◦ , a ﬂip in the vertical line shown, and a ﬂip in the analogous horizontal line (not shown). This group of four elements is isomorphic to the Klein 4group. 25. If we join endpoints of the line segments, we have a square with the given lines as its diagonals. The symmetries of that square produce all the symmetries of the given ﬁgure, so the group of symmetries is isomorphic to D4 . 26. The only symmetries are those obtained by sliding the ﬁgure to the left or to the right. We consider the vertical line segments to be one unit apart. For each integer n, we can slide the ﬁgure n units to the right if n > 0 and n units to the left if n < 0, leaving the ﬁgure alone if n = 0. A moment of thought shows that performing the symmetry coresponding to an integer n and then the one corresponding to an integer m yields the symmetry corresponding to n + m. We see that the symmetry group is isomorphic to Z. 27. (See the answer in the text.) 28. Replace the ﬁnal “to” by ”onto”. A permutation of a set S is a onetoone map of S onto S . 29. The deﬁnition is correct. 30. This onetoone map of R onto R is a permutation. 28 8. Groups of Permutations 31. This is not a permutation; it is neither one to one nor onto. Note that f2 (3) = f2 (−3) = 9 and f2 (x) = −1 has no solution. 32. This onetoone map of R onto R is a permutation. 33. This is not a permutation, it is not a map onto R. Note that f4 (x) = −1 for any x ∈ R. 34. This is not a permutation. Note that f5 (2) = f5 (−1) = 0, so f5 is not one to one. 35. T F T T T T F F F T 36. Every proper subgroup of S3 is abelian, for such a subgroup has order either 1, 2, or 3 by Exercise 18b. 37. Function composition is associative and there is an identity element, so we have a monoid. 38. Let ρ denote the rotation through 2π/n radians and let φ denote the reﬂection (ﬂip) an axis through a vertex that bisects the vertex angle there. The diagram below shows the top part of a Cayley digraph consisting of two concentric ngons whose 2n vertices correspond to the elements of Dn . We let denote the identity element.
ρn−1 I zρ ρ B ¨ ¨¨ n−2 ¨ & b &d d & & ρ2 φ rr f ¢ rr φ y ¢ f j r2 A ρφ φρ ρ ¨ r r ¨ rr % ¨ φρ2 ρE φ } 39. If x is a ﬁxed element of G, then mapping each g in G into xg gives a permutation λx of G. The map φ of G into SG that carries each x in G into λx is then an isomorphism of G with a subgroup of the group SG . 40. Yes, it is a subgroup. Closure: If σ (b) = b and µ(b) = b, then (σµ)(b) = σ (µ(b)) = σ (b) = b. Identity: The identity carries every element into itself, and hence carries b into b. Inverses: If σ (b) = b, then σ −1 (b) = b. 41. No, the set need not be closed under the operation if B has more than one element. Suppose that σ and µ are in the given set, that b, c ∈ B and σ (b) = c but that µ(c) ∈ B . Then (µσ )(b) = µ(σ (b)) = / µ(c) ∈ B , so µσ is not in the given set. / 42. No, an inverse need not exist. Supppose A = Z and B = Z+ , and let σ : A → A be deﬁned by σ (n) = n + 1. Then σ is in the given set, but σ −1 is not because σ −1 (1) = 0 ∈ Z+ . / 43. Yes, it is a subgroup. Use the proof in Exercise 40, but replace b by B and ( ) by [ ] everywhere. 44. The order of Dn is 2n because the regular ngon can be rotated to n possible positions, and then turned over and rotated to give another n positions. The rotations of the ngon, without turning it over, clearly form a cyclic subgroup of order n. 8. Groups of Permutations 29 45. The group has 24 elements, for any one of the 6 faces can be on top, and for each such face on top, the cube can be rotated in four diﬀerent positions leaving that face on top. The four such rotations, leaving the top face on top and the bottom face on the bottom, form a cyclic subgroup of order 4. There are two more such rotation groups of order 4, one formed by the rotations leaving the front and back faces in those positions, and one formed by the rotations leaving the side faces in those positions. One exhibits a subgroup of order three by taking hold of a pair of diagonally opposite vertices and rotating through the three possible positions, corresponding to the three edges emanating from each vertex. There are four such diagonally opposite pairs of vertices, giving the desired four groups of order three. 46. Let n ≥ 3, and let ρ ∈ Sn be deﬁned by ρ(1) = 2, ρ(2) = 3, ρ(3) = 1, and ρ(m) = m for 3 < m ≤ n. Let µ ∈ Sn be deﬁned by µ(1) = 1, µ(2) = 3, µ(3) = 2, and µ(m) = m for 3 < m ≤ n. Then ρµ = µρ so Sn is not commutative. (Note that if n = 3, then ρ is our element ρ1 and µ is our element µ1 in S3 .) 47. Suppose σ (i) = m = i. Find γ ∈ Sn such that γ (i) = i and γ (m) = r where r = m. (Note this is possible because n ≥ 3.) Then (σγ )(i) = σ (γ (i)) = σ (i) = m while (γσ )(i) = γ (σ (i)) = γ (m) = r, so σγ = γσ . Thus σγ = γσ for all γ ∈ Sn only if σ is the identity permutation. 48. Let c be an element in both Oa, σ and Ob, σ . Then there exist integers r and s such that σ r (a) = c and σ s (b) = c. Then σ r−s (a) = σ −s (σ r (a)) = σ −s (c) = b. Therefore, for each integer n ∈ Z, we see that σ n (b) = σ n+r−s (a). Hence {σ n (b)  n ∈ Z} = {σ n (a)  n ∈ Z}. 49. Let A = {a1 , a2 , · · · an }. Let σ ∈ SA be deﬁned by σ (ai ) = ai+1 for 1 ≤ i < n and σ (an ) = a1 . (Note that σ essentially performs a rotation if the elements of A are spaced evenly about a circle.) It is clear that σ n is the identity permutation and  σ  = n = A. We let H = σ . Let ai and aj be given; suppose i < j . Then σ j −i (ai ) = aj and σ i−j (aj ) = ai , so H is transitive on A. 50. Let σ be transitive on A and let a ∈ A. Then {σ n (a)  n ∈ Z} must include all elements of A, that is, Oa, σ = A. Conversely, suppose that Oa, σ = A for some a ∈ A. Then {σ n (a)  n ∈ Z} = A. Let b, c ∈ A and let b = σ r (a) and c = σ s (a). Then σ s−r (b) = σ s (σ −r (b)) = σ s (a) = c, showing that σ is transitive on A. 51. a. The person would see all possible products a ∗ b and all instances of the associative property for ∗ in G . b. Associativity: Let a, b, c ∈ G . Then a ∗ (b ∗ c) = a ∗ (c ∗ b) = (c ∗ b) ∗ a = c ∗ (b ∗ a) = (b ∗ a) ∗ c = (a ∗ b) ∗ c where we used the fact that G is a group and the deﬁnition of ∗ . Identity: We have e ∗ a = a ∗ e = a and a ∗ e = e ∗ a = a for all a ∈ G . Inverses: Let a ∈ G and let a−1 be the inverse of a in G. Then a−1 ∗ a = a∗a−1 = e = a−1 ∗a = a∗ a−1 , so a−1 is also the inverse of a in G . 52. To start, we show that ρa is a permutation of G. If ρa (x) = ρa (y ), then xa = ya and x = y by group cancellation, so ρa is one to one. Because ρa (xa−1 ) = xa−1 a = x, we see that ρa maps G onto G. Thus ρa is a permutation of the set G. Let G = {ρa  a ∈ G}. For a, b ∈ G, we have (ρa ρb )(x) = ρa (ρb (x)) = ρa (xb) = xba = ρba (x), showing that G is closed under permutation multipliction. Because ρe is the identity permutation and because ρa−1 ρa = ρe , we see that G is a subgroup of the group SG of all permutations of G. 30 9. Orbits, Cycles, and the Alternating Groups Let φ : G → G be deﬁned by φ(a) = ρa−1 . Clearly φ is one to one and maps G onto G . From the equation ρa ρb = ρba derived above, we have φ(ab) = ρ(ab)−1 = ρb−1 a−1 = ρa−1 ρb−1 = φ(a)φ(b), which is the homomorphism property for φ. Therefore φ is an isomorphism of G onto G . 53. a. Let us show that that the n × n permutation matrices form a subgroup of the group GL(n, R) of all invertible n × n matrices under matrix multiplication. If P1 and P2 are two of these permutation matrices, then the exercise stated that P1 P2 is the matrix that produces the same reordering of the rows of P2 as the reordering of the rows of In that produced P1 . Thus P1 P2 can again be obtained from the identity matrix In by reordering its rows, so it is a permutation matrix. The matrix In is the identity permutation matrix. If P is obtained from In by a reordering the rows that puts row i in the position j , then P −1 is the matrix obtained from In by putting row j in position i. Thus the n × n permutation matrices do form a group under permutation multiplication. Let us number the elements of G from 1 to n, and number the rows of In from 1 to n, say from top to the bottom in the matrix. Theorem 8.16, says we can associate with each g ∈ G a permutation (reordering) of the elements of G, which we can now think of as a reordering of the numbers from 1 to n, which we can in turn think of as a reordering of the rows of the matrix In , which is in turn produced by multiplying In on the left by a permutation matrix P . The eﬀect of left multiplication of a matrix by a permutation matrix, explained in the exercise, shows that this association of g with P is an isomorpism of G with a subgroup of the group of all permutation matrices. b. Proceeding as in the second paragraph of Part(a), we number the elements e, a, b, and c of the Klein 4group in Table 5.11 with the numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 respectively. Looking at Table5.11, we see that left multiplication of each of e, a, b, c by a produces the sequence a, e, c, b. Applying the same reordering to the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4 produces the reordering 2, 1, 4, 3. Thus we associate with a the matrix obtained from the I4 by interchanging rows 1 and 2 and interchanging rows 3 and 4. Proceeding in this fashion with the other three elements, we obtain these pairings requested in the exercise. 1 0 e↔ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 a↔ 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 b↔ 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 c↔ 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 9. Orbits, Cycles, and the Alternating Groups
1. {1, 2, 5}, {3}, {4, 6} 2. {1, 5, 7, 8}, {2, 3, 6}, {4} 3. {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}, {6}, {7, 8} 4. Z 5. {2n  n ∈ Z}, {2n + 1  n ∈ Z} 7. 12345678 41358627 8. 6. {3n  n ∈ Z}, {3n + 1  n ∈ Z}, {3n + 2  n ∈ Z} 12345678 37285416 9. 12345678 54378621 10. (1,8),(3, 6, 4)(5, 7) and (1, 8)(3, 4)(3, 6)(5, 7) 11. (1, 3, 4)(2, 6)(5, 8, 7) and (1, 4)(1, 3)(2, 6)(5, 7)(5, 8) 12. (1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 6, 5, 2) and (1, 2)(1, 5)(1, 6)(1, 8)(1, 7)(1, 4)(1, 3) 13. (See the answer in the text.) 9. Orbits, Cycles, and the Alternating Groups 14. The greatest order is 6 and comes from a product of disjoint cycles of lengths 2 and 3. 15. The greatest order is 6 and comes from a cycle of length 6. 16. The greatest order is 12, coming from a product of disjoint cycles of lengths 4 and 3. 17. The greatest order is 30 and comes from a product of disjoint cycles of lengths 2, 3, and 5. 18. The greatest order is 105 and comes from a product of disjoint cycles of lengths 3, 5, and 7. 19. (See the text answer.) 20. The deﬁnition is correct. 31 21. The deﬁnition is incorrect; (1,4,5) is a cycle in S5 , but it has three orbits, {1, 4, 5}, {2}, and {3}. A permutation σ of a ﬁnite set is a cycle if and only if σ has at most one orbit of cardinality greater than 1. 22. The deﬁnition is incorrect; it must be speciﬁed as a subgroup of some Sn . The alternating group An is the subgroup of Sn consisting of the even permutations in Sn . 23. F T F F F F T T T F 24. The even permutations in S3 are ρ0 = (12)(12), ρ1 = (1, 2, 3) = (1, 3)(1, 2), and ρ2 = (1, 3, 2) = (1, 2)(1, 3). ρ0 ρ0 ρ1 ρ2 ρ1 ρ1 ρ2 ρ0 ρ2 ρ2 ρ0 ρ1 ρ0 ρ1 ρ2 25. Viewing a permutation σ in Sn as permuting the rows of the identity matrix In , we see that if σ could be expressed as both an even and odd number of transpositions (giving row interchanges), then the matrix resulting from applying σ to In would have both determinant 1 and determinant 1. 26. If σ is a permutation and τ = (i, j ) is a transposition in Sn , then by considering whether i and j are in the same or diﬀerent orbits of σ , we can show that the number of orbits of σ and of τ σ diﬀer by 1. Starting with the identity permutation ι which has n orbits and multiplying by transpositions to produce σ , we see that the number of transpositions cant be both even and odd, for σ has either an even or odd number of orbits, but not both. 27. a. Note that (1, 2)(1, 2) is the identity permutation in Sn , and 2 ≤ n − 1 if n > 2. Because (1, 2, 3, 4, · · · , n) = (1, n)(1, n − 1) · · · (1, 3)(1, 2), we see that a cycle of length n can be written as a product of n − 1 transpositions. Now a permutation in Sn can be written as a product of disjoint cycles, the sum of whose lengths is ≤ n. If there are r disjoint cycles involved, we see the permutation can be written as a product of at most n − r transpositions. Because r ≥ 1, we can always write the permutation as a product of at most n − 1 transpositions. b. This follows from our proof of a., because we must have r ≥ 2. c. Write the odd permutation σ as a product of s transpositions, where s ≤ n − 1 by Part(a). Then s is an odd number and 2n + 3 is an odd number, so 2n + 3 − s is an even number. Adjoin 2n + 3 − s transpositions (1,2) as factors at the right of the product of the s transpositions that comprise σ . The same permutation σ results because the product of an even number of factors (1,2) is the identity permutation. Thus σ can be written as a product of 2n + 3 permutations. 32 9. Orbits, Cycles, and the Alternating Groups If σ is even, we proceed in exactly the same way, but this time s is even so 2n + 8 − s is also even. We tack the identity permutation, written as a product of the 2n + 8 − s factors (1, 2), onto the end of σ and obtain σ as a product of 2n + 8 transpositions. A 28. L TEX is unable to draw these ﬁgures the way I would like. Make the modiﬁcations listed in your own sketches. The ﬁnal solid lines in your sketch will indicate the orbit after performing the additional transposition (i, j ). a. Consider the right circle to be drawn with a dashed rather than solid curve, and also the short arc from b to j on the left circle to be dashed. σ (j ) r
'$'$ < < rj ri r r &%&% b b. Consider the left and right circles both to be drawn with dashed curves, indicating the orbits before performing the additional transposition (i, j ).
'$'$ '$ < < < jr ri &%&% &% 29. Suppose σ ∈ H is an odd permutation. Let φ : H → H be deﬁned by φ(µ) = σµ for µ ∈ H . If φ(µ1 ) = φ(µ2 ), then σµ1 = σµ2 , so µ1 = µ2 by group cancellation. Also, for any µ ∈ H , we have φ(σ −1 µ) = σσ −1 µ = µ. This shows that φ is a onetoone map of H onto itself. Because σ is an odd permutation, we see that φ maps an even permutation onto an odd one, and an odd permutation onto an even one. Because φ maps the set of even permutations in H one to one onto the set of odd permutations in H , it is immediate that H has the same number of even permutations as odd permutations. Thus we have shown that if H has one odd permutation, it has the same number of even permutations as odd permutations. 30. If the cycle has length 1, then no element is moved. If it has length n > 1, then n elements are moved, because elements not in the cycle are not moved. 31. Closure: Let σ, µ ∈ H . If σ moves elements s1 , s2 , · · · , sk of A and µ moves elements r1 , r2 , · · · , rm of A, then σµ can’t move any elements not in the list s1 , s2 , · · · , sk , r1 , r2 , · · · , rm , so σµ moves at most a ﬁnite number of elements of A, and hence is in H . Thus H is closed under the operation of SA . Identity: The identity permutation is in H because it moves no elements of A. Inverses: Because the elements moved by σ ∈ H are the same as the elements moved by σ −1 , we see that for each σ ∈ H , we have σ −1 ∈ H also. Thus H is a subgroup of SA . 32. No, K is not a subgroup. If σ, µ ∈ K and σ is a cycle of length 40 while µ is a cycle of length 30 and these two cycles are disjoint, then σµ moves 70 elements of A, and is thus not in K . Thus K is not closed under permutation multiplication. 33. Let µ be any odd permutation in Sn . Because σ is an odd permutation, so is σ −1 , and consequently σ −1 µ is an even permutation, and thus is in An Because µ = σ (σ −1 µ), we see that µ is indeed a product of σ and a permutation in An . 9. Orbits, Cycles, and the Alternating Groups 33 34. It is no loss of generality to assume that σ = (1, 2, 3, · · · , m) where m is odd. Because m is odd, we easily compute that σ 2 = (1, 2, 3, · · · , m)(1, 2, 3, · · · , m)(1, 3, 5, · · · , m, 2, 4, 6, · · · , m − 1), which is again a cycle. 35. If σ is a cycle of length n, then σ r is also a cycle if and only if n and r are relatively prime, that is, if and only if gcd(n, r) = 1. To see why, let the cycle be σ = (1, 2, 3, · · · , n) Computing, we ﬁnd that σ r carries 1 into 1 + r, or more precisely, into 1 + r modulo n in case r ≥ n. Then 1 + r modulo n is carried in turn into 1 + 2r modulo n, etc. Thus the cycle in σ r containing 1 is (1, 1 + r, 1 + 2r, 1 + 3r, · · · , 1 + mr) where all entries are to be read modulo n, and m is the smallest positive integer such that 1 + mr ≡ 1(mod n), or equivalently, the smallest positive integer such that mr ≡ 0(mod n). Thus the length of the cycle containing 1 in σ r is the smallest positive integer m such that mr is divisible by n. In order for σ r to be a cycle, this value of m must be n, which is the case if and only if gcd(n, r) = 1. 36. We must show that λa is one to one and onto G. Suppose that λa (g1 ) = λa (g2 ). Then ag1 = ag2 . The group cancellation property then yields g1 = g2 , so λa is one to one. Let g ∈ G. Then λa (a−1 g ) = a(a−1 g ) = g , so λa is onto G. 37. Closure: Let λa , λb ∈ H . For g ∈ G, we have (λa λb )(g ) = λa (λb (g )) = λa (bg ) = (ab)g = λab (g ). Thus λa λb = λab , so H is closed under permutation multiplication (function composition). Identity: Cearly λe is the identity permutation of G. Inverses: We have λa λa−1 = λaa−1 = λe , so λa−1 = λa−1 . Thus H is a subgroup of SG . 38. We must show that for each a, b ∈ G, there exists some λc ∈ H such that λc (a) = b. We need only choose c such that ca = b. That is, we take c = ba−1 . 39. We show that (1, 2, 3, · · · , n)r (1, 2)(1, 2, 3, · · · , n)n−r = (1, 2) for r = 0, (2, 3) for r = 1, (3, 4) for r = 2, · · · , (n, 1) for r = n − 1. To see this, note that any number not mapped into 1 or 2 by (1, 2, 3, · · · , n)n−r is left ﬁxed by the given product. For r = i, we see that (1, 2, 3, · · · , n)n−i maps i + 1 into 1, which is then mapped into 2 by (1, 2), which is mapped into i + 2 by (1, 2, 3, · · · , n)i . Also (1, 2, 3, · · · , n)n−i maps i + 2 mod n into 2, which is then mapped into 1 by (1, 2), which is mapped into i + 1 by (1, 2, 3, · · · , n)i . Let (i, j ) be any transposition, written with i < j . We easily compute that (i, j ) = (i, i + 1)(i + 1, i + 2) · · · (j − 2, j − 1)(j − 1, j )(j − 2, j − 1) · · · (i + 1, i + 2)(i, i + 1). By Corollary 9.12, every permutation in Sn can be written as a product of transpositions, which we now see can each be written as a product of the special transpositions (1, 2), (2, 3), · · · , (n, 1) and we have shown that these in turn can be expressed as products of (1, 2) and (1, 2, 3, · · · , n). This completes the proof. 34 10. Cosets and the Theorem of Lagrange 10. Cosets and the Theorem of Lagrange
1. (See the answer in the text.) 2. 4Z = {· · · , −8, −4, 0, 4, 8, · · ·}, 2 + 4Z = {· · · , −6, −2, 2, 6, 10, · · ·} 3. 2 = {0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10}, 1 + 2 = {1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11} 4. 4 = {0, 4, 8}, 1 + 4 = {1, 5, 9}, 2 + 4 = {2, 6, 10}, 3 + 4 = {3, 7, 11} 5. 18 = {0, 18}, 1 + 18 = {1, 19}, 2 + 18 = {2, 20}, · · · , 17 + 18 = {17, 35} 6. {ρ0 , µ2 }, {ρ1 , δ2 }, {ρ2 , µ1 }, {ρ3 , δ1 } 7. {ρ0 , µ2 }, {ρ1 , δ1 }, {ρ2 , µ1 }, {ρ3 , δ2 } They are not the same. 8. We do not get a coset group. The 2 × 2 blocks in the table do not all have elements of just one coset. ρ0 ρ0 µ2 ρ1 δ2 ρ2 µ1 ρ3 δ1 µ2 µ2 ρ0 δ2 ρ1 µ1 ρ2 δ1 ρ3 ρ1 ρ1 δ1 ρ2 µ2 ρ3 δ2 ρ0 µ1 δ2 δ2 ρ3 µ1 ρ0 δ1 ρ1 µ2 ρ2 ρ2 ρ2 µ1 3 δ1 ρ0 µ2 ρ1 δ2 µ1 µ1 ρ2 δ1 ρ3 µ2 ρ0 δ2 ρ1 ρ3 ρ3 δ2 ρ0 µ1 ρ1 δ1 ρ2 µ2 δ1 δ1 ρ1 µ2 ρ2 δ2 ρ3 µ1 ρ0 ρ0 µ2 ρ1 δ2 ρ2 µ1 ρ3 δ1 9. {ρ0 , ρ2 , }, {ρ1 , ρ2 }, {µ1 , µ2 }, {δ1 , δ2 , } 10. The same cosets are obtained as in Exercise 9, so the right cosets of {ρ0 , ρ2 } are the same as the left cosets. 11. (See the answer in the text.) 12. 3 = {1, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21} has 8 elements, so its index (the number of cosets) is 24/8 = 3. 13. µ1 = {ρ0 , µ1 } has 2 elements, so its index (the number of left cosets) is 6/2 = 3. 14. µ2 = {ρ0 , µ2 } has 2 elements, so its index (the number of left cosets) is 8/2 = 4. 15. σ = (1, 2, 5, 4)(2, 3) = (1, 2, 3, 5, 4) generates a cyclic subgroup of S5 of order 5, so its index (the number of left cosets) is 5!/5 = 4! = 24. 16. µ = (1, 2, 4, 5)(3, 6) generates a cyclic subgroup of S6 of order 4, (the cycles are disjoint) so its index (the number of left cosets) is 6!/4 = 720/4 = 180. 17. The deﬁnition is incorrect; we have no concept of a left coset of an arbitrary subset of a group G. Let G be a group and let H ≤ G. The left coset of H containing a is aH = {ah  h ∈ H }. 18. The deﬁnition is correct. 19. T T T F T F T T F T (i) See the last sentence in this section. 10. Cosets and the Theorem of Lagrange 35 20. This is impossible. For a subgroup H of an abelian group G, we have a + H = H + a for all a ∈ G. 21. For any group G, just take the subgroup H = G. 22. The subgroup {0} of Z6 . 23. This is impossible. Because the cells are disjoint and nonempty, their number cannot exceed the order of the group. 24. This is impossible. The number of cells must divide the order of the group, and 4 does not divide 6. 25. The left cosets of the subgroup H form a partition of G and each coset has the same number of elements as H has. 26. Reﬂexive: Let a ∈ G. then aa−1 = e and e ∈ H because H is a subgroup. Thus a ∼R a. Symmetric: Suppose a ∼R b. Then ab−1 ∈ H . Because H is a subgroup, (ab−1 )−1 = ba−1 is in H , so b ∼R a. Transitive: Suppose a ∼R b and b ∼R c. Then ab−1 ∈ H and bc−1 ∈ H . Because H is a subgroup (ab−1 )(bc−1 ) = ac−1 is in H , so a ∼R c. 27. Let φg : H → Hg by φg (h) = hg for all h ∈ H . If φg (h1 ) = φg (h2 ) for h1 , h2 ∈ H , then h1 g = h2 g and h1 = h2 by group cancellation, so φg is one to one. Clearly φg is onto Hg , for if hg ∈ Hg , then φg (h) = hg . 28. We show that gH = Hg by showing that each coset is a subset of the other. Let gh ∈ gH where g ∈ G and h ∈ H . Then gh = ghg −1 g = [(g −1 )−1 hg −1 ]g is in Hg because (g −1 )−1 hg −1 is in H by hypothesis. Thus gH is a subset of Hg . Now let hg ∈ Hg where g ∈ G and h ∈ H . Then hg = gg −1 hg = g (g −1 hg ) is in gH because g −1 hg is in H by hypothesis. Thus Hg is a subset of gH also, so gH = Hg . 29. Let h ∈ H and g ∈ G. By hypothesis, Hg = gH . Thus hg = gh1 for some h1 ∈ H . Then g −1 hg = h1 , showing that g −1 hg ∈ H . 30. It is false. Let G = S3 , H = {ρ0 , µ1 }, a = ρ1 and b = µ3 . (See Table 8.8.) Then aH = {ρ1 , µ3 } = bH , but Ha = {ρ1 , µ2 } while Hb = {ρ2 , µ3 }. 31. It is true; b = eb and e ∈ H so b ∈ Hb. Because Hb = Ha, we have b ∈ Ha. 32. It is true. Because H is a subgroup, we have {h−1  h ∈ H } = H . Therefore Ha−1 = {ha−1  h ∈ H } = {h−1 a−1  h ∈ H } = {(ah)−1  h ∈ H }. That is, Ha−1 consists of all inverses of elements in aH . Similarly, Hb−1 consists of all inverses of elements in bH . Because aH = bH , we must have Ha−1 = Hb−1 . 33. It is False. Let H be the subgroup {ρ0 , µ2 } of D4 in Table 8.12. Then ρ1 H = δ2 H = {ρ1 , δ2 }, and ρ12 H = ρ2 H = {ρ2 , µ1 } but δ22 H = ρ0 H = H = {ρ0 , µ2 }. 34. The possible orders for a proper subgroup are p, q , and 1. Now p and q are primes and every group of prime order is cyclic, and of course every group of order 1 is cyclic. Thus every proper subgroup of a group of order pq must be cyclic. 35. From the proof in Exercise 32, Ha−1 = {(ah)−1  h ∈ H } This shows that the map φ of the collection of left cosets into the collection of right cosets deﬁned by φ(aH ) = Ha−1 is well deﬁned, for if aH = bH , then {(ah)−1  h ∈ H } = {(bh)−1  h ∈ H }. Because Ha−1 may be any right coset of H , the map is onto the collection of right cosets. Because elements in disjoint sets have disjoint inverses, we see that φ is one to one. 36 10. Cosets and the Theorem of Lagrange 36. Let G be abelian of order 2n where n is odd. Suppose that G contains two elements, a and b, of order 2. Then (ab)2 = abab = aabb = ee = e and ab = e because the inverse of a is a itself. Thus ab also has order 2. It is easily checked that then {e, a, b, ab} is a subgroup of G of order 4. But this is impossible because n is odd and 4 does not divide 2n. Thus there can’t be two elements of order 2. 37. Let G be of order ≥ 2 but with no proper nontrivial subgroups. Let a ∈ G, a = e. Then a is a nontrivial subgroup of G, and thus must be G itself. Because every cyclic group not of prime order has proper subgroups, we see that G must be ﬁnite of prime order. 38. Following the hint and using the notation there, it suﬃces to prove {(ai bj )K  i = 1, · · · , r, j = 1, · · · , s} is the collection of distinct left cosets of K in G. Let g ∈ G and let g be in the left coset ai H of H . Then g = ai h for some h ∈ H . Let h be in the left coset bj K of K in H . Then h = bj k for some k ∈ K , so g = ai bj k and g ∈ ai bj K . This shows that the collection given in the hint includes all left cosets of K in G. It remains to show the cosets in the collection are distinct. Suppose that ai bj K = ap bq K , so that ai bj k1 = ap bq k2 for some k1 , k2 ∈ K . Now bj k1 ∈ H and bq k2 ∈ H . Thus ai and ap are in the same left coset of H , and therefore i = p and ai = ap . Using group cancellation, we deduce that bj k1 = bq k2 . But this means that bj and bq are in the same left coset of K , so j = q . 39. The partition of G into left cosets of H must be H and G − H = {g ∈ G  g ∈ H }, because G has / ﬁnite order and H must have half as many elements as G. For the same reason, this must be the partition into right cosets of H . Thus every left coset is also a right coset. 40. Let a ∈ G. Then a has order d that must divide the order of G, so that n = dq . We know that ad = e. Thus an = (ad )q = eq = e also. 41. Let r + Z be a left coset of Z in R, where r ∈ R. Let [r] be the greatest integer less than or equal to r. Then 0 ≤ r − [r] < 1 and r + (−[r]) is in r + Z. Because the diﬀerence of any two distinct elements in r + Z is at least 1, we see that x = r − [r] must be the unique element x ∈ r + Z satisfying 0 ≤ x < 1. 42. Consider a left coset r + 2π of 2π in R. Then every element of this coset is of the form r + n(2π ) for n ∈ Z. We know that sin(r + n(2π )) = sin r for all n ∈ Z because the function sine is periodic with period 2π . Thus sine has the same value at each elements of the coset r + 2π . 43. a. Reﬂexive: We have a = eae where e ∈ H and e ∈ K , so a ∼ a. Symmetric: Let a ∼ b so a = hbk for some h ∈ H, k ∈ K . Then b = h−1 ak −1 and h−1 ∈ H and k −1 ∈ K because H and K are subgroups Thus b ∼ a. Transitive: Let a ∼ b and b ∼ c so a = hbk and b = h1 ck1 for some h, h1 ∈ H and k, k1 ∈ K . Then a = hh1 ck1 k and hh1 ∈ H and k1 k ∈ K because H and K are subgroups. Thus a ∼ c. b. The equivalence class containing the element a is HaK = {hak  h ∈ H, k ∈ K }. It can be formed by taking the union of all right cosets of H that contain elements in the left coset aK . 44. a. Closure: If σ (c) = c and µ(c) = c, then (σµ)(c) = σ (µ(c)) = σ (c) = c, so Sc, c is closed under permutation multiplication. Identity: The identity permutation leaves c ﬁxed so it is in Sc, c . Inverses: If σ leaves c ﬁxed, then σ −1 does also. Thus Sc, c is a subgroup of SA . b. No, Sc, d is not closed under permutation multiplication. If σ, µ ∈ Sc, d , then (σµ)(c) = σ (µ(c)) = σ (d). Because σ (c) = d and σ is one to one, we know that σ (d) = d unless c = d. 11. Direct Products and Finitely Generated Abelian Groups 37 c. Let µ ∈ Sc, d . Then we claim that Sc, d is the coset µSc, c of Sc, c in SA . It is obvious that µSc, c ⊆ Sc, d . Let σ ∈ Sc, d . Then (µ−1 σ )(c) = µ−1 (σ (c)) = µ−1 (d) = c. Thus µ−1 σ ∈ Sc, c so σ ∈ µSc, c which means that Sc, d ⊆ µSc, c . Hence Sc, d = µSc, c . 45. We can work with Zn . Let d divide n. Then n/d = {0, n/d, 2n/d, · · · , (d − 1)n/d} is a subgroup of Zn of order d. It consists precisely of all elements x ∈ Zn such that dx = x + x + · · · + x for d summands is equal to 0. Because an element x of any subgroup of order d of Zn must satisfy dx = 0, we see that n/d is the only such subgroup. Because the order of a subgroup must divide the order of the whole group, we see that these are the only subgroups that Zn has. 46. Every element in Zn generates a subgroup of some order d dividing n, and the number of generators of that subgroup is ϕ(d) by Corollary 6.16. By the preceding exercise, there is a unique such subgroup of order d dividing n. Thus Σdn ϕ(d) counts each element of Zn once and only once as a generator of a subgroup of order d dividing n. Hence Σdn ϕ(d) = n. 47. Let d be a divisor of n = G. Now if G contains a subgroup of order d, then each element of that subgroup satisﬁes the equation xd = e. By the hypothesis that xm = e has at most m solutions in G, we see that there can be at most one subgroup of each order d dividing n. Now each a ∈ G has some order d dividing n, and a has exactly ϕ(d) generators. Because a must be the only subgroup of order d, we see that the number of elements of order d for each divisor d of n cannot exceed ϕ(d). Thus we have n= (number of elements of G of order d) ≤ ϕ(d) = n.
dn dn This shows that G must have exactly ϕ(d) elements of each order d dividing n, and thus must have ϕ(n) ≥ 1 elements of order n. Hence G is cyclic. 11. Direct Products and Finitely Generated Abelian Groups
1. (See the answer in the text.) 2. The group is cyclic because there are elements of order 12. Element (0,0) (0,1) (0,2) (0,3) Order 1 4 2 4 Element (1,0) (1,1) (1,2) (1,3) Order 3 12 6 12 Element (2,0) (2,1) (2,2) (2,3) Order 3 12 6 12 3. lcm(2, 2) = 2. (The abbreviation lcm stands for least common multiple.) 4. lcm(3, 5) = 15. (The abbreviation lcm stands for least common multiple.) 5. lcm(3, 9) = 9. (The abbreviation lcm stands for least common multiple.) 6. lcm(4, 6, 5) = 60. (The abbreviation lcm stands for least common multiple.) 7. lcm(4, 2, 5, 3) = 60. (The abbreviation lcm stands for least common multiple.) 8. For Z6 × Z8 : the lcm (least common multiple ) of 6 and 8 which is 24. For Z12 × Z15 : the lcm of 12 and 15 which is 60. 38 11. Direct Products and Finitely Generated Abelian Groups {(0, 0), (0, 1)} {(0, 0), (1, 1)} 9. {(0, 0), (1, 0)} 10. There are 7 order 2 subgroups: (1, 0, 0) , (0, 1, 0) , (0, 0, 1) , (1, 1, 0) , (1, 0, 1) , (0, 1, 1) , (1, 1, 1) . There are 7 order 4 subgroups: {(0, 0, 0), (1, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0), (1, 1, 0)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 0, 0), (0, 1, 1), (1, 1, 1)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 1, 0), (0, 1, 1), (1, 0, 1)} {(0, 0, 0), (0, 1, 1), (0, 0, 1), (0, 1, 0)} 11. (See the answer in the text.) 12. {(0, 0, 0), (1, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0), (1, 1, 0)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 0, 0), (0, 1, 2), (1, 1, 2)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 1, 0), (0, 1, 2), (1, 0, 2)} {(0, 0, 0), (0, 1, 2), (0, 0, 2), (0, 1, 0)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 0, 0), (0, 0, 2), (1, 0, 2)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 1, 0), (0, 0, 2), (1, 1, 2)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 1, 2), (0, 1, 0), (1, 0, 2)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 0, 0), (0, 0, 1), (1, 0, 1)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 1, 0), (0, 0, 1), (1, 1, 1)} {(0, 0, 0), (1, 1, 1), (0, 1, 0), (1, 0, 1)} 13. Z3 × Z20 , Z4 × Z15 , Z5 × Z12 , Z3 × Z4 × Z5 14. a. 4 b. 12 c. 12 d. 2, 2 e. 8 15. The maximum possible order is 12 = lcm(4, 6). 16. Yes. Both groups are isomorphic to Z2 × Z3 × Z4 . 17. The maximum possible order is 120 = lcm(8, 20, 24). 18. No. Z8 × Z10 × Z24 Z2 × Z8 × Z8 × Z3 × Z5 but Z4 × Z12 Z40 Z4 × Z4 × Z8 × Z3 × Z5 19. The maximum possible order is 180 = lcm(4, 18, 15). 20. Yes. Both groups are isomorphic to Z2 × Z4 × Z3 × Z9 × Z5 . 21. Z8 , Z2 × Z4 , Z2 × Z2 × Z2 22. Z16 , Z2 × Z8 , Z4 × Z4 , Z2 × Z2 × Z4 , Z2 × Z2 × Z2 × Z2 23. (See the answer in the text.) 24. Z16 × Z9 × Z5 , Z2 × Z8 × Z9 × Z5 , Z4 × Z4 × Z9 × Z5 , Z2 × Z2 × Z4 × Z9 × Z5 , Z2 × Z2 × Z2 × Z2 × Z9 × Z5 , Z16 × Z3 × Z3 × Z5 , Z2 × Z8 × Z3 × Z3 × Z5 , Z4 × Z4 × Z3 × Z3 × Z5 , Z2 × Z2 × Z4 × Z3 × Z3 × Z5 , Z2 × Z2 × Z2 × Z2 × Z3 × Z3 × Z5 25. (See the answer in the text.) 26. There are 3 of order 24, arising from the subscript sequences 8, 3 and 2, 4, 3 and 2, 2, 2, 3 on the factors Z. Similarly, there are 2 of order 25 arising from the subscript sequences 25 and 5, 5. There are 3 · 2 = 6 of order 24 · 25, because each of three for order 24 can be paired with each of the two of order 25. 11. Direct Products and Finitely Generated Abelian Groups 39 27. Because there are no primes that divide both m and n, any abelian group of order mn is isomorphic to a direct product of cyclic groups of primepower order where all cyclic groups given by primes dividing m appear before any of the primes dividing n. Thus any abelian group of order mn is isomorphic to a direct product of a group of order m with a group of order n, when gcd(m, n) = 1. Because there are r choices for the group of order m and s choices for the group of order n, there are rs choices in all. 28. We have 105 = 25 55 . There are 7 groups of order 25 , up to isomorphism, by Exercise 23. Replacing factors 2 by factors 5 in the answer to Exercise 23, we see that there are also 7 abelian groups of order 55 , up to isomorphism. By Exercise 27, there are 7 · 7 = 49 abelian groups of order 105 , up to isomorphism. 29. a. We just illustrate with the computation for groups of order p8 , to get the last entry 22 in the table. We try to be systematic, according as there is just one factor Z, then two factors Z, then three, etc. For each of these cases, we list the possible sequences of exponents i that appear on the subscripts pi on the factors Zpi . Factors 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Exponent Sequences 8 1, 7 2 , 6 3 , 5 4 , 4 1, 1, 6 1, 2, 5 1, 3, 4 2, 2, 4 2, 3, 3 1, 1, 1, 5 1, 1, 2, 4 1, 1, 3, 3 1, 2, 2, 3 2, 2, 2, 2 1, 1, 1, 1, 4 1, 1, 1, 2, 3 1, 1, 2, 2, 2 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 3 1 , 1, 1, 1, 2, 2 1,1,1,1,1,1,2 1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1 Total 1 4 5 5 3 2 1 1 Thus there are a total of 1 + 4 + 5 + 5 + 3 + 2 + 1 + 1 = 22 abelian groups of order p8 , up to isomorphism. b. We use the entries from the table in the answer in the text. i) 3 · 5 · 15 = 225 ii) 5 · 15 = 225 iii) q 5 r4 q 3 = q 8 r4 so our computation becomes 22 · 5 = 110 30. Finish this diagram by a double arrow at the right end of each row looping around to the left end of the row, and a single arrow at the bottom of each column looping around to the top of the column. A L TEX can’t do dashed arrows or the looping ones. (0,0) ↓ (1,0) ↓ (2,0) ↓ . . . ↓ (n,0) ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ (0,1) ↓ (1,1) ↓ (2,1) ↓ . . . ↓ (n,1) ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ (0,2) ↓ (1,2) ↓ (2,2) ↓ . . . ↓ (n,2) (1,0) −→ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· . . . ··· ··· ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ (0, m) ↓ (1, m) ↓ (2, m) ↓ . . . ↓ (n, m) ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ (0,1) =⇒ 40 11. Direct Products and Finitely Generated Abelian Groups 31. a. It is abelian if the two generators a and b representing the two arc types commute. From a diagram, we check that this is the case when the arrows on both ngons have the same (clockwise or counterclockwise) direction. b. Z2 × Zn c. Z2 × Zn is cyclic when n is odd. d. It is isomorphic to the dihedral group Dn , for it is generated by an element ρ (a rotation) of order n and an element µ (a reﬂection) of order 2 satisfying ρµ = µρ−1 . 32. T T F T F F F F F T 33. Zp is an example for any prime p. 34. a. Cardinality considerations show that the only subgroup of Z5 × Z6 that it isomorphic to Z5 × Z6 is Z5 × Z6 itself. b. There are an inﬁnite number of them. Subgroup mZ × nZ is isomorphic to Z × Z for all positive integers m and n. 35. S3 is an example, for its nontrivial proper subgroups are all abelian, so any direct product of them would be abelian, and could not be isomorphic to nonabelian S3 . 36. T F F T T F T F T T 37. The numbers are the same. 38. a. Yes, it has just one subgroup of order 8 because 72 = 8 · 9 so the subgroup of order 8 consists of all elements having order that divides 8. b. No. If the group is Z8 × Z9 , then it has just one subgroup {(0, 0), (2, 0), (4, 0), (6, 0)} of order 4, but if it is isomorphic to Z2 × Z4 × Z9 , it has more than one subgroup of order 4, namely {(0, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0), (0, 2, 0), (0, 3, 0)} and {(0, 0, 0), (2, 0, 0), (0, 2, 0), (2, 2, 0)}. 39. Let G be abelian and let a, b ∈ G have ﬁnite order. Then ar = b s = e for some positive integers r and s. Because G is abelian, we see that (ab)rs = (ar )s (bs )r = es er = ee = e, so ab has ﬁnite order. This shows that the subset H of G consisting of all elements of ﬁnite order is closed under the group operation. Of course e ∈ H because e has order 1. If ar = e, then a−r = (a−1 )r = e also, showing that a ∈ H implies a−1 ∈ H , and completing the demonstration that H is a subgroup of G. 40. The torsion subgroup of Z4 × Z × Z3 has order 4 · 3 = 12. The torsion subgroup of Z12 × Z × Z12 has order 12 · 12 = 144. 41. {−1, 1} 42. {eqπi  q ∈ Q} 43. Let G be a ﬁnitely generated abelian group and write it (up to isomorphism) in the form described in Theorem 11.12. Put parentheses around the ﬁrst portion, involving factors of the form Zpr , and then put parenthese around the second part, containing the factors Z. We have then exhibited G, up to isomorphism, in the form H × K where H is a torsion group and K is torsion free. 44. a. 36 ; b. 2, 12, and 60 as explained in Part(c). c. Find an isomorphic group that is a direct product of cyclic groups of primepower order. For each prime divisor of the order of the group, write the subscripts in the direct product involving that prime in a row in order of increasing magnitude. Keep the righthand ends of the rows aligned. Then take the product of the numbers down each column of the array. These are the torsion coeﬃcients. Illustrating with the group in b., we ﬁrst form Z2 × Z3 × Z3 × Z4 × Z4 × Z5 . We now form the array and multiply columns, as in 11. Direct Products and Finitely Generated Abelian Groups 2 4 3 12 4 3 5 60 41 2 obtaining the torsion coeﬃcients 2, 12, 60. 45. If m and n are relatively prime, then (1, 1) has order mn so the group is cyclic of order mn. If m and n are not relatively prime, then no element has order exceeding the least common multiple of m and n, which has to be less than mn, so the group is not cyclic. 46. Computation in a direct product of n groups consists of computing using the individual group operations in each of the n components. In a direct product of abelian groups, the individual group operations are all commutative, and it follows at once that the direct product is an abelian group. 47. Closure: Let a, b ∈ H . Then a2 = b2 = e. Because G is abelian, we see that (ab)2 = abab = aabb = ee = e, so ab ∈ H also. Thus H is closed under the group operation. Identity: We are given that e ∈ H . Inverses: For all a ∈ H , the equation a2 = e means that a−1 = a ∈ H . Thus H is a subgroup. 48. Yes, H is a subgroup for order 3, by essentially the same proof as in the preceding exercise. No, H is not a subgroup for order 4, because the square of an element of order 4 has order 2, so H is not closed under the operation. For prime positive integers, H will be a subgroup. 49. S3 is a counterexample. 50. a. (h, k ) = (h, e)(e, k ) b. (h, e)(e, k ) = (h, k ) = (e, k )(h, e). c. The only element of H × K of the form (h, e) and also of the form (e, k ) is (e, e) = e. 51. Uniqueness: Suppose that g = hk = h1 k1 for h, h1 ∈ H and k, k1 ∈ K . Then h1−1 h = k1 k −1 is in both H and K , and we know that H ∩ K = {e}. Thus h1−1 h = k1 k −1 = e, from which we see that h = h1 and k = k1 . Isomorphic: Suppose g1 = h1 k1 and g2 = h2 k2 . Then g1 g2 = h1 k1 h2 k2 = h1 h2 k1 k2 because elements of H and K commute by hypothesis b. Thus by uniqueness, g1 g2 is renamed (h1 h2 , k1 k2 ) = (h1 , k1 )(h2 , k2 ) in H × K . 52. Recall that every subgroup of a cyclic group is cyclic. Thus if a ﬁnite abelian group G contains a subgroup isomorphic to Zp × Zp , which is not cyclic, then G cannot be cyclic. Conversely, suppose that G is a ﬁnite abelian group that is not cyclic. By Theorem 11.12, G contains a subgroup isomorphic to Zpr × Zps for the same prime p, because if all components in the direct product correspond to distinct primes, then G would be cyclic by Theorem 11.5. The subgroup pr−1 × ps−1 of Zpr × Zps is clearly isomorphic to Zp × Zp . 53. By the Theorem of Lagrange, the order of an element of a ﬁnite group (that is, the order of the cyclic subgroup it generates) divides the order of the group. Thus if G has primepower order, then the order of every element is also a power of the prime. The hypothesis of commutativity was not used. 54. By Theorem 11.12, the groups that appear in the decompositions of G × K and of H × K are unique except for the order of the factors. Because G × K and H × K are isomorphic, these factors in their decompositions must be the same. Because the decompositions of G × K and H × K can both be written in the order with the factors from K last, we see that G and H must have the same factors in their expression in the decomposition described in Theorem 11.12. Thus G and H are isomorphic. 42 12. Plane Isometries 12. Plane Isometries
1. (See the answer in the text.) 2. P R P P R R R P 3. (See the answer in the text.) 4. A ﬁgure with a oneelement group of plane symmetries. 5. A ﬁgure with a twoelement group of plane symmetries. 6. A ﬁgure with a threeelement group of plane symmetries.
7. (See the answer in the text.) 8. A ﬁgure with a fourelement group of plane symmetries, isomorphic to Z2 × Z2 . 9. (See the answer in the text.) 10. Rotations and reﬂections can have ﬁxed points. A translation slides all points by the same amount, and a glide reﬂection moves all points the same distance. 11. A rotations is the only type with just one ﬁxed point. 12. No plane isometry has exactly two ﬁxed points. If P and Q are left ﬁxed, so are all points on the line through these two points. 13. Only the identity and reﬂections have an inﬁnite number of ﬁxed points. 14. If P , Q, and R are three non collinear points, then three circles with centers at P , Q, and R have at most one point in common. Namely, two circles intersect in two points, and if the center of the third circle does not lie on the line through the centers of the ﬁrst two, then it can’t pass through both points of intersection of the ﬁrst two. An isometry φ that leaves P , Q, and R ﬁxed must leave every other point S ﬁxed because it must preserve its distance to P , Q, and R, so that both S and φ(S ) must be the unique points of intersection of three circles with P , Q, and R as centers and the appropriate radii. 12. Plane Isometries 43 15. If φ(Pi ) = ψ (Pi ) for i = 1, 2, and 3, then φ−1 (ψ (Pi )) = Pi for i = 1, 2, and 3. Thus by Exercise 14, φ−1 ψ = ι, the identity map, so ψ = φ. 16. No, the product of two rotations (about diﬀerent points) may be a translation, so the set of rotations is not closed under multiplication. 17. (See the answer in the text.) 18. Yes, they do form a subgroup. Think of the ﬁxed point as the origin in the plane of complex numbers. Rotations about that point correspond to multiplying by complex numbers z such that z  = 1. The set U = {z ∈ C  z  = 1} is a group under multiplication, and the multiplication corresponds to function composition of rotations. The number 1 corresponds to the identity map. 19. (See the answer in the text.) 20. No, the product of two glide reﬂections is orientation preserving, and hence is not a glide reﬂection. 21. (See the answer in the text.) 22. Because G is ﬁnite, it can contain no translations, so the orientation preserving isometries in G consist of the rotations in G and the identity map. Because the product of two orientation preserving isometries is orientation preserving, we see that the set H of all orientation preserving isometries in G is closed under multiplication (function composition). Because the inverse of a rotation is also a rotation, we see that H contains the inverse of each element, and is thus a subgroup of G. If H = G, let µ be an element of G that is not in H . If σ is another element of G not in H , then µ−1 σ ∈ H , because the product of two orientation reversing isometries is order preserving. Thus σ ∈ µH . This shows that the coset µH contains all elements of G that are not in H . Because µH  = H , we see that in this case G = 2H . 23. We can consider all the rotations in G to be clockwise. Let ρ be the rotation in G which rotates the plane clockwise through the smallest positive angle. Such a rotation exists because G is a ﬁnite group. We claim that G is cyclic, generated by ρ. Let α be the angle of rotation for ρ. Let σ be another rotation in G with angle of rotation β . Write β = qα + θ, according to the division algorithm. Then θ = β − qα, and the isometry ρ−q σ rotates the plane through the angle θ. By the division algorithm, either θ = 0 or 0 < θ < α. Because 0 < θ < α is impossible by our choice of α as the smallest nonzero angle of rotation, we see that θ = 0. Hence β = qα, so σ = ρq , showing that G is cyclic and generated by ρ. 24. a. No 25. a. No 26. a. No 27. a. Yes 28. a. Yes 29. a. No 30. a. Yes b. No b. No b. Yes b. No b. Yes b. No b. No c. No c. Yes c. No c. No c. Yes c. No c. Yes d. No d. No d. No d. No d. No d. Yes d. Yes e. Z e. D∞ e. Z × Z2 e. D∞ e. D∞ × Z2 e. Z e. D∞ c. No 32. a. Yes, 180◦ b. Yes c. No 31. a. Yes, 90◦ and 180◦ b. Yes 44 33. a. No b. No c. No c. No c. No b. Yes c. No c. No 13. Homomorphisms 34. a. No b. Yes c. No b. Yes c. No 35. a. Yes, 180◦ 37. a. Yes, 120◦ b. Yes b. Yes 36. a. Yes, 60◦ , 120◦ , and 180◦ 38. a. No c. No b. No c. Yes d. (1, 0) and (0, 1) 39. a. Yes, 90◦ and 180◦ 40. a. Yes, 120◦ 41. a. Yes, 120◦ b. No b. Yes d. (1, 1) and (1,1) √ d. (1,0) and (1, 3) √ d. (0, 1) and ( 3, 1) 42. Let us call the four diagonals of the cube through its center d1 , d2 , d3 , and d4 . By rotating the cube, any diagonal can be moved to fall on the line segment formerly occupied by any of the diagonals (including itself) in two ways. For example, if d1 goes from point P to point Q and d2 from point R to point S , then d1 can be moved into the segment from R to S with the vertex formerly at P falling on either point R or point S . Thus diagonal d1 can be moved onto a diagonal (including itself) in 4 · 2 = 8 ways. Once diagonal d1 is in position, we can keep the ends of d1 ﬁxed and rotate the cube through a total of three positions, giving a total of 3 · 8 = 24 possible rotations of the cube. But the set {d1 , d2 , d3 , d4 } admits only 4! = 24 permutations. Thus, identifying each rotation with one of these permutations of the four diagonals, we see that the group of rotations must be isomorphic to the full symmetric group S4 on four letters. 13. Homomorphisms
1. It is a homomorphism, because φ(m + n) = m + n = φ(m) + φ(n). 2. It is not a homomorphism, because φ(2.6 + 1.6) = φ(4.2) = 4 but φ(2.6) + φ(1.6) = 2 + 1 = 3. 3. It is a homomorphism, because φ(xy ) = xy  = xy  = φ(x)φ(y ) for x, y ∈ R∗ . 4. It is a homomorphism. Let m, n ∈ Z6 . In Z, let m + n = 6q + r by the division algorithm in Z. Then φ(m +6 n) is the remainder of r modulo 2. Because 2 divides 6, the remainder of m + n in Z modulo 2 is also the remainder of r modulo 2. Now the map γ : Z → Z2 of Example 13.10 is a homomorphism, and we have just shown that φ(m +6 n) = γ (m + n) for m, n ∈ Z6 . Thus we have φ(m +6 n) = γ (m + n) = γ (m) +2 γ (n) = φ(m) + φ(n). 5. It is not a homomorphism, because φ(5 +9 7) = φ(3) = 1 but φ(5) +2 φ(7) = 1 +2 1 = 0. 6. It is a homomorphism, because φ(x + y ) = 2x+y = 2x 2y = φ(x)φ(y ) for x, y ∈ R∗ . 7. It is a homomorphism. Let a, b ∈ Gi . Then φ(ab) = (e1 , e2 , · · · , ab, · · · , er ) = (e1 , e2 , · · · , a, · · · , er )(e1 , e2 , · · · , b, · · · , er ) = φ(a)φ(b). 8. It is not a homomorphism if G is not abelian. We have φ(ab) = (ab)−1 = b−1 a−1 = φ(b)φ(a) which may not equal φ(a)φ(b) if G is not abelian. For a speciﬁc example, let G = S3 with our the notation in Section 8. Then φ(ρ1 µ1 ) = φ(µ3 ) = µ3−1 = µ3 , but φ(ρ1 )φ(µ1 ) = ρ1−1 µ1−1 = ρ2 µ1 = µ2 . 13. Homomorphisms 45 9. Yes, it is a homomorphism. By calculus, (f + g ) = f + g . Then φ(f + g ) = (f + g ) = f + g = φ(f ) + φ(g ). 10. Yes, it is a homomorphism since we have a [f (x) + g (x)] dx = 4 4 4 0 [f (x) + g (x)] dx = 0 f (x) dx + 0 g (x) dx = φ(f ) + φ(g ).
b b a f (x) dx + b a g (x) dx, so φ(f + g ) = 11. Yes, it is a homomorphism. By deﬁnition, 3(f + g )(x) = 3[f (x) + g (x)] = 3 · f (x) + 3 · g (x) = (3f )(x) + (3g )(x) = (3f + 3g )(x), showing that 3(f + g ) and 3f + 3g are the same function. Thus φ(f + g ) = 3(f + g ) = 3f + 3g = φ(f ) + φ(g ). 12. No, it is not a homomorphism. Let n = 2 and A = B= 10 01 and B = 11 , so that A + 11 21 . We see that φ(A + B ) = det(A + B ) = 4 − 1 = 3 but φ(A) + φ(B ) = det(A) + 12 det(B ) = 1 + 0 = 1. 13. Yes, it is a homomorphism. Let A = (aij ) and B = (bij ) where the element with subscript ij is in the ith row and j th column. Then
n n n φ(A + B ) = = tr(A + B ) =
i=1 (aii + bii ) =
i=1 aii +
i=1 bii tr(A) + tr(B ) = φ(A) + φ(B ). 14. No, it is not a homomorphism. We see that φ(In In ) = φ(In ) = tr(In ) = n, but φ(In ) + φ(In ) = tr(In ) + tr(In ) = n + n = 2n. 15. No, it is not a homomorphism. Let f (x) = x2 + 1. We have φ(f · f ) = 1) dx =
1 5 12 0 (x 2 12 2 0 (x + 1) dx 16 9. = 14 2 0 (x + 2x + + 2 3 +1= 28 15 but φ(f )φ(f ) = + 1) dx = ( 1 + 1)2 = 3 16. Ker(φ) consists of the even permutations, so Ker(φ) = A3 = {ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 }. 17. Ker(φ) = 7Z because 4 has order 7 in Z7 . We have φ(25) = φ(21 + 4) = φ(21) +7 φ(4) = 0 +7 φ(4) = φ(1) +7 φ(1) +7 φ(1) +7 φ(1) = 4 +7 4 +7 4 +7 4 = 1 +7 1 = 2. 18. Ker(φ) = 5Z because 6 has order 5 in Z10 . We have φ(18) = φ(15 + 3) = φ(15) +10 φ(3) = 0 +10 φ(3) = φ(1) +10 φ(1) +10 φ(1) = 6 +10 6 +10 6 = 2 +10 6 = 8. 19. In S8 , we have σ = (1, 4, 2, 6)(2, 5, 7) = (1, 4, 2, 5, 7, 6) which is of order 6, so Ker(φ) = 6Z. Then φ(20) = φ(18 + 2) = φ(18)φ(2) = ι σ 2 = (1, 2, 7)(4, 5, 6). 20. Ker(φ) = 5 = {0, 5} because 8 has order 5 in Z20 . We have φ(3) = 8 +20 8 +20 8 = 16 +20 8 = 4. 21. The element σ = (2, 5)(1, 4, 6, 7) has order 4, so Ker(φ) = 4 = {0, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20}. Then φ(14) = φ(12 +24 2) = ι σ 2 = (1, 6)(4, 7). 46 13. Homomorphisms 22. Now φ(m, n) = 3m − 5n so Ker(φ) = {(m, n)  3m = 5n for m, n ∈ Z}. Then φ(−3, 2) = 3(−3) − 5(2) = −19. 23. We have φ(m, n) = (2m − n, −3m +5n) and the only simultaneous solution of the equations 2m − n = 0 and −3m + 5n = 0 is m = n = 0, so Ker(φ) = {(0, 0)}. Also, φ(4, 6) = (8 − 6, −12 + 30) = (2, 18). 24. Let σ = (3, 5)(2, 4) and µ = (1, 7)(6, 10, 8, 9). Because σ has order 2 and µ has order 4, we see that Ker(φ) = 2Z × 4Z. Because our all the cycles are disjoint, we ﬁnd that φ(3, 10) = σ 3 µ10 = (3, 5)3 (2, 4)3 (1, 7)10 (6, 10, 8, 9)10 = (3, 5)(2, 4)(6, 10, 8, 9)2 = (3, 5)(2, 4)(6, 8)(9, 10). 25. Because the homomorphism φ must be onto Z, φ(1) must be a generator of Z. Thus there are only two such homomorphisms φ, one where φ(1) = 1 so φ(n) = n for all n ∈ Z, and one where φ(1) = −1 so φ(n) = −n for all n ∈ Z. 26. There are an inﬁnite number of them. For any nonzero n ∈ Z, we know that n is isomorphic to Z, and that φ : Z → Z given by φ(m) = mn is an isomorphism, and hence a homomorphism. Of course φ deﬁned by φ(m) = 0 for all m ∈ Z is also a homomorphism. 27. There are two of them; one where φ(1) = 1 (see Example 13.10 with n = 2) and one where φ(1) = 0. 28. Because we must have φg (e) by Theorem 13.12, we must have ge = e, so g = e is the only possibility. Because φe (x) = ex = x is the identity map, it is indeed a homomorphism. 29. We have φg (xy ) = g (xy )g −1 = (gxg −1 )(gyg −1 ) = φg (x)φg (y ) for all x, y ∈ G, so φg is a homomorphism for all g ∈ G. 30. Incorrect. It should say what φ maps to what, what x and y are, and include the necessary quantiﬁer, “for all”. A map φ of a group G into a group G is a homomorphism if and only if φ(xy ) = φ(x)φ(y ) for all x, y ∈ G. 31. The deﬁnition is correct. 32. T T F T F F T T F F 33. There are no nontrivial homomorphisms. By Theorem 13.12, the image φ[Z12 ] would be a subgroup of Z5 , and hence all of Z5 for a nontrivial φ. By Theorem 13.15, the number of cosets of Ker(φ) must then be 5. But the number of cosets of a subgroup of a ﬁnite group is a divisor of the order of the group, and 5 does not divide 12. 34. Let φ(n) be the remainder of n when divided by 4 for n ∈ Z12 . Replacing 6 by 12 and 2 by 4 in the solution of Exercise 4 shows that φ is a homomorphism. 35. Let φ(m, n) = (m, 0) for all (m, n) ∈ Z2 × Z4 . 36. There are no nontrivial homomorphisms because Z has no ﬁnite subgroups other than {0}. 37. Let φ(n) = ρn for n ∈ Z3 , using our notation in Section 8 for elements of S3 . Both Z3 and ρ1 are cyclic of order 3. 38. Let φ(n) be the identity in S3 for n even, and the transposition (1,2) for n odd in Z. Note that (1, 2) is of order 2, isomorphic to Z2 , and this homomorphism mirrors the homomorphism γ of Example 13.10 for n = 2. 13. Homomorphisms 47 39. Let φ(m, n) = 2m. Then φ((m, n) + (r, s)) = φ(m + r, n + s) = 2(m + r) = 2m + 2r = φ(m, n) + φ(r, s). 40. Let φ(2n) = (2n, 0) for n ∈ Z. Then φ(2m + 2n) = φ(2(m + n)) = (2(m + n), 0) = (2m + 2n, 0) = (2m, 0) + (2n, 0) = φ(2n) + φ(2m). 41. Viewing D4 as a group of permutations, let φ(σ ) = (1, 2) for each odd permutation σ ∈ D4 , and let φ(σ ) be the identity permutation for each even σ ∈ D4 . Note that (1, 2) is a subgroup of S3 of order 2, isomorphic to Z2 . This homomorphism mirrors the homomorphism for n = 4 in Example 13.3, restricted to the subgroup D4 of S4 . 42. For each σ ∈ S3 , let φ(σ ) = µ where µ(i) = σ (i) for i = 1, 2, 3 and µ(4) = 4. This is obviously a homomorphism. 43. Let φ(σ ) = (1, 2) for each odd permutation σ ∈ S4 , and let φ(σ ) be the identity permutation for each even σ ∈ S4 . Note that (1, 2) is a subgroup of S3 of order 2, isomorphic to Z2 . This homomorphism mirrors the homomorphism for n = 4 in Example 13.3. 44. Because φ[G] = {φ(g )  g ∈ G}, we see that φ[G] ≤ G, so φ[G] must be ﬁnite also. By Theorem 13.15, there is a onetoone correspondence between the elements of φ[G] and the cosets of Ker(φ) in G. Thus φ[G] = G/Ker(φ), so φ[G] divides G. 45. By Theorem 13.14, φ[G] is a subgroup of G , so if G  is ﬁnite, then φ[G] is ﬁnite. By the Theorem of Lagrange, we see that φ[G] is then a divisor of G . 46. Let x ∈ G. By Theorem 7.6, there are (not necessarily distinct) indices i1 , i2 , i3 , · · · , im in I such that x = ain1 ain2 ain3 · · · ainm where the nj are in Z. m 1 2 3 Because φ(aij ) = µ(aij ) for j = 1, 2, 3, · · · , m, it follows from Deﬁnition 13.1 (extended by induction) and Property 2 in Theorem 13.12 that φ(x) = µ(x). Thus φ and µ are the same map of G into G . 47. By Theorem 13.12, Ker(φ) is a subgroup of G. By the Theorem of Lagrange, either Ker(φ) = {e} or Ker(φ) = G because G is a prime number. If Ker(φ) = {e}, then φ is one to one by Corollary 13.18. If Ker(φ) = G, then φ is the trivial homomorphism, mapping everything into the identity element. 48. We see that Ker(sgnn ) = An . The multiplicative group {−1, 1} is isomorphic to the group Z2 , and if 1 ∈ {−1, 1} is renamed 0 and 1 is renamed 1, then this becomes the homomorphism of Example 13.3. 49. Let a, b ∈ G. For the composite function γφ, we have γφ(ab) = γ (φ(ab)) = γ (φ(a)φ(b)) = γ (φ(a))γ (φ(b)) = γφ(a)γφ(b) where the ﬁrst equality uses the deﬁnition of the composite map γφ, the second equality uses the fact that φ is a homomorphism, the third uses the fact that γ is a homomorphism, and the last uses the deﬁnition of γφ again. This shows that γφ is indeed a homomorphism. 50. Let x , y ∈ φ[G] and let φ(x) = x and φ(y ) = y where x, y ∈ G. Then φ[G] is abelian if if if if if if and and and and and and only only only only only only if if if if if if xy =yx, (y x )−1 x y = e , x −1 y −1 x y = e , φ(x)−1 φ(y )−1 φ(x)φ(y ) = e , φ(x−1 y −1 xy ) = e , x−1 y −1 xy ∈Ker(φ) 48 13. Homomorphisms for all x , y ∈ φ[G]. Note that because x and y could be any elements of φ[G], x and y could be any elements of G. 51. Let m, n ∈ Z. We have φ(m + n) = am+n = am an = φ(m)φ(n), showing that φ is a homomorphism. The image of φ is the cyclic subgroup a of G, and Ker(φ) is one of the subgroups of Z, which must be cyclic and consist of all (positive, negative and zero) multiples of some integer j in Z. If a has ﬁnite order in G, then j is the order of a; otherwise, j = 0. 52. We show that each of S = {x ∈ G  φ(x) = φ(a)} and Ha is a subset of the other. Let s ∈ S . Using Theorem 13.12 and the homomorphism property, we have φ(sa−1 ) = φ(s)φ(a−1 ) = φ(a)φ(a−1 ) = φ(a)φ(a)−1 = e so sa−1 = h ∈ H . Then s = ha so s ∈ Ha. Thus S is a subset of Ha. Let h ∈ H so that ha ∈ Ha. Then φ(ha) = φ(h)φ(a) = e φ(a) = φ(a), showing that ha ∈ S . Thus Ha is a subset of S , so Ha = S . 53. We have φ(1, 0) = h1 k 0 = h and φ(0, 1) = h0 k 1 = k . Let φ be a homomorphism. Using addition notation in Z × Z as usual, we have φ(1, 1) = φ((1, 0) + (0, 1)) = φ(1, 0) + φ(0, 1) = hk, φ(1, 1) = φ((0, 1) + (1, 0)) = φ(0, 1) + φ(1, 0) = kh. Thus if φ is a homomorphism, we must have hk = kh. Conversely, suppose that hk = kh. Then for any (i, j ) and (m, n) in Z × Z, we have φ((i, j ) + (m, n)) = φ(i + m, j + n) = hi+m k j +n = hi hm k j k n = hi k j hm k n = φ(i, j )φ(m, n) where the ﬁrst equality in the second line follows from the commutativity of h and k . Thus φ is a homomorphism if and only if hk = kh. 54. The preceding exercise shows that φ is a homomorphism for all choices of h and k in G if and only if hk = kh for all h and k in G, that is, if and only if G is an abelian group. 55. The map φ is a homomorphism if and only if hn = e, the identity in G. Proof: If φ is a homomorphism, then φ(0) = e. Consequently hn = φ(1)n = φ(1 + 1 + · · · + 1) = φ(0) = e. n summands Conversely, suppose that hn = e, so that h Zm where m is a divisor of n. Let i, j ∈ Zn . Viewing i and j in Z, write i + j = qm + r, i = q1 m + r1 , and j = q2 m + r2 , all by the division algorithm. Then φ(i + j ) = hi+j = hqm+r = (hm )q hr = eq hr = hr . Similarly, φ(i) = hr1 and φ(j ) = hr2 , so φ(i)φ(j ) = hr1 +r2 . Because i + j = (q1 + q2 )m + r1 + r2 , the remainder i + j when divided by m is the same as the remainder of r1 + r2 when divided by m. Thus hr1 +r2 = hr so φ(i)φ(j ) = φ(i + j ). Hence φ is a homomorphism. 14. Factor Groups 49 14. Factor Groups
1. 3 has 2 elements, so Z6 / 3 has 6/2 = 3 elements. 2. 2 × 2 has 2 · 6 = 12 elements, so the factor group has 48/12 = 4 elements. 3. (2, 1) has 2 elements, so the factor group has 8/2 = 4 elements. 4. {0} × Z5 has 5 elements, so the factor group has 15/5 = 3 elements. 5. (1, 1) has 4 elements, so the factor group has 8/4 = 2 elements. 6. (4, 3) has 6 elements, so the factor group has (12 · 18)/6 = 36 elements. 7. (1, ρ1 ) has 6 elements, so the factor group has 12/6 = 2 elements. 8. (1, 1) generates the entire group so the factor group has just one element. 9. 4 = {0, 4, 8}. Now 5 + 5 = 10, 5 + 5 + 5 = 3, and 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 8. Because 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 8 is the ﬁrst repeated sum of 5 in 4 , we see that the coset 5 + 4 is of order 4 in this factor group. 10. 12 = {0, 12, 24, 36, 48}. We prefer to compute sums of the element 2 in the coset 26 + 12 , rather than the element 26. Computing, 2 + 2 = 4, 4 + 2 = 6, 6 + 2 = 8, 8 + 2 = 10, and 10 + 2 = 12 ∈ 12 . Thus 26 + 12 has order 6 in the factor group. 11. (1, 1) = {(0, 0), (1, 1), (2, 2), (0, 3), (1, 4), (2, 5)}. Computing, (2, 1) + (2, 1) = (1, 2), (1, 2) + (2, 1) = (0, 3) ∈ (1, 1) . Thus (2, 1) + (1, 1) has order 3 in the factor group. 12. (1, 1) = {(0, 0), (1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3)}. Computing, we ﬁnd that (3, 1) + (3, 1) = (2, 2) ∈ (1, 1) . Thus (3, 1) + (1, 1) has order 2 in the factor group. 13. (0, 2) = {(0, 0), (0, 4), (0, 6)}. Computing, (3, 1) + (3, 1) = (2, 2), (2, 2) + (3, 1) = (1, 3), (1, 3) + (3, 1) = (0, 4) ∈ (0, 2) . Thus (3, 1) + (0, 2) has order 4 in the factor group. 14. (1, 2) = {(0, 0), (1, 2), (2, 4), (3, 6)}. We have (3, 3) + (3, 3) = (2, 6), (2, 6) + (3, 3) = (1, 1), (1, 1) + (3, 3) = (0, 4), (0, 4) + (3, 3) = (3, 7), (3, 7) + (3, 3) = (2, 2), (2, 2) + (3, 3) = (1, 5), (1, 5) + (3, 3) = (0, 0) ∈ (1, 2) . Thus (3, 3) + (1, 2) has order 8 in the factor group. It generates the entire factor group. 15. (4, 4) = {(0, 0), (4, 4), (2, 0), (0, 4), (4, 0), (2, 4)}. We see that (2, 0) ∈ (4, 4) so (2, 0) + (4, 4) has order 1 in the factor group. 16. Because ρ1 µ1 ρ1−1 = ρ1 µ1 ρ2 = µ2 and ρ1 ρ0 ρ1−1 = ρ1 ρ0 ρ2 = ρ0 , we see that iρ1 (H ) = {ρ0 , µ2 }. 17. The deﬁnition is incorrect. A normal subgroup H of a group G is a subgroup satisfying gH = Hg for all g ∈ G. 18. The deﬁnition is correct. 19. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Change “homomorphism” to “isomorphism” and “into” to “onto”. An automorphism of a group G is an isomorphism mapping G onto G. 20. Normal subgroups are those whose cosets can be used to form a factor group, because multiplication of left cosets by multiplying representatives is a welldeﬁned binary operation. 50 14. Factor Groups 21. (See the answer in the text for Part(a) and Part(b)). c. Taking a and b as representatives of the cosets aH and bH respectively, we see that (aH )(bH ) = (ab)H . Because G is abelian, ab = ba, so (ab)H = (ba)H = (bH )(aH ). Thus (aH )(bH ) = (bH )(aH ) so G/H is abelian. 22. a. When working with a factor group G/H , one would let x be an element of G, not an element of G/H . The student probably does not understand what elements of G/H look like and can write nothing sensible concerning them. b. We must show that each element of G/H is of ﬁnite order. Let xH ∈ G/H . c. Because G is a torsion group, we know that xm = e in G for some positive integer m. Computing (xH )m in G/H using the representative x, we have (xH )m = xm H = eH = H , so xH is of ﬁnite order. Because xH can be any element of G/H , we see that G/H is a torsion group. 23. T T T T T F T F T F 24. If n ≥ 2, then An  = Sn /2, so the only cosets of An are An and the set of all odd permutations in Sn . Thus the left and right cosets must be the same, and An is a normal subgroup of Sn . Because Sn /An has order 2, it is isomorphic to Z2 . If n = 1, then An = Sn so Sn /An is the trivial group of one element. 25. Let h ∈ H and a ∈ G. Suppose left coset multiplication (aH )(bH ) by choosing representatives is well deﬁned. Then (a−1 H )(aH ) = eH = H . Choosing the representatives a−1 h from a−1 H and a from aH , we see that a−1 ha = h1 for some h1 ∈ H . Thus ha = ah1 , so ha ∈ aH . This shows that Ha ⊆ aH . 26. Exercise 39 of Section 11 proves that the elements of G of ﬁnite order do form a subgroup T of the abelian group G. Because G is abelian, every subgroup of G is a normal subgroup, so T is normal in G. Suppose that xT is of ﬁnite order in G/T ; in particular, suppose that (xT )m = T . Then xm ∈ T . Because T is a torsion group, we must have (xm )r = xmr = e in G for some positive integer r. Thus x is of ﬁnite order in G, so that x ∈ T . This means that xT = T . Thus the only element of ﬁnite order in G/T is the identity T , so G/T is a torsion free group. 27. Reﬂexive: Because ie [H ] = H for every subgroup H of G, we see that every subgroup is conjugate to itself. Symmetric: Suppose that ig [H ] = K , so that for each k ∈ K , we have k = ghg −1 for exactly one h ∈ H . Then h = (g −1 )kg = (g −1 )k (g −1 )−1 , and we see that ig−1 [K ] = H , so K is also conjugate to H. Transitive: Suppose that ia [H ] = K and ib [K ] = S for elements a, b ∈ G and subgroups H, K, and S of G. Then each s ∈ S can be written as s = bkb−1 for a unique k ∈ K . But k = aha−1 for a unique h ∈ H . Substituting, we have s = b(aha−1 )b−1 = (ba)h(a−1 b−1 ) = (ba)h(ba)−1 , so iba [H ] = S and H is conjugate to S . 28. We have H = {H } if and only if gHg −1 = H for all g ∈ G, which is true if and only if H is a normal subgroup of G. We see that the normal subgroups of G are precisely the subgroups in the oneelement cells of the conjugacy partition of the subgroups of G. 29. We see that ρ1 µ2 ρ1−1 = ρ1 µ2 ρ2 = µ3 , and ρ2 µ2 ρ2−1 = ρ2 µ2 ρ1 = µ1 , and conjugation by other elements of S3 again yield either µ1 , µ2 , or µ3 . Thus the subgroups of S3 conjugate to {ρ0 , µ2 } are {ρ0 , µ2 }, {ρ0 , µ1 }, and {ρ0 , µ3 }. 14. Factor Groups 51 30. We have G/H  = m. Because the order of each element of a ﬁnite group divides the order of the group,we see that (aH )m = H for all elements aH of G/H . Computing using the representative a of aH , we see that am ∈ H for all a ∈ G. 31. Let {Hi  i ∈ I } be a set of normal subgroups of a group G. Let K = i∈I Hi . If a, b ∈ K , then a, b ∈ Hi for each i ∈ I , and ab ∈ Hi for each i ∈ I because Hi is a subgroup of G. Thus ab ∈ K and K is closed under the group operation of G. We see that e ∈ K because e ∈ Hi for each i ∈ I . Because a−1 ∈ Hi for each i ∈ I , we see that a−1 ∈ K also. Thus K is a subgroup of G. Let g ∈ G and k ∈ K . Then k ∈ Hi for i ∈ I and gkg −1 ∈ Hi for each i ∈ I because each Hi is a normal subgroup of G. Hence gkg −1 ∈ K , and K is a normal subgroup of G. 32. Let {Hi  i ∈ I } be the set of all normal subgroups of G containing S . Note that G is such a subgroup of G, so I is nonempty. Let K = i∈I Hi . By Exercise 31, we know that K is a normal subgroup of G, and of course K contains S because Hi contains S for each i ∈ I . By our constructions, we see that K is contained in every normal subgroup Hi of G containing S , so K must be the smallest normal subgroup of G containing S . 33. Consider two elements aC and bC in G/C . Now (aC )−1 = a−1 C and (bC )−1 = b−1 C . Conseqently, choosing representatives, we see that (aC )(bC )(aC )−1 (bC )−1 = aba−1 b−1 C . However, aba−1 b−1 ∈ C because C contains all commutators in G, so (aC )(bC )(aC )−1 (bC )−1 = C . Thus (aC )(bC ) = C (bC )(aC ) = (bC )(aC ) which shows that G/C is abelian. 34. Let g ∈ G. Because the inner automorphism ig : G → G is a onetoone map, we see that ig [H ] has the same order as H . Because H is the only subgroup of G of that order, we ﬁnd that ig [H ] = H for all g ∈ G. Therefore H is invariant under all inner automorphisms of G, and hence is a normal subgroup of G. 35. By Exercise 54 of Section 5, we know that H ∩ N is a subgroup of G, and is contained in H , so it is a subgroup of H . Let h ∈ H and x ∈ H ∩ N . Then x ∈ N and because N is a normal subgroup of G, we ﬁnd that hxh−1 ∈ N , and of course hxh−1 ∈ H because h, x ∈ H . Thus hxh−1 ∈ H ∩ N , so H ∩ N is a normal subgroup of H . Let G = D4 , let N = {ρ0 , ρ2 , µ1 , µ2 }, and let H = {ρ0 , µ1 }, using the notation in Section 8. Then N is normal in G, but H ∩ N = H is not normal in G. 36. Let H be the intersection of all subgroups of G that are of order s. We are told that this intersection is nonempty. By Exercise 31, H is a subgroup of G. Let x ∈ H and g ∈ G. Let K be any subgroup of G of order s. To show that gxg −1 ∈ H , we must show that gxg −1 ∈ K . Now g −1 Kg is a subgroup of G of order s, so x ∈ g −1 Kg . Let x = g −1 kg where k ∈ K . Then k = gxg −1 , so gxg −1 is indeed in K . Because K can be any subgroup of G of order s, we see that gxg −1 ∈ H , so H is a normal subgroup of G. 37. a. By Exercise 49 of Section 13, the composition of two automorphisms of G is a homomorphism of G into G. Because each automorphism is a onetoone map of G onto G, their composition also has this property, and is thus an automorphism of G. Thus compostion gives a binary operation on the set of all automorphisms of G. The identity map acts as identity automorphism, and the inverse map of an automorphism of G is again an automorphism of G. Thus the automorphisms form a group under function composition. b. For a, b, x ∈ G, we have ia (ib (x)) = ia (bxb−1 ) = a(bxb−1 )a−1 = (ab)x(b−1 a−1 ) = (ab)x(ab)−1 = iab (x), so the composition of two inner automorphisms is again an inner automorphism. Clearly, ie 52 14. Factor Groups acts as identity and the equation ia ib = iab shows that ia ia−1 = ie , so ia−1 is the inverse of ia . Thus the set of inner automorphisms is a group under function composition. Let a ∈ G and let φ be any automorphism of G. We must show that φia φ−1 is an inner automorphism of G in order to show that the inner automorphisms are a normal subgroup of the entire automorphism group of G. For any x ∈ G, we have (φia φ−1 )(x) = φ(ia (φ−1 (x))) = φ(aφ−1 (x)a−1 ) = φ(a)φ(φ−1 (x))φ(a−1 ) = φ(a)x(φ(a))−1 = iφ(a) (x), so φia φ−1 = iφ(a) which is indeed an inner automorphism of G. 38. Let H = {g ∈ G  ig = ie }. Let a, b ∈ H . Then for x ∈ G, we have (ab)x(ab)−1 = a(bxb−1 )a−1 = axa−1 = x, so iab = ie and ab ∈ H . Of course e ∈ H , and axa−1 = x yields x = a−1 xa = a−1 x(a−1 )−1 , so a−1 ∈ H . Thus H is a subgroup of G. To show that H is a normal subroup of G, let a ∈ H and x ∈ G. We must show that xax−1 ∈ H , that is, that ixax−1 = ie . For any y ∈ G, we have ixax−1 (y ) = (xax−1 )y (xax−1 )−1 = x[a(x−1 yx)a−1 ]x−1 = x(x−1 yx)x−1 = y = ie (y ), so ixax−1 = ie . 39. For gH ∈ G/H , let φ∗ (gH ) = φ(g )H . Because we deﬁned φ∗ using the representative g of gH , we must show that φ∗ is well deﬁned. Let h ∈ H , so that gh is another representative of gH . Then φ(gh) = φ(g )φ(h). Because we are told that φ[H ] is contained in H , we know that φ(h) = h ∈ H , so φ(g )φ(h) = φ(g )h ∈ φ(g )H . This shows that φ∗ is well deﬁned, for the same coset φ(g )H was obtained using the representatives g and gh. For the homomorphism property, let aH, bH ∈ G/H . Because φ is a homomorphism, we obtain φ∗ ((aH )(bH )) = φ∗ ((ab)H ) = φ(ab)H = (φ(a)φ(b))H = (φ(a)H )(φ(b)H ) = φ∗ (aH )φ∗ (bH ). Thus φ∗ is a homomorphism. 40. a. Let H be the subset of GL(n, R) consisting of the n × n matrices with determinant 1. The property det(AB ) = det(A)·det(B ) shows that the set H is closed under matrix multiplication. Now det(In ) = 1 and every matrix in GL(n, R) has a nonzero determinant and is invertible. From 1 = det(In ) =det(AA−1 ) = det(A)·det(A−1 ), it follows that det(A−1 ) = 1/det(A), so if A ∈ H , then A−1 ∈ H . Thus H is a subgroup of GL(n, R). Let A ∈ H and let X ∈ GL(n, R). Because X is invertible, det(X ) = 0. Then det(XAX −1 ) = det(X )· det(A)· det(X −1 ) = det(X )· det(A) · (1/det(X )) = det(A) = 1, so XAX −1 ∈ H . Thus H is a normal subgroup of GL(n, R). b. Let K be the subset of GL(n, R) consisting of the n × n matrices with determinant ±1. Note from Part(a) that if det(A) = −1, then det(A−1 ) = 1/(−1) = −1. The same arguments as in Part(a) then show that if K is the subset of n × n matrices with determinant ±1, then K is a subgroup of GL(n, R). Part(a) shows that if A ∈ K and X ∈ GL(n, R), then det(XAX −1 ) =det(A) = ±1, so that again XAX −1 ∈ K and K is a normal subgroup of GL(n, R). 41. a. Let A, B, and C be subsets of G. Then (AB )C = {(ab)c  a ∈ A, b ∈ B, c ∈ C } = {a(bc)  a ∈ A, b ∈ B, c ∈ C } = A(BC ) by the associativity of multiplication in G. The subset {e} acts as identity for this multiplication. Let a, b ∈ G with a = b. Then the set {a, b} has no multiplicative inverse, because the product of {a, b} with any other nonempty subset of G yields a set with at least two elements, and hence not {e}. The product of any subset with the empty subset is the empty subset, so even if G = {e}, we still do not have a group, for ∅ has no inverse. 15. Factor Group Computations and Simple Groups 53 b. The proof that if N is a normal subgrop and a, b ∈ G, then the subset product (aN )(bN ) is contained in the coset (ab)N would just repeat the last paragraph of the proof of Theorem 14.4. To show that (ab)N is contained in (aN )(bN ), we let n ∈ N . Then (ab)n = (ae)(bn), and this equation exhibits an element of (ab)N as a product of elements in (aN ) and (bN ). c. Associativity was proved for all subsets of G in Part(a), so it is surely true for the cosets of the normal subgroup N . Because N = eN , we see that (aN )N = (aN )(eN ) = (ae)N = aN , and similarly (eN )(aN ) = aN . Thus the coset N acts as identity element. The equation (a−1 N )(aN ) = eN = (aN )(a−1 N ) shows that each coset has an inverse, so these cosets of N do form a group under this set multiplication. The identity of the coset group is N , while the identity for the multiplication of all subsets of G is {e}. If N = {e}, these identities are diﬀerent. 15. Factor Group Computations and Simple Groups
1. Because (0, 1) has order 4, the factor group has order 2 and must be isomorphic to Z2 . This is also obvious because this factor group essentially collapses everything in the second factor of Z2 × Z4 to the identity, leaving just the ﬁrst factor. 2. In this factor group,the ﬁrst factor is not touched, but in the second factor, the element 2 is collapsed to 0. Because Z4 / 2 is isomorphic to Z2 , we see the factor group isomorphic to Z2 × Z2 . Alternatively, we can argue that the factor group has order four but no element of order greater than two. 3. We have (1, 2) = {(0, 0), (1, 2)}, so the factor group is of order 8/2 = 4. We easily see that (1, 1) + (1, 2) has order 4 in this factor group, which must then be isomorphic to Z4 . 4. We have (1, 2) = {(0, 0), (1, 2), (2, 4), (3, 6)}, so the factor group has order 32/4 = 8. Because (0, 1) must be added to itself eight times for the sum to lie in (1, 2) , we see that (0, 1) + (1, 2) is of order 8 in this factor group, which is thus cyclic and isomorphic to Z8 . 5. We have (1, 2, 4) = {(0, 0, 0), (1, 2, 4), (2, 0, 0), (3, 2, 4)} so the factor group has order (4 · 4 · 8)/4 = 32. The factor group can have no element of order greater than 8 because Z4 × Z4 × Z8 has no elements of order greater than 8. Because (0, 0, 1) must be added to iself eight times for the sum to lie in (1, 2, 4) , we see that the factor group has an element (0, 0, 1) + (1, 2, 4) of order 8, and is thus either isomorphic to Z4 × Z8 or to Z2 × Z2 × Z8 . The ﬁrst group has only three elements of order 2, while the second one has seven elements of order 2. We count the elements of Z4 × Z4 × Z8 not in (1, 2, 4) but which, when added to themselves, yield an element of (1, 2, 4) . No element added to itself yields (1, 2, 4) or (3, 2, 4). There are six such elements that yield (0, 0, 0) when added to themselves. There are another six such elements that yield (2, 0, 0) when added to themselves. These twelve elements are only enough to form three 4element cosets in the factor group, which must be ismorphic to Z4 × Z8 . 6. Factoring out by (0, 1) collapses the second factor of Z × Z to zero without touching the ﬁrst factor, so the factor group is isomorphic to Z. (For those who object to this “collapsing” argument, the projection map π1 : Z × Z → Z where π1 (m, n) = m has (0, 1) as its kernel.) 7. The 1 in the generator (1, 2) of (1, 2) shows that each coset of (1, 2) contains a unique element of the form (0, m), and of course, every such element of Z × Z is in some coset of (1, 2) . We can choose these representatives (0, m) to compute in the factor group, which must therefore be isomorphic to Z. 8. The 1 in the generator (1, 1, 1) of (1, 1, 1) shows that each coset of (1, 1, 1) contains a unique element of the form (0, m, n), and of course, every such element of Z × Z × Z is in some coset of 54 15. Factor Group Computations and Simple Groups (1, 1, 1) . We can choose these representatives (0, m, n) to compute in the factor group, which must therefore be isomorphic to Z × Z. 9. We conjecture that (Z × Z × Z4 )/ (3, 0, 0) is isomorphic to Z3 × Z × Z4 , because only the multiples of 3 in the ﬁrst factor are collapsed to zero. It is easy to check that φ : Z × Z × Z4 → Z3 × Z × Z4 deﬁned by φ(n, m, s) = (r, m, s), where r is the remainder of n when divided by 3 in the division algorithm, is an onto homomorphism with kernel (3, 0, 0) . By Theorem 14.6, such a check proves our conjecture. 10. We conjecture that (Z × Z × Z8 )/ (0, 4, 0) is isomorphic to Z × Z4 × Z8 , because only the multiples of 4 in the second factor are collapsed to zero. It is easy to check that φ : Z × Z × Z8 → Z × Z4 × Z8 deﬁned by φ(n, m, s) = (n, r, s), where r is the remainder of m when divided by 4 in the division algorithm, is an onto homomorphism with kernel (0, 4, 0) . By Theorem 14.6, such a check proves our conjecture. 11. Note that (1, 1) + (2, 2) is of order 2 in the factor group and (0, 1) + (2, 2) generates an inﬁnite cyclic subgroup of the factor group. This suggests that the factor group is isomorphic to Z2 × Z. We construct a homomophism φ mapping Z × Z onto Z2 × Z having kernel (2, 2) . By Theorem 14.6, we will then know that (Z × Z)/ (2, 2) is isomorphic to Z2 × Z. We want to have φ(1, 1) = (1, 0) and φ(0, 1) = (0, 1). Because (m, n) = m(1, 1) + (n − m)(0, 1), we try to deﬁne φ by φ(m, n) = (m · 1, n − m). Here m · 1 means 1 + 1 + · · · 1 for m summands in Z2 , in other words, the remainder of m modulo 2. Because φ[(m, n) + (r, s)] = φ(m + r, n + s) = ((m + r) · 1, n + s − m − r) = (m · 1, n − m) + (r · 1, s − r) = φ(m, n) + φ(r, s), we see that φ is indeed a homomorphism. For (r, s) ∈ Z2 × Z, we see that φ(r, s + r) = (r, s), so φ is onto Z2 × Z. If φ(m, n) = (0, 0), then m · 1 = 0 in Z2 and n − m = 0 in Z. Thus m is even and m = n, so (m, n) = (m, m) lies in (2, 2) . Thus Ker(φ) is contained in (2, 2) . It is easy to see that (2, 2) is contained in Ker(φ), so Ker(φ) = (2, 2) . As we abserved above, Theorem 14.6 shows that our factor group is isomorphic to Z2 × Z. 12. Clearly (1, 1, 1) + (3, 3, 3) is of order 3 in the factor group, while (0, 1, 0) + (3, 3, 3) and (0, 0, 1) + (3, 3, 3) both generate inﬁnite subgroups of the factor group. We conjecture that the factor group is isomorphic to Z3 × Z × Z. As in the solution to Exercise 11, we show that by deﬁning a homomorphism φ of Z × Z × Z onto Z3 × Z × Z having kernel (3, 3, 3) . Just as in Exercise 11, we are motivated to let φ(m, n, s) = (m · 1, n − m, s − m). We easily check that φ is a homomorphism with the onto property and kernel that we desire, completing the proof. Just follow the arguments in the solution of Exercise 11. 13. Checking the Table 8.12 for D4 , we ﬁnd that only ρ0 and ρ2 commute with every element of D4 . Thus Z (D4 ) = {ρ0 , ρ2 }. It follows that {ρ0 , ρ2 } is a normal subgroup of D4 . Now D4 /Z (D4 ) has order 4 and is hence abelian. Therefore the commutator subgroup C is contained in Z (D4 ). Because D4 is not abelian, we see that C = {ρ0 }, so C = Z (D4 ) = {ρ0 , ρ2 }. 15. Factor Group Computations and Simple Groups 55 14. Because ρ0 is the only element of S3 that commutes with every element of S3 (see Table 8.8), we see that Z (Z3 × S3 ) = Z3 × {ρ0 }. Because A3 is the commutator subgroup of S3 , we see that the commutator subgroup of Z3 × S3 is {0} × A3 . 15. From Tables 8.8 and 8.12, Z (S3 × D4 ) = {(ρ0 , ρ0 ), (ρ0 , ρ2 )}. From Exercise 13, we see that the commutator subgroup is A3 × {ρ0 , ρ2 }. 16. We present the answers in tabular form. The order of the factor group is easy to determine, as we did in Exercises 1 through 12. It is clear the factor groups listed are the only ones possible. Which of the possibilities is the correct one for the given subgroup can easily be determined by taking into account the order, and checking whether there is an element of order 4 in the factor group. We leave the “up to isomorphism” label oﬀ the “Factor Group” heading to conserve space. Subgroup (1, 0) (0, 1) (1, 1) (1, 2) (2, 1) (1, 3) Factor Group Z4 Z4 Z4 Z4 Z4 Z4 Subgroup 2×2 (2, 0) (0, 2) (2, 2) (0, 0) Factor Group Z2 × Z2 Z2 × Z4 Z4 × Z2 Z2 × Z4 Z4 × Z4 17. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Replace “contains” by “consists of”. The center of a group G consists of all elements of G that commute with every element of G. 18. The deﬁnition is correct. 19. T F F T F T F F T F 20. F/K is isomorphic to H = {f ∈ F  f (0) = 0}, because every coset of K in F contains a unique function in H , and H is a subgroup of F . There is nothing special about 0 as the choice of a point in the domain of the functions. F/K is also isomorphic to Ha = {f ∈ F  f (a) = 0} for the same reason. 21. F ∗ /K ∗ is isomorphic to H ∗ = {f ∈ F ∗  f (1) = 1}, because every coset of K ∗ in F ∗ contains a unique function in H ∗ , and H ∗ is a subgroup of F ∗ . There is nothing special about 1 as the choice of a point ∗ in the domain of the functions. F ∗ /K ∗ is also isomorphic to Ha = {f ∈ F ∗  f (a) = 1} for the same reason. 22. No, if f + K has order 2 in F/K , then we would have to have f ∈ K but g = f + f ∈ K . Thus we / would have to have g be continuous, but have f = 1 g be not continuous. This is impossible. 2 23. (See the answer in the text.) 24. U/z0 U is isomorphic to {e}, for z0 U = U . 25. U/ −1 is isomorphic to U , for the map φ : U → U given by φ(z ) = z 2 is a homomorphism of U onto U with kernel {−1, 1}. By Theorem 14.6, U/ −1 is isomorphic to U . 26. U/ ζn is isomorphic to U , for the map φ : U → U given by φ(z ) = z n is a homomorphism of U onto U with kernel ζn . By Theorem 14.6, U/ ζn is isomorphic to U . 27. The factor group R/Z is isomorphic to U , the multiplicative group of complex numbers having absolute value 1. The map φ : R → U given by φ(r) = e(2πr)i = cos(2πr) + i sin(2πr) is a homomorphism of R onto U with kernel Z. By Theorem 14.6, R/Z is isomorphic to U . 56 15. Factor Group Computations and Simple Groups 28. The group Z is an example, for Z/ 2 has only elements of ﬁnite order. 29. Let G = Z2 × Z4 . Then H = (1, 0) is isomorphic to K = (0, 2) , but G/H is isomorphic to Z4 while G/K is isomorphic to Z2 × Z2 . 30. a. The center is a whole group. b. The center is {e}, because the center is a normal subgroup and the group is simple. 31. a. The commutator subgroup of an abelian group is {e}. b. The whole group G is simple. Because C is a normal subgroup, C = {e} or C = G. Because G is nonabelian and G/C is abelian, we must have C = G. 32. Every coset of a factor group G/H that contains a generator of the cyclic group G will generate the factor group. 33. If M and L are normal subgroups of G and M < L < G, then L/M is a proper nontrivial normal subgroup of G/M . If γ : G → G/M is the canonical homomorphism and K is a proper nontrivial normal subgroup of G/M , then γ −1 [K ] is a normal subgroup of G and M < γ −1 [K ] < G. 34. Every subgroup H of index 2 is normal, because both left and right cosets of H are H itself and {g ∈ G  g ∈ H }. Thus G cannot be simple if it has a subgroup H of index 2. / 35. We know that φ[N ] is a subgroup of φ[G] by Theorem 13.12. We need only show that φ[N ] is normal in φ[G]. Let g ∈ G and x ∈ N . Because φ is a homomophism, Theorem 13.12 tells us that φ(g )φ(x)φ(g )−1 = φ(g )φ(x)φ(g −1 ) = φ(gxg −1 ). Because N is normal, we know that gxg −1 ∈ N , so φ(gxg −1 ) is in φ[N ], and we are done. 36. We know that φ−1 [N ] is a subgroup of G by Theorem 13.12. We need only show that φ−1 [N ] is normal in G. Let x ∈ φ−1 [N ], so that φ(x) ∈ N . For each g ∈ G, we have φ(gxg −1 ) = φ(g )φ(x)φ(g −1 ) = φ(g )φ(x)φ(g )−1 ∈ N because N is a normal subgroup of G . Thus gxg −1 ∈ φ−1 [N ], showing that φ−1 [N ] is a normal subgroup of G. (Note that N need only be normal in φ[G] for the conclusion to hold.) 37. Suppose that G/Z (G) is cyclic and is generated by the coset aZ (G). Let x, y ∈ G. Then x is a member of a coset am Z (G) and y is a member of a coset an Z (G) for some m, n ∈ Z. We can thus write x = am z1 and y = an z2 where z1 , z2 ∈ Z (G). Because z1 and z2 commute with every element of G, we have xy = am z1 an z2 = am+n z1 z2 = an z2 am z1 = yx, showing that G is abelian. Therefore, if G is not abelian, then G/Z (G) is not cyclic. 38. Let G be nonabelian of order pq . Suppose that Z (G) = {e}. Then Z (G) is a divisor of pq greater than 1, but less than pq because G is nonabelian, and hence Z (G) is either p or q . But then G/Z (G) is either q or p, and hence is cyclic, which contradicts Exercise 37. Therefore Z (G) = {e}. 39. a. Because (a, b, c) = (a, c)(a, b), we see that every 3cycle is an even permutation, and hence is in An . b. Let σ ∈ An and write σ as a product of transpositions. The number of transpositions in the product will be even by deﬁnition of An . The product of the ﬁrst two transpositions will be either of the form (a, b)(c, d) or of the form (a, b)(a, c) or of the form (a, b)(a, b), depending on repetition of letters in the transpositions. If the form is (a, b)(a, b), it can be deleted from the product altogether. As the hint shows, either of the other two forms can be expressed as a 3cycle. We then proceed with 15. Factor Group Computations and Simple Groups 57 the next pair of transpositions in the product, and continue until we have expressed σ as a product of 3cycles. Thus the 3cycles generate An . c. Following the hint, we ﬁnd that (r, s, i)2 = (r, i, s), (r, s, j )(r, s, i)2 = (r, s, j )(r, i, s) = (r, i, j ), (r, s, j )2 (r, s, i) = (r, j, s)(r, s, i) = (s, i, j ), 2 (r, s, k )(r, s, j )2 (r, s, i) = (r, i, s)(r, s, k )(s, i, j ) = (i, j, k ). (r, s, i) Now every 3cycle either contains neither r nor s and is of the form (i, j, k ), or just one of r or s and is of the form (r, i, j ) or (s, i, j ), or both r and s and is of the form (r, s, i) or (r, i, s) = (s, r, i). Beause all of these forms can be obtained from our special 3cycles, we see that the special 3cycles generate An . d. Following the hint and using Part(c) we ﬁnd that ((r, s)(i, j ))(r, s, i)2 ((r, s)(i, j ))−1 = (r, s)(i, j )(r, i, s)(i, j )(r, s) = (r, s, j ). Thus if N is a normal subgroup of An and contains a 3cycle, which we can consider to be (r, s, i) because r and s could be any two numbers from 1 to n in Part(c), we see that N must contain all the special 3cycles and hence be all of An by Part(c). e. Before making the computations in the hints of the ﬁve cases, we observe that one of the cases must hold. If Case 1 is not true and Case 2 is not true, then when elements of N are written as a product of disjoint cycles, no cycle of length greater than 3 occurs, and no element of N is a single 3cycle. The remaining cases cover the possibilities that at least one of the products of disjoint cycles involves two cycles of length 3, involves one cycle of length 3, or involves no cycle of length 3. Thus all possibilities are covered, and we now turn to the computations in the hints. Case 1. By Part(d), if N contains a 3cycle, then N = An and we are done. Case 2. Note that a1 , a2 , · · · , ar do not appear in µ because the product contained disjoint cycles. We have σ −1 [(a1 , a2 , a3 )σ (a1 , a2 , a3 )−1 ] = (ar , · · · , a2 , a1 )µ−1 (a1 , a2 , a3 )µ(a1 , a2 , · · · , ar )(a1 , a3 , a2 ) = (a1 , a3 , ar ), and this element is in N because it is the product of σ −1 and a conjugate of σ by an element of An . Thus in this case, N contains a 3cycle and is equal to An by Part(d). Case 3. Note that a1 , a2 , · · · , a6 do not appear in µ. As in Case 2, we see that
σ −1 [(a1 , a2 , a4 )σ (a1 , a2 , a4 )−1 ] = (a1 , a3 , a2 )(a4 , a6 , a5 )µ−1 (a1 , a2 , a4 )µ(a4 , a5 , a6 )(a1 , a2 , a3 )(a1 , a4 , a2 ) = (a1 , a4 , a2 , a6 , a3 ) is in N . Thus N contains a cycle of length greater than 3, and N = An by Case 2. Case 4. Note that a1 , a2 , and a3 do not appear in µ. Of course σ 2 ∈ N because σ ∈ N , so σ 2 = µ(a1 , a2 , a3 )µ(a1 , a2 , a3 ) = (a1 , a3 , a2 ) ∈ N , so N contains a 3cycle and hence N = An as shown by Part(d). Case 5. Note that a1 , a2 , a3 , and a4 do not appear in µ. As in Case 2, we see that 58 16. Group Action on a Set σ −1 [(a1 , a2 , a3 )σ (a1 , a2 , a3 )−1 ] = (a1 , a2 )(a3 , a4 )µ−1 (a1 , a2 , a3 )µ(a3 , a4 )(a1 , a2 )(a1 , a3 , a2 ) = (a1 , a3 )(a2 , a4 ) is in N . Continuing with the hint given, we let α = (a1 , a3 )(a2 , a4 ) and β = (a1 , a3 , i) where i is diﬀerent from a1 , a2 , a3 , and a4 . Then β ∈ An and α ∈ N and N a normal subgroup of An imply that (β −1 αβ )α ∈ N . Computing, we ﬁnd that (β −1 αβ )α = (a1 , i, a3 )(a1 , a3 )(a2 , a4 )(a1 , a3 , i)(a1 , a3 )(a2 , a4 ) = (a1 , a3 , i). Thus N = An in this case also, by Part(d). 40. Closure: Let h1 n1 , h2 n2 ∈ HN where h1 , h2 ∈ H and n1 , n2 ∈ N . Because N is a normal subgroup, left cosets are right cosets so N h2 = h2 N ; in particular, n1 h2 = h2 n3 for some n3 ∈ N . Then (h1 n1 )(h2 n2 ) = (h1 h2 )(n3 n2 ) ∈ HN, so HN is closed under the group operation. Identity: Because e ∈ H and e ∈ N , we see that e = ee ∈ HN. Inverses: Now (h1 n1 )−1 = n1−1 h1−1 ∈ N h1−1 and N h1−1 = h1−1 N because N is normal. Thus n1−1 h1−1 = h1−1 n4 for some n4 ∈ N , so (h1 n1 )−1 ∈ HN , and we see that HN is a subgroup of G. Clearly HN is the smallest subgroup of G containing both H and N , because any such subgroup must contain all the products hn for h ∈ H and n ∈ N . 41. Exercise 40 shows that N M is a subgroup of G. We must show that g (nm)g −1 ∈ N M for all g ∈ G, n ∈ N, and m ∈ M . We have g (nm)g −1 = (gng −1 )(gmg −1 ). Because N and M are both normal, we know that gng −1 ∈ N and gmg −1 ∈ M . Thus g (nm)g −1 ∈ N M so N M is a normal subgroup of G. 42. The fact that K is normal shows that hkh−1 ∈ K , so (hkh−1 )k −1 ∈ K . The fact that H is normal shows that kh−1 k −1 ∈ H , so h(kh−1 k −1 ) ∈ H . Thus hkh−1 k −1 ∈ H ∩ K , so hkh−1 k −1 = e. It follows that hk = kh. 16. Group Action on a Set
1. (See the answer in the text.) 2. G1 = G3 = {ρ0 , δ2 }, G2 = G4 = {ρ0 , δ1 }, G s 1 = G s 3 = { ρ0 , µ 1 } , G s 2 = G s 4 = { ρ0 , µ 2 } , Gm1 = Gm2 = {ρ0 , ρ2 , µ1 , µ2 }, Gd1 = Gd2 = {ρ0 , ρ2 , δ1 , δ2 }, GC = G, GP1 = GP3 = {ρ0 , µ1 }, GP2 = GP4 = {ρ0 , µ2 } 3. {1, 2, 3, 4}, {s1 , s2 , s3 , s4 }, {m1 , m2 }, {d1 , d2 }, {C }, {P1 , P2 , P3 , P4 } 4. The deﬁnition is incorrect. We need a universal quantiﬁer. A group G acts faithfully on X if and only if gx = x for all x ∈ G implies that g = e. 5. The deﬁnition is incorrect, and is an example of a nonsense deﬁnition. A group G is transitive on a Gset X if and only if for each a, b ∈ X , there exists some g ∈ G such that ga = b. 16. Group Action on a Set 6. Every subGset of a Gset X consists of a union of orbits in X under G. 7. A Gset if transitive if and only if it has only one orbit. 8. F T F T F T T F T T 59 9. a. {P1 , P2 , P3 , P4 } and {s1 , s2 , s3 , s4 } are isomorphic subD4 sets. Note that if you change each P to an s in Table 16.10, you get a duplication of the four columns for s1 , s2 , s3 , and s4 . b. δ1 leaves two elements, 2 and 4, of {1, 2, 3, 4} ﬁxed, but δ1 leaves no elements of {s1 , s2 , s3 , s4 } ﬁxed. c. Yes, for after Part(b), the only other conceivable choice for an isomorphism is {m1 , m2 } with {d1 , d2 }. However, µ1 leaves the elements of {m1 , m2 } ﬁxed and moves both elements of {d1 , d2 } so they are not isomorphic. 10. a. Yes, for ρ0 is the only element of G that leaves every element of X ﬁxed. b. {1, 2, 3, 4}, {s1 , s2 , s3 , s4 }, and {P1 , P2 , P3 , P4 } 11. Let g1 , g2 ∈ G. Now suppose that g1 a = g2 a for all a ∈ X , which is true if and only if and only if g2−1 g1 a = a for all a ∈ X . If g1 = g2 , then g2−1 g1 = e, and the action of G on X is not faithful. If the action of G on X is faithful, then we must have g2−1 g1 = e and g1 = g2 , that is, two distinct elements of G cannot act the same on each a ∈ G. 12. Closure: Let g1 , g2 ∈ GY . Then for each y ∈ Y , we have (g1 g2 )y = g1 (g2 y ) = g1 y = y , so g1 g2 ∈ GY , and GY is closed under the group operation. Identity: Because ey = y for all y ∈ Y , we see that e ∈ GY . Inverses: From y = g1 y for all y ∈ Y , it follows that g1−1 y = g1−1 (g1 y ) = (g1−1 g1 )y = ey = y for all y ∈ Y , so g1−1 ∈ GY also, and consequently GY ≤ G. 13. a. Because rotation through 0 radians leaves each point of the plane ﬁxed, the ﬁrst requirement of Deﬁnition 16.1 is satisﬁed. The second requirement (θ1 + θ2 )P = θ1 (θ2 )P is also valid, because a rotation counterclockwise through θ1 + θ2 radians can be achieved by sequentially rotating through θ2 radians and then through θ1 radians. b. The orbit containing P is a circle with center at the origin (0, 0) and radius the distance from P to the origin. c. The group GP is the cyclic subgroup 2π of G. 14. a. Let X = i∈I Xi and let x ∈ X . Then x ∈ Xi for precisely one index i ∈ I because the sets are disjoint, and we deﬁne gx for each g ∈ G to be the value given by the action of G on Xi . Conditions (1) and (2) in Deﬁnition 16.1 are satisﬁed because Xi is a Gset by assumption. b. We have seen that each orbit in X is a subGset. The Gset X can be regarded as the union of these subGsets because the action gx of g ∈ G on x ∈ X coincides with the subGset action gx of g ∈ G on the same element x viewed as an element of its orbit. 15. Let φ : X → L be deﬁned by φ(x) = gGx0 where gx0 = x. Because G is transitive on X , we know that such a g exists. We must show that φ is well deﬁned. Suppose that g1 x0 = x and g2 x0 = x. Then g2 x0 = g1 x0 so (g1−1 g2 )x0 = x0 . But then g1−1 g2 ∈ Gx0 so g2 ∈ g1 Gx0 and g1 Gx0 = g2 Gx0 . This shows that the deﬁnition of φ(x) is independent of the choice of g such that gx = x0 , that is, φ is well deﬁned. 60 16. Group Action on a Set It remains to show that φ is one to one and onto L, and that gφ(x) = φ(gx) for all x ∈ X and g ∈ G. Suppose that φ(x1 ) = φ(x2 ) for x1 , x2 ∈ X , and let g1 x0 = x1 and g2 x0 = x2 . Then φ(x1 ) = φ(x2 ) implies that g1 Gx0 = g2 Gx0 so g2 = g1 g0 for some g0 ∈ Gx0 . The equation g2 x0 = x2 then yields g1 g0 x0 = x2 . Because g0 ∈ Gx0 , we then obtain g1 x0 = x2 so x1 = x2 and φ is one to one. If g ∈ G, then φ(gx0 ) = gGx0 shows that φ maps X onto L. Finally, to show that gφ(x) = φ(gx), let x = g1 x0 . Then gx = g (g1 x0 ) = (gg1 )x0 so φ(gx) = (gg1 )Gx0 = g (g1 Gx0 ) = gφ(x). 16. By Exercise 14, each Gset X is the union of its Gset orbits Xi for i ∈ I . By Exercise 15, each Gset orbit Xi is isomorphic to a Gset consisting of left cosets of Gxi,0 where xi,0 is any point of Xi . It is possible that the group Gxi,0 may the the same as the group Gxj,0 for some j = i in I , but by attaching the index i to each coset of Gxi,0 and j to each coset of Gxj,0 as indicated in the statement of the exercise, we can consider these ith and j th coset Gsets to be disjoint. Identifying Xi with this isomorphic ith coset Gset, we see that X is isomorphic to a disjoint union of left coset Gsets. 17. a. If g ∈ K so that g (g0 x0 ) = g0 x0 , then (g0−1 gg0 )x0 = x0 , which means that g0−1 gg0 ∈ H , so g ∈ g0 Hg0−1 . Because g may be any element of K , this shows that K ⊆ g0 Hg0−1 . Making a symmetric argument, starting with g ∈ H , g0 x0 as initial base point, and obtaining x0 as second − base point by g0−1 acting on g0 x0 , we see that H ⊆ g0 1 Kg0 , or equivalently, g0 Hg0−1 ⊆ K . Thus −1 K = g0 Hg0 . b. Conjecture: The Gset of left cosets of H is isomorphic to the Gset of left cosets of K if and only if H and K are conjugate subgroups of G. c. We ﬁrst show that if H and K are conjugate subgroups of G, then the Gset LH of left cosets of H is isomorphic to the Gset LK of left cosets of K . Let g0 ∈ G be chosen such that K = g0 Hg0−1 . Note that for aH ∈ LH , we have aHg0−1 = ag0−1 g0 Hg0−1 = ag0−1 K ∈ LK . We deﬁne φ : LH → LK by φ(aH ) = ag0−1 K . We just saw that ag0−1 K = (aH )g0−1 so φ is independent of the choice of a ∈ H , that is, φ is well deﬁned. Because ag0−1 assumes all values in G as a varies through G, we see that φ is onto LK . If φ(aH ) = φ(bH ), then (aH )g0−1 = ag0−1 K = bg0−1 K = (bH )g0−1 , so aH = bH and φ is one to one. To show φ is an isomorphism of Gsets, it only remains to show that φ(g (aH )) = gφ(aH ) for all g ∈ G and aH ∈ LH . But φ(g (aH )) = φ((ga)H ) = (ga)g0−1 K = g (ag0−1 K ) = gφ(aH ), and we are done. Conversely, suppose that φ : LH → LK is an isomorphism of the Gset of left cosets of H onto the Gset of left cosets of K . Because φ is an onto map, there exists g0 ∈ G such that φ(g0 H ) = K . Because φ commutes with the action of G, we have (g0 hg0−1 )K = (g0 hg0−1 )φ(g0 H ) = φ(g0 hg0−1 g0 H ) = φ(g0 H ) = K , so g0 hg0−1 ∈ K for all h ∈ H , that is, g0 Hg0−1 ⊆ K . From φ(g0 H ) = K , we easily see that φ−1 (g0−1 K ) = H , and an argument similar to the one just made then shows that g0−1 Kg0 ⊆ H . Thus g0 Hg0−1 = K , that is, the subgroups are indeed conjugate. 18. There are three of them; call them X , Y , and Z4 corresponding to the three subgroups {0, 1, 2, 3}, {0, 2} and {0}, respectively, of Z4 , no two of which are conjugate. The tables for them are X a a a a a Y a a b a b b b a b a 0 1 2 3 and essentially the group table for Z4 itself corresponding to {0}. (Conceptually, entries in the body of that group table should be in braces, like {3} to denote the coset, rather than the element.) 17. Applications of GSets to Counting 61 19. There are four of them; call them X, Y, Z, and Z6 corresponding respectively to subgroups Z6 , 2 , 3 , and {0}. See the text answer for the action tables for X, Y, and Z . The group table for Z6 is essentially the action table for {0}. (Conceptually, the entries in the body of that group table should in braces, like {3}, to denote the coset rather than the element.) 20. There are four of them; using the notation for S3 in Section 8, call them X , Y , Z , and S3 corresponding respectively to the subgroup S3 , the subgroup {ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 }, the three conjugate subgroups {ρ0 , µ1 }, {ρ0 , µ2 }, and {ρ0 , µ3 }, and the trivial subgroup {ρ0 }. We choose the subgroup {ρ0 , µ1 } to illustrate the action on the 3element set. The action tables for these subgroups are X a a a a a a a Y a a a a b b b b b b b a a a a a b c a c b Z bc bc ca ab cb ba ac ρ0 ρ1 ρ2 µ1 µ2 µ3 and essentially the group table for S3 itself corresponding to the subgroup {ρ0 }. (Conceptually, the entries in the body of that group table should in braces, like {µ1 }, to denote the coset rather than the element.) 17. Applications of GSets to Counting
1. G = (1, 3, 5, 6) has order 4. Let X = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8}. We have X(1)  = 8, X(1, 3, 5, 6)  = {2, 4, 7, 8} = 4, X(1, 5)(3, 6)  = {2, 4, 7, 8} = 4, X(1, 6, 5, 3)  = {2, 4, 7, 8} = 4. Therefore we have g∈G Xg  = 8 + 4 + 4 + 4 = 20. The number of orbits under G is then (1/4)(20) = 5. 2. The group G generated by (1, 3) and (2, 4, 7) has order 6. Let X = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8}. We have X(1)  = 8 X(1, 3)  = 6 X(2, 4, 7)  = 5 X(2, 7, 4)  = 5 X(1, 3)(2, 4, 7)  = 3 X(1, 3)(2, 7, 4)  = 3. Thus
g ∈G Xg  = 8 + 6 + 5 + 5 + 3 + 3 = 30. The number of orbits under G is then (1/6)(30) = 5. 3. The group of rigid motions of the tetrahedron has 12 elements because any one of four triangles can be on the bottom and the tetrahedron can then be rotated though 3 positions, keeping the same face on the bottom. We see that Xg  = 0 unless g is the identity ι of this group G, and Xι  = 4! = 24. Thus there are (1/12)(24) = 2 distinguishable tetrahedral dice. 4. The total number of ways such a block can be painted with diﬀerent colors on each face is 8 · 7 · 6 · 5 · 4 · 3. The group of rigid motions of the cube has 24 elements. The only rigid motion leaving unchanged a block with diﬀerent colors on all faces is the identity, which leaves all such blocks ﬁxed. Thus the number of distinguishable blocks is (1/24)(8 · 7 · 6 · 5 · 4 · 3) = 8 · 7 · 5 · 3 = 40 · 21 = 840. 62 17. Applications of GSets to Counting 5. There are 86 ways of painting the faces of a block, allowing for repetition of the 8 colors. Following the breakdown of the group G of rotations given in the hint, and using sublabels to suggest the categories in this breakdown, we have Xι  = 86 where ι is the identity, Xopp face, 90◦ or 270◦ rotation  = 8 · 8 · 8; there are 6 such, Xopp face, 180◦ rotation  = 8 · 8 · 8 · 8; there are 3 such, Xopp vertices  = 8 · 8; there are 8 such, Xopp edges  = 8 · 8 · 8; there are 6 such. Thus g∈G Xg  = 86 + 6 · 83 + 3 · 84 + 8 · 82 + 6 · 83 = 83 (83 + 37). The number of distinguishable blocks is thus (1/24)[83 (83 + 37)] = 11, 712. 6. Proceding as in Exercise 5 using the same group G acting on the set X of 48 ways of coloring the eight vertices, we obtain Xι  = 48 where ι is the identity, Xopp face, 90◦ or 270◦ rotation  = 4 · 4; there are 6 such, Xopp face, 180◦ rotation  = 4 · 4 · 4 · 4; there are 3 such, Xopp vertices  = 4 · 4 · 4 · 4; there are 8 such, Xopp edges  = 4 · 4 · 4 · 4; there are 6 such. Thus g∈G Xg  = 48 + 6 · 42 + 3 · 44 + 8 · 44 + 6 · 44 = 44 (273) + 96. The number of distinguishable blocks is thus (1/24)[44 (273) + 96)] = 2, 916. 7. a. The group is G = D4 and has eight elements. We label them as in Section 8. There are 6 · 5 · 4 · 3 ways of painting the edges of the square, and we let X be this set of 360 elements. We have Xρ0  = 6 · 5 · 4 · 3 and Xg  = 0 for g ∈ D4 , g = ρ0 . Thus the number of distinguishable such painted squares is (1/8)(360) = 45. b. We let G be as in Part(a), and let X be the set of 64 ways of painting the edges of the square, allowing repetition of colors. This time, we have Xρ0  = 64 , Xρ1  = Xρ3  = 6, Xρ2  = 6 · 6, Xµ1  = Xµ2  = 6 · 6 · 6, and Xδ1  = Xδ2  = 6 · 6. Thus g∈G Xg  = 64 + 2 · 6 + 62 + 2 · 63 + 2 · 62 = 62 (51) + 12. The number of distinguishable blocks is thus (1/8)[62 (51) + 12)] = 231. 8. The group of rigid motions of the tetrahedron is a subgroup G of the group of permutations of its vertices. The order of G is 12 because, viewing the tetrahedron as sitting on a table, any of the four faces may be on the botton, and then the base can be rotated repreatedly through 120◦ to give three possible positions. If we call the vertex at the top of the tetrahedron number 1 and number the vertices on the table as 2, 3, and 4 counterclockwise when viewed from above, we can write the 12 group elements in cyclic notation as #1 on top (1) (2, 3, 4) (2, 4, 3) #2 on top (1, 2)(3, 4) (1, 3, 2) (1, 4, 2) #3 on top (1, 3)(2, 4) (1, 2, 3) (1, 4, 3) #4 on top (1, 4)(2, 3) (1, 2, 4) (1, 3, 4). Let X be the 26 ways of placing either a 50ohm resistor or 100ohm resistor in each edge of the tetrahedron. Now the elements of G that are 3cycles correspond to rotating, holding a single vertex ﬁxed. These carry the three edges of the triangle opposite that vertex cyclically into themselves, and 18. Rings and Fields 63 carry the three edges emenating from that vertex cyclically into themselves. Thus X3cycle  = 2 · 2. The element (1, 2)(3, 4) of G carries the edge joining vertex 1 to vertex 2 and the edge joining vertex 3 to vertex 4 into themselves, swaps the edge joining vertices 1 and 3 with the one joining vertices 2 and 4, and swaps the edge joining vertices 1 and 4 with the one joining vertices 2 and 3. Thus we see that X(1,2)(3,4)  = 2 · 2 · 2 · 2, and of course the analogous count can be made for the group elements (1, 3)(2, 4) and (1, 4)(2, 3). Thus we obtain Xι  = 26 , X3cycle  = 22 , and Xother type  = 24 . Consequently g∈G Xg  = 26 + 8 · 22 + 3 · 24 = 144. The number of distinguishable blocks is thus (1/12)(144) = 12. 9. a. The group G of rigid motions of the prism has order 8, four positions leaving the end faces in the same position and four positions with the end faces swapped. There are 6 · 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 ways of painting the faces diﬀerent colors. We let X be the set of these 6! possibilities. Then Xι  = 6! and Xother  = 0. Thus there are (1/8)(6!) = 6 · 5 · 3 = 90 distinguishable painted prisms using six diﬀerent colors. b. This time the set X of possible ways of painting the prism has 66 elements. We have Xι  = 66 where ι is the identity element, Xsame ends, rotate 90◦ or 270◦  = 6 · 6 · 6, Xsame ends, rotate 180◦  = 6 · 6 · 6 · 6, Xswap ends, keeping top face on top  = 6 · 6 · 6 · 6, Xswap ends, as above, rotate 90◦ or 270◦  = 6 · 6, Xswap ends, as above, rotate 180◦  = 6 · 6 · 6. Thus g∈G Xg  = 66 + 2 · 63 + 64 + 64 + 2 · 62 + 63 = 62 (64 + 92). The number of distinguishable blocks is thus (1/8)[62 (64 + 82)] = 6, 246. 18. Rings and Fields
1. 0 2. 16 3. 1 4. 22 5. (1, 6) 6. (2, 2) 7. Yes, nZ for n ∈ Z+ is a commutative ring, but without unity unless n = 1, and is not a ﬁeld. 8. No, Z+ is not a ring; there is no identity for addition. 9. Yes, Z × Z is a commutative ring with unit (1, 1), but is not a ﬁeld because (2, 0) has no multiplicative inverse. 10. Yes, 2Z × Z is a commutative ring, but without unity, and is not a ﬁeld. √ 11. Yes, {a + b 2  a, b ∈ Z} is a commutative ring with unity, but is not a ﬁeld because 2 has no multiplicative inverse. √ 12. Yes, {a + b 2  a, b ∈ Q} is a commutative ring with unity and is a ﬁeld because √ 1 1 a−b 2 a −b √ √= √· √=2 +2 2. 2 a − 2b a − 2b2 a+b 2 a+b 2 a−b 2 13. No, Ri is not closed under multiplication. 14. The units in Z are 1 and 1. 64 18. Rings and Fields 15. The units in Z × Z are (1, 1), (1, 1), (1, 1), and (1, 1). 16. The units in Z5 are 1, 2, 3, and 4 because 1 · 1 = 2 · 3 = 4 · 4 = 1. 17. All nonzero elements of Q are units. 18. The units in Z × (Q) × Z are (1, q, 1), (−1, q, 1), (1, q, −1) and (−1, q, −1) for any nonzero q ∈ Q. 19. The units in Z4 are 1 and 3; 1 · 1 = 3 · 3 = 1. 20. a. Each of the four entries in the matrix can be either of two elements, so there are 24 = 16 matrices in M2 (Z2 ). 11 01 10 = I2 , and 10 11 11 inverse. These six matrices are the units. b. 21. (See the answer in the text.) 22. Because det(A + B ) need not equal det(A) + det(B ), we see that det is not a ring homomorphism. For example, det(In + In ) = 2n but det(In ) + det(In ) = 1 + 1 = 2. 23. Let φ : Z → Z be a ring homomorphism. Because 12 = 1, we see that φ(1) must be an integer whose square is itself, namely either 0 or 1. If φ(1) = 1 then φ(n) = φ(n · 1) = n, so φ is the identity map of Z onto itself which is a homomorphism. If φ(1) = 0, then φ(n) = φ(n · 1) = 0, so φ maps everthing onto 0, which also yields a homomorphism. 24. As in the preceding solution, we see that for a ring homomorphism φ : Z → Z × Z, we must have φ(1)2 = φ(12 ) = φ(1). The only elements of Z × Z that are their own squares are (0, 0), (1, 0), (0, 1), and (1, 1). Thus the possibilities for φ are φ1 (n) = (0, 0), φ2 (n) = (n, 0), φ3 (n) = (0, n), and φ4 (n) = (n, n). It is easily checked that these four maps are ring homomorphisms. 25. Because both (1, 0) and (0, 1) are their own squares, their images under a ring homomorphism φ : Z × Z → Z must also have this property, and thus must be either 0 or 1. Because (1, 0) and (0, 1) generate Z × Z as an additive group, this determines the possible values of the homomorphism on (n, m) ∈ Z × Z. Thus the possibilities are given by φ1 (n, m) = 0, φ2 (n, m) = n, φ3 (n, m) = m, and φ4 (n, m) = n + m. It is easily checked that φ1 , φ2 , and φ3 are homomorpisms. However, φ4 is not a homomorphism because n + m = φ4 (n, m) = φ4 ((1, 1)(n, m)) = φ4 (1, 1)φ4 (n, m) = (1 + 1)(n + m) = 2(n + m). 26. As in Exercise 25, we see that the images of additive generators (1, 0, 0), (0,1, 0), and (0, 0, 1) under a ring homomorphism φ : Z × Z × Z → Z can only be 0 and 1. As shown in the argument for φ4 in that exercise, mapping more than one of these generators into 1 will not give a ring homomorphism. Thus either they are all mapped into 0 giving the trivial homomorphism, or we have a projection homomorphism where one of the generators is mapped into 1 and the other two are mapped into 0. Thus there are four such ring homomorphisms φ. 27. (See the answer in the text) 28. We have x2 + x − 6 = (x + 3)(x − 2). In Z14 , it is possible to have a product of two nonzero elements be 0. Trying all elements x from 6 to 7 in Z14 to see if (x + 3)(x − 2) is zero, we ﬁnd that this happens for x = −5, −3, 2, and 4. Thus the elements 2, 4, 9, and 11 in Z14 are solutions of the quadratic equation. , 11 01 , 10 01 and 01 10 are all their own 18. Rings and Fields 29. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Insert the word “commutative” before either “ring” or “group”. 65 A ﬁeld F is a commutative ring with nonzero unity such that the set of nonzero elements of F is a group under multiplication. 30. The deﬁnition is incorrect. We have not deﬁned any concept of magnitude for elements of a ring. A unit in a ring with nonzero unity is an element that has a multiplicative inverse. 31. In the ring Z6 , we have 2 · 3 = 0, so we take a = 2 and b = 3. 32. Z × Z has unity (1, 1); however the subring Z × {0} has unity (1, 0). Also, Z6 has unity 1 while the subring {0, 2, 4} has unity 4, and the subring {0, 3} has unity 3. 33. T F F F T F T T T T 34. Let f, g, h ∈ F . Now [(f g )h](x) = [(f g )(x)]h(x) = [f (x)g (x)]h(x). Because multiplication in R is associative, we continue with [f (x)g (x)]h(x) = f (x)[g (x)h(x)] = f (x)[(gh)(x)] = [f (gh)](x). Thus (f g )h and f (gh) have the same value on each x ∈ R, so they are the same function and axiom 2 holds. For axiom 3, we use the distributive laws in R and we have [f (g + h)](x) = f (x)[(g + h)(x)] = f (x)[g (x) + h(x)] = f (x)g (x) + g (x)h(x) = (f g )(x) + (f h)(x) = (f g + f h)(x) so f (g + h) and f g + f h are the same function and the left distributive law holds. The right distributive law is proved similarly. 35. For f, g ∈ F , we have φa (f + g ) = (f + g )(a) = f (a) + g (a) = φa (f ) + φa (g ). Turning to the multiplication, we have φa (f g ) = (f g )(a) = f (a)g (a) = φa (f )φa (g ). Thus φa is a homomorphism. 36. We need check only the multiplicative property. Reﬂexive: The identity map ι of a ring R into itself satisﬁes ι(ab) = ab = ι(a)ι(b), so the reﬂexive property is satisﬁed. Symmetric: Let φ : R → R be an isomorphism. We know from group theory that φ−1 : R → R is an isomorphism of the additive group of R with the additive group of R. For φ(a), φ(b) ∈ R , we have φ−1 (φ(a)φ(b)) = φ−1 (φ(ab)) = ab = φ−1 (φ(a))φ−1 (φ(b)). Transitive: Let φ : R → R and ψ : R → R be ring isomorphisms. Exercise 27 of Section 3 shows that ψφ is an isomorphism of both the additive binary structure and the multiplicative binary stucture. Thus ψφ is again a ring isomorphism. 37. Let u, v ∈ U . Then there exists s, t ∈ R such that us = su = 1 and vt = tv = 1. These equations show that s and t are also units in U . Then (ts)(uv ) = t(su)v = t1v = tv = 1 and (uv )(ts) = u(vt)s = u1s = 1, so uv is again a unit and U is closed under multiplication. Of course multiplication in U is associative because multiplication in R is associative. The equation (1)(1) = 1 shows that 1 is a unit. We showed above that a unit u in U has a multiplicative inverse s in U . Thus U is a group under multiplication. 38. Now (a + b)(a − b) = a2 + ba − ab − b2 is equal to a2 − b2 if and only if ba − ab = 0, that is, if and only if ba = ab. But ba = ab for all a, b ∈ R if and only if R is commutative. 39. We need only check the second and third ring axioms. For axiom 2, we have (ab)c = 0c = 0 = a0 = a(bc). For axiom 3, we have a(b + c) = 0 = 0 + 0 = ab + ac, and (a + b)c = 0 = 0 + 0 = ac + bd. 40. If φ : 2Z → 3Z is an isomorphism, then by group theory for the additive groups we know that either φ(2) = 3 or φ(2) = −3, so that either φ(2n) = 3n or φ(2n) = −3n. Suppose that φ(2n) = 3n. Then 66 18. Rings and Fields φ(4) = 6 while φ(2)φ(2) = (3)(3) = 9. Thus φ(2n) = 3n does not give an isomorphism, and a similar computation shows that φ(2n) = −3n does not give an isomorphism either. R and C are not isomorphic because every element in the ﬁeld C is a square while 1 is not a square in R. 41. In a commutative ring, we have (a + b)2 = a2 + ab + ba + b2 = a2 + ab + ab + b2 = a2 + 2 · ab + b2 . Now the binomial theorem simply counts the number of each type of product ai bn−i appearing in (a + b)n . As long as our ring is commutative, every summand of (a + b)n can be written as a product of factors a and b with all the factors a written ﬁrst, so the usual binomial expansion is valid in a commutative ring. p In Zp , the coeﬃcient i of ai bp−i in the expansion of (a + b)p is a multiple of p if 1 ≤ i ≤ p − 1. Because p · a = 0 for all a ∈ Zp , we see that the only nonzero terms in the expansion are those corresponding to i = 0 and i = p, namely bp and ap . 42. Let F be a ﬁeld, and suppose that u2 = u for nonzero u ∈ F . Multiplying by u−1 , we ﬁnd that u = 1. This shows that 0 and 1 are the only solutions of the equation x2 = x in a ﬁeld. Now let K be a subﬁeld of F . The unity of K satisﬁes the equation x2 = x in K , and hence also in F , and thus must be the unity 1 of F . 43. Let u be a unit in a ring R. Suppose that su = us = 1 and tu = ut = 1. Then s = s1 = s(ut) = (su)t = 1t = t. Thus the inverse of a unit is unique. 44. a. If a2 = a and b2 = b and if the ring is commutative, then (ab)2 = abab = aabb = a2 b2 = ab, showing that the idempotents are closed under multiplication. b. By trying all elments, we ﬁnd that the idempotents in Z6 are 0, 1, 3, and 4 while the idempotents in Z12 are 0, 1, 4, and 9. Thus the idempotents in Z6 × Z12 are (0, (1, (3, (4, 45. We have P 2 = [A(AT A)−1 AT ][A(AT A)−1 AT ] = A[(AT A)−1 (AT A)](AT A)−1 A = AIn (AT A)−1 AT = A(AT A)−1 AT = P. 46. As explained in the answer to Exercise 41, the binomial expansion is valid in a commutative ring. Suppose that an = 0 and bm = 0 in R. Now (a + b)m+n is a sum of terms containing as a factor ai bm+n−i for 0 ≤ i ≤ m + n. If i ≥ n, then ai = 0 so each term with a factor ai bm+n−i is zero. On the other hand, if i < n, then m + n − i > m so bm+n−i = 0 and each term with a factor ai bm+n−i is zero. Thus (a + b)m+n = 0, so a + b is nilpotent. 47. If R has no nonzero nilpotent element, then the only solution of x2 = 0 is 0, for any nonzero solution would be a nilpotent element. Conversely, suppose that the only solution of x2 = 0 is 0, and suppose that a = 0 is nilpotent. Let n be the smallest positive integer such that an = 0. If n is even, then an/2 = 0 but (an/2 )2 = an = 0 so an/2 is a nonzero solution of x2 = 0, contrary to assumption. If n is odd, then (a(n+1)/2 )2 = an+1 = an a = 0a = 0 so a(n+1)/2 is a nonzero solution of x2 = 0, contrary to assumption. Thus R has no nonzero nilpotent elements. 0) 0) 0) 0) (0, (1, (3, (4, 1) 1) 1) 1) (0, (1, (3, (4, 4), 4), 4), 4), (0, 9) (1, 9) (3, 9) (4, 9). 18. Rings and Fields 67 48. It is clear that if S is a subring of R, then all three of the conditions must hold. Conversely, suppose the conditions hold. The ﬁrst two conditions and Exercise 45 of Section 5 show that S, + is an additive group. The ﬁnal condition shows that multiplication is closed on S . Of course the associative and distributive laws hold for elements of S , because they actually hold for all elements in R. Thus S is a subring of R. 49. a. Let R be a ring and let Hi ≤ R for i ∈ I . Theorem 7.4 shows that H = i∈I Hi is an additive group. Let a, b ∈ H . Then a, b ∈ Hi for i ∈ I , so ab ∈ Hi for i ∈ I because Hi is a subring of R. Therefore ab ∈ H so H is closed under multiplication. Clearly the associative and distributive laws hold for elements from H , because they actually hold for all elements in R. Thus H is a subring of R. b. Let F be a ﬁeld, and let Ki ≤ F for i ∈ I . Part(a) shows that K = i∈I Ki is a ring. Let a ∈ K, a = 0. Then a ∈ Ki for i ∈ I so a−1 ∈ Ki for i ∈ I because Exercises 42 and 43 show that the unity in each Ki is the same as in F and that inverses are unique. Therefore a−1 ∈ K . Of course multiplication in K is commutative because multiplication in F is commutative. Therefore K is a subﬁeld of F . 50. We show that Ia satisﬁes the conditions of Exercise 48. Because a0 = 0 we see that 0 ∈ Ia . Let c, d ∈ Ia . Then ac = ad = 0 so a(c − d) = ac − ad = 0 − 0 = 0; thus (c − d) ∈ Ia . Also a(cd) = (ac)d = 0d = 0 so cd ∈ Ia . This completes the check of the properties in Exercise 48. 51. Clearly an is in every subring containing a, so Ra contains an for every positive integer n. Thus Ra , + contains the additive group G generated by S = {an  n ∈ Z+ }. We claim that G = Ra . We need only show that G is closed under multiplication. Now G consists of zero and all ﬁnite sums of terms of the form an or −am . By the distributive laws, the product of two elements that are ﬁnite sums of positive powers and inverses of postive powers of a can again be written as such a sum, and is thus again in G. Therefore G is actually a subring containing a and contained in Ra so we must have G = Ra . 52. Example 18.15 shows that the map φ : Zrs → Zr × Zs where φ(a) = a · (1, 1) is an isomorphism. Let b = φ−1 (m, n). Computing b · (1, 1) by components, we see that 1 + 1 + · · · + 1 for b summands yields m in Zr and yields n in Zs . Thus, viewing b as an integer in Z, we see that b ≡ m (mod r) and b ≡ n (mod s). 53. a. Statement: Let b1 , b2 , · · · , bn be integers such that gcd(bi , bj ) = 1 for i = j . Then Zb1 b2 ···bn is isomorphic to Zb1 × Zb2 × · · · Zbn with an isomorphism φ where φ(1) = (1, 1, · · · , 1). Proof: By the hypothesis that gcd(bi , bj ) = 1 for i = j , we know that the image group is cyclic and that (1, 1, · · · , 1) generates the group. Because the domain group is cyclic generated by 1, we know that φ is an additive group isomorphism. It remains to show that φ(ms) = φ(m)φ(s) for m and s in the domain group. This follows from the fact that the ith component of φ(ms) in the image group is (ms) · 1 which is equal to the product of m summands of 1 times s summands of 1 by the distributive laws in a ring. b. Let c = φ−1 (a1 , a2 , · · · , an ) where φ be the isomorphism in Part(a). Computing φ(c) = φ(c · 1) in its ith component, we see that 1 + 1 + · · · + 1 for c summands in the ring Zbi yields ai . Viewing c as an integer, this means that c ≡ ai (mod bi ). 54. Note that a0 = 0 for all a ∈ S follows from the distributive laws, so associativity of multiplication for products containing a factor 0 holds, and associativity in the group S ∗ , · takes care of associativity for other products. All of the other axioms needed to verify that S is a division ring follow at once from the two given group statements and the given distribtive laws, except for the commutativity of addition. 68 19. Integral Domains The left followed by the right distributive laws yield (1 + 1)(a + b) = (1 + 1)a + (1 + 1)b = a + a + b + b. The right followed by the left distributive laws yield (1 + 1)(a + b) = 1(a + b) + 1(a + b) = a + b + a + b. Thus a + a + b + b = a + b + a + b and by cancellation in the additive group, we obtain a + b = b + a. 55. Let a, b ∈ R where R is a Boolean ring. We have a + b = (a + b)2 = a2 + ab + ba + b2 = a + ab + ba + b. Thus in a Boolean ring, ab = −ba. Taking b = a, we see that aa = −aa, so a = −a. Thus every element is its own additive inverse, so −ba = ba. Combining our equations ab = −ba and −ba = ba, we obtain ab = ba, showing that R is commutative. 56. a. + ∅ {a} {b } S ∅ ∅ {a} {b } S {a} {a} ∅ S {b } {b} {b} S ∅ {a} S S {b} {a} ∅ · ∅ S {a} {b } ∅ ∅ ∅ ∅ ∅ S ∅ S {a} {b} {a} ∅ {a} {a} ∅ {b} ∅ {b} ∅ {b} b. Let A, B ∈ P (S ). Then A + B = (A ∪ B ) − (A ∩ B ) = (B ∪ A) − (B ∩ A) = B + A, so addition is commutative. We check associativity of addition; it is easiest to think in terms of the elements in (A + B ) + C and the elements in A + (B + C ). By deﬁnition, the sum of two sets contains the elements in precisely one of the sets. Thus A + B consists of the elements that are in either one of the sets A or B , but not in the other. Therefore (A + B ) + C consists of the elements that are in precisely one of the three sets A, B, C . Clearly A + (B + C ) yields this same set, so addition is associative. The empty set ∅ acts a additive identity, for A + ∅ = (A ∪ ∅) − (A ∩ ∅) = A − ∅ = A for all A ∈ P (S ). For A ∈ P (S ), we have A + A = (A ∪ A) − (A ∩ A) = A − A = ∅, so each element of P (S ) is its own additive inverse. This shows that P (S ), + is an abelian group. For associativity of multiplication, we see that (A · B ) · C = (A ∩ B ) ∩ C = A ∩ (B ∩ C ) = A · (B · C ). For the left distributive law, we again think in terms of the elements in the sets. The set A · (B + C ) = A ∩ (B + C ) consists of all elements of A that are in precisely one of the two sets B, C . This set thus contains all the elements in A ∩ B or in A ∩ C , but not in both sets. This is precisely the set (A ∩ B ) + (A ∩ C ) = (A · B ) + (A · C ). The right distributive law can be demonstrated by a similar argument. We have shown that P (S ), +, · is a ring. Because A · A = A ∩ A = A, we see from the deﬁnition in Exercise 55 that it is a Boolean ring. 19. Integral Domains
1. We rewrite the equation as x(x − 3)(x + 1) = 0, and simply try all the elements, 5 4, 3 2, 1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 of Z12 , obtaining the solutions 0, 3, 5, 8, 9, and 11. 2. The solution in Z7 is 3 and the solution in Z23 is 16. 3. Trying all possibilities 2, 1, 0, 1, 2, and 3, we ﬁnd no solutions. 4. Trying all possibilities 2, 1, 0,1, 2, and 3, we ﬁnd x = 2 as the only solution. 19. Integral Domains 5. 0 6. 0 7. 0 8. 3 9. 12 10. 30 69 11. (a + b)4 = a4 + 4 · a3 b + 6 · a2 b2 + 4 · ab3 + b4 = a4 + 2 · a2 b2 + b4 12. (a + b)9 = [(a + b)3 ]3 = [a3 + 3 · a2 b + 3 · ab2 + b3 ]3 = (a3 + b3 )3 = a9 + 3 · a6 b3 + 3 · a3 b6 + b9 = a9 + b9 . 13. (a + b)6 = [(a + b)3 ]2 = [a3 + 3 · a2 b + 3 · ab2 + b3 ]2 = (a3 + b3 )2 = a6 + 2 · a3 b3 + b6 . 14. We have 2 −1 2 −1 12 24 = 00 00 . 15. The deﬁnition is incorrect. We must state that a = 0 and b = 0. If, in a ring R, nonzero elements a and b are such that ab = 0, then a and b are divisors of zero. 16. The deﬁnition is incorrect; n must be minimal in Z+ . If for some n ∈ Z+ , n · a = 0 for all a in a ring R, the smallest such n is the characteristic of R. If no such n exists, then 0 is the characteristic of R. 17. F T F F T T F T F F 18. Specifying the regions by their number, we have as examples: 1. Q 2. Z 3. Z4 4. 2Z 5. M2 (R) and 6. Uppertriangular matrices with integer entries and all zeros on the main diagonal. 19. (See the answer in the text.) 20. We need add only one region, No. 7, to the existing ﬁgure. Unfortunately, we can’t draw big circles, so we had to use quadrilaterals which are a bit confusing. For example, the commutative ring quadrilateral extends into the high rectangle, and includes regions numbered 1, 2, 3, and 4. This would be apparent if we could have made it a large circle. We suggest that you draw circles, as in the text. Just add another region 7 inside the existing region 5 of the text, and label it “Strictly skew ﬁelds”. 70 19. Integral Domains @ @@@@ @@@ @@@ @@@@ @@@ @ @ Integral Commutative rings 4 '$ Rings Fields with unity 1 &% Domains 2
hhh hh hhhh hhhh 5 3
hhh hhhh 6 Strictly skew ﬁelds 7 21. Rewriting ab = ac as a(b − c) = 0, deduce b = c from a = 0 and the absence of zero divisors. 22. If a = 0 is in the ﬁnite integral domain D, use the cancellation law and cardinality to deduce that the map of D into D where x is mapped into ax is onetoone and onto D. 23. If a2 = a, then a2 − a = a(a − 1) = 0. If a = 0, then a−1 exists in R and we have a − 1 = (a−1 a)(a − 1) = a−1 [a(a − 1)] = a−1 0 = 0, so a − 1 = 0 and a = 1. Thus 0 and 1 are the only two idempotent elements in a division ring. 24. Exercise 49(a) in Section 18 showed that an intersection of subrings of a ring R is again a subring of R. Thus an intersection of subdomains Di for i ∈ I of an integral domain D is at least a ring. The preceding exercise shows that unity in an integral domain can be characterized as the nonzero idempotent. This shows that the unity in each Di must be the unity 1 in D, so 1 is in the intersection of the Di . Of course multiplication is commutative in the intersection because it is commutative in D and the operation is induced. Finally, if ab = 0 in the intersection, then ab = 0 in D so either a = 0 or b = 0, that is, the intersection has no divisors of zero, and is a subdomain of D. 25. Because R has no divisors of zero, multiplicative cancellation of nonzero elements is valid. The construction in the proof of Theorem 18.11 is valid and shows that each nonzero a ∈ R has a right inverse, say ai . A similar construction where the elements of R are all multiplied on the right by a shows that a has a left inverse, say aj . By associativity of multiplication, we have aj = aj (aai ) = (aj a)ai = ai . Thus every nonzero a ∈ R is a unit, so R is a division ring. 26. a. Let a = 0. We wish to show that a is not a divisor of zero. Let b be the unique element such that aba = a. Suppose ac = 0 or ca = 0. Then a(b + c)a = aba + aca = a + 0 = a. By uniqueness b + c = b so c = 0. 19. Integral Domains 71 b. From aba = a, we know that b = 0 also. Multiplying on the left by b, we obtain baba = ba. Because R has no divisors of zero by part a, multiplicative cancellation is valid and we see that bab = b. c. We claim that ab is unity for nonzero a and b given in the statement of the exercise. Let c ∈ R. From aba = a, we see that ca = caba. Cancelling a, we obtain c = c(ab). From part b, we have bc = babc, and cancelling b yields c = (ab)c. Thus ab satisﬁes (ab)c = c(ab) for all c ∈ R, so ab is unity. d. Let a be a nonzero element of the ring. By part a, aba = a. By part c , ab = 1 so b is a right inverse of a. Because the elements a and b behave in a symmetric fashion by part b, an argument symmetric to that in part c, starting with the equation ac = abac, shows that ba = 1 also. Thus b is also a left inverse of a, so a is a unit. This shows that R is a division ring. 27. By Exercise 23, we see that the unity in an integral domain can be characterized as the unique nonzero idempotent. The unity element in D must then also be the unity in every subdomain. Recall that the characteristic of a ring with unity is the minimum n ∈ Z+ such that n · 1 = 0, if such an n exists, and is 0 otherwise. Because unity is the same in the subdomain, this computation will lead to the same result there as in the original domain. 28. Let R = {n · 1  n ∈ Z}. We have n · 1 + m · 1 = (n + m) · 1 so R is closed under addition. Taking n = 0, we see that 0 ∈ R. Because the inverse of n · 1 is (−n) · 1, we see that R contains all additive inverses of elements, so R, + is an abelian group. The distributive laws show that (n · 1)(m · 1) = (nm) · 1, so R is closed under multiplication. Because 1 · 1 = 1, we see that 1 ∈ R. Thus R is a commutative ring with unity. Because a product ab = 0 in R can also be viewed as a product in D, we see that R also has no divisors of zero. Thus R is a subdomain of D. 29. Suppose the characteristic is mn for m > 1 and n > 1. Following the hint, the distributive laws show that (m · 1)(n · 1) = (nm) · 1 = 0. Because we are in an integral domain, we must have either m · 1 = 0 or n · 1 = 0. But if m · 1 = 0 then Theorem 19.15 shows that the characteristic of D is at most m. If n · 1 = 0, the chracteristic of D is at most n. Thus the characteristic can’t be a composite positive integer, so it must either be 0 or a prime p. 30. a. From group theory, we know that S is an abelian group under addition. We check the associativity of multiplication, using the facts that, for all m, n ∈ Z and r, s ∈ R, we have n·(m·r) = (nm)·r, n·(r +s) = n · r + n · s, r(n · s) = n · (rs), and (n · r)s = n · (rs), which all follow from commutativity of addition and the distributive laws in R. We have, for r, s, t ∈ R and k, m, n ∈ Z, (r, k )[(s, m)(t, n)] = (r, k )(st + m · t + n · s, mn) = (r(st + m · t + n · s) + k · (st + m · t + n · s) + mn · r, kmn) = (rst + k · st + m · rt + n · rs + km · t + kn · s + mn · r, kmn) and [(r, k )(s, m)](t, n) = (rs + k · s + m · r, km)(t, n) = ((rs + k · s + m · r)t + km · t + n · (rs + k · s + m · r), kmn) = (rst + k · st + m · rt + n · rs + km · t + kn · s + mn · r, kmn). Thus multiplication is associative. For the left distributive law, we obtain (r, k )[(s, m) + (t, n)] = (r, k )(s + t, m + n) = (r(s + t) + k · (s + t) + (m + n) · r, k (m + n) = (rs + k · s + m · r, km) + (rt + k · t + n · r, kn) = (r, k )(s, m) + (r, k )(t, n). 72 20. Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorems Proof of the right distributive law is a similar computation. Thus S is a ring. b. We have (0, 1)(r, n) = (0r + 1 · r + n · 0, 1n) = (r, n) = (r0 + n · 0 + 1 · r, n1) = (r, n)(0, 1), so (0, 1) ∈ S is unity. c. Using Theorem 19.15 and part b, the ring S either has characteristic 0 or the smallest positive integer n such that (0, 0) = n · (0, 1) = (0, n). Clearly n has this property if and only if S = R × Zn . Because we chose Z or Zn to form S acccording as R has characteristic 0 or n, we see that R and S have the same characteristic. d. We have φ(r1 + r2 ) = (r1 + r2 , 0) = (r1 , 0) + (r2 , 0) = φ(r1 ) + φ(r2 ). Also, φ(r1 r2 ) = (r1 r2 , 0) = (r1 r2 + 0 · r2 + 0 · r1 , 00) = (r1 , 0)(r2 , 0) = φ(r1 )φ(r2 ). Thus φ is a homomorphism. If φ(r1 ) = φ(r2 ), then (r1 , 0) = (r2 , 0) so r1 = r2 ; Thus φ is one to one. Therefore φ maps R isomorphically onto the subring φ[R] of S . 20. Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorems
1. Either 3 or 5 2. Either 2, 6, 7, or 8 3. Either 3, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, or 14 5. 3749 ≡ 249 ≡ (26 )8 · 2 ≡ 18 · 2 ≡ 2 (mod 7)
17 4. 347 ≡ (322 )2 · 33 ≡ 12 · 27 ≡ 27 ≡ 4 (mod 23) 6. 217 ≡ (24 )4 · 2 ≡ (−2)4 · 2 ≡ 16 · 2 ≡ 14 (mod 18). Thus 217 = 18q + 14. Then 2(2 ) ≡ 218q+14 ≡ (218 )q · 214 ≡ 1q · 214 ≡ (24 )3 · 22 ≡ (−3)3 · 22 ≡ −27 · 4 ≡ −8 · 4 ≡ 6 (mod 19) so the answer is 6 + 1 = 7. 7. (See the answer in the text.) 8. All positive integers less than p2 that are not divisible by p are relatively prime to p. Thus we delete from the p2 − 1 integers less than p2 the integers p, 2p, 3p, · · · , (p − 1)p. There are p − 1 integers deleted, so φ(p2 ) = (p2 − 1) − (p − 1) = p2 − p. 9. We delete from the pq − 1 integers less than pq those that are mltiples of p or of q to obtain those relatively prime to pq . The multiples of p are p, 2p, 3p, · · · , (q − 1)p and the multiples of q are q, 2q, 3q, · · · , (p − 1)q . Thus we delete a total of (q − 1) + (p − 1) = p + q − 2 elements, so φ(pq ) = (pq − 1) − (p + q + 2) = pq − p − q + 1 = (p − 1)(q − 1). 10. From Exercise 7, we ﬁnd that φ(24) = 8, so 78 ≡ 1 (mod 24). Then 71000 ≡ (78 )125 ≡ 1125 ≡ 1 (mod 24). 11. We can reduce the congruence to 2x ≡ 2 (mod 4). The gcd of 4 and 2 is d = 2 which divides b = 2. We divide by 2 and solve instead the congruence x ≡ 1 (mod 2). Of course x = 1 is a solution. Another incongruent (mod 4) solution is x = 1 + 2 = 3. Thus the solutions are the numbers in 1 + 4Z and 3 + 4Z. 12. We can reduce the congruence to 7x ≡ 5 (mod 15). The gcd of 15 and 7 is d = 1 which divides b = 5. By inspection, x = 5 is a solution, and all solutions must be congruent to 5. Thus the solutions are the numbers in 5 + 15Z. 13. The congruence can be reduced to 12x ≡ 15 (mod 24). The gcd of 24 and 12 is d = 12 which does not divide b = 15, so there are no solutions. 20. Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorems 73 14. The congruence can be reduced to 21x ≡ 15 (mod 24). The gcd of 24 and 21 is d = 3 which divides b = 15. We divide by 3 and solve instead the congruence 7x ≡ 5 (mod 8). By inspection, x = 3 is a solution. Other incongruent (mod 24) solutions are given by x = 3 + 8 = 11 and x = 3 + 2 · 8 = 19. Thus the solutions are the numbers in 3 + 24Z, 11 + 24Z, or 19 + 24Z. 15. The congruence can be reduced to 3x ≡ 8 (mod 9). The gcd of 9 and 3 is d = 3 which does not divide b = 8, so there are no solutions. 16. The congruence can be reduced to 5x ≡ 8 (mod 9). The gcd of 9 and 5 is 1 which divides 8. By inspection, x = 7 is a solution, and there are no other incongruent (mod 9) solutions, so solutions are the numbers in 7 + 9Z. 17. The congruence can be reduced to 25x ≡ 10 (mod 65). The gcd of 65 and 25 is d = 5 which divides b = 10. We divide by 5 and solve instead the congruence 5x ≡ 2 (mod 13). By inspection x = 3 is one solution. The other solutions that are incongruent (mod 65) are 3 + 13 = 16, 3+2 · 13 = 29, 3+3 · 13 = 42, and 3 + 4 · 13 = 55. Thus the solutions are the numbers in 3 + 65Z, 16 + 65Z, 29 + 65Z, 42 + 65Z, and 55 + 65Z. 18. The gcd of 130 and 39 is d = 13 which divides b = 52. We divide by 13 and solve instead 3x ≡ 4 (mod 10). By inspection, x = 8 is a solution. Repeatedly adding 10 eleven times, we see that the solutions are the numbers in 8 + 130Z, 18 + 130Z, 28 + 130Z, 38 + 130Z, 48 + 130Z, 58 + 130Z, 68 + 130Z, 78 + 130Z, 88 + 130Z, 98 + 130Z, 108 + 130Z, 118 + 130Z, or 128 + 130Z. 19. Because (p − 1)! = (p − 1)(p − 2)!, Exercise 28 shows that we have −1 ≡ (p − 1) · (p − 2)! (mod p). Reducing (mod p), we have the congruence −1 ≡ (−1) · (p − 2)! (mod p), so we must have (p − 2)! ≡ 1 (mod p). 20. Taking p = 37 and using Exercise 28, we have 36! ≡ (36)(35)(34!) ≡ −1 (mod 37) so (−1)(−2)(34!) ≡ −1 (mod 37) and 2(34!) ≡ 36 (mod 37). Thus 34! ≡ 18 (mod 37). 21. Taking p = 53 and using Exercise 28, we have 52! ≡ (52)(51)(50)(49!) ≡ −1 (mod 53) so (−1)(−2)(−3)(49!) ≡ −1 (mod 53) and 6(49!) ≡ 1 (mod 53). By inspection, we see that 49! ≡ 9 (mod 53). 22. Taking p = 29 and using Exercise 28, we have 28! ≡ (28)(27)(26)(25)(24!) ≡ −1 (mod 29) so (−1)(−2)(−3)(−4)(24!) ≡ −1 (mod 29) and (−5)(24!) ≡ −1 (mod 29). By inspection, we see that 24! ≡ 6 (mod 29). 23. F T T F T T F T F T ·12 1 5 7 11 1 1 5 7 11 5 5 1 11 7 7 7 11 1 5 11 11 7 This group is isomorphic to Z2 × Z2 , + . 5 1 24. 74 21. The Field of Quotients of an Integral Domain 25. The nonzero elements of Zp form a group of order p − 1 under multiplication modulo p, and the order of an element of a ﬁnite group divides the order of the group. 26. The elements of Zn that are integers relative prime to n form a group of order φ(n) under multiplication modulo n, and the order of an element of a ﬁnite group divides the order of the group. 27. If a2 = 1, then a2 − 1 = (a − 1)(a + 1) = 0. Because a ﬁeld has no divisors of 0, either a − 1 = 0 or a + 1 = 0. Thus either a = 1 or a = p − 1. 28. Because Zp is a ﬁeld, for each factor in (p − 1)!, its inverse in Zp is also a factor. In two cases, namely for the factors 1 and p − 1, the inverse is the same factor (see Exercise 27), while in the other cases the inverse is a diﬀerent factor. For p ≥ 3 we see that (p − 1)! ≡ (p − 1) · (1)(1) · · · (1) ·(1) (mod p)
p−3 (1) 2 s so (p − 1)! ≡ p − 1 ≡ −1 (mod p). When p = 2, we have p − 1 ≡ 1 ≡ −1 (mod 2). 29. We show that n37 − n is divisible by each of the primes 37, 19, 13, 7, 3, and 2 for every positive integer n. By Corollary 20.2, ap ≡ a (mod p) so of course n37 ≡ n (mod 37) for all n, so n37 − n ≡ 0 (mod 37) for all n, that is n37 − n is divisible by 37 for all n ∈ Z+. Working modulo 19, we have n37 − n ≡ n[(n18 )2 − 1]. If n is divisible by 19, then so is n37 − n. If n is not divisible by 19, then by Fermat’s theorem, (n18 )2 − 1 ≡ 12 − 1 ≡ 0 (mod 19), so again n37 − n is divisible by 19. Notice that the reason this argumnet works is that 36 = 37  1 is a multiple of 18 = 19  1. Divisiblity by 13, 7, 3, and 2 are handled in the same way, and the computatations are successful because 36 36 36 36 is is is is a a a a multiple multiple multiple multiple of of of of 13  1 = 12, 7  1 = 6, 3  1 = 2, 2  1 = 1. 30. Looking at the argument in Exercise 29, we try to ﬁnd still another prime p less than 37 such that 36 is divisible by p − 1. We see that p = 5 ﬁlls the bill, so n37 − n is actually divisible by 5(383838) = 1919190 for all integers n. 21. The Field of Quotients of an Integral Domain
1. The ﬁeld of quotients of D is {q1 + q2 i  q1 , q2 ∈ Q}. 2. Because √ 1 −b √ 1 a−b 2 a √= √· √=2 +2 2, 2 a − 2b a − 2b2 a+b 2 a+b 2 a−b 2 √ we see that {q1 + q2 2  q1 , q2 ∈ Q} is a ﬁeld, and must be the ﬁeld of quotients. 3. The deﬁnition is incorrect. We should think of the embedding as having taken place, so that D ⊆ F , and every element of F must be a quotient of elements of D. A ﬁeld of quotients of an integral domain D is a ﬁeld F containing D as a subdomain and with the property that every x ∈ F is equal to some quotient a/b for a, b ∈ D. 21. The Field of Quotients of an Integral Domain 4. T F T F T T F T T T 75 5. Let D = {q ∈ Q  q = m/2n for m, n ∈ Z}, that is, the set of all rational numbers that can be written as a quotient of integers with denominator a power of 2. It is easy to see that D is an integral domain. Let D = Z. Then Q is a ﬁeld of quotients of both D and D . 6. We have [(a, b)] + ([(c, d)] + [(e, f )]) = [(a, b)] + [(cf + de, df )] = [(adf + bcf + bde, bdf )] = [(ad + bc, bd)] + [(e, f )] = ([(a, b)] + [(c, d)]) + [(e, f )]. Thus addition is associative. 7. We have [(0, 1)] + [(a, b)] = [(0b + 1a, 1b] = [(a, b)]. by Part 1 of Step 3, we also have [(a, b)] + [(0, 1)] = [(a, b)]. 8. We have [(−a, b)] + [(a, b)] = [(−ab + ba, b2 )] = [(0, b2 )]. But [(0, b2 )] ∼ [(0, 1)] because (0)(1) = (b2 )(0) = 0. Thus [(−a, b)] + [(a, b)] = [(0, 1)]. By Part 1 of Step 3, [(a, b)] + [(−a, b)] = [(0, 1)] also. 9. Now [(a, b)]([(c, d)][(e, f )]) = [(a, b)][(ce, df )] = [(ace, bdf )] = [(ac, bd)][(e, f )] = ([(a, b)][(c, d)])[(e, f )]. Thus multiplication is associative. 10. We have [(a, b)][(c, d)] = [(ac, bd)] = [(ca, db)] = [(c, d)][(a, b)] so multiplication is commutative. 11. For the left distributive law, we have [(a, b)]([(c, d)] + [(e, f )]) = [(a, b)][(cf + de, df )] = [(acf + ade, bdf )]. Also, [(a, b)][(c, d)] + [(a, b)][(e, f )] = [(ac, bd)] + [(ae, bf )] = [(acbf + bdae, bdbf )] ∼ [(acf + ade, bdf )] because (acbf + bdae)bdf = acbf bdf + bdaebdf = bdbf (acf + ade), for multiplication in D is commutative. The right distributive law then follws from Part 6. 12. a. Because T is nonempty, there exists a ∈ T . Then [(a, a)] is unity in Q(R, T ), because [(a, a)][(b, c)] = [(ab, ac)] ∼ [(b, c)] since abc = acb in the commutative ring R. b. A nonzero element a ∈ T is identiﬁed with [(aa, a)] in Q(R, T ). Because T has no divisors of zero, [(a, aa)] ∈ Q(R, T ), and we see that [(aa, a)][(a, aa)] = [(aaa, aaa)] ∼ [(a, a)] because aaaa = aaaa. We saw in part a that [(a, a)] is unity in Q(R, T ). Commutativity of Q(R, T ) shows that [(a, aa)][(aa, a)] is unity also, so a ∈ T has an inverse in Q(R, T ) if a = 0. 13. We need only takt T = {an  n ∈ Z+ } in Exercise 12. This construction is entirely diﬀerent from the one in Exercise 30 of Section 19. 14. There are four elements, for 1 and 3 are already units in Z4 . 15. It is isomorphic to the ring D of all rational numbers that can be expressed as a quotient of integers with denominator a power of 2, as described in the answer to Exercise 5. 16. It is isomorphic to the ring of all rational numbers that can be expressed as a quotient of integers with denominator a power of 6. The 3 in the 3Z does not restrict the numerator, because 1 can be recovered as [(6, 6)], 2 as [(12, 6)], etc. 17. It runs into trouble when we try to prove the transitive property in the proof of Lemma 21.2, for multiplicative cancellation may not hold. For R = Z6 and T = {1, 2, 4} we have (1, 2) ∼ (2, 4) because (1)(4) = (2)(2) = 4 and (2, 4) ∼ (2, 1) because (2)(1) = (4)(2) in Z6 , but (1, 2) (2, 1) because (1)(1) = (2)(2) in Z6 . 76 22. Rings of Polynomials 22. Rings of Polynomials
1. f (x) + g (x) = 2x2 + 5, 2. f (x) + g (x) = 0, f (x)g (x) = 6x2 + 4x + 6 f (x)g (x) = x2 + 1 f (x)g (x) = x3 + 5x 3. f (x) + g (x) = 5x2 + 5x + 1, 4. f (x) + g (x) = 3x4 + 2x3 + 4x2 + 1, f (x)g (x) = x7 + 2x6 + 4x5 + x3 + 2x2 + x + 3 5. Such a polynomial is of the form ax3 + bx2 + cx + d where each of a, b, c, d may be either 0 or 1. Thus there are 2 · 2 · 2 · 2 = 16 such polynomials in all. 6. Such a polynomial is of the form ax2 + bx + c where each of a, b, c maybe either 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Thus there are 5 · 5 · 5 = 125 such polynomials in all. 7. φ2 (x2 + 3) = 22 + 3 = 7 8. φi (2x3 − x2 + 3x + 2) = 2i3 − i2 + 3i + 2 = −2i + 1 + 3i + 2 = i + 3 9. φ3 [(x4 + 2x)(x3 − 3x2 + 3)] = φ3 (x4 + 2x)φ3 (x3 − 3x2 + 3) = (34 + 6)(33 − 33 + 3) = (4 + 6)(3) = 2 10. φ5 [(x3 + 2)(4x2 + 3)(x7 + 3x2 + 1)] = φ5 (x3 + 2)φ5 (4x2 + 3)φ5 (x7 + 3x2 + 1) = (53 + 2)(4 · 52 + 3)(57 + 3 · 52 + 1) = (6 + 2)(2 + 3)(5 + 5 + 1) = (1)(5)(4) = 6 11. φ4 (3x106 + 5x99 + 2x53 ) = 3(4)106 + 5(4)99 + 2(4)53 = 3(46 )17 44 + 5(46 )16 43 + 2(46 )8 45 = 3(1)4 + 5(1)1 + 2(1)2 = 5 + 5 + 4 = 0 12. 12 + 1 = 0 but 02 + 1 = 0, so 1 is the only zero. 13. Let f (x) = x3 + 2x + 2. Then f (0) = 2, f (1) = 5, f (2) = 0, f (3) = 0, f (−3) = 4, f (−2) = 4, and f (−1) = 6 so 2 and 3 are the only zeros. 14. Let f (x) = x5 + 3x3 + x2 + 2x. Then f (0) = 0, f (1) = 2, f (2) = 4, f (−2) = 4, and f (−1) = 0 so 0 and 4 are the only zeros. 15. Because Z7 is a ﬁeld, f (a)g (a) = 0 if and only if either f (a) = 0 or g (a) = 0. Let f (x) = x3 + 2x2 + 5 and g (x) = 3x2 + 2x. Then f (0) = 5, f (1) = 1, f (2) = 0, f (3) = 1, f (−3) = 3, f (−2) = 5, and f (−1) = 6 while g (0) = 0, g (1) = 5, g (2) = 2, g (3) = 5, g (−3) = 0, g (−2) = 1, and g (−1) = 1. Thus f (x)g (x) has 0, 2, and 4 as its only zeros. 16. φ3 (x231 + 3x117 − 2x53 + 1) = 3231 + 3118 − 2(353 ) + 1 = (34 )57 33 + (34 )29 32 − 2(34 )13 3 + 1 = 33 + 32 − 2(3) + 1 = 2 + 4 − 1 + 1 = 1. 17. Let f (x) = 2x219 + 3x74 + 2x57 + 3x44 = 2(x4 )54 x3 + 3(x4 )18 x2 + 2(x4 )14 x + 3(x4 )11 . Then f (0) = 0, f (1) = 2+3+2+3 = 0, f (2) = 1+2+4+3 = 0, f (−2) = 4+2+1+3 = 0 and f (−1) = 3+3+3+3 = 2. Thus 0, 1, 2,and 3 are zeros of f (x). 18. The deﬁnition is incorrect. All but a ﬁnite number of the ai must be zero. A polynomial with coeﬃcients in a ring R is an inﬁnite formal sum
∞ ai xi = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + · · · + an xn + · · ·
i=1 where ai ∈ R for i = 0, 1, 2, · · · and all but a ﬁnite number of the ai are 0. 22. Rings of Polynomials 19. The deﬁnition is incorrect. The zero α may be in a ﬁeld E containing F . 77 Let F be a subﬁeld of a ﬁeld E and let f (x) ∈ F [x]. A zero of f (x) in E is an α ∈ E such that φα (f (x)) = 0, where φα : F [x] → E is the evaluation homomorphism mapping x into α. 20. f (x, y ) = (3x3 + 2x)y 3 + (x2 − 6x + 1)y 2 + (x4 − 2x)y + (x4 − 3x2 + 2) = (y + 1)x4 + 3y 3 x3 + (y 2 − 3)x2 + (2y 3 − 6y 2 − 2y )x + (y 2 + 2) 21. (See the answer in the text.) 22. 2x + 1 is a unit because (2x + 1)2 = 1 in Z4 [x]. 23. T T T T F F T T T F 24. Let f (x) = an xn + an−1 xn−1 + · · · + a1 x + a0 and g (x) = bm xm + bm−1 xm−1 + · · · + b1 x + b0 be polynomials in D[x] with an and bm both nonzero. Because D is an integral domain, we know that an bm = 0, so f (x)g (x) is nonzero because its term of highest degree has coeﬃcient an bm . As stated in the text, D[x] is a commutative ring with unity, and we have shown it has no divisors of zero, so it is an integral domain. 25. a. The units in D[x] are the units in D because a polnomial of degree n times a polynomial of degree m is a polynomial of degree nm, as proved in the preceding exercise. Thus a polynomial of degree 1 cannot be multiplied by anything in D[x] to give 1, which is a polynomial of degree 0. b. They are the units in Z, namely 1 and 1. c. They are the units in Z7 , namely 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. 26. Let f (x) =
∞ i i=0 ai x , g (x) ∞ i i=0 bi x , ∞ i i=0 ci x . = h(x)[f (x) + g (x)] = ∞ j =0 and h(x) = ∞ i=0 Then
∞ n=0 n cj xj n (ai + bi )xi =
i=0 ∞ n ci (an−i + bn−i ) xn ci bn−i xn ∞ =
n=0 i=0 ci an−i xn +
n=0 i=0 ∞ = ∞ cj x
j ∞ ai x
i cj x
j ∞ +
j =0 bi xi
i=0 j =0 i=0 = h(x)f (x) + h(x)g (x) so the left distributive law holds. 27. a. Let f (x)
∞ i i=0 ax and g (x) = ∞ i=0 be polynomials in F [x]. Then
∞ ∞ ∞ D(f (x) + g (x)) = D
i=0 ∞ ai x +
i=0 i bi x i =D
i=0 (ai + bi )xi ∞ =
i=1 ∞ i(ai + bi )xi−1 =
i=1 ∞ (iai + ibi )xi−1 =
i=1 iai xi−1 +
i=1 ibi xi−1 = D(f (x)) + D(g (x)). 78 22. Rings of Polynomials b. The kernel of D is F . [This would not be true if F had characteristic p, for then D(xp ) = 0.]
1 c. The image of D is F [x] because D is additively a homomorphism with D(1) = 0 and D( i+1 ai xi+1 ) = ai xi . 28. a. φα1 ,···, αn (f (x1 , · · · , xn )) is the element of F obtained by replacing each xi by αi in the polynomial and computing in E the resulting sum of products. That is φα1 ,···, αn (f (x1 , · · · , xn )) = f (α1 , · · · , αn ). This is a map φα1 ,···, αn : F [x1 , · · · , xn ] → E which is a homomorphism and maps F isomorphically by the identity map, that is, φα1 ,···, αn (a) = a for a ∈ F . b. φ−3, 2 (x12 x23 + 3x14 x2 ) = (9)(8) + 3(81)(2) = 72 + 486 = 558. c. Let F be a subﬁeld of E . Then (α1 , · · · , αn ) in E × E × · · · E is a zero of f (x1 , · · · , xn ) ∈
n factors F [x1 , · · · xn ] if φα1 ,···, αn (f (x1 , · · · , xn )) = 0. 29. Addition associative: Let φ, ψ, µ ∈ RR . Then [(φ + ψ )+ µ](r) = (φ + ψ )(r)+ µ(r) = φ(r)+ ψ (r)+ µ(r) = φ(r) + (ψ + µ)(r) = [φ + (ψ + µ)](r) because addition in R is associative. Because (φ + ψ ) + µ and φ + (ψ + µ) have the same value on each r ∈ R, they are the same function. Identity for +: The function φ0 such that φ0 (r) = 0 for all r ∈ R acts as additive identity, for (φ0 + ψ )(r) = φ0 (r) + ψ (r) = 0 + ψ (r) = ψ (r). Because φ0 and φ0 + ψ have the same value on each r ∈ R, we see that they are the same function. A similar argument shows that ψ + φ0 = ψ . Additive inverse: Given φ ∈ RR , the function −φ deﬁned by (−φ)(r) = −(φ(r)) for r ∈ R is the additive inverse of φ, for (φ+(−φ))(r) = φ(r)+(−φ)(r) = φ(r)+(−φ(r)) = 0 = φ0 (r), so φ+(−φ) = φ0 . A similar argument shows that (−φ) + φ = φ0 . Addition commutative: We have (φ + ψ )(r) = φ(r) + ψ (r) = ψ (r) + φ(r) = (ψ + φ)(r) because addition in R is commutative. Thus φ + ψ and ψ + φ are the same function, so φ + ψ = ψ + φ. Multiplication associative: Now [(φ · ψ ) · µ](r) = [(φ · ψ )(r)]µ(r) = [φ(r)ψ (r)]µ(r) = φ(r)[ψ (r)µ(r)] = φ(r)[(ψ · µ)(r)] = [φ · (ψ · µ)](r) because multiplication in R is associative. Thus φ · (ψ · µ) = (φ · ψ ) · µ because the functions have the same value on each r ∈ R. Left distributive law: We have [φ · (ψ + µ)](r) = φ(r)[(ψ + µ)(r)] = φ(r)[ψ (r) + µ(r)] = φ(r)ψ (r) + φ(r)µ(r) = (φ · ψ )(r) + (φ · µ)(r) = [φ · ψ + φ · µ](r) because the left distributive law holds in R. Thus φ · (ψ + µ) = φ · ψ + φ · µ because these functions have the same value at each r ∈ R. Right distributive law: The proof is analogous to that for the left distributive law. 30. a. The map µ : F [x] → F F where µ(f (x)) is the function φ ∈ F F such that φ(a) = f (a) for all a ∈ F is easily seen to be a homomorphism of F [x] into the ring F F , and by deﬁnition, PF = µ[F [x]]. Thus PF is the homomorphic image of a ring under a ring homomorphism. Theorem 13.12 then shows that PF , + is a group. Let φ, ψ ∈ PF , and let f (x), g (x) ∈ F [x] be such that µ(f (x)) = φ and µ(g (x)) = ψ . Then (φ · ψ )(a) = φ(a)ψ (a) = f (a)g (a) for all a ∈ F , so µ(f (x)g (x)) = φ · ψ . Thus φ · ψ ∈ PF so PF is closed under multiplication. By Exercise 48 of Section 18, PF is a subring of FF . b. Let F be the ﬁnite ﬁeld Z2 . A function in Z2Z2 has just two elements in both its domain and range. Thus there are only 22 = 4 such functions in all. However, Z2 [x] is an inﬁnite set, so it isn’t isomorphic to PZ2 . 31. a. There are 22 = 4 elements in Z2Z2 and 33 = 27 in Z3Z3 . b. Because (φ + φ)(a) = φ(a) + φ(a) = 2 · φ(a) = 0 in Z2 , we see that every element of Z2Z2 is its own additive inverse, so this additive group of order 4 must be isomorphic to Z2 × Z2 . Similarly, if 23. Factorization of Polynomials over a Field 79 φ ∈ Z3Z3 then 3 · φ(a) = 0 for all a ∈ Z3 . Because this group is abelian, we see that it is isomorphic to Z3 × Z3 × Z3 . c. Let gi (x) = (1/c)fi (x) for i = 1, · · · , n. Note that gi (aj ) = 0 for j = i. Let di = gi (ai ). Note that di appears as a product of nonzero factors (ai − ak ) for k = i, and consequently di = 0 for i = 1, · · · , n. Let φ ∈ F F and suppose that φ(ai ) = ci . Let f (x) ∈ F be deﬁned by
n f (x) =
i=1 ci gi (x). di Because gj (ai ) = 0 if j = i, we see that only the ith term in the sum deﬁning f (x) contributes a nonzero summand to f (ai ). Because di = gi (ai ), we obtain f (ai ) = ci ci gi (ai ) = di = ci for i = 1, · · · , n. di di We have shown that each function φ in F F is a polynomial function f (x) in PF . 23. Factorization of Polynomials over a Field
1. We perform the desired division. x4 + x3 + x2 + x − 2 = q (x) x2 + 2x − 3 x6 + 3x5 + 4x2 − 3x + 2 6 + 2x5 − 3x4 x x5 + 3x4 x5 + 2x4 − 3x3 x4 + 3x3 + 4x2 x4 + 2x3 − 3x2 x3 − 3x 3 + 2x2 − 3x x − 2x2 +2 2 − 4x + 6 −2x 4x + 3 = r(x) 2. We perform the desired division. 5x4 + 5x2 − x = q (x) 3x2 + 2x − 3 x6 + 3x5 + 4x2 − 3x + 2 x6 + 3x5 + 6x4 x4 + 4x2 4 + 3x3 + 6x2 x − 3x3 − 2x2 − 3x − 3x3 − 2x2 + 3x x + 2 = r(x) 80 23. Factorization of Polynomials over a Field 3. We perform the desired division. 6x4 + 7x3 + 2x2 − x + 2 = q (x) + 3x − 5 2x + 1 x5 − 2x4 + x5 + 6x4 3x4 3x4 + 7x3 4x3 4x3 + 2x2 − 2x2 + 3x − 2x2 − x 4x − 5 4x + 2 4 = r(x) 4. We perform the desired division. 9x2 + 5x + 10 = q (x) 5x2 − x + 2 x4 + 5x3 − 3x2 x4 + 2x3 + 7x2 3x3 + x2 3x3 − 5x2 + 10x 6x2 + x 6x2 − 10x + 9 2 = r(x) 5. Trying 2 ∈ Z5 , we ﬁnd that 22 = 4, 23 = 3, 24 = 1, so 2 generates the multiplicative subgroup {1, 2, 3, 4} of all units in Z5 . By Corollary 6.16, the only generators are 21 = 2 and 23 = 3. 6. Trying 2 ∈ Z7 , we ﬁnd that 23 = 1, so 2 does not generate. Trying 3, we ﬁnd that 32 = 2, 33 = 6, 34 = 4, 35 = 5, and 36 = 1, so 3 generates the six units 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 in Z7 . By Corollary 6.16, the only generators are 31 = 3 and 35 = 5. 7. Trying 2 ∈ Z17 , we ﬁnd that 24 = −1, so 28 = 1 and 2 does not generate. Trying 3, we ﬁnd that 32 = 9, 33 = 10, 34 = 13, 35 = 5, 36 = 15, 37 = 11, 38 = 16 = −1. Because the order of 3 must divide 16, we see that 3 must be of order 16, so 3 generates the units in Z17 . By Corollary 6.16, the only generators are 31 = 3, 33 = 10, 35 = 5, 37 = 11, 39 = 14, 311 = 7, 313 = 12, and 315 = 6. 8. Trying 2 ∈ Z23 , we ﬁnd that 22 = 4, 23 = 8, 24 = 16, 25 = 9, 26 = 18, 27 = 13, 28 = 3, 29 = 6, 210 = 12, and 211 = 1, so 2 does not generate. However, this computation shows that (−2)11 = −1. Because the order of 2 must divide 22, we see that 21 = 2 must be of order 22, so 21 generates the units of Z23 . By Corollary 6.16, the only generators are (−2)1 = 21, (−2)3 = 15, (−2)5 = 14, (−2)7 = 10, (−2)9 = 17, (−2)13 = 19, (−2)15 = 7, (−2)17 = 5, (−2)19 = 20, and (−2)21 = 11. 9. In Z5 , we have x4 + 4 = x4 − 1 = (x2 + 1)(x2 − 1). Replacing 1 by  4 again, we continue and discover that (x2 − 4)(x2 − 1) = (x − 2)(x + 2)(x − 1)(x + 1). 10. By inspection, 1 is a zero of x3 + 2x2 + 2x + 1 in Z7 [x]. Executing the division algorithm as illustrated in our answers to Exercises 1 through 3, we compute x3 + 2x2 + 2x + 1 divided by x − (−1) = x + 1, 23. Factorization of Polynomials over a Field and ﬁnd that x3 + 2x2 + 2x + 1 = (x + 1)(x2 + x + 1). By inspection, 2 and 4 are zeros of x2 + x + 1. Thus the factorization is x3 + 2x2 + 2x + 1 = (x + 1)(x − 4)(x − 2). 81 11. By inspection, 3 is a zero of 2x3 + 3x2 − 7x − 5 in Z11 [x]. Dividing by x − 3 using the technique illustrated in our answers to Exercises 1 through 3, we ﬁnd that 2x3 + 3x2 − 7x − 5 = (x − 3)(2)(x2 − x − 1). By inspection, 3 and 4 are zeros of x2 − x − 1, so the factorization is 2x3 + 3x2 − 7x − 5 = (x − 3)(x + 3)(2x − 8). 12. By inspection, 1 is a zero of x3 + 2x + 3 in Z5 [x], so the polynomial is not irreducible. We divide by x + 1, using the technique of Exercises 1 through 3, and obtain x3 + 2x + 3 = (x + 1)(x2 − x + 3). By inspection, 1 and 2 are zeros of x2 − x + 3, so the factorization is x3 + 2x + 3 = (x + 1)(x + 1)(x − 2). 13. Let f (x) = 2x3 + x2 + 2x + 2 in Z5 [x]. Then f (0) = 2, f (1) = 2, f (−1) = −1, f (2) = 1, and f (−2) = 1, so f (x) has no zeros in Z5 . Because f (x) is of degree 3, Theorem 23.10 shows that f (x) is irreducible over Z5 . 14. f (x) = x2 + 8x − 2 satisﬁes the Eisenstein condition for irreducibility over Q with p = √ It is not 2. irreducible over R because the quadriatic formula shows that is has the real zeros (−8 ± 72)/2. Of course it is not irreducible over C also. 15. The polynomial g (x) = x2 + 6x + 12 is irreducible over Q because it satisﬁes the Eisenstein condition with p√ 3. It is also irreducible over R because the quadratic formula shows that its zeros are = (−6 ± −12)/2, which are not in R. It is not irreducible over C, because its zeros lie in C. 16. If x3 + 3x2 − 8 is reducible over Q, then by Theorem 23.11, it factors in Z[x], and must therefore have a linear factor of the form x − a in Z[x]. Then a must be a zero of the polynomial and must divide 8, so the possibilities are a = ±1, ±2, ±4, ±8. Computing the polyomial at these eight values, we ﬁnd none of them is a zero of the polynomial, which is therefore irreducible over Q. 17. If x4 − 22x2 + 1 is reducible over Z, then by Theorem 23.11, it factors in Z[x], and must therefore either have a linear factor in Z[x] or factor into two quadratics in Z[x]. The only possibilites for a linear factor are x ± 1, and clearly neither 1 nor 1 is a zero of the polynomial, so a linear factor is impossible. Suppose x4 − 22x2 + 1 = (x2 + ax + b)(x2 + cx + d). Equating coeﬃcients, we see that x3 coef f icient : 0 = a + c x2 coef f icient : −22 = ac + b + d 82 23. Factorization of Polynomials over a Field x coef f icient : 0 = bc + ad constant term : 1 = bd so either b = d = 1 or b = d = −1. Suppose b = d = 1. Then −22 = ac + 1 + 1 so ac = −24. Because a + c = 0, we have a = −c, so −c2 = −24 which is impossible for an integer c. Similarly, if b = d = −1, we deduce that −c2 = −20, which is also impossible. Thus the polynomial is irreducible. 18. Yes, with p = 3. 19. Yes, with p = 3. 20. No, for 2 divides the coeﬃcient 4 of x10 and 32 divides the constant term 18. 21. Yes, with p = 5. 22. Let this polynomial be f (x). If f (x) has a rational zero, then this zero can be expressed as a fraction with numerator dividing 10 and denominator dividing 6. The possibilities are ±10, ±5, ±10/3, ±5/2, ±2, ±5/3, ±1, ±5/6, ±2/3, ±1/2, ±1/3, and ±1/6. Experimentation with a calculator shows that there is a negative real zero between 2 and 3 because f (−2) < 0 and f (−3) > 0. (Recall the intermediate value theorem.) The only possible rational candidate is 5/2. We reach for our calculator and ﬁnd that f (−2.5) = 0, so 5/2 is a zero and (2x + 5) is a linear factor. Because f (0) < 0 and f (1) > 0, the intermediate value theorem shows that there is a real zero a satisfying 0 < a < 1. The rational possibilies are 5/6, 2/3, 1/2, 1/3, and 1/6. Because 2x + 5 is a factor, accounting for the factor 2 of 6 and the factor 5 of 10, we can discard 5/6, 1/2, and 1/6, leaving 2/3 and 1/3 to try. We reach for our calculator and compute f (2/3) = 0, so 3x − 2 is also a factor. Because we have accounted for the 6 and the 10 with these linear factors, the only other possible rational zeros would have to be 1 or 1, and we easily ﬁnd that these are not zeros. Thus the rational zeros are 2/3 and 5/2. 23. The deﬁnition is incorrect. We must require that g (x) and h(x) have degree less than the degree of f (x), and that the polynomial is nonconstant. A nonconstant polynomial f (x) ∈ F [x] is irreducible over the ﬁeld F if f (x) = g (x)h(x) for any polynomials g (x), h(x) ∈ F [x] both of degree less than the degree of f (x). 24. The deﬁnition is correct. 25. T T T F T F T T T T 26. Considering f (x) = x4 + x3 + x2 − x + 1 in Z[x], we ﬁnd that f (−2) = 16 − 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 15. Thus p = 3 and p = 5 are primes such that 2 is a zero of f (x) in Zp , that is, such that x + 2 is a factor of f (x) in Zp [x]. 27. The polynomials of degree 2 in Z2 [x] are x2 : not irreducible because 0 is a zero, x2 + 1: not irreducible because 1 is a zero, x2 + x: not irreducible because 0 is a zero, x2 + x + 1: irreducible because neither 0 nor 1 are zeros. Thus our answer is x2 + x + 1. 23. Factorization of Polynomials over a Field 28. The Polynomials of degree 3 in Z2 [x] are x3 : not irreducible because 0 is a zero, x3 + 1: not irreducible because 1 is a zero, x3 + x: not irreducible because 0 is a zero, x3 + x2 : not irreducible because 0 is a zero, x3 + x + 1: irreducible, neither 0 nor 1 is a zero, x3 + x2 + 1: irreducible, neither 0 nor 1 is a zero, x3 + x2 + x: not irreducible because 0 is a zero, x3 + x2 + x + 1: not irreducible, 1 is a zero. Thus the irreducible cubics are x3 + x + 1 and x3 + x2 + 1. 29. The 18 polynomials of degree 2 in Z3 are x2 , x2 + x, x2 + 2x, 2x2 , 2x2 + x, 2x2 + 2x all reducible because 0 is a zero, x2 + 2, x2 + x + 1, 2x2 + 1, 2x2 + 2x + 2 all reducible because 1 is a zero, x2 + 2x + 1, 2x2 + x + 2 both reducible because 2 is a zero, and 83 x2 + 1, x2 + x + 2, x2 + 2x + 2, 2x2 + 2, 2x2 + x + 1, 2x2 + 2x + 1 which are all irreducible because none has 0, 1, or 2 as a zero. 30. An irreducible polynomial must have a nonzero constant term or 0 is a zero; this eliminates 18 of the 54 cubic polynomials in Z3 [x]. Now a is a zero of f (x) if and only if a is a zero of 2f (x), so we can consider just the 18 cubics with leading coeﬃcient 1 and constant term nonzero. x3 + 2, x3 + x2 + 1, x3 + x + 1, x3 + 2x2 + 2x + 1, x3 + x2 + 2x + 2, x3 + 2x2 + x + 2 have 1 as a zero, so they are reducible. x3 + 1, x3 + 2x2 + 2, x3 + x + 2, x3 + x2 + x + 1 have 1 as a zero, so they are reducible. The remaining eight cubics with leading coeﬃcient 1 and nonzero constant term, namely: x3 x3 + 2x + 1, x3 + 2x + 2, x3 + x2 + 2, x3 + 2x2 + 1, x3 + x2 + x + 2, + x2 + 2x + 1, x3 + 2x2 + x + 1, and x3 + 2x2 + 2x + 2 and their doubles 2x3 + x + 2, 2x3 + x + 1, 2x3 + 2x2 + 1, 2x3 + x2 + 2, 2x3 + 2x2 + 2x + 1, 2x3 + 2x2 + x + 2, 2x3 + x2 + 2x + 2, and 2x3 + x2 + x + 1 are irreducible. 31. Following the hint, each reducible quadratic that is of the form x2 + ax + b is a product (x + c)(x + d) p for c, d ∈ Zp . There are 2 = p(p − 1)/2 such products (neglecting order of factors) where c = d. There are p such products where c = d. Thus there are p(p − 1)/2 + p = p2 /2 + p/2 = p(p + 1)/2 reducible quadratics with leading coeﬃcient 1. Because the leading coeﬃcient (upon multiplication) can be any one of p − 1 nonzero elements, there are (p − 1)p(p + 1)/2 reducible quadratics altogether. The total number of quadratic polynomials in Zp [x] is (p 1)p2 . Thus the number of irreducible quadratics is (p − 1)p2 − (p − 1)p(p + 1)/2 = p(p − 1)[p − (p + 1)/2] = p(p − 1)2 /2. 32. Each zero of a polynomial leads to a linear factor, and the number of linear factors in the factorization of a polynomial cannot exceed the degree of the polynomial. 33. If the group were not cyclic, then the Fundamental Theorem for ﬁnitely generated abelian groups shows that the least common multiple m of the orders of the elements would be less than the number n of elements, leading to a polynomial xm − 1 with n > m zeros, which is impossible in a ﬁeld. 84 23. Factorization of Polynomials over a Field 34. Note that x2 = xx and x2 + 1 = (x + 1)2 are reducible in Zp . For an odd prime p and a ∈ Zp , we know that (−a)p + a = −ap + a = −a + a = 0 by Corollary 20.2. Thus xp + a has −a as a zero, so it is reducible over Zp for every prime p. [Actually, the binomial theorem and Corollary 20.2 show that xp + a = xp + ap = (x + a)p .] 35. We are given that f (a) = a0 + a1 a + · · · + an an = 0 and a = 0. Dividing by an , we ﬁnd that 1 1 a0 ( )n + a1 ( )n−1 + · · · + an = 0 a a which is just what we wanted to show. 36. By Theorem 23.1, we know that f (x) = q (x)(x − a) + c for some constant c ∈ F . Applying the evaluation homomorphism φa to both sides of this equation, we ﬁnd that f (a) = q (a)(a − a) + c = q (a)0 + c = c, so the remainder r(x) = c is actually f (a). 37. a. Let f (x) =
∞ i i=0 ai x and g (x) = ∞ i i=0 bi x . ∞ Then
∞ σm (f (x) + g (x)) = σm
i=0 ∞ (ai + bi )xi =
i=0 σm (ai + bi )xi =
i=0 [σm (ai ) + σm (bi )]xi = σm (f (x)) + σm (g (x)) and
∞ n ∞ n σm (f (x)g (x)) = σm
∞ n=0 n i=0 i=0 ai bn−i xn = σm
i=0 ai bn−i xn n=0 ∞ n n=0 i=0 =
n=0 σm (ai bn−i ) xn = σm (ai )σm (bn−i ) xn = σm (f (x))σm (g (x)), so σm is a homomorphism. If h(x) ∈ Zm [x], then if k (x) is the polynomial in Z[x] obtained from h(x) by just viewing the coeﬃcients as elements of Z rather than of Zm , we see that σm (k (x)) = h(x), so the homomorphism σm is onto Zm [x]. b. Let f (x) = g (x)h(x) for g (x), h(x) ∈ Z[x] with the degrees of both g (x) and h(x) less than the degree n of f (x). Applying the homomorphism σm , we see that σm (f (x)) = σm (g (x))σm (h(x)) is a factorization of σm (f (x)) into two polynomials of degree less than the degree n of σm (f (x)), contrary to hypothesis. Thus f (x) is irreducible in Z[x], and hence in Q[x] by Theorem 23.11. c. Taking m = 5, we see that σ5 (x3 + 17x + 36) = x3 + 2x + 1 which does not have any of the ﬁve elements 0, 1, 1, 2, 2 of Z5 as a zero, and is thus irreducible over Z5 by Theorem 23.10. By Part(b), we conclude that x3 + 17x + 36 is irreducible over Q. 24. Noncommutative Examples 85 24. Noncommutative Examples
1. (2e + 3a + 0b) + (4e + 2a + 3b) = e + 0a + 3b, where coeﬃcients are added in Z5 . 2. Because {e, a, b} is a cyclic multiplicative group, we have aa = b, bb = a, ab = ba = e, and of course e acts as identity element. With the coeﬃcients of e, a, and b from Z5 , we obtain (2e + 3a + 0b)(4e + 2a + 3b) = 2e(4e + 2a + 3b) + 3a(4e + 2a + 3b) + 0b(4e + 2a + 3b) = (3e + 4a + 1b) + (4e + 2a + 1b) + (0e + 0a + 0b) = 2e + a + 2b. 3. Because {e, a, b} is a cyclic multiplicative group, we have aa = b, bb = a, ab = ba = e, and of course e acts as identity element. With the coeﬃcients of e, a, and b from Z5 , we obtain (3e + 3a + 3b)2 = 3e(3e + 3a + 3b) + 3a(3e + 3a + 3b) + 3b(3e + 3a + 3b) = (4e + 4a + 4b) + (4e + 4a + 4b) + (4e + 4a + 4b) = 2e + 2a + 2b. Having seen how this could have been simpliﬁed in view of the equal coeﬃcients of e, a, and b, we can now proceed more quickly and ﬁnd that (3e + 3a + 3b)4 = (2e + 2a + 2b)2 = 4 · (1e + 1a + 1b)2 = 4 · (3e + 3a + 3b) = 2e + 2a + 2b. 4. (i + 3j )(4 + 2j − k ) = 4i + 2ij − ik + 12j + 6jj − 3jk = 4i + 2k + j + 12j − 6 − 3i = −6 + i + 13j + 2k. 5. i2 j 3 kji5 = (−1)(−j )kji = (jk )(ji) = i(−k ) = j . 6. (i + j )−1 =
1 i+j · −i−j −i−j = −i−j 2 = − 1 i − 1 j. 2 2
1 −5j +15k 7. [(1 + 3i)(4j + 3k )]−1 = (4j + 3k + 12k − 9j )−1 = (−5j + 15k )−1 = 1 3 50 j − 50 k. · 5j −15k = 5j −15k 5j −15k 25+225 = j −3k 50 = 8. (0ρ0 + 1ρ1 + 0ρ2 + 0µ1 + 1µ2 + 1µ3 )(1ρ0 + 1ρ1 + 0ρ2 + 1µ1 + 0µ2 + 1µ3 ) = (1ρ1 + 1ρ2 + 1µ3 + 1µ2 ) + (1µ2 + 1µ3 + 1ρ2 + 1ρ1 ) + (1µ3 + 1µ1 + 1ρ1 + 1ρ0 ) = (1ρ0 + 1ρ1 + 0ρ2 + 1µ1 + 0µ2 + 1µ3 ) 9. The center is {r + 0i + 0j + 0k  r ∈ R, r = 0} because nonzero coeﬃcients of i, j, or k lead to an element that does not commute with j, k, or i respectively. 10. Clearly {a + bi  a, b ∈ R} and {a + bj  a, b ∈ R} as well as {a + bk  a, b ∈ R} are subrings of the quaternions that are actually ﬁelds isomorphic to C. 11. F F F F F F T F T F 12. a. The polynomial x2 + 1 ∈ H[x] has i, −i, j, −j, k, and −k as zeros in H. b. The subset {1, −1, i, −i, j, −j, k, −k, } of H is a group under quaternion multiplication and is not cyclic because no element has order greater than 2. 13. Let ψ (m, n) = (m, −m). It is easily seen that ψ is an endomorphism of Z. Then (φψ )(m, n) = φ(ψ (m, n)) = φ(m, −m) = (0, 0). 86 14. The matrices 10 01 , 01 10 , 11 01 24. Noncommutative Examples , 10 11 , 01 11 , 11 10 , have inverses 10 01 1 −1 10 −1 1 01 , , , , , and , respectively in every 01 10 01 −1 1 10 1 −1 ﬁeld. (Note that if the ﬁeld has characteristic 2, we have 1 = 1 so the last four matrices in the second row may be the same as four in the top row.) 15. Let m ∈ Z [or m ∈ Zn as the case may be]. Let φm be the endomorphism of the additive abelian group of the ring such that φm (1) = m. Then {φm  m ∈ Z [or m ∈ Zn ]} is the entire homomorphism ring, because a homomorphism of each of these cyclic groups is determined by its value on the generator 1 of the group. Deﬁne ψ : End(Z) → Z [or End(Zn ) → Zn ] by ψ (φm ) = m. Now (φi + φj )(1) = φi (1)+ φj (1) = i + j = φi+j (1), so φi + φj = φi+j because these homormophisms agree on the generator 1. Hence ψ (φi + φj ) = ψ (φi+j ) = i + j = ψ (φi ) + ψ (φj ), so ψ is an additive homomorphism. Also, (φi φj )(1) = φi (φj (1)) = φi (j ) = ij = φij (1), so φi φj = φij . Therefore ψ (φi φj ) = ψ (φij ) = ij = ψ (φi )ψ (φj ). Hence ψ is a ring homomorphism. By deﬁnition, the image under ψ is the entire ring Z [or Zn ]. If ψ (φi ) = ψ (φj ), then i = j in Z [or Zn ] so φi and φj map the generator 1 into the same element and thus are the same homomorphism. Thus ψ is an isomorphism. 16. A homomorphism of Z2 × Z2 can map the generators (1, 0) and (0, 1) onto any elements of the ring. Thus there are a total of 4 · 4 = 16 homomorphisms of Z2 × Z2 into itself, while the ring itself has only 4 elements . Thus the ring of all homomorphisms cannot be isomorphic to the ring itself, for they have diﬀerent cardinality. 17. Because we are dealing with homomorphisms, it suﬃces to show that (Y X − XY )(axn ) = 1(axn ) for a monomial axn ∈ F [x]. We have (Y X − XY )(axn ) = (Y X )(axn ) − (XY )(axn ) = Y (axn+1 ) − X (naxn−1 ) = (n + 1)axn − naxn = 1(axn ). 18. Let φ : RG → R be deﬁned by φ(re) = r. Then φ(re + se) = φ((r + s)e) = r + s = φ(re) + φ(se), and φ((re)(se)) = φ((rs)e) = rs = φ(re)φ(se), so φ is a homomorphism. Clearly, the image of RG under φ is all of R. If φ(re) = φ(se), then r = s, so φ is one to one. Thus φ is an isomorphism. 19. a. From the statement of the problem, we expect the identity matrix I2 to play the roll of 1, the matrix B with coeﬃcient b to play the role i, and the matrix C with coeﬃcient c to play the roll of j in a quaternion a + bi + cj + dk . Note that B 2 = C 2 = −I2 . Thus we let K = BC = 01 −1 0 0i i0 = i0 0 −i . b. (See the answer in the text.) c. We should check that φ is one to one. 25. Ordered Rings and Fields 87 25. Ordered Rings and Fields
1. Under Phigh , a − 0 is positive, x − a is positive, x2 − x is positive, etc. Thus we have the ordering a < x < x2 < x3 < · · < xn < · · · for any a ∈ R and n ∈ Z+ . 2. The ordering is Plow so (xi − xj ) ∈ P and xi > xj if i < j . Thus we have the ordering · · · < x3 < x2 < x < x0 = 1 < x−1 < x−2 < x−3 < · · · . √ √ √ 3. Because 2 is negative, we must have n < 0 for n 2 to be positive. We see that m + n 2 is positive if m > 0 and n < 0, or if m > 0 and m2 > 2n2 , or if n < 0 and 2n2 > m2 . 4. (i) a c d e b 6. (i) c a b e d 8. (i) e a c b d 10. b d e a c (ii) d b a e c (ii) e c a b d (ii) c d a e b 11. d b a e c 5. (i) a c e d b 7. (i) d a b c e 9. (i) c a e d b (ii) e c b a d (ii) d c e a b (ii) e c b a d 12. b e c d a 13. d e b a c √ √ 14. The smallest subﬁeld of C containing 3 2 is the intersection F of all subﬁelds of C that contain 3 2. Because R is one such subﬁeld of C, we see that F ≤ R and thus can be ordered using the induced √ √ ordering from R. Because the smallest subﬁeld K of C containing α = 3 2( −1+i 3 ) is isomorphic to 2 F , Theorem 25.10 shows that K can be ordered, and K contains α which is not a real number. 15. T T F T T F T F F T 16. Let Q[x] be ordered using the ordering Phigh , in which x is greater than every element of Q. Let Q[π ] have the ordering provided by the ordering Phigh of Q[x] and the isomorphism of Q[x] with Q[π ] provided by the evaluation homomorphism φπ : Q[x] → R, as described in Example 25.11. Because φπ (x) = π and φπ (q ) = q for all q ∈ Q, the inequality q < x in Q[x] is carried into q < π in Q[π ] for all q ∈ Q. √ √ √ 17. Let m + n 2 and r + s 2 be any elements of Z[ 2], so that m, n, r, s ∈ Z. Then √ √ √ φ((m + n 2) + (r + s 2)) = φ((m + r) + (n + s) 2) √ = (m + r) − (n + s) 2 √ √ = (m − n 2) + (r − s 2) √ √ = φ(m + n 2) + φ(r + s 2), showing that φ is an additive homomorphism. Turning to the multiplication, we have √ √ √ φ((m + n 2)(r + s 2)) = φ((mr + 2ns) + (ms + nr) 2) √ = (mr + 2ns) − (ms + nr) 2 √ √ = (m − n 2)(r − s 2) √ √ = φ(m + n 2)φ(r + s 2). √ √ Thus we have a homomorphism. It is clear that φ is a onetoone map of Z( 2) onto Z( 2), so φ is an isomorphism. 18. If a ∈ P , then a − 0 = a ∈ P . By deﬁnition of < in Theorem 25.5, (a − 0) ∈ P means that 0 < a. 88 25. Ordered Rings and Fields 19. If c = 0, then ac = bd = 0. Because b ∈ P and R can have can no divisors of zero, we conclude that d = 0. By similar argument, d = 0 implies that c = 0. d2 Suppose now that c and d are nonzero. From ac = bd, we obtain acd = bd2 . Now b ∈ P , and ∈ P implies bd2 ∈ P so acd ∈ P . Then −acd = a(−cd) ∈ P , so −cd ∈ P and thus cd ∈ P . / / 20. If a < b, then (b − a) ∈ P . Now b − a = (−a) − (−b) so ((−a) − (−b)) ∈ P. Thus −b < −a. 21. If a < 0 then (0 − a) ∈ P so −a ∈ P . If 0 < b then (b − 0) ∈ P so b ∈ P . Consequently (−a)b = −(ab) ∈ P . Thus (0 − ab) ∈ P so ab < 0. 22. Either a/b ∈ P or −(a/b) ∈ P . If −(a/b) ∈ P , then b(−a/b) = −a ∈ P , contradicting the hypothesis that a ∈ P , so a/b ∈ P .
1 23. Now 0 < a implies that a = (a − 0) ∈ P , and a < 1 implies that (1 − a) ∈ P . Either ( a − 1) ∈ P or 1 1 1 1 (1 − a ) ∈ P . If (1 − a ) ∈ P , then (a − 1) = a(1 − a ) ∈ P , contradicting (1 − a) ∈ P . Thus ( a − 1) ∈ P 1 so 1 < a . 1 24. Now −1 < a implies that (a + 1) ∈ P and a < 0 implies that (0 − a) = −a ∈ P . If ( a + 1) ∈ P , then 1 1 1 (−1 − a) = −a( a + 1) is in P , contradicting (a + 1) ∈ P . Therefore −( a + 1) = (−1 − a ) ∈ P , so 1 a < −1. 25. Closure: Let a , b ∈ P and let φ(a) = a and φ(b) = b . Because φ is one to one and P = φ[P ], we must have a ∈ P and b ∈ P . Therefore ab ∈ P , so φ(ab) = φ(a)φ(b) = a b ∈ P . Likewise (a + b) ∈ P so φ(a + b) = φ(a) + φ(b) = (a + b ) ∈ P . Trichotomy: Let c ∈ R and let c be the unique element of R such that φ(c) = c . If c ∈ P , then φ(c) = c ∈ P . If c = 0, then φ(c) = c = 0 . If −c ∈ P , then φ(−c) = −φ(c) = −c ∈ P . The fact that only one of c ∈ P, c = 0, −c ∈ P holds shows that only one of c ∈ P , c = 0 , −c ∈ P holds. Furthermore, a < b in R if and only if (b − a) ∈ P , which is true if and only if φ(b − a) = (φ(b) − φ(a)) ∈ P , which is true if and only if φ(a) < φ(b). 26. Closure: Let a, b ∈ P ∩ S . Then ab ∈ P by closure of P and ab ∈ S by closure of S as a subring. Thus ab ∈ P ∩ S . Likewise, (a + b) ∈ P and (a + b) ∈ S so (a + b) ∈ P ∩ S . Trichotomy: Let s ∈ S . Then s ∈ R so either s = 0, s ∈ P , or −s ∈ P , and only one of these holds. Thus in S , either s = 0, s ∈ S ∩ P , or −s ∈ S ∩ P , and only one of these holds. 27. Let < be a relation on R satisfying trichotomy, transitivity, and isotonicity as stated in Theorem 25.5. Let P = {x ∈ R  0 < x}. Closure: Let x, y ∈ P . Then 0 < x and 0 < y . By the second condition in isotonicity, we have 0y < xy so 0 < xy and xy ∈ P . Also, from 0 < x and the ﬁrst condition of isotonicity, we obtain 0 + y < x + y , so y < x + y . From 0 < y and y < x + y , we obtain 0 < x + y by transitivity. Trichotomy for P: Let x ∈ R. By trichotomy for <, precisely one of 0 < x, 0 = x, or x < 0 holds. Now 0 < x if and only if x ∈ P . By isotonicity, x < 0 implies (−x + x) < (−x + 0). Again by isotonicity, (−x + x) < (−x + 0) implies x + (−x + x) < x + (−x + 0), that is, it implies x < 0. Thus x < 0 if and only if 0 < −x, which is true if and only if −x ∈ P . By isotonicity, a < b for the given < on R if and only if −a + a < −a + b, that is, if and only if 0 < b − a. By deﬁnition of P, 0 < b − a if and only if (b − a) ∈ P , which is true if and only if a <P b. Thus < and <P are the same relation on R. 26. Homomorphisms and Factor Rings 89 28. Note that if a < 0 and b < 0, then −a ∈ P and −b ∈ P so ab = (−a)(−b) ∈ P , so 0 < ab. It follows at once that a product of an even number of elements xi where every xi < 0 is an element of P . Thus any product of an even number of elements, all of which are greater than zero or all of which are less than zero, is sure to be positive. From a2n+1 = b2n+1 , we obtain (a2 )n a = (b2 )n b and we see the either a < 0 and b < 0, or 0 < a and 0 < b. Consider the factorization 0 = a2n+1 − b2n+1 = (a − b)(a2n + a2n−1 b + a2n−2 b2 + · · · + b2n ). Every summand in parentheses is the product of an even number of factors that are either a or b. Because a and b are either both greater than zero or both less than zero, every summand in parentheses is positive, and thus their sum is positive, and hence nonzero. Because R has no zero divisors, we must have a − b = 0, so a = b. 29. In the chart following, the order in the left column indicates the order in which the indeterminants were adjoined to R, and whether the order when they were adjoined was Phigh or Plow . The other columns indicate whether the inequality the top of the column is true (T) or false (F). Because no two rows have the same sequence of T’s and F’s, the orderings are all diﬀerent. Ordering xhigh, y high xhigh, y low xlow, y high xlow, y low y high, xhigh y high, xlow y low, xhigh y low, xlow x<y T F T F F T F T 1<x T T F F T F T F 1<y T F T F T T F F xy < 1 F T F T F T F T 26. Homomorphisms and Factor Rings
1. Let φ be a homomorphism of Z × Z into Z × Z. Suppose that φ(1, 0) = (m, n). From φ(1, 0) = φ[(1, 0)(1, 0)], we see that m2 = m and n2 = n, so φ(1, 0) must be one of the elements (0, 0), (1, 0), (0, 1), or (1, 1). By a similar argument , φ(0, 1) must be one of these same four elements. We also must have φ(1, 0)φ(0, 1) = φ(0, 0) = (0, 0). This gives just 9 possibilities. φ(1, 0) = (1, 0) while φ(0, 1) = (0, 0) or (0, 1), φ(1, 0) = (0, 1) while φ(0, 1) = (0, 0) or (1, 0), φ(1, 0) = (1, 1) while φ(0, 1) = (0, 0), and φ(1, 0) = (0,0) while φ(0, 1) = (0, 0), (1, 0), (0, 1) or (1, 1). It is easily checked that each of these does give rise to a homomorphism. 2. In order for Zn to contain a subring isomorphic to Z2 , we see that Zn must contain a nonzero element s such that s + s = 0 and s2 = s, so that s can play the role of 1 in Z2 . From s + s = 0, we see that n must be even. Let n = 2m, so that the group {0, m}, +n Z2 , +2 . In order to have {0, m}, ·n Z2 , ·2 , we must have mm = m. In Zn , we have 2 · m = 0, 3 · m = (2 · m) + m = m, 4 · m = 0, 5 · m = m, etc. Thus we have mm = m in Zn if and only if m is an odd integer. Hence Zn contains a subring isomorphic to Z2 if and only if n = 2m for an odd integer m. 90 26. Homomorphisms and Factor Rings 3. Because the ideals must be additive subgroups, by group theory we see that the possibilities are restricted to the cyclic additive subgroups 0 1 2 3 4 6 = {0}, = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, 10, 11}, = {0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10}, = {0, 3, 6, 9}, = {0, 4, 8}, and = {0, 6}. It is easily checked that each of these is closed under multiplication by any element of Z12 , so they are ideals. We have Z12 / 0 Z12 , Z12 / 1 {0}, Z12 / 2 Z2 , Z12 / 3 Z3 , Z12 / 4 Z4 , and Z12 / 6 Z6 . 4. Here are the tables for addition and multiplication in 2Z/8Z. + 8Z 2 + 8Z 4 + 8Z 6 + 8Z 8Z 8Z 2 + 8Z 4 + 8Z 6 + 8Z 2 + 8Z 2 + 8Z 4 + 8Z 6 + 8Z 8Z 4 + 8Z 4 + 8Z 6 + 8Z 8Z 2 + 8Z 6 + 8Z 6+8Z 8Z 2 + 8Z 4 + 8Z · 8Z 2 + 8Z 4 + 8Z 6 + 8Z 8Z 8Z 8Z 8Z 8Z 2 + 8Z 8Z 4 + 8Z 8Z 4 + 8Z 4 + 8Z 8Z 8Z 8Z 8Z 6 + 8Z 8Z 4 + 8Z 8Z 4 + 8Z The rings 2Z/8Z and Z4 are not isomorphic, for 2Z/8Z has no unity while Z4 does. 5. The deﬁnition is incorrect; φ must map R onto R . An isomorphism of a ring R with a ring R is a homomorphism φ : R → R mapping R onto R such that Ker(φ) = {0}. 6. The deﬁnition is correct. 7. The deﬁnition is incorrect. The set description is nonsense. The kernel of a homomorphism φ mapping a ring R into a ring R is {r ∈ R  φ(r) = 0 }. 8. The diﬀerentiation map δ is not a homomorphism; δ (f (x)g (x)) = f (x)g (x) + f (x)g (x) = f (x)g (x) = δ (f (x))δ (g (x)). To connect this with Example 26.12, we note that the kernel of δ as an additive group homomorphism is the set of all constant functions. Example 26.12 shows that this is not an ideal, so δ cannot be a ring homomorphism. 9. Let φ : Z → Z × Z be deﬁned by φ(n) = (n, 0). Then Z has unity 1, but φ(1) = (1, 0) is not the unity of Z × Z; the unity of Z × Z is (1, 1). 10. T F T F T F T T T T 11. (See the text answer.) 12. We know that Z/2Z Z2 , which is a ﬁeld. Z4 , where 2 is a divisor of 0. Z which has no divisors of zero. 13. Z is an integral domain. Z/4Z 14. Z × Z has divisors of zero, but (Z × Z)/(Z × {0}) 26. Homomorphisms and Factor Rings 15. {(n, n)  n ∈ Z} is a subring of Z × Z, but it is not an ideal because (2, 1)(n, n) = (2n, n). 91 16. a. The notations r and s would be used to denote elements of R, not of R/N . The student probably does not understand the structure of a factor ring. b. Assume that R/N is commutative. Then (r + N )(s + N ) = (s + N )(r + N ) for all r, s ∈ R. c. Let r, s ∈ R. Then (r + N )(s + N ) = (s + N )(r + N ) for all r, s ∈ R if and only if rs + N = sr + N for all r, s ∈ R, so if and only if (rs + N ) − (sr + N ) = N for all r, s ∈ R, so if and only if (rs − sr) + N = N for all r, s ∈ R, so if and only (rs − sr) ∈ N for all r, s ∈ R. √ √ √ √ √ √ 17. Because (a + b 2)+(c + d 2) = (a + c)+(b + d) 2 and 0 = 0+0 2 and −(a + b 2) = (−a)+(−b) 2, we see that R is closed under addition, has √ additive identity, and contains additive inverses. Thus an √ √ R, + is a group. Now (a + b 2)(c + d 2) = (ac + 2bd) + (ad + bc) 2, so R is closed under multiplication and is thus a ring. We will show that R is a ring by showing that it is the image of R under a homomorphism φ : R → M2 . Let √ φ(a + b 2) = Then √ √ √ φ((a + b 2) + (c + d 2)) = φ((a + c) + (b + d) 2 a + c 2(b + d) a 2b = = b+d a+c ba √ √ = φ(a + b 2) + φ(c + d 2) and √ √ √ φ((a + b 2)(c + d 2)) = φ((ac + 2bd) + (ad + bc) 2) ac + 2bd 2(ad + bc)) = = ad + bc ac + 2bd √ √ = φ(a + b 2)φ(c + d 2). a 2b ba . + c 2d dc a 2b ba c 2d dc √ This shows that φ is a homomorphism. Because R = φ[R], we see that R is a ring. If φ(a + b 2) is the matrix with all entries zero, then we must have a = b = 0, so Ker(φ) = 0 and φ is one to one. Thus φ is an isomorphism of R onto R . 18. Let φ : F → R be a homomorphism of a ﬁeld F into a ring R, and let N = Ker(φ). If N = {0}, then N contains a nonzero element u of F which is a unit. Because N is an ideal, we see that u−1 u = 1 is in N , and then N contains a1 = a for all a ∈ F . Thus N is either {0}, in which case φ is one to one by group theory, or N = F , so that φ maps every element of F onto 0. 19. By Exercise 49 of Section 13, ψφ(r + s) = ψφ(r) + ψφ(s) for all r, s ∈ R. For multiplication, we note that ψφ(rs) = ψ (φ(rs)) = ψ (φ(r)φ(s)) = [ψφ(r)][ψφ(s)] because both φ and ψ are homomorphisms. Thus ψφ is also a homomorphism. 92 26. Homomorphisms and Factor Rings n ai bn−i is valid. If p is a prime 20. In a commutative ring R, the binomial expansion (a + b)n = n i=0 i p and n = p, then all the binomial coeﬃcients i for 1 ≤ i ≤ p − 1 are divisible by p, and thus the p term i ai bp−i = 0 for a and b in a commutative ring of characteristic p. This shows at once that φp (a + b) = (a + b)p = ap + bp = φp (a) + φp (b). Also φp (ab) = (ab)p = ap bp because R is commutative. But ap bp = φp (a)φp (b), so φ is a homomorphism. 21. By Theorem 26.3, we know φ(1) is unity for φ[R]. Suppose that R has unity 1 . Then φ(1) = φ(1)1 = φ(1)φ(1) so that we have φ(1)1 − φ(1)φ(1) = 0 . Consequently, φ(1)(1 − φ(1)) = 0 . Now if φ(1) = 0 , then φ(a) = φ(1a) = φ(1)φ(a) = 0 φ(a) = 0 for all a ∈ R, so φ[R] = {0 } contrary to hypothesis. Thus φ(1) = 0 . Because R has no divisors of zero, we conclude from φ(1)(1 − φ(1)) = 0 that 1 − φ(1) = 0 , so φ(1) is the unity 1 of R . 22. a. Because the ideal N is also a subring of R, Theorem 26.3 shows that φ[N ] is a subring of R . To show that is is an ideal of φ[R], we show that φ(r)φ[N ] ⊆ φ[N ] and φ[N ]φ(r) ⊆ φ[N ] for all r ∈ R. Let r ∈ R and let s ∈ N . Then rs ∈ N and sr ∈ N because N is an ideal. Applying φ, we see that φ(r)φ(s) = φ(rs) ∈ φ[N ] and φ(s)φ(r) = φ(sr) ∈ φ[N ]. b. Let φ : Z → Q be the injection map given by φ(n) = n for all n ∈ Z. Now 2Z is an ideal of Z, but 2Z is not an ideal of Q because (1/2)2 = 1 and 1 is not in 2Z. c. Let N be an ideal of R or of φ[R]. We know that φ−1 [N ] is at least a subring of R by Theorem 26.3. We must show that rφ−1 [N ] ⊆ φ−1 [N ] and that φ−1 [N ]r ⊆ φ−1 [N ] for all r ∈ R. Let s ∈ φ−1 [N ], so that φ(s) ∈ N . Then φ(rs) = φ(r)φ(s) and φ(r)φ(s) ∈ N because N is an ideal. This shows that rs ∈ φ−1 [N ], so rφ−1 [N ] ⊆ φ−1 [N ]. Also φ(sr) = φ(s)φ(r) and φ(s)φ(r) ∈ N because N is an ideal. This shows that sr ∈ φ−1 [N ], so φ−1 [N ]r ⊆ φ−1 [N ]. 23. If f (x1 , · · · , xn ) and g (x1 , · · · , xn ) both have every element of S as a zero, then so do their sum, product, and any multiple of one of them by any element h(x1 , · · · , xn ) in F [x1 , · · · , xn ]. Because the possible multipliers from F [x1 , · · · , xn ] include 0 and 1, we see that the set NS is indeed a subring closed under multiplication by elements of F [x1 , · · · , xn ], and thus is an ideal of this polynomial ring. 24. Let N be an ideal of a ﬁeld F . If N contains a nonzero element a, then N contains (1/a)a = 1, because N is an ideal. But then N contains s1 = s for every s ∈ F , so N = F . Thus N is either {0} or F . If N = F , then F/N = F/F is the trivial ring of one element. If N = {0}, then F/N = F/{0} is isomorphic to F , because each element s + {0} of F/{0} can be renamed s. 25. If N = R, then the unity 1 of R is not an element of N , for if 1 ∈ N , then so is r1 = r for all r ∈ R. Thus 1 + N = N , that is, 1 + N is not the zero element of R/N . Clearly (1 + N )(r + N ) = r + N = (r + N )(1 + N ) in R/N , which shows that 1 + N is unity for R/N . 26. Let x, y ∈ Ia so ax = ay = 0. Then a(x + y ) = ax + ay = 0 + 0 = 0 so (x + y ) ∈ Ia . Also, a(xy ) = (ax)y = 0y = 0 so xy ∈ Ia . Because a0 = 0 and a(−x) = −(ax) = −0 = 0, we see that Ia contains 0 and additive inverses of each of its elements x, so Ia is a subring of R. (Note that thus far, we have not used commutativity in R.) Let r ∈ R. Then a(xr) = (ax)r = 0r = 0 so xr ∈ Ia , and because R is commutative, we see that a(rx) = r(ax) = r0 = 0, so rx ∈ Ia . Thus Ia is an ideal of R. 27. Let {Ni  i ∈ I } be a collection of ideals in R. Each of these ideals is a subring of R, and Exercise 49 of Section 18 shows that N = i∈I Ni is also a subring of R. We need only show that N is closed under multiplication by elements of R. Let r ∈ R and let s ∈ N . Then s ∈ Ni for all i ∈ I . Because each Ni is an ideal of R, we see that rs ∈ Ni and sr ∈ Ni for all i ∈ I . Thus rs ∈ N . 26. Homomorphisms and Factor Rings 93 28. By Exercise 39 of Section 14, the map φ∗ : R/N → R /N deﬁned by φ∗ (r + N ) = φ(r) + N is well deﬁned and satisﬁes the additive requirements for a homomorphism. Now we have φ∗ ((r +N )(s+N )) = φ∗ (rs + N ) = φ(rs) + N = [φ(r)φ(s)] + N = [φ(r) + N ][φ(s) + N ] = [φ∗ (r + N ][φ∗ (s + N ] so φ∗ also satisﬁes the multiplicative condition, and is a ring homomorphism. 29. The condition that φ maps R onto a nonzero ring R shows that no unit of R is in Ker(φ), for if Ker(φ) contains a unit u, then it contains (ru−1 )u = r for all r ∈ R, which would mean that Ker(φ) = R and R would be the zero ring. Let u be a unit in R. Because φ[R] = R , we know that φ(1) is unity 1 in R . From uu−1 = u−1 u = 1, we obtain φ(uu−1 ) = φ(u)φ(u−1 ) = 1 and φ(u−1 u) = φ(u−1 )φ(u) = 1 . Thus φ(u) is a unit of R , and its inverse is φ(u−1 ). 30. Let {0} be the collection of all nilpotent elements of R. Let a, b ∈ {0}. Then there exist positive integers m and n such that am = bn = 0. In a commutative ring, the binomial expansion is valid. Consider (a + b)m+n . In the binomial expansion, each summand contains a term ai bm+n−i . Now either i ≥ m so that ai = 0 or m + n − i ≥ n so that bm+n−i = 0. Thus each summand of (a + b)m+n is zero, so (a + b)m+n = 0 and {0} is closed under addition. For multiplication, we note that because R is commutative, (ab)mn = (am )n (bn )m = (0)(0) = 0, so ab ∈ {0}. If s ∈ R, then (sa)m = am sm = 0sm = 0 so {0} is also closed under left and right multiplication by elements of R. Taking x = 0, we see that 0 ∈ {0}. Also (−a)m is either am or −am , so (−a)m = 0 and −a ∈ {0}. Thus {0} is an ideal of R. 31. The nilradical of Z12 is {0, 6}. The nilradical of Z is {0} and the nilradical of Z32 is {0, 2, 4, 6, 8, · · · , 30}. 32. Suppose (a + N )m = N in R/N . Then am ∈ N . Because N is the nilradical of R, there exists n ∈ Z+ such that (am )n = 0. But then amn = 0 so a ∈ N . Thus a + N = N so {N } is the nilradical of R/N . 33. Let a ∈ R. Because the nilradical of R/N is R/N , there is some positive integer m such that (a + N )m = N . Then am ∈ N . Because every element of N is nilpotent, there exists a positive integer n such that (am )n = 0 in R. But then amn = 0, so a is an element of the nilradical of R. Thus the nilradical of R is R. √ 34. Let a, b ∈ N . Then am ∈ N and bn ∈ N for some positive integers m and n. Precisely as in the answer to Exercise 30, we argue that (a +√) ∈ N , ab ∈ N , and also that sa ∈ N and as ∈ N for any b s ∈ R. Because 01 ∈ N , we see that 0 ∈ N . Also (−a)m is either am or −(am ), and both am and √ √ −(am ) are in N . Thus −a ∈ N . This shows that N is an ideal of R. √ 35. a. Let R = Z and let N = 4Z. Then N = 2Z = 4Z. √ b. Let R = Z and let N = 2Z. Then N = 2Z. √ 36. If N /N is viewed as a subring of R/N , then it is the nilradical of R/N , in the sense of the deﬁnition in Exercise 30. 37. We have φ[(a + bi) + (c + di)] = φ[(a + c) + (d + b)i] = = ab −b a + cd −d c a+c b+d −b − d a + c = φ(a + bi) + φ(c + di). 94 Also 27. Prime and Maximal Ideals φ[(a + bi)(c + di)] = φ[(ac − bd) + (ad + bc)i] = = ab −b a cd −d c ac − bd ad + bc −ad − bc ac − bd = φ(a + bi)φ(c + di). Thus φ is a homomorphism. It is obvious that φ is one to one. Hence φ exhibits an isomorpism of C with the subring φ[C], which therefore must be a ﬁeld. 38. a. For x, y ∈ R, we have λa (x + y ) = a(x + y ) = ax + ay = λa (x) + λa (y ). Thus λa is a homomorphism of R, + with itself, that is, an element of End( R, + ) b. Note that for a, b ∈ R, we have (λa λb )(x) = λa (λb (x)) = λa (bx) = a(bx) = (ab)x = λab (x). Thus λa λb = λab and R is closed under multiplication. We also have (λa + λb )(x) = λa (x) + λb (x) = ax + bx = (a + b)x = λa+b (x), so λa + λb = λa+b . Thus R is closed under addition. From what we have shown, it follows that λ0 + λa = λ0+a = λa and λa + λ0 = λa+0 = λa so λ0 acts as additive identity. Finally, λ−a + λa = λ−a+a = λ0 and λa + λ−a = λa−a = λ0 so R contains an additive inverse of each element. Thus R is a ring. c. Let φ : R → R be deﬁned by φ(a) = λa . By our work in Part(b), we see that φ(a + b) = λa+b = λa + λb = φ(a) + φ(b), and φ(ab) = λab = λa λb = φ(a)φ(b). Thus φ is a homomorphism, and is clearly onto R . Suppose that φ(a) = φ(b). Then ax = bx for all x ∈ R. Because R has unity (and this is the only place where that hypothesis is needed), we have in particular a1 = b1 so a = b. Thus φ is one to one and onto R , so it is an isomorphism. 27. Prime and Maximal Ideals
1. Because a ﬁnite integral domain is a ﬁeld, the prime and the maximal ideals coincide. The ideals {0, 2, 4} and {0, 3} are both prime and maximal because the factor rings are isomorphic to the ﬁelds Z2 and Z3 respectively. 2. Because a ﬁnite integral domain is a ﬁeld, the prime and the maximal ideals coincide. The prime and maximal ideals are {0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10} and {0, 3, 6, 9} because the factor rings are isomorphic to the ﬁelds Z2 and Z3 respectively. 3. Because a ﬁnite integral domain is a ﬁeld, the prime and the maximal ideals coincide. The prime and maximal ideals are {(0, 0), (1, 0)} and {(0, 0), (0, 1)} because the factor rings are isomorphic to the ﬁeld Z2 . 4. A ﬁnite integral domain is a ﬁeld, so prime and maximal ideals coincide. The prime and maximal ideals are {(0, 0), (0, 1), (0, 2), (0, 3)} and {(0, 0), (1, 0), (0, 2), (1, 2))} leading to factor rings isomorphic to the ﬁeld Z2 . 5. By Theorem 27.25, we need only ﬁnd all values c such that x2 + c is irreducible over Z3 . Let f (x) = x2 . Then f (0) = 0, f (1) = 1, and f (2) = 1. We must ﬁnd c ∈ Z3 such that 0 + c and 1 + c are both nonzero. Clearly c = 1 is the only choice. 27. Prime and Maximal Ideals 95 6. By Theorem 27.25, we need only ﬁnd all values c such that x3 + x2 + c is irreducible over Z3 . Let f (x) = x3 + x2 . Then f (0) = 0, f (1) = 2, and f (2) = 0. We must ﬁnd c ∈ Z3 such that 0 + c and 2 + c are both nonzero. Clearly c = 2 is the only choice. 7. By Theorem 27.25, we need only ﬁnd all values c such that g (x) = x3 + cx2 + 1 is irreducible over Z3 . When c = 0, g (2) = 0 and when c = 1, g (1) = 0, butwhen c = 2, g (x) has no zeros. Thus c = 2 is the only choice. 8. By Theorem 27.25, we need only ﬁnd all values c such that x2 + x + c is irreducible over Z5 . Let f (x) = x2 + x. Then f (0) = 0, f (1) = 2, f (2) = 1, f (3) = 2, and f (4) = 0. We must ﬁnd c ∈ Z5 such that 0 + c, 1 + c,and 2 + c are all nonzero. Clearly c = 1 and c = 2 both work. 9. By Theorem 27.25, we need only ﬁnd all values c such that g (x) = x2 + cx + 1 is irreducible over Z5 . We compute that when c = 0, g (2) = 0, when c = 1, g (x) has no zeros, when c = 2, g (−1) = 0, when c = 3, g (1) = 0, and when c = 4, g (x) has no zeros. Thus c can be either 1 or 4. 10. The deﬁnition is incorrect. We need to specify that the ideals are not R. A maximal ideal of a ring R is an ideal M such that there is no ideal N of R such that M ⊂ N ⊂ R. 11. The deﬁnition is incorrect nonsense. A prime ideal of a commutative ring R is an ideal N such that if a, b ∈ R and ab ∈ N , then either a ∈ N or b ∈ N . 12. The deﬁnition is correct, although this is not the way it is phrased in the text. 13. The deﬁnition is correct, although this is not the way it is phrased in the text. 14. F T T F T T T F T F 15. Z × 2Z is a maximal ideal of Z × Z, for the factor ring is isomorphic to Z2 , which is a ﬁeld. 16. Z × {0} is a prime ideal of Z × Z that is not maximal, for the factor ring is isomorphic to Z which is an integral domain, but not a ﬁeld. 17. Z × 4Z is a proper ideal of Z × Z that is not prime, for the factor ring is isomorphic to Z4 which has divisors of zero. 18. Q/ x2 − 5x + 6 is not a ﬁeld, because x2 − 5x + 6 = (x − 2)(x − 3) is not an irreducible polynomial, so the ideal x2 − 5x + 6 is not maximal. 19. Q/ x2 − 6x + 6 is a ﬁeld, because the polynomial x2 − 6x + 6 is irreducible by the Eisenstein condition with p = 2 or p = 3, so x2 − 6x + 6 is a maximal ideal. 20. If a + M has no multiplicative inverse in R/M , then the principal ideal generated by a + M does not contain 1 + M , so it is not R/M . Then the inverse image of this ideal under the canonical homomorphism of R into R/M would be an ideal strictly between M and R. 21. If there were an ideal N strictly between the ideal M and the ring R, then its image under the canonical homomorphism of R into R/M would be an ideal of R/M strictly between {0 + M } and R/M . This is impossible because there are no nontrivial proper ideals in a ﬁeld. 96 27. Prime and Maximal Ideals 22. If F is a ﬁeld, then the division algorithm can be used to show that every ideal N in F [x] is principal, generated by any element of N of minimum possible degee N . 23. Because a maximal ideal in F [x] is a prime ideal, a factorization of p(x) into two polymials both having degree less than deg(p(x)) would mean that p(x) would contain a polynomial of degree less than the degree of p(x), which is impossible. 24. Theorem 19.11 shows that every ﬁnite integral domain is a ﬁeld. Let N be a prime ideal in a ﬁnite commutative ring R with unity. Then R/N is a ﬁnite integral domain, and therefore a ﬁeld, and therefore N is a maximal ideal. 25. Yes, it is possible; Z2 × Z3 contains a subring isomorphic to Z2 and one isomorphic to Z3 . 26. Yes, it is possible; Z2 × Z3 contains a subring isomorphic to Z2 and one isomorphic to Z3 . 27. No, it is not possible. Enlarging the integal domain to a ﬁeld of quotients, we would then have a ﬁeld containing (up to isomorphism) two diﬀerent prime ﬁelds Zp and Zq . The unity of each of these ﬁelds would be a zero of x2 − x, but this polynomial has only one nonzero zero in a ﬁeld, namely the unity of the ﬁeld. 28. Let M be a maximal ideal of R and suppose that ab ∈ M but a is not in M . Let N = {ra + m  r ∈ R, m ∈ M }. From (r1 a + m1 ) + (r2 a + m2 ) = (r1 + r2 )a + (m1 + m2 ), we see that N is closed under addition. From r(r1 a + m1 ) = (rr1 )a + (rm1 ) and the fact that M is an ideal, we see that N is closed under multiplication by elements of R, and is of course closed itself under multiplication. Also 0 = 0a + 0 is in N and furthermore (−r)a + (−m) = −(ra) − m = −(ra + m) is in N . Thus N is an ideal. Clearly N contains M , but N = M because 1a + 0 = a is in N but a is not in M . Because M is maximal, we must have N = R. Therefore 1 ∈ N , so 1 = ra + m for some r ∈ R and m ∈ M . Multiplying by b, we ﬁnd that b = rab + mb. But ab and mb are both in M , so b ∈ M . We have shown that if ab ∈ M and a is not in M , then b ∈ M . This is the deﬁnition of a prime ideal. 29. We use the addendum to Theorem 26.3 stated in the ﬁnal paragraph of Section 26 and proved in Exercise 22 of that section. Suppose that N is any ideal of R. By the addendum mentioned and using the canonical homomorphism γ : R → R/N , if M is a proper ideal of R properly containing N , then γ [M ] is a proper nontrivial ideal of R/N . This shows that if M is not maximal, then R/N is not a simple ring. On the other hand, suppose that R/N is not a simple ring, and let N be a proper nontrivial ideal of R/N . By the addendum mentioned, γ −1 [N ] is an ideal of R, and of course γ −1 [N ] = R because N is a proper ideal of R/N , and also γ −1 [N ] properly contains N because N is nontrival in R/N . Thus γ −1 [N ] is a proper ideal of R that properly contains N , so N is not maximal. We have proved p if and only if q by proving not p if and only if not q . This exercise is the straightforward analogue of Theorem 15.18 for groups, that is, a maximal ideal of a ring is analogous to a maximal normal subgroup of a group. 30. Every ideal of F [x] is principal by Theorem 26.24. Suppose f (x) = {0} is a proper prime ideal of F [x]. Then every polynomial in f (x) has degree greater than or equal to the degree of f (x). Thus if f (x) = g (x)h(x) in F [x] where the degrees of both g (x) and h(x) are less than the degree of f (x), neither g (x) nor h(x) can be in f (x) . This would contradict the fact that f (x) is a prime ideal, so no such factorization of f (x) in F [x] can exist, that is, f (x) is irreducible in F [x]. By Theorem 26.25, f (x) is therefore a maximal ideal of F [x]. 31. If f (x) divides g (x), then g (x) = f (x)q (x) for some q (x) ∈ F [x], so g (x) ∈ f (x) because this ideal consists of all multiples of f (x). Conversely, if g (x) ∈ f (x) , then g (x) is some multiple h(x)f (x) of f (x) for h(x) ∈ F [x]. The equation g (x) = h(x)f (x) is the deﬁnition of f (x) dividing g (x). 27. Prime and Maximal Ideals 32. The equation [r1 (x)f (x) + s1 (x)g (x)] + [r2 (x)f (x) + s2 (x)g (x)] = [r1 (x) + r2 (x)]f (x) + [s1 (x) + s2 (x)]g (x) shows that N is closed under addition. The equation [r(x)f (x) + s(x)(g (x)]h(x) = h(x)[r(x)f (x) + s(x)g (x)] = [h(x)r(x)]f (x) + [h(x)s(x)]g (x) 97 shows that N is closed under multiplication by any h(x) ∈ F [x]; in particular N is closed under multiplication. Now 0 = 0f (x) + 0g (x) and −[r(x)f (x) + s(x)g (x)] = [−r(x)]f (x) + [−s(x)]g (x) are in N , so we see that N is an ideal. Suppose now that f (x) and g (x) have diﬀerent degrees and thatN = F [x]. Suppose that f (x) is irreducible. By Theorem 26.25, we know that then f (x) is a maximal ideal of F [x]. But clearly f (x) ⊆ N . Because N = F [x], we must have f (x) = N . In particular g (x) ∈ N so g (x) = f (x)q (x). Because f (x) and g (x) have diﬀerent degrees, we see that g (x) = f (x)q (x) must be a factorization of g (x) into polynomials of smaller degree than the degree of g (x). Hence g (x) is not irreducible. 33. Given that the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra holds, let N be the smallest ideal of C[x] containing r polynomials f1 (x), f2 (x), · · · , fr (x). Because every ideal in C[x] is a principal ideal, we have N = h(x) for some polynomial h(x) ∈ C[x]. Let α1 , α2 , · · · , αs be all the zeros in C of h(x), and let αi be a zero of multiplicity mi . By the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra, h(x) must factor into linear factors in C[x], so that h(x) = c(x − α1 )m1 (x − α2 )m2 · · · (x − αs )ms . Note each αi is a zero of every fj (x) because each fj (x) is a multiple of the generator h(x) of N . Thus by hypothesis, each αi is a zero of g (x). The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra shows that g (x) = k (x)(x − α1 )(x − α2 ) · · · (x − αs ) for some polynomial k (x) ∈ C[x]. Let m be the maximum of m1 , m2 , · · · , ms . Then g (x)m has each (x − αi )mi as a factor, and thus has h(x) as a factor, so g (x)m ∈ h(x) = N . Conversely, let the Nullstellensatz for C[x] hold. Suppose that the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra does not hold, so that there exists a nonconstant polynomial f1 (x) in C[x] having no zero in C. Then every zero of f1 (x) is also a zero of every polynomial in C[x], because there are no zeros of f1 (x). By the Nullstellensatz for C[x], every element of C[x] has the property that some power of it is in f1 (x) , so that some power of every polynomial in C[x] has f1 (x) as a factor. This is certainly impossible, because 1 ∈ C[x] and f1 (x) is a nonconstant polynomial and thus is not a factor of 1n = 1 for any positive integer n. Thus there can be no such polynomial f1 (x) in C[x], and the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra holds. 34. a. Let a1 , a2 ∈ A and b1 , b2 ∈ B . Then (a1 + b1 ) + (a2 + b2 ) = (a1 + a2 ) + (b1 + b2 ) because addition is commutative. This shows that A + B is closed under addition. For r ∈ R, we know that ra1 ∈ A and rb1 ∈ B , so r(a1 + b1 ) = ra1 + rb1 is in A + B . A similar argument with multiplication on the right shows that (a1 + b1 )r = a1 r + b1 r is in A + B . Thus A + B is closed under multiplication on the left or right by elements of R, in particular, multiplication is closed on A + B . Because 0 = 0 + 0 ∈ A + B and −(a1 + b1 ) = (−a1 ) + (−b1 ) is in A + B , we see that A + B is an ideal. b. Because a + 0 = a is in A + B and 0 + b = b is in A + B for all a ∈ A and b ∈ B , we see that A ⊆ (A + B ) and B ⊆ (A + B ). 35. a. It is clear that AB is closed under addition; [a sum of m products of the form ai bi ] + [a sum of n products of the form aj bk ] is a sum of m + n prodcts of this form, and hence is in AB . Because A 98 27. Prime and Maximal Ideals and B are ideals, we see that r(ai bi ) = (rai )bi and (ai bi )r = ai (bi r) are again of the form aj bj . The distributive laws then show that each sum of products ai bi when multiplied on the left or right by r ∈ R produces again a sum of such products. Thus AB is closed under multiplication by elements of R, and hence is closed itself under multiplication. Because 0 = 00 and −(ai bi ) = (−ai )(bi ) are in AB , we see that AB is indeed an ideal. b.Regarding ai bi as ai in A multiplied on the right by an element bi of R, we see that ai bi is in the ideal A. Regarding ai bi as bi in B multiplied on the left by an element ai of R, we see that ai bi is in B , so ai bi ∈ A ∩ B . Because A and B are closed under addition, we see that any element of AB is contained in both A and B , so AB ⊆ A ∩ B . 36. Let x, y ∈ A : B , and let b ∈ B . Then xb ∈ A and yb ∈ A for all b ∈ B , so (x + y )b = xb + yb is in A for all b ∈ B , because A is closed under addition. Thus A : B is closed under addition. Turning to multiplication, let r ∈ R. We want to show that xr and rx are in A : B , that is, that (xr)b and (rx)b are in A for all b ∈ B . Because multiplication is commutative by hypothesis, it suﬃces to show that xbr is in A for all b ∈ B . But because x ∈ A : B , we know that xb ∈ A and A is an ideal, so (xb)r ∈ A. Thus A : B is closed under multiplication by elements in R; in particular, it is itself closed under multipliction. Because 0b = 0 and 0 ∈ A, we see that 0 ∈ A : B . Because (−x)b = −(xb) and xb ∈ A implies (−xb) ∈ A, we see that A : B contains the additive identity and additive inverse of each of its elements. 37. Clearly S is closed under addition, contains the zero matrix, and contains the additive inverse of each of its elements. The computation ab 00 cd 00 = ac ad 00 shows that S is closed under multiplication, so it is a subring of M2 (F ). The computations 01 10 and ab 00 cd ef = ac + be ad + bf 0 0 ab 00 = 00 ab show that S is not closed under left multiplication by elements of M2 (F ), but is closed under right multiplication by those elements. Thus S is a right deal, but not a left ideal, of M2 (F ). 38. Let R = M2 (Z2 ). The computations 01 10 ab cd = cd ab and ab cd 01 10 = ba dc show that for every matrix in an ideal N of R, the matrix obtained by interchanging its rows and the matrix obtained by interchanging its columns are again in N . Thus if N contains any one of the four matrices having 1 for one entry and 0 for all the others, then N contains all four such matrices, and hence all nonzero matrices because any matrix in R is a sum of such matrices and N is closed under addition. By interchanging rows and columns, every nonzero matix with at least two nonzero entries can be brought to one of the following forms: 28. Gr¨bner Bases for Ideals o two zero entries: 11 00 01 11 , 10 10 , 10 01 11 11 99 one zero entry: no zero entry: . The following computations then show that every nontrivial ideal of R must contain one of the four matrices with only one nonzero entry, and hence must be all of R: 11 00 10 00 10 00 11 11 10 00 10 01 = 10 00 10 00 , 10 00 10 00 10 10 01 11 = 10 00 01 00 , = , = , 10 00 = 10 . 00 28. Gr¨bner Bases for Ideals o
1. −3x3 + 7x2 y 2 z − 5x2 yz 3 + 2xy 3 z 5 3. 2x2 yz 2 − 2xy 2 z 2 − 7x + 3y + 10z 3 5. 2z 5 y 3 x − 5z 3 yx2 + 7zy 2 x2 − 3x3 7. 10z 3 − 2z 2 y 2 x + 2z 2 yx2 + 3y − 7x 9. (See the answer in the text.) 10. 2xy 3 z 5 − 5x2 yz 3 + 7x2 y 2 z − 3x3 12. 2x2 yz 2 − 2xy 2 z 2 + 10z 3 − 7x + 3y 11. 3y 2 z 5 − 8z 7 + 5y 3 z 3 − 4x 13. 3yz 3 − 8xy − 4xz + 2yz + 38 2. −4x + 5y 3 z 3 + 3y 2 z 5 − 8z 7 4. −8xy − 4xz + 3yz 3 + 2yz + 38 6. −8z 7 + 3z 5 y 2 + 5z 3 y 3 − 4x 8. 3z 3 y + 2zy − 4zx − 8yx + 38 14. We write the given ideal as x2 y + 4xy, xy 2 − 2x, xy − y 2 so that the polynomials are listed in decreasing order; the maximum order term is x2 y . Multiplying the third by −x and adding to the ﬁrst (or dividing the ﬁrst by the third), we write the ideal as xy 2 + 4xy, xy 2 − 2x, xy − y 2 with maximum order term xy 2 < x2 y . 15. We write the given ideal as xy + y 3 , x − y 4 , y 3 + z so that the polynomials are listed in decreasing order; the maximum order term is xy . Multiplying the second by −y and adding to the ﬁrst (or dividing the ﬁrst by the second), we write the ideal as y 5 + y 3 , x − y 4 , y 3 + z = x − y 4 , y 5 + y 3 , y 3 + z with maximum order term x < xy . 16. We write the given ideal as x3 + y 2 z 3 , x2 yz 3 + 4, xyz − 3z 3 so that the polynomials are listed in decreasing order; the maximum order term is x3 . Because the leading terms of the second and third polynomials do not divide x3 , we cannot perform a singlestep division algorithm reduction that gives a basis with a smaller maximum term order. 100 28. Gr¨bner Bases for Ideals o 17. We write the given ideal as y 3 z 2 − 2z, y 2 z 3 + 3, y 2 z 2 + 3 so that the polynomials are listed in decreasing order; the maximum order term is y 3 z 2 . Multiplying the third by −y and adding to the ﬁrst (or dividing the ﬁrst by the third), we write the ideal as −3y − 2z, y 2 z 3 + 3, x2 z 2 + 3 = y 2 z 3 + 3, y 2 z 2 + 3, −3y − 2z with maximum order term y 2 z 3 < y 3 z 2 . 18. Starting with the given basis and adding (2)(1st) to the 2nd, and adding (1)(1st) to the 3rd yields w + x − y + 4z − 3, −x + 3y − 10z + 10, 2x − 2y − 3z − 2 . Adding (2)(2nd) to the 3rd yields w + x − y + 4z − 3, −x + 3y − 10z + 10, 4y − 23z + 18 Thus {w + x − y + 4z − 3, −x + 3y − 10z + 10, 4y − 23z + 18} is a Gr¨bner basis. o 19. Starting with the given basis and adding (2)(1st) to the 2nd and adding (1)(1st) to the 3rd yields w − 4x + 3y − z + 2, 6x − 5y + 1, −6x + 5y − 3 . Adding the 2nd to the 3rd yields w − 4x + 3y − z + 2, 6x − 5y + 1, −2 . Because the ideal contains a unit, 2, we know that the ideal is equal to R[w, x, y, z ] = −2 = 1 . Thus any set {a}, where a = 0 and a ∈ R, is a Gr¨bner basis. (The corresponding algebraic variety o is ∅.) 20. Because every ideal in R[x] is principal, a Gr¨bner basis will consist of a polynomial of minimum o degree that has the form f (x)(1st) + g (x)(2nd). Now when we add (−x)(2nd) to the 1st, we obtain x2 − 4, x3 + x2 − 4x − 4 . Adding (−x)(1st) to the 2nd, we obtain x2 − 4, x2 − 4 = x2 − 4 . Thus {x2 − 4} is a Gr¨bner basis. o 21. Because every ideal in R[x] is principal, a Gr¨bner basis will consist of a polynomial of minimum o degree that has the form f (x)(1st) + g (x)(2nd) + h(x)(3rd). Adding (−x)(2nd) to the 1st and adding (1)(2nd) to the 3rd, we obtain −3x3 + 9x2 − 6x, x3 − x2 − 4x + 4, x2 + x − 2 . Adding (3x)(3rd) to the 1st and adding (−x)(3rd) to the 2nd yields 12x2 − 12x, −2x2 − 2x + 4, x2 + x − 2 . Adding (12)(3rd) to the 1st and adding (2)(3rd) to the 2nd yields −24x + 24, 0, x2 + x − 2 = x − 1, (x − 1)(x + 2) = x − 1 . Thus {x − 1} is a Gr¨bner basis. o 22. Because every ideal in R[x] is principal, a Gr¨bner basis will consist of a polynomial of minimum o degree that has the form f (x)(1st) + g (x)(2nd). Now when we add (−x2 )(2nd) to the 1st, we obtain x4 − x3 +2x2 +2x − 5, x3 − x2 + x − 1 . Adding (−x)(2nd) to the 1st yields x2 +3x − 5, x3 − x2 + x − 1 . Adding (−x)(1st) to the 2nd yields x2 + 3x − 5, −4x2 + 6x − 1 . Adding (4)(1st) to the 2nd yields x2 + 3x − 5, 18x − 21 . Adding (−x/18)(2nd) to the 1st, we obtain 265 x − 5, 18x − 21 = 5 5 1 o 6 x − 1, 6x − 7 . Adding (36/5)(1st) to the 2nd yields 6 x − 1, 5 = 1 . Thus {1} is a Gr¨bner basis. (The corresponding algebraic variety is ∅.) 28. Gr¨bner Bases for Ideals o 101 23. Adding (−x)(2nd) to the 1st, we get −2xy + 8x − 2, xy + 2y − 9 . Adding (2)(2nd) to the 1st yields 8x + 4y − 20, xy + 2y − 9 = 2x + y − 5, xy + 2y − 9 . Adding (−y/2)(1st) to the 2nd yields 2x + y − 5, − 1 y 2 + 9 y − 9 = 2x + y − 5, y 2 − 9y + 18 = g1 , g2 . 2 2 We now proceed to test for a Gr¨bner basis according to Theorem 28.12. Maximum term degree o can’t be reduced by the division algorithm. Form S (g1 , g2 ) = (y 2 )(1st) − (2x)(2nd) = 18xy − 36x + y 3 − 5y 2 . This is of greater term order than either g2 or g1 . We see if this can be reduced to zero using g1 and g2 , that is, repeatedly using the division algorithm on remainders with just g1 or g2 as divisors. We have S (g1 , g2 ) − 9y (g1 ) = 18xy − 36x + y 3 − 5y 2 − 9y (2x + y − 5) = −36x + y 3 − 14y 2 + 45y. We add 18g1 = 36x + 18y − 90 to this and obtain y 3 − 14y 2 + 63y − 90. We add (−y )g2 = −y 3 + 9y 2 − 18y to this and obtain −5y 2 + 45y − 90. Finally, adding 5g2 = 5y 2 − 45y + 90 to this we obtain 0. Thus by Theorem 18.12, we see that {g1 , g2 } = {2x + y − 5, y 2 − 9y + 18} is a Gr¨bner basis. o Because y 2 − 9y + 18 = (y − 6)(y − 3), any point on the corresponding variety has y coordinate 1 3 or 6. Requiring that the point be a zero of 2x + y − 5, we ﬁnd that the variety is {(1, 3), (− 2 , 6}. 24. Let N = x2 y + x, xy 2 − y = g1 , g2 . Maximum term degree in the basis {g1 , g2 } cannot be reduced further by using the division algorithm. We compute S (g1 , g2 ) = yg1 − xg2 = y (x2 y + x) − x(xy 2 − y ) = 2xy, and proceed to reduce the basis {x2 y + x, xy 2 − y, xy } using the division algorithm. Adding (−x)(3rd) to the 1st and adding (−y )(3rd) to the 2nd, we obtain N = xy, x, y = x, y . Thus {x, y } is a Gr¨bner basis and the corresponding algebraic variety is the origin, {(0, 0)}. o 25. Let N = x2 y + x + 1, xy 2 + y − 1 = g1 , g2 . Maximum term degree in the basis {g1 , g2 } cannot be reduced further by using the division algorithm. We therefore compute S (g1 , g2 ) = y (x2 y + x + 1) − x(xy 2 + y − 1) = x + y, and proceed to reduce the basis {x2 y + x + 1, xy 2 + y − 1, x + y } using the division algorithm. Adding (xy)(3rd) to the 1st, we obtain N = −xy 2 + x + 1, xy 2 + y − 1, x + y . Adding the 2nd to the 1st, we have N = xy 2 + y − 1, x + y . Adding (−y 2 )(2nd) to the 1st, we obtain N = x + y, −y 3 + y − 1 = h1 , h2 where maximum term degree cannot be reduced further using the division algorithm. While we can determine the algebraic variety easily now, for illustration, we verify that we do have a Gr¨bner basis using Theorem 28.12. Now S (h1 , h2 ) = y 3 h1 + xh2 = xy − x + y 4 = x(y − 1) + y 4 , o and we test if it can be reduced to zero using the division algorithm with h1 and h2 as divisors. We obtain (1 − y )h1 + x(y − 1) + y 4 = (1 − y )(x + y ) + x(y − 1) + y 4 = y 4 − y 2 + y. Adding yh2 to this yields 0, so by Theorem 28.12, we see that {h1 , h2 } = {x + y, −y 3 + y − 1} is a Gr¨bner basis for N . o Using our calculator, we ﬁnd that y 3 − y + 1 has one real zero which is approximately 1.3247, so V (N ) = {a, −a)} for a ≈ 1.3247. 26. Let N = x2 y + xy 2 , xy − x . Adding (−x)(2nd) to the 1st, we discover that N = x2 + xy 2 , xy − x = g1 , g2 where maximum term degree cannot be reduced further using the division algorithm. We compute S (g1 , g2 ) = y (x2 + xy 2 ) − x(xy − x) = x2 + xy 3 , and test if it can be reduced to zero using 102 28. Gr¨bner Bases for Ideals o the division algorithm repeatedly with g1 and g2 as divisors. We ﬁnd that (x2 + xy 3 ) + (−1)g1 = (x2 + xy 3 ) − (x2 + xy 2 ) = xy 3 − xy 2 . Adding (−y 2 )g2 = (−y 2 )(xy − x) to xy 3 − xy 2 yields 0, so {x2 + xy 2 , xy − x} is a Gr¨bner basis for N by Theorem 28.12. We can obtain a slightly simpler o Gr¨bner basis by adding (−y )(2nd) to the 1st, which yields {x2 + xy, xy − x}. Then adding (1)(2nd) o to the 1st gives us {x2 + x, xy − x} as Gr¨bner basis. Note that the initial power products x2 and xy o of the basis polynomials remain the same. Now x2 + x has 0 and 1 as zeros. We see that (0, a) is a zero of xy − x for all a ∈ R, but (−1, b) is a zero of xy − x only if b = 1. Thus V (N ) = {(−1, 1), (0, a)  a ∈ R}. 27. T F T T T T T T F F (The answer T to Part(h) assumes that the student has had a course in linear algebra where matrix reduction was used to solve linear systems.) 28. Let Pi = xy and Pj = x2 in lex with y < x. Then xy < x2 but xy does not divide x2 . 29. Additive closure: With ci , di ∈ R for i = 1, 2, · · · , r, we have (c1 f1 + c2 f2 + · · · + cr fr ) + (d1 f1 + d2 f2 + · · · , +dr fr ) = (c1 + d1 )f1 + (c2 + d2 )f2 + · · · + (cr fr + dr fr ) and (ci + di ) is in R for i = 1, 2, · · · , r. Additive identity: Set all ci = 0 Additive inverses: Replace all ci by −ci . Multiplicative property: For a ∈ R, a(c1 f1 + c2 f2 + · · · + cr fr ) = (ac1 )f1 + (ac2 )f2 + · · · + (acr )fr and aci ∈ R for i = 1, 2, · · · , r. 30. Let h(x) be a common divisor of f (x) and g (x), so that f (x) = q1 (x)h(x) and g (x) = q2 (x)h(x) for q1 (x), q2 (x) in F [x]. Then r(x) = f (x) − g (x)q (x) = q1 (x)h(x) − q2 (x)h(x)q (x) = [q1 (x) − q2 (x)q (x)]h(x), so h(x) divides r(x) as well as g (x). Thus divisors of both f (x) and g (x) also divide both g (x) and r(x). Going the other way, suppose k (x) divides both g (x) and r(x), so that g (x) = q3 (x)k (x) and r(x) = q4 (x)k (x) for q3 (x), q4 (x) ∈ F [x]. Then f (x) = g (x)q (x) + r(x) = q3 (x)k (x)q (x) + q4 (x)k (x) = [q3 (x)q (x) + q4 (x)]k (x), so k (x) divides f (x) as well as g (x). Thus divisors of both g (x) and r(x) also divide both g (x) and f (x). Thus the set of divisors of f (x) and g (x) is the same as the set of divisors of g (x) and r(x). 31. Let N = xy, y 2 −y = g1 , g2 . By Theorem 28.12, we need to show that S (g1 , g2 ) = y (xy )−x(y 2 −y ) = xy can be reduced to 0 using the division algorithm with just xy and y 2 − y as divisors. Adding (−1)g1 to xy , we immediately obtain 0, and we are done. 32. Additive closure: Let f (x), g (x) ∈ I (S ), so that f (s) = 0 and g (s) = 0 for all s ∈ S . Applying the evaluation homomorphism φs , we get φs (f (x) + g (x)) = φs (f (x)) + φs (g (x)) = f (s) + g (s) = 0 + 0 = 0 for all s ∈ S , so (f + g ) ∈ I (S ). 29. Introduction to Extension Fields Additive identity: φs (0) = 0 for all s ∈ S , so 0 ∈ I (S ). 103 Additive inverses: f (x) ∈ I (S ) implies φs (−f (x)) = −φs (f (x)) = −f (s) = −0 = 0 for all s ∈ S , so −f (x) ∈ I (S ). Multiplicative property: Let f (x) ∈ I (S ) and h(x) ∈ F [x]. Then φs (h(x)f (x)) = φs (h(x))φs (f (x)) = h(s)f (s) = h(s)(0) = 0 for all s ∈ S , so h(x)f (x) ∈ I (S ). 33. By Deﬁnition 28.1, V (I (S )) consists of all common zeros of elements of I (S ). By deﬁnition of I (S ) in Exercise 32, every f (x) ∈ I (S ) has every s ∈ S as a zero, so s ∈ V (I (S )) for all s ∈ S . Thus S ⊆ V (I (S )). 34. Let n = 1, F = Q and S = Z ⊆ Q in Exercise 32. Then I (S ) = {0}, for a nonzero element of Q[x] can have only a ﬁnite number of zeros in Q. However, V (I (S )) = V ({0}) = Q = Z. 35. Let f (x) ∈ N . Now V (N ) consists of all s ∈ F n such that h(s) = 0 for all h(x) ∈ N . Thus s ∈ V (N ) implies that f (s) = 0 because f (x) is an example of an h(x) ∈ N . Thus f (s) = 0 for all s ∈ V (N ). By deﬁnition of I (S ) in Exercise 32, this means that f (x) ∈ I (V (N )). Thus N ⊆ I (V (N )). 36. Let N = x2 , y 2 . Then V (N ) = {(0, 0)}, and I (V (N )) = x, y = N. 29. Introduction to Extension Fields
√ 1. Let α = 1 + 2. Then (α − 1)2 = 2 so α2 − 2α − 1 = 0. Thus α is a zero of x2 − 2x − 1 in Q[x]. √√ √ √ 2. Let α = 2+ 3. Then α2 = 2+2 6+3 so α2 − 5 = 2 6. Squaring again, we obtain α4 − 10α2 +1 = 0, so α is a zero of x4 − 10x2 + 1 in Q[x]. 3. Let α = 1 + i. Then (α − 1)2 = −1, so α2 − 2α + 2 = 0. Thus α is a zero of x2 − 2x + 2 in Q[x] √ √ √ 4. Let α = 1 + 3 2. Then α2 = 1 + 3 2 so α2 − 1 = 3 2. Cubing, we obtain α6 − 3α4 + 3α2 − 3 = 0, so α is a zero of x6 − 3x4 + 3x2 − 3 in Q[x]. √ √ 3 5. Let α = 2 − i. Then α2 + i = 3 2. Cubing, we obtain α6 + 3α4 i − 3α2 − i = 2, so α6 − 3α2 − 2 = (1 − 3α4 )i. Squaring, we obtain α12 − 6α8 − 4α6 + 9α4 + 12α2 + 4 = −1 + 6α4 − 9α8 . Thus α12 + 3α8 − 4α6 + 3α4 + 12α2 + 5 = 0, so α is a zero of x12 + 3x8 − 4x6 + 3x4 + 12x2 + 5 in Q[x]. √ √ 6. Let α = 3 − 6. Then α2 − 3 = − 6. Squaring again, we obtain α4 − 6α2 + 3 = 0, so α is a zero of f (x) = x4 − 6x2 + 3 in Q[x]. Now f (x) is monic and is irreducible by the Eisenstein condition with p = 3. Thus deg(α, Q) = 4 and irr(α, Q) = f (x). √ √ 2 7. Let α = 1 + 7. Then α2 − 1 = 7. Squaring again, we obtain α4 − 3 α2 − 62 = 0, or 9α4 − 6α2 − 62 = 3 3 9 0. Let f (x) = 9x4 − 6x2 − 62. Then f (x) is irreducible by the Eisenstein condition with p = 2. Thus 1 deg(α, Q) = 4 and irr(α, Q) = 9 f (x). √ √ √ 8. Let α = 2+ i. Then α2 = 2+2 2i − 1 so α2 − 1 = 2 2i. Squaring again, we obtain α4 − 2α2 +1 = −8, so α4 − 2α2 + 9 = 0. Let f (x) = x4 − 2x2 + 9. One can show that f (x) is irreducible by the technique of Example 23.14. Thus deg(α, Q) = 4 and irr(α, Q) = f (x). 9. We see that i is algebraic over Q because it is a zero of x2 + 1 in Q[x]; deg(i, Q) = 2. 104 29. Introduction to Extension Fields 10. Let α = 1 + i. Then α − 1 = i so α2 − 2α + 2 = 0. Because α is not in R, we see that α is algebraic of degree 2 over R. √ 11. The text told us that π is transcendental over Q, behaving just like an indeterminant. Thus π is √ also transcendental over Q. [It is easy to see that if a polynomial expression in π is zero, then a √ polynomial in π is zero. Namely, starting with f ( π ) = 0, move all odddegree terms to the righthand √ side, factor π out from them, and then square both sides.] 12. Because √ π ∈ R, it is algebraic over R of degree 1. It is a zero of x − √ π in R[x]. √ 13. Now π is algebraic over Q(π ) of degree 2. It is not in Q(π ). Remember that π behaves just like an √ indeterminant x over Q. Note that x is not in Q(x), but it is a zero of y 2 − x in (Q(x))[y ]. 14. Now π 2 is transcendental over Q for the text told us that π is transcendental over Q, and a polynomial expression in π 2 equal to zero and having rational coeﬃcients can be viewed as a polynomial expression in π equal to zero with coeﬃcients in Q and having all terms of even degree. 15. Now π 2 ∈ Q(π ) so it is algebraic over Q(π ) of degree 1. It is a zero of x − π 2 in (Q(π ))[x]. 16. Now π 2 is algebraic over Q(π 3 ) of degree 3. It is not in Q(π 3 ), (note that x2 is not a polynomial in x3 ,) but it is a zero of x3 − (π 3 )2 = x3 − π 6 in (Q(π 3 ))[x]. 17. We perform a division. x + (1 + α) x − α x2 + x + 1 x2 − αx (1 + α)x (1 + α)x − α2 − α α2 + α + 1 = 2 · (α + 1) = 0. We have x2 + x + 1 = (x − α)(x + α + 1). 18. a. Let f (x) = x2 + 1. Then f (0) = 1, f (1) = 2, and f (−1) = 2 so f (x) is a cubic with no zeros in Z3 and thus is irreducible in Z3 [x]. b. + 0 1 2 α 2α 1+α 1 + 2α 2+α 2 + 2α 0 0 1 2 α 2α 1+α 1 + 2α 2+α 2 + 2α 1 1 2 0 1 +α 1 + 2α 2+α 2 + 2α α 2α 2 2 0 1 2+α 2 + 2α α 2α 1+α 1 + 2α α α 1+α 2+α 2α 0 1 + 2α 1 2 + 2α 2 2α 2α 1 + 2α 2 + 2α 0 α 1 1+α 2 2+α 1+α 1+α 2+α α 1 + 2α 1 2 + 2α 2 2α 0 1 + 2α 1 + 2α 2 + 2α 2α 1 1+α 2 2+α 0 α 2+α 2+α α 1+α 2 + 2α 2 2α 0 1 + 2α 1 2 + 2α 2 + 2α 2α 1 + 2α 2 2+α 0 α 1 1+α 29. Introduction to Extension Fields · 0 1 2 α 2α 1+α 1 + 2α 2 +α 2 + 2α 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 α 2α 1+α 1 + 2α 2+α 2 + 2α 2 0 2 1 2α α 2 + 2α 2+α 1 + 2α 1+α α 0 α 2α 2 1 2+α 1 +α 2 + 2α 1 + 2α 2α 0 2α α 1 2 1 + 2α 2 +2α 1+α 2+α 1+α 0 1+α 2 + 2α 2+α 1 + 2α 2α 2 1 α 1 + 2α 0 1 + 2α 2+α 1+α 2 + 2α 2 α 2α 1 2+α 0 2+α 1 + 2α 2 + 2α 1+α 1 2α α 2 2 + 2α 0 2 + 2α 1+α 1 + 2α 2+α α 1 2 2α 105 19. The deﬁnition is incorrect. The polynomial must be nonzero and in F [x]. An element α of an extension ﬁeld E of a ﬁeld F is algebraic over F if and only if α is a zero of some nonzero polynomial in F [x]. 20. The deﬁnition is incorrect. The polynomial must be nonzero. An element β of an extension ﬁeld E of a ﬁeld F is transcendental over F if and only if β is not a zero of any nonzero polynomial in F [x]. 21. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Only the coeﬃcient of the leading term need be 1. A monic polynomial in F [x] is a nonzero polynomial having 1 as the coeﬃcient in the term of highest degree. 22. The deﬁnition is incorrect. The subﬁelds examined must contain F as well as α. A ﬁeld E is a simple extension of a subﬁeld F if and only if there exists some α ∈ E such that no proper subﬁeld of E contains both F and α. 23. T T T T F T F T F T 24. a. One such ﬁeld is Q(π 3 ). b. One such ﬁeld is Q(e10 ). 25. a. Let f (x) = x3 + x2 + 1. Then f (0) = 1 and f (1) = 1 so f (x) has no zeros in Z2 and is thus irreducible. b. The long division uses the relations α3 = α2 + 1 and −α3 − α2 = −α2 − 1 − α2 = −1. x2 + (1 + α) + (α2 + α) + 1 x − α x3 + x2 x3 − αx2 (1 + α)x2 (1 + α)x2 − (α2 + α)x (α2 + α)x + 1 (α2 + α)x − 1 0 Continuing, we try α2 as a zero of q (x) = x2 + (1 + α)x + (α2 + α). Substituting, we obtain α4 + (1 + α)α2 + (α2 + α) = α(α2 + 1) + α2 + (α2 + 1) + (α2 + α) = (α2 + 1) + α + α2 + (α2 + 1) + (α2 + α) = 2 · (α2 + 1) + 2 · α2 + 2 · α = 0 106 29. Introduction to Extension Fields so α2 is a zero of q (x). We do another long division. This one involves the computation α2 (α2 + α + 1) = αα3 + α3 + α2 = α(α2 + 1) + (α2 + 1) + α2 = (α2 + 1) + α + (α2 + 1) + α2 = α2 + α. x + (α2 + α + 1) x − α2 x2 + (1 + α)x + (α2 + α) x2 − α2 x (α2 + α + 1)x + (α2 + α) (α2 + α + 1)x + (α2 + α) 0 Thus in (Z2 )[x], x3 + x2 + 1 = (x − α)(x − α2 )[x − (α2 + α + 1)]. 26. The group Z2 (α), + is abelian of order 8 with the property that a + a = 0 for all elements a in the group. Thus the group must be isomorphic to Z2 × Z2 × Z2 . The group Z2 (α)∗ , · is abelian of order 7, and must be cyclic (both because it has prime order and because it is the multiplicative group of nonzero elements of a ﬁnite ﬁeld) and is isomorphic to Z7 . 27. It is the monic polynomial in F [x] of minimal degree having α as a zero. 28. Take an irreducible factor p(x) of f (x), and form the ﬁeld E = F [x]/ p(x) . If we identify each a ∈ F with the coset a + p(x) in F [x]/ p(x) , then we can view E as an extension ﬁeld of F . The coset α = x + p(x) can be viewed as a zero in E of p(x), and hence as a zero in E of f (x). 29. Every element of F (β ) can be expressed as a quotient of polynomials in β with coeﬃcients in F . Because α is algebraic over F (β ), there is a polynomial expression in α with coeﬃcients in F (β ) which is equal to zero. By multiplying this equation by the polynomial in β which is the product of the denominators of the coeﬃcients in this equation, we obtain a polynomial in α equal to zero and having as coeﬃcients polynomials in β . Now a polynomial in α with coeﬃcients that are polynomials in β can be formally rewritten as a polynomial in β with coeﬃcients that are polynomials in α. [Recall that (F [x])[y ] (F [y ])[x].] This polynomial expression is still zero, which shows that β is algebraic over F (α). 30. Theorem 29.18 shows that every element of F (α) can be uniquely expressed in the form b0 + b1 α + b2 α2 + · · · + bn−1 αn−1 . Because F has q elements, there are q choices for b0 , then q choices for b1 , etc. Thus there are q n such expressions altogether. The uniqueness property shows that diﬀerent expressions correspond to distinct elements of F (α), which must therefore have q n elements. 31. a. Let f (x) = x3 + x2 + 2. Then f (0) = 2, f (1) = 1, and f (−1) = 2 so f (x) has no zeros in Z3 and thus is irreducible over Z3 [x]. b. Exercise 30 shows that the ﬁeld Z3 [x]/ f (x) , which can be viewed as an extension ﬁeld of Z3 of degree 3, has 33 = 27 elements. 30. Vector Spaces 107 32. a. If p = 2, then 1 = p − 1 in Zp , but 12 = (p − 1)2 . Thus the squaring function mapping Zp → Zp is not one to one; in fact, its image can have at most p − 1 elements. Thus some element of Zp is not a square if p = 2. b. We saw in Example 29.19 that there is a ﬁnite ﬁeld of four elements. Let p be an odd prime. By Part(a), there exists a ∈ Zp such that x2 − a has no zeros in Zp . This means that x2 − a is irreducible in Zp [x]. Let α be a zero of x2 − a in an extension ﬁeld of Zp . By Exercise 30, Zp (α) has p2 elements. 33. Let β ∈ F (α). Then β is equal to a quotient r(α)/s(α) of polynomials in α with coeﬃcients in F . Suppose that f (β ) = 0 where f (x) ∈ F [x] and is of degree n. Multiplying the equation f (β ) = 0 by s(α)n , we obtain a polynomial in α with coeﬃcients in F which is equal to zero. But then, α is algebraic over F , which is contrary to hypothesis. Therefore there is no such nonzero polynomial expression f (β ) = 0, that is, β is transcendantal over F . √ 34. We know that x3 − 2 is irreducible in Q[x] by the Eisenstein √ condition with p = 2. Therefore 3 2 is algebraic of √ degree 3 √ over Q. By Theorem 29.18, the ﬁeld Q( 3 2) consists of all elements of R of the form a + b( 3 2) + c( 3 2)2 for a, b, c ∈ Q, and distinct values of a, b, and c give distinct elements of R. √ set given in the problem consists of precisely these elements of R, so the given set is the ﬁeld The Q( 3 2). 35. We keep using Theorem 29.18 and Exercise 30. Now the polynomial x3 + x + 1 in Z2 [x] has no zeros in Z2 and is therefore irreducible in Z2 [x]. If α is a zero of this polynomial in an extension ﬁeld, then Z2 (α) has 23 = 8 elements by Exercise 30. 24 Similarly, let α be a zero of the irreducible polynomial x4 + x + 1 in Z2 [x]. Then Z2 (α) has = 16 elements. Finally, let α be a zero of the irreducible polynomial x2 − 2 in Z5 [x]. Then Z5 (α) has 52 = 25 elements. 36. Following the hint, we let F ∗ be the multiplicative group of nonzero elements of F . We are given that F is ﬁnite; suppose that F has m elements. Then F ∗ has m − 1 elements. Because the order of an element of a ﬁnite group divides the order of the group, we see that for all a ∈ F ∗ we have am−1 = 1. Thus every a ∈ F ∗ is a zero of the polynomial xm−1 − 1. Of course, 0 is a zero of x. Thus every α ∈ F is algebraic over the prime ﬁeld Zp of F , for the polynomial xm−1 − 1 is in Zp for all primes p. 37. Let E be a ﬁnite ﬁeld with prime subﬁeld Zp . If E = Zp , then the order of E is p and we are done. Otherwise, let α1 ∈ E where α1 ∈ Zp . Let F1 = Zp (α1 ). By Exercise 30, the ﬁeld F1 has order pn1 / where n1 is the degree of α1 over Zp . If F1 = E , we are done, Otherwise, we ﬁnd α2 ∈ E where α2 ∈ F1 , and form F2 = F1 (α2 ), obtaining a ﬁeld of order pn1 n2 where n2 is the degree of α2 over / F1 . We continue this process, constructing ﬁelds Fi of order pn1 n2 ··· ni . Because E is a ﬁnite ﬁeld, this process must eventually terminate with a ﬁeld Fr = E . Then E has order pn1 n2 ··· nr which is a power of p as asserted. 30. Vector Spaces
1. {(0, 1), (1, 0)}, {(1, 1), (−1, 1)}, and {(2, 1), (1, 2)} 2. Suppose that a(1, 1, 0) + b(1, 0, 1) + c(0, 1, 1) = (d, e, f ). Then a + b = d, a + c = e, and b + c = f . Subtracting the second equation from the ﬁrst, we obtain b − c = d − e. Adding this to the last equation, we obtain 2b = f + d − e, so b = (f + d − e)/2. Then a = (d + e − f )/2 and c = (e + f − d)/2. 108 30. Vector Spaces This shows that the given vectors span R3 . Setting d = e = f = 0, we see that we must then have a = b = c = 0 so the vectors are also independent, and hence are a basis for R3 . 3. We claim the vectors are dependent, and thus cannot form a basis. If a(1, 1, 2) + b(2, 3, 1) + c(10, 14, 0) = (0, 0, 0), then a a 2a + + 2b 3b b + 10c 14c = = = 0 0 0. Adding the ﬁrst two equations, we ﬁnd that −b − 4c = 0. Adding twice the ﬁrst equation to the last, we ﬁnd that 5b + 20c = 0, which is essentially the same equation. Let c = 1 so b = −4 and a = 2. We ﬁnd that 2(−1, 1, 2) + (−4)(2, −3, 1) + 1(10, −14, 0) = (0, 0, 0), so the vectors are indeed independent. √ √ 4. Because 2 is a zero of irreducible x2 − 2 of degree 2, Theorem 30.23 shows that a basis is {1, 2}. √ √ 5. Because 2 is in R and is a zero of x − 2 of degree 1, Theorem 30.23 shows that a basis is {1}. √ √√ 6. Because 3 2 is a zero of irreducible x3 − 2 of degree 3, by Theorem 30.23 a basis is {1, 3 2, ( 3 2)2 }. 7. Because C = R(i) where i is a zero of irreducible x2 + 1 of degree 2, Theorem 30.23 shows that a basis is {1, i}. 8. Because i is a zero of irreducible x2 + 1 of degree 2, Theorem 30.23 shows that a basis is {1, i}. √√ √ √ 9. Since 4 2 is a zero of irreducible x4 − 2 of degree 4, by Theorem 30.23 a basis is {1, 4 2, 2, ( 4 2)3 }. 10. Recall that α is a zero of x2 + x + 1, so Z2 (α) is a 2dimensional vector space over Z2 . Thus the three elements 1, 1 + α, and (1 + α)2 = 1 + 2 · α + α2 = 1 + 1 + α = α must be independent. By inspection, we see that 1(1) + 1(1 + α) + 1(1 + α)2 = 1 + (1 + α) + α = 0, so α is a zero of x2 + x + 1, which is thus not only irr(α, Z2 ) but is also irr(1 + α, Z2 ). Of course, we already knew this because the polynomial’s other zero, bedsides α, must lie in Z2 (α) since x2 + x + 1 has to factor into linear factors there, and 1 + α is the only possibility for the other zero. However, we wanted to present the technique given in our ﬁrst argument. 11. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Delete the “uniquely”. The vectors in a subset S of a vector space V over a ﬁeld F span V if and only if each β ∈ V an be expressed as a linear combination of the vectors in S . 12. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Some coeﬃcients in the linear combination must be nonzero. The vectors in a subset S of a vector space V over a ﬁeld F are linearly independent over F if and only if the zero vector cannot be expressed as a linear combination, having some coeﬃcients nonzero, of vectors in S . 13. The deﬁnition is correct. 30. Vector Spaces 14. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Replace “dependent” by “independent”. 109 A basis for a vector space V over a ﬁeld F is a set of vectors in V that span V and are linearly independent. 15. T F T T F F F T T T 16. a. A subspace of the vector space V over F is a subset W of V that is closed under vector addition and under multiplication by scalars in F , and is itself a vector space over F under these two operations. b. Let {Wi  i ∈ I } be a collection of subspaces of V . Because Wi , + is an abelian group, Theorem 7.4 shows that i∈I Wi is again an abelian group. Let a ∈ F and let α ∈ i∈I Wi . Then α ∈ Wi for each i ∈ I , so aα ∈ Wi for each i ∈ I because each Wi is a vector space. Hence aα ∈ i∈I Wi so the intersection is closed under scalar multiplication. All the other axioms for a vector space (distributive laws, etc.) certainly hold in this intersection, because they hold for all elements in V. 17. a. Let S be a subset of a vector space V over a ﬁeld F . The subspace generated by S is the intersection of all subspaces of V that contain S. b. Clearly, the sum of two ﬁnite linear combinations of elements of S is again a ﬁnite linear combination of elements of S . Also, a scalar times a ﬁnite linear combination is again a ﬁnite linear combination: a(b1 α1 + · · · + bn αn ) = (ab1 )αn + · · · + (abn )αn . Because 0 = 0α for α ∈ S , we see that 0 ∈ V is a ﬁnite linear combination of elements of S. Multiplying by the scalar 1, we see that an additive inverse of such a linear combination is again a ﬁnite linear combination of elements of S . Therefore the set of all ﬁnite linear combinations of elements of S is a vector space, and is clearly the smallest vector space that contains S. This result is analogous to the case of Theorem 7.6 for abelian groups, although we do have to check here that scalar multiplication is closed. 18. The direct sum of vector spaces V1 , V2 , · · · , Vn over the same ﬁeld F is {(α1 , α2 , · · · , αn )  α1 ∈ Vi for i = 1, 2, · · · , n}, with addition and scalar multiplication deﬁned by (α1 , α2 , · · · , αn ) + (β1 , β2 , · · · , βn ) = (α1 + β1 , α2 + β2 , · · · , αn + βn ). and a(α1 , α2 , · · · , αn ) = (aα1 , aα2 , · · · , aαn ) for all a ∈ F. Because addition and multiplication are deﬁned by performing the operations in each component, and because the vectors appearing in each component form a vector space over F , it is clear that this direct sum is again a vector space. 19. Let F be any ﬁeld and let F n = {(a1 , a2 , · · · , an )  ai ∈ F }. Then F n is a vector space with addition and multiplication of ntuples deﬁned by performing those operations in each component. (It is the direct sum of F with itself n times, as deﬁned in Exercise 18.) A basis for F n is {(1, 0, 0, · · · , 0), (0, 1, 0, · · · , 0), · · · , (0, 0, 0, · · · , 1)}. 110 30. Vector Spaces 20. Let V and V be vector spaces over the same ﬁeld F . A map φ : V → V is an isomorphism if φ is a onetoone map, φ[V ] = V , and furthermore φ(α + β ) = φ(α) + φ(β ) for all α, β ∈ V and all a ∈ F . 21. Because each vector in V can be expressed as a linear combination of the βi , we see that {β1 , β2 , · · · , βn } generates V . Now 0 = 0β1 + 0β2 + · · · + 0βn . By hypothesis, this is the unique linear combination of the βi that yields 0, so the vectors βi are independent. Therefore, {β1 , β2 , · · · , βn } is a basis for V . For the other direction, suppose that {β1 , β2 , · · · , βn } is a basis for V . Then every vector α is a linear combination of the βi . Suppose that α = n ci βi and also α = n di βi . Subtracting, we i=1 i=1 obtain 0 = α − α = n (ci − di )βi . Because the βi are linearly independent, we must have ci − di = 0 i=1 so ci = di for i = 1, 2, · · · n, and the expression for α as a linear combination of the βi is unique. 22. a. The system can be rewritten as X1 α1 + X2 α2 + · · · + Xn αn = β (1) and φ(aα) = aφ(α) because the ith component of the vector on the left side of the equation (1) is ai1 X1 +ai2 X2 +· · ·+ain Xn and the ith component of β is βi . Equation (1) shows that the system has a solution if and only if β is a ﬁnite linear combination of the vectors αj for j = 1, 2, · · · , n. By Exercise 17, this means that the system has a solution if and only if β lies in the subspace generated by the vectors α1 , α2 , · · · , αn . b. Note that if {αj  j = 1, · · · , n} is a basis for a vector space, then Exercise 21 shows that the linear combination of the αj that equals a vector β is unique. In terms of Part(a), this means that the system (1) has a unique solution. 23. Let {γ1 , γ2 , · · · , γn } be a basis for V . Let φ : F n → V be deﬁned by φ(a1 , a2 , · · · , an ) = a1 γ1 + a2 γ2 + · · · + an γn . Because addition and multiplication in F n is by components, it is obvious that φ(α + β ) = φ(α) + φ(β ) and φ(aα) = aφ(α) for all α, β ∈ V and all a ∈ F . Because {γ1 , γ2 , · · · , γn } is a basis for V , every vector in V can be expressed as a linear combination of these vectors, so φ maps F n onto V . By Exercise 21, the expression for a vector in V as a linear combination of the vectors γi is unique, so φ is one to one. Thus φ is an isomorphism. 24. a. Let α ∈ V, α = 0. Because {βi  i ∈ I } is a basis for V , we know by Exercise 21 that there are unique vectors βi1 , βi2 , · · · , βin and nonzero scalars a1 , a2 , · · · an such that α = a1 βi1 + a2 βi2 + · · · + an βin . By the conditions for a linear transformation, we then have φ(α) = a1 φ(βi1 ) + a2 φ(βi2 ) + · · · + an φ(βin ). This shows that the map φ is completely determined by the values φ(βi ) for i ∈ I . b. Let φ : V → V be deﬁned as follows: For nonzero α ∈ V , express α as a linear combination α = a1 βi1 + a2 βi2 + · · · + an βin (2) with nonzero scalars a1 , a2 , · · · an . This can be done because {βi  i ∈ I } is a basis for V . Deﬁne φ(α) = a1 βi1 + a2 βi2 + · · · + an βin . Because the expression (2) for α with nonzero scalars is unique by Exercise 21, we see that φ is well deﬁned, and of course, φ(βi ) = βi for i ∈ I . Because addition and scalar multiplication of linear combinations of the βi and the βi are both achieved by adding and scalar multiplying respectively the coeﬃcients in the linear combinations, we see at once that φ satisﬁes the required properties for a linear transformation. Part(a) shows that this transformation is completely determined by the vectors βi , that is, the linear transformation is unique. 31. Algebraic Extensions 25. a. A linear transformation of vector spaces is analogous to a homomorphism of groups. 111 b. The kernel or nullspace of φ is Ker(φ) = φ−1 [{0 }] = {α ∈ V  φ(α) = 0 }. Considering just the additive groups of V and V , group theory shows that Ker(φ) is an additive group. Let α ∈ Ker(φ). Then φ(aα) = aφ(α) = a0 = 0 , so Ker(φ) is closed under scalar multiplication by scalars a ∈ F . Hence Ker(φ) is a subspace of V . c. φ is an isomorphism of V with V if φ is one to one (equivalently, if Ker(φ) = {0}) and if φ maps V onto V . 26. Let V /S be the factor group V , + / S, + , which is abelian because V is abelian. Deﬁne scalar multiplication on V /S by a(α + S ) = aα + S for a ∈ F, (α + S ) ∈ V /S. For σ ∈ S , we have a(α + σ ) = aα + aσ and aσ ∈ S for all σ in the subspace S , so this scalar multiplication is well deﬁned, independent of the choice of representative in the coset α + S . Because addition and scalar multiplication in V /S are computed in terms of representatives in V and because V is a vector space, we see that addition and scalar multiplication in V /S satisfy the axioms for a vector space. 27. a. By group theory, we know that φ[V ], + is a subgroup of V , + . Let α ∈ V and a ∈ F . Then aφ(α) = φ(aα) shows that φ[V ] is closed under multiplication by scalars in F . Thus φ[V ] is a subspace of V . b. Let {α1 , α2 , · · · , αr } be a basis for Ker(φ). By Theorem 30.19, this set can be enlarged to a basis {α1 , α2 , · · · , αr β1 , β2 , · · · , βm } for V . Let γ ∈ V . Then γ = a1 α1 + · · · + ar αr + b1 β1 + · · · + bm βm for scalars ai , bj ∈ F . Because φ(αi ) = 0 for i = 1, · · · , r, we see that φ(γ ) = b1 φ(β1 ) + · · · + bm φ(βm ). Thus {φ(β1 ), · · · , φ(βm )} spans φ[V ]. We claim that this set is independent, and hence is actually a basis for φ[V ]. Suppose that c1 φ(β1 )+ · · · + cm φ(βm ) = 0 for scalars cj ∈ F . Then φ(c1 β1 + · · · + cm βm ) = 0, so (c1 β1 + · · · + cm βm ) ∈ Ker(φ), and thus c1 β1 + · · · + cm βm = d1 α1 + · · · + dr αr for some scalars di . Moving everything to the lefthand side of this equation, we obtain a linear combination of the vectors αi and βj which is equal to 0. Because the αi and βj form a basis for V , they are independent so all the coeﬃcients di and cj must be zero. The fact that the cj must be zero shows that {φ(β1 ), · · · , φ(βm )} is independent, and thus is a basis for φ[V ]. By our construction, dim(Ker(φ)) = r, dim(V ) = r + m, and we have shown that dim(φ[V ]) = m. Thus dim(φ[V ]) = m = (r + m) − r = dim(V )−dim(Ker(φ)). 31. Algebraic Extensions
√ √ 1. Because irr( 2, Q) = x2 − 2, the degree is 2 and a basis is {1, 2}. √√√ 2. By Example 31.9, the degree is 4 and a basis is {1, 2, 3, 6}. √ √√√ √√√ √√ 3. We notice that 18 = 2 3√ 3. √ √ Q( 2, 3, 18) and Q( 2, 3) are the same ﬁeld. Thus the Thus degree is 4 and a basis is {1, 2, 3, 6} by Example 31.9. √ √ √ √ 4. Now 3 ∈ Q( 3 2) because√ ( √ is of degree 2 over Q while Q( 3 2) is of degree 3, and 2 √ / Q 3) does not divide √ 3. Thus the degree √ Q( 3 2, 3) over Q is 6. We form products from the bases {√, 3} for Q( 3) of 1 √√ √ √ √ √ √ 2√ √ 3 over Q and {1, 3 2, ( 3 2)2 } for Q( 3 2) over Q( 3), obtaining {1, 3 2, ( 3 2) , 3, 3( 2), 3( 3 2)2 } as a basis. 112 31. Algebraic Extensions √ 5. As√ the solution to Exercise 4, the extension has degree 6. Taking products√ √ bases {√ √ for in from √ 1, 2} √√ √ √ √√ Q( 2) over Q and {1, 3 2, ( 3 2)2 } for Q( 3 2) over√ ( 2), we see {1, 3 2, ( 3 2)2 , 2, 2( 3 2), 2( 3 2)2 } Q √√ is a basis. It is easy to see that Q( 2, 3 2) = Q( 6 2) since 21/6 = 27/6 /2 = 23/6 24/6 /2 = 21/2 (21/3 )2 /2, so another basis is {1, 21/6 , 22/6 , 23/6 , 24/6 , 25/6 }. √ √ √ √ √√ 6. As shown in √ √ √31.9, we have deg( 2 + 3, Q) = 4, so Q( 2 + 3) = Q( 2, 3) and a basis Example over Q is {1, 2, 3, 6} just as in Example 31.9. √√ √ √ √ 7. Because 2 3 = 6, we see that the ﬁeld is Q( 6) which has degree 2 over Q and a basis {1, 6}. 8. As in the solution to Exercise 4, we see the extension is of degree√ because 2 does √ divide 3.√ 6√ not We √ √ 3 3 2 } for Q( 3 5) over Q( 2), form products from the bases {1, 2} for Q( 2) over Q and {1, 5, ( 5) √√ √√√ √√ yielding {1, 3 5, ( 3 5)2 , 2, 2( 3 5), 2( 3 5)2 } as a basis. √√ √ √ √ √√√ √√ 9. Now 3 6/ 3 2 = 3 3 and 3 24 = 2( 3 3), so√ ( 2, 3 6, 3 24) = Q( 3 2, 3 3). The degree over Q is 9, √ Q √ √ √2 √ √ and we take √ products from the bases {1, 3 2, ( 3 2)2 } and {1, 3 3, ( 3 3) } for Q( 3 2) over Q and Q( 3 2, 3 3) over Q( 3 2) respectively, obtaining the basis √√√√√ √√ √ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 {1, 2, 4, 3, 6, 12, 9, 18, 36}. √√ √√ √ 10. Because Q( 2, 6) = Q( 2, 3), the extension is of degree 2 over Q( 3) and we can take the set √ {1, 2} as a basis. √ √ √√ 11. Example 31.9 shows that Q( 2√ 3) = Q( 2, 3), so the extension has degree 2 and we can take + √ as basis over Q( 3) the set {1, 2}. √ √ √√ 12. By Example 31.9, Q( 2 + 3) = Q( 2, 3) so the degree of the extension is 1 and {1} is a basis. √ √ √√ √ √√ √ √√ √ 13. Now 6 + 10 = 2( 3 + 5) so we have Q( 2√ 6 + 10) = Q( 2, 3 + 5). The degree of the , √ √ extension is 2 and a basis over Q( 3 + 5) is {1, 2}. 14. The deﬁnition is incorrect. An algebraic extension need not be a ﬁnite extension. An algebraic extension of a ﬁeld F is an extension ﬁeld E of F with the property that each α ∈ E is a zero of some nonzero polynomial in F [x]. 15. The deﬁnition is incorrect. If an element adjoined is transcendental over F , the extension is not ﬁnite. A ﬁnite extension ﬁeld of a ﬁeld F is an extension ﬁeld of F that has ﬁnite dimension when regarded as a vector space having F as its ﬁeld of scalars. 16. The deﬁnition is correct. 17. The deﬁnition is not quite correct. We should insert “nonconstant” before “polynomial” and “in F[x]” after it. A ﬁeld F is algebraically closed if and only if every nonconstant polnomial in F [x] has a zero in F . √ √ √ 18. Let E = Q( 2) and let F = Q. The algebraic closure of Q in Q( 2) is Q( 2) because it is an √ algebraic extension of Q. However, Q( 2) is not algebraically closed, because the polynomial x2 + 1 √ has no zeros in Q( 2). 19. F T F T F T F F F F 31. Algebraic Extensions 113 20. Because E is a ﬁnite dimensional vector space over F , the set of all powers of an element α in E cannot be independent, so some ﬁnite linear combination with nonzero coeﬃcents in F of these powers must be zero. 21. Taking a basis of n elements αi for E over F and a basis of m elements βj for K over E , the set of the mn possible products αi βj is a basis for K over F . 22. If b = 0, then a + bi ∈ C but a + bi ∈ R. By Theorem 31.3, a + bi is algebraic over R. Then by / Theorem 31.4, [C : R] = [C : R(a + bi)][R(a + bi) : R] = 2, and because a + bi ∈ R, we must have [R(a + bi) : R] = 2, so [C : R(a + bi)] = 1. Thus C = R(a + bi). / 23. Let α be any element in E that is not in F . Then [E : F ] = [E : F (α)][F (α) : F ] = p for some prime p by Theorem 31.4. Because α is not in F , we know that [F (α) : F ] > 1, so we must have [F (α) : F ] = p and therefore [E : F (α)] = 1. As we remarked after Deﬁnition 31.2, this shows that E = F (α), which is what we wish to show. √ √ √ 24. If x2 − 3 were reducible over Q( 3 2), then it would factor into linear factors over Q( 3 2), so 3 would √ √ √ lie in the ﬁeld Q( 3 2), and we would have Q( 3) ≤ Q( 3 2). But then by Theorem 31.4, √ √ √ √ 3 3 [Q( 2) : Q] = [Q( 2) : Q( 3][Q( 3) : Q]. √ √ This equation is impossible because [Q( 3 2) : Q] = 3 while [Q( 3) : Q] = 2. 25. Corollary 31.6 shows that the degree of an extension of F by successively adjoining square roots must be 2n for some n ∈ Z+ . Because x14 − 3x2 + 12 is irreducible over Q by the Eisenstein condition with p = 3, and because [Q(α) : Q] = 14 for any zero α of this polynomial, and because 14 is not a divisor of 2n for any n ∈ Z+ , we see that α cannot lie in any ﬁeld obtained by adjoining just square roots. Therefore α cannot be expressed as a rational function of square roots, square roots of rational functions of square roots, etc. 26. We need only show that for each α ∈ D, α = 0, its multiplicative inverse 1/α is in D also. Because E is a ﬁnite extension of F , we know that α is algebraic over F . Let deg(α, F ) = n. Then by Theorem 30.23, we have F (α) = {a0 + a1 α + a2 α2 + · · · + an−1 αn−1  ai ∈ F for i = 0, · · · n − 1}. In particular, 1/α ∈ F (α), so 1/α is equal to polynomial in α with coeﬃcients in F , and is in D. √ √ √√ √ √ √ √ √ √ 3 = 27. Obviously Q( 3 + 7) ⊆ Q( √ , 7). Now ( 3 + √ 7)2 √ 10 + 2 21 so 21 ∈ Q( 3 + 7). √ √ √ √ √ Hence √ 7 + 7 3) − 7( 3 + 7) = −√ 7 is in√ ( √+ 7), so this ﬁeld contains 7 and also (3 Q3 √ √ √ √4 √√ √ √ ( 3 + 7) − 7 = 3. Therefore Q( 3, 7) ⊆ Q( 3 + 7), so Q( 3, 7)√ Q(√3 + 7). [One can = also make an argument like that in Example 31.9 of the text, ﬁnding irr(√ 3 + 7, Q) and showing √√ √ that it is of degree 4 over Q. Then we would have [Q( 3, 7) : Q( 3 + 7)] = 1, so the ﬁelds are equal.] √ √ √√ 28. If a = b the result is clear; we assume a = b. It is obvious that Q( a + b) ⊆ Q( a, b). √ √ √√ √ √ b We now show that Q( a, b) ⊆ Q( a + b). Let α = √a− √b ∈ Q( a + b). Now α = √ √ √ √ a+ √ √ √ √ a − b. Thus Q( a + b) contains 1 [α + ( a + b)] = 1 (2 a) = a and hence also contains 2 √ √ √ √ √ √ √2 √ ( a + b) − a = b. Thus Q( a, b) ⊆ Q( a + b). 114 31. Algebraic Extensions 29. If a zero α of p(x) were in E , then because p(x) is irreducible over F , we would have [F (α) : F ] = deg(p(x)), and [F (α : F ] would be a divisor of [E : F ] by Theorem 31.4. By hypothesis, this is not the case. Therefore p(x) has no zeros in E . 30. Because F (α) is a ﬁnite extension of F and α2 ∈ F (α), Theorem 31.3 shows that α2 is algebraic over F . If F (α2 ) = F (α), then F (α) must be an extension of F (α2 ) of degree 2, because α is a zero of x2 − α2 . By Theorem 31.4, we would then have 2 = [F (α) : F (α2 )] dividing [F (α) : F ], which is impossible because [F (α) : F ] is an odd number. Therefore F (α2 ) = F (α), so deg(irr(α2 , F )) = deg(irr(α, F )) = [F (α) : F ] which is an odd number. 31. Suppose K is algebraic over F. Then every element of K is a zero of a nonzero polynomial in F[x], and hence in E[x]. This shows that K is algebraic over E. Of course E is algebraic over F, because each element of E is also an element of K. Conversely, suppose that K is algebraic over E and that E is algebraic over F . Let α ∈ K . We must show that α is algebraic over F . Because K is algebraic over E , α is a zero of some polynomial a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + · · · + an xn in E [x]. Because E is algebraic over F , the ai are algebraic over F for i = 0, 1, 2, · · · , n. Hence F (a0 , a1 , a2 , · · · , an ) is an extension of F of some ﬁnite degree m by Theorem 31.11. Because α is algebraic over E of degree r ≤ n, Theorem 31.4 shows that F (a0 , a1 , a2 , · · · , an , α) is a ﬁnite extension of F of degree ≤ mr. By Theorem 31.3, α is algebraic over F . 32. If α is algebraic over F E , then F E (α) is algebraic over F E and by deﬁnition, F E is algebraic over F . By Exercise 31, then F E (α) is algebraic over F so, in particular, α is algebraic over F . But then α ∈ F E contrary to hypothesis. Thus α is transcendental over F E . 33. Let f (x) be a nonconstant polynomial in F E [x]. We must show that f (x) has a zero in F E . Now f (x) ∈ E [x] and E is agebraically closed by hypothesis, so f (x) has a zero α in E . By Exercise 32, if α is not in F E , then α is transcendental over F E . But by construction, α is a zero of f (x) ∈ F E [x], so this is impossible. Hence α ∈ F E , which shows that F E is algebraically closed. 34. Let α ∈ E and let p(x) = irr(α, F ) have degree n. Now p(x) factors into (x − α1 )(x − α2 ) · · · (x − αn ) in F [x]. Because by hypotheses all zeros of p(x) in F are also in E , we see that this same factorization is also valid in E [x]. Hence p(α) = (α − α1 )(α − α2 ) · · · (α − αn ) = 0, so α = αi for some i. This shows that F ≤ E ≤ F . Because by deﬁnition F contains only elements that are algebraic over F and E contains all of these, we see that E = F and is therefore algebraically closed. 35. If F is a ﬁnite ﬁeld of odd characteristic, then 1 = −1 in F . Because 12 = (−1)2 = 1, the squares of elements of F can run through at most F  − 1 elements of F , so there is some a ∈ F that is not a square. The polynomial x2 − a then has no zeros in F , so F is not algebraically closed. 36. For all n ∈ Z, n ≥ 2, the polynomial xn − 2 is irreducible in Q[x] by the Eisenstein condition with p = 2. This shows that Q has ﬁnite extensions contained in C of arbitrarily high degree. If QC were a ﬁnite extension of Q of degree r, then there would be no algebraic extensions of Q in C of degree greater than r. Thus the algebraic closure QC of Q in C cannot be a ﬁnite extension of Q. 37. Because [C : R] = 2 and C is an algebraic closure of R, it must be that every irreducible p(x) in R[x] of degree > 1 is actually of degree 2. Because C = R where α ∈ C is any zero of any such polynomial, 32. Geometric Constructions we know by the construction in Theorem 29.3 that C p(x) in R[x] of degree 2. 115 R[x]/ p(x) for any irreducible polynomial Now let E be any ﬁnite extension of R. If E = R, then let β be in E but not in R. Then p(x) = irr(β, R) has degree 2,because we have seen that there are no irreducible polynomials in R[x] of greater degree. The construction in Theorem 29.3 shows that R(β ) R[x]/ p(x) and hence R(β ) C. Because C is algebraically closed, R(β ) is algebraically closed also and admits no proper algebraic extensions. Because E is an algebraic extension of R(β ), we must have E = R(β ), so E C. 38. If R contains no nontrivial proper ideals, then {0} is the only proper ideal, and is a maximal ideal, and of course it is contained in itself so we are done. Suppose R contains a nontrivial proper ideal N which of course does not contain the unity 1 of R. The set S of ideals of R that do not contain 1 is partially ordered by inclusion. Let T = {Ni  i ∈ I } be a chain of S . We claim that U = i∈I Ni is an element of S that is an upper bound of T . Let x, y ∈ U . Then x ∈ Nj and y ∈ Nk for some j, k ∈ I . Because T is a chain, one of these ideals is contained in the other, say Nj ⊆ Nk . Then x, y ∈ Nk which is an ideal, so for all r ∈ R, we see that x ± y, 0, rx, and xr are all in Nk and hence in U . This shows that U is an ideal. Clearly Ni ⊆ U for all i ∈ I , and 1 is not in U because 1 is not in Ni for any i ∈ I . Thus U ∈ S and is an upper bound for T , so the hypotheses of Zorn’s lemma are satisﬁed. Let M be a maximal element of S ; such an element of S exists by Zorn’s lemma. Because M ∈ S , we see that M is an ideal of R, and does not contain 1 so M = R. Suppose that L is an ideal of R such that M ⊆ L ⊆ R. If L ∈ S , then M = L because M is a maximal element of S under set inclusion. Otherwise, 1 ∈ L so L = R. Thus M is a maximal ideal of R. 32. Geometric Constructions
1. By Euler’s formula, ei(3θ) = cos 3θ + i sin 3θ. On the other hand, e3iθ = (eiθ )3 = (cos θ + i sin θ)3 , which we compute using the binomial theorem; the real part of the answer should be equal to cos 3θ. We have (cos θ + i sin θ)3 = (cos3 θ − 3 cos θ sin2 θ) + i(don’t care). Thus cos 3θ = cos3 θ − 3 cos θ(1 − cos2 θ) = 4 cos3 θ − 3 cos θ. 2. T T T F T F T T T F 3. If a regular 9gon could be constructed, the angle (360/9)◦ = 40◦ could be constructed, and could then be bisected to construct an angle of 20◦ . The proof of Theorem 32.11 shows, however, that an angle of 20◦ is not constructible. √ 4. One can √ construct an angle of 30◦ if and only if one can construct the number cos 30◦ = 3/2. Because 3 is constructible and quotients of constructible numbers are constructible, an angle of 30◦ is constructible. 5. Because OA = OP , ∠OAP = ∠AP O = (180◦ − 36◦ )/2 = 72◦ . Then ∠QAP = 36◦ so triangle OAP is similar to triangle AP Q. Now AP  = AQ = OQ = r, so QP  = 1 − r. Taking ratios of r corresponding sides, we obtain AP /OP  = OA/AP  so 1−r = 1 . Thus r2 = 1 − r so r2 + r − 1 = 0. r By the quadratic formula, we ﬁnd that r = −1+ 5 which is a constructible number. Thus we can 2 construct an angle of 36◦ by taking a line segment OP of length 1, drawing a circle of radius 1 at O and one of radius r at P , and ﬁnding a point A of intersection of the two circles. Then ∠AOP measures
√ 116 33. Finite Fields 36◦ . Thus a regular 10gon which has central angles of 36◦ is constructible. A regular pentagon is obtain by starting at vertex 1 of a regular 10gon and drawing line segments to vertex 3, on to vertex 5, on to vertex 7, on to vertex 9, and then to vertex 1. 6. A regular 20gon is constructible because we can bisect the constructible angle of 36◦ (see Exercise 5) to obtain an angle of 18◦ = (360/20)◦ . 7. Because we can construct an angle of 72◦ = 2(36◦ ) by Exercise 5, and because 60◦ is a constructible angle, we can construct an angle of 72◦ − 60◦ = 12◦ = (360/30)◦ . Therefore a regular 30gon can be constructed. 8. Exercise 7 shows that a 12◦ angle can be constructed, so a 24◦ = (2 · 12)◦ = (72/3)◦ angle can be constructed. Thus an angle of 72◦ can be trisected. 9. Exercise 7 shows that an angle of 12◦ can be constructed so an angle of 24◦ = (2 · 12)◦ = (360/15)◦ can be constructed. Hence a regular 15gon can be constructed. 10. Starting with a line segment of length 1, from 0 to 1 on the usual xaxis, we can construct a line segment of any rational length in a ﬁnite number of steps, and thus ﬁnd any point with rational coordinates in the x, y plane in a ﬁnite number of steps. Thinking analytically, the only other points in the plane we can locate must appear as an intersection of two lines, of a line and a circle, or of two circles, which reduces algebraically to ﬁnding the solutions of only linear or quadratic equations. Considering a right triangle with an acute angle θ and hypotenuse of length 1, we see that we can construct the angle θ if and only if we can construct a line segment of length cos θ. It can be shown that cos 20◦ is not a solution of a linear or quadratic equation, but rather of a cubic equation, so while we can construct a 60◦ angle because cos 60◦ = 1/2, we cannot trisect it to obtain a 20◦ angle. 33. Finite Fields
1. Because 4096 = 212 is a power of a prime, a ﬁnite ﬁeld of order 4096 does exist. 2. Because 3127 = 53 · 59 is not a power of a prime, no ﬁnite ﬁeld of order 3127 exists. 3. Because 68921 = 413 is a power of a prime, a ﬁnite ﬁeld of order 68921 does exist. 4. GF (9)∗ is a cyclic group under multiplication of order 8 and has φ(8) = 4 generators, so there are 4 primitive 8th roots of unity. 5. GF (19)∗ is a cyclic group under multiplication of order 18 and has φ(18) = 6 generators, so there are 6 primitive 18th roots of unity. 6. GF (31)∗ is a cyclic group under multiplication of order 30. Its cyclic subgroup of order 15 has φ(15) = 8 generators, so it contains 8 primitive 15th roots of unity. 7. GF (23)∗ is a cyclic group under multiplication of order 22. Because 10 is not a divisor of 22, it contains no elements of order 10, so GF (23)∗ contains no primitive 10th roots of unity. 8. T F T F T F T T F T 34. Isomorphism Theorems 117 9. Because both the given polynomials are irreducible over Z2 , both Z2 (α) and Z2 (β ) are extension of Z2 of degree 3 and thus are subﬁelds of Z2 containing 23 = 8 elements. By Theorem 33.3, both of these ﬁelds must consist precisely of the zeros in Z2 of the polynomial x8 − x. Thus the ﬁelds are the same. 10. Let p(x) be irreducible of degree m in Zp [x]. Let K be the ﬁnite extension of Zp obtained by adjoining all the zeros of p(x) in Zp . Then K is a ﬁnite ﬁeld of order pn for some positive integer n, and consists n precisely of all zeros of xp − x in Zp . Now p(x) factors into linear factors in K [x], and these linear n n factors are among the linear factors of xp − x in K [x]. Thus p(x) is a divisor of xp − x. 11. Because α ∈ F , we have Zp (α) ⊆ F . But because α is a generator of the multiplicative group F ∗ , we see that Zp (α) = F . Because F  = pn , the degree of α over Zp must be n. 12. Let F be a ﬁnite ﬁeld of pn elements containing (up to isomorphism) the prime ﬁeld Zp . Let m be a m divisor of n, so that n = mq . Let F = Zp be an algebraic closure of F . If α ∈ Zp and αp = α, then n mq m pm(q −1) m(q −1) m pm(q −2) m(q −2) m αp = αp = (αp ) = αp = (αp ) = αp = · · · = αp = α. By Theorem 33.3, m the zeros of xp − x in Zp form the unique subﬁeld of Zp of order pm . Our computation shows that n the elements in this subﬁeld are also zeros of xp − x, and consequently all lie in the ﬁeld F , which n by Theorem 33.3 consists of all zeros of xp − x in Zp . 13. Let F be the extension of Zp of degree n, consisting of all zeros of xp − x by Theorem 33.3. Each α ∈ F is algebraic over Zp and has degree that divides n by Theorem 31.4. Thus each α ∈ F is a zero of a monic irreducible polynomial of a degree dividing n. Conversely, a zero β of an irreducible monic polynomial having degree m dividing n lies in a ﬁeld Zp (β ) of pm elements that is contained in F by Exercise 12. Thus the elements of F are precisely the zeros of all monic irreducible polynomials n in Zp [x] of degree dividing n, as well as precisely all zeros of xp − x. Factoring into linear factors n in F [x], we see that both xp − x and the product g(x) of all monic polynomials in Zp [x] of degree d n dividing n have the factorization α∈ F (x − α), so xp − x = g (x). 14. a. Now x2 ≡ a (mod p) has a solution in Z if and only if x2 = b has a zero in Zp where b is the remainder of a modulo p. Now Zp∗ is cyclic of order p − 1. The elements b of a cyclic group that are squares are those that are even powers of a generator, and these are precisely the elements b satisfying b(p−1)/2 = 1. Thus we see that x2 ≡ a (mod p), for a not congruent to zero modulo p, has a solution in Z if and only if a(p−1)/2 ≡ 1 (mod p). b. We know that x2 − 6 is irreducible in Z17 [x] if and only if it has no zero in Z17 , so that 6 = b2 for any b ∈ Z17 . By Part(a), we test by computing whether 6(17−1)/2 = 68 is congruent to 1 modulo 17. Computing in Z17 , we have 62 = 2, 64 = 22 = 4, and 68 = 44 = 16, so 6 is not a square in Z17 and x2 − 6 is irreducible.
n 34. Isomorphism Theorems
1. (See the answer in the text.) 2. a. K = {0, 6, 12} 0 + K = {0, 6, 12}, b. 2 + K = {2, 8, 14}, 4 + K = {4, 10, 16}, 1 + K = {1, 7, 13}, 3 + K = {3, 9, 15}, 5 + K = {5, 11, 17} c. φ[Z18 ] is the subgroup {0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10} of Z12 . 118 34. Isomorphism Theorems d. µ(0 + K ) = 0, µ(1 + K ) = 10, µ(2 + K ) = 8, µ(3 + K ) = 6, µ(4 + K ) = 4, µ(5 + K ) = 2 3. (See the text answer.) 4. a. HN = {0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30, 33} b. 0 + N = {0, 9, 18, 27}, 3 + N = {3, 12, 21, 30}, 6 + N = {6, 15, 24, 33} c. 0 + (H ∩ N ) = {0, 18}, 6 + (H ∩ N ) = {6, 24}, 12 + (H ∩ N ) = {12, 30} d. φ(0 + N ) = 0 + (H ∩ N ), φ(3 + N ) = 12 + (H ∩ N ), φ(6 + N ) = 6 + (H ∩ N ) 5. (See the text answer.) 6. a. 0+H 2+H 4+H 6+H 8+H = {0, 9, 18, 27}, 1 + H = {1, 10, 19, 28} = {2, 11, 20, 29}, 3 + H = {3, 12, 21, 30} = {4, 13, 22, 31}, 5 + H = {5, 14, 23, 32} = {6, 15, 24, 33}, 7 + H = {7, 16, 25, 34} = {8, 17, 26, 35} b. 0 + K = {0, 18}, 1 + K = {1, 19}, 2 + K = {2, 20} 3 + K = {3, 21}, 4 + K = {4, 22}, 5 + K = {5, 23} 6 + K = {6, 24}, 7 + K = {7, 25}, 8 + K = {8, 26} 9 + K = {9, 27}, 10 + K = {10, 28}, 11 + K = {11, 29} 12 + K = {12, 30}, 13 + K = {13, 31}, 14 + K = {14, 32} 15 + K = {15, 33}, 16 + K = {16, 34}, 17 + K = {17, 35} c. 0 + K = {0, 18}, 9 + K = {9, 27} d. (0 + K ) + H/K (1 + K ) + H/K (2 + K ) + H/K (3 + K ) + H/K (4 + K ) + H/K (5 + K ) + H/K (6 + K ) + H/K (7 + K ) + H/K (8 + K ) + H/K = {0 + K, 9 + K } = {{0, 18}, {9, 27}} = {1 + K, 10 + K } = {{1, 19}, {10, 28}} = {2 + K, 11 + K } = {{2, 20}, {11, 29}} = {3 + K, 12 + K } = {{3, 21}, {12, 30}} = {4 + K, 13 + K } = {{4, 22}, {13, 31}} = {5 + K, 14 + K } = {{5, 23}, {14, 32}} = {6 + K, 15 + K } = {{6, 24}, {15, 33}} = {7 + K, 16 + K } = {{7, 25}, {16, 34}} = {8 + K, 17 + K } = {{8, 26}, {17, 35}} φ(1 + H ) = (1 + K ) + H/K φ(3 + H ) = (3 + K ) + H/K φ(5 + H ) = (5 + K ) + H/K φ(7 + H ) = (7 + K ) + H/K e. φ(0 + H ) = (0 + K ) + H/K, φ(2 + H ) = (2 + K ) + H/K, φ(4 + H ) = (4 + K ) + H/K, φ(6 + H ) = (6 + K ) + H/K, φ(8 + H ) = (8 + K ) + H/K 7. Let x ∈ H ∩ N and let h ∈ H . Because x ∈ H and H is a subgroup, we know that hxh−1 ∈ H . Because x ∈ N and N is normal in G, we also know that hxh−1 ∈ N . Thus hxh−1 ∈ H ∩ N , so H ∩ N is a normal subgroup of H . 8. a. Let γ : G → G/H be the natural homomorphism of a group onto its factor group. Then γ [K ] = K/H = B is a normal subgroup of A = G/H by Theorem 15.16. Similarly γ [L] = L/H = C is a 35. Series of Groups 119 normal subgroup of A. It is clear that B = K/H is a subgroup of C = L/H because K is a subgroup of L. b. Theorem 34.7 shows that (A/B )/(C/B ) A/C = (G/H )/(L/H ) G/L. 9. By Lemma 34.4, we know that K ∨ L = KL = LK , so G = KL = LK . By Theorem 34.5, G/L = KL/L K/(K ∩ L) = K/{e} K . Similarly, G/K = LK/K L/(L ∩ K ) = L/{e} L. 35. Series of Groups
1. (See the answer in the text.) 2. We have to insert subgroups to produce additional factor groups of orders 5 and 49 in the ﬁrst series, and we create the reﬁnement {0} < 14700Z < 300Z < 60Z < 20Z < Z of the series {0} < 60Z < 20Z < Z. We have to insert subgroups to produce additional factor groups of orders 3 and 20 in the second series, and we create the reﬁnement {0} < 14700Z < 4900Z < 245Z < 49Z < Z of the series {0} < 245Z < 49Z < Z. These two reﬁnements are isomorphic, producing cyclic factor groups of orders 3, 20, 5, 49, and an inﬁnite cyclic factor group. 3. The given series are already isomorphic, with factor groups of orders 3 and 8. 4. The ﬁrst series has cyclic factor groups of orders 4, 6, and 3 while the second has cyclic factor groups of orders 3, 2, and 12. Thus we break the 4 into two 2’s and break the 12 into a 6 and a 2. We obtain the reﬁnement {0} < 36 < 18 < 3 < Z72 of the series {0} < 18 < 3 < Z72 , and the reﬁnement {0} < 24 < 12 < 6 < Z72 of the series {0} < 24 < 12 < Z72 . 5. (See the answer in the text.) 6. {0} < {0} < {0} < {0} < {0} < {0} < 30 30 30 20 20 12 < < < < < < 15 < 5 < Z60 , 10 < 5 < Z60 , 6 < 3 < Z60 , 10 < 5 < Z60 , 4 < 2 < Z60 , 6 < 2 < Z60 , {0} < {0} < {0} < {0} < {0} < {0} < 30 30 30 20 12 12 < < < < < < 15 < 3 < Z60 , 10 < 2 < Z60 , 6 < 2 < Z60 , 10 < 2 < Z60 , 6 < 3 < Z60 , 4 < 2 < Z60 . For each series, the factor groups are isomorphic to Z2 , Z2 , Z3 , and Z5 in some order. 7. (See the text answer for the series.) For each series, the factor groups are isomorphic to Z2 , Z2 , Z2 , Z2 , and Z3 in some order. 120 35. Series of Groups 8. There are six possible series {(0, 0)} < (m, n) < Z5 × Z5 where (m, n) is either (0, 1), (1, 0), (1, 1), (1, 2), (1, 3), or (1, 4). There are two factor groups isomorphic to Z5 . 9. (See the text answer for the series.) The factor groups are isomorphic to Z3 , Z2 , and Z2 in some order. 10. {(0, 0, 0)} < Z2 × {0} × {0} < Z2 × Z5 × {0} < Z2 × Z5 × Z7 , {(0, 0, 0)} < Z2 × {0} × {0} < Z2 × {0} × Z7 < Z2 × Z5 × Z7 , {(0, 0, 0)} < {0} × Z5 × {0} < {0} × Z5 × Z7 < Z2 × Z5 × Z7 , {(0, 0, 0)} < {0} × Z5 × {0} < Z2 × Z5 × {0} < Z2 × Z5 × Z7 , {(0, 0, 0)} < {0} × {0} × Z7 < {0} × Z5 × Z7 < Z2 × Z5 × Z7 , {(0, 0, 0)} < {0} × {0} × Z7 < Z2 × {0} × Z7 < Z2 × Z5 × Z7 . The factor groups are isomorphic to Z2 , Z5 , and Z7 in some order. 11. {ρ0 } × Z2 12. {ρ0 } × {ρ0 , ρ2 } 13. {ρ0 } × Z4 ≤ {ρ0 } × Z4 ≤ {ρ0 } × Z4 ≤ · · · 14. {ρ0 } × {ρ0 , ρ2 } ≤ {ρ0 } × D4 ≤ {ρ0 } × D4 ≤ · · · 15. The deﬁnition is correct. 16. The deﬁnition is incorrect. It is the factor groups of the series, not the series groups themselves, that need to be abelian. A solvable group G is a group that has a composition series {e} = H0 < H1 < · · · < Hn = G such that the quotient groups Hi+1 /Hi are abelian for i = 1, 2, · · · , n − 1. 17. T F T F F T F F T T 18. {ρ0 } × {ρ0 } ≤ A3 × {ρ0 } ≤ S3 × {ρ0 } ≤ S3 × A3 ≤ S3 × S3 is a composition series. Yes, S3 × S3 is solvable because all the factor groups in this series are of order either 2 or 3 and hence are abelian. 19. Yes, D4 is solvable, for {ρ0 } ≤ {ρ0 , ρ2 } ≤ {ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 , ρ3 } ≤ D4 is a composition series with all factor groups of order 2 and hence abelian. 20. Chain (3) {0} ≤ {0} ≤ 12 ≤6≤3 ≤ 3 ≤ Z36 Chain (4) {0} ≤ {0} ≤ 18 ≤ 18 ≤ 6 ≤ 3 ≤ Z36 Isomorphisms: {0}/{0} {0}/{0} {0}, 12 /{0} 6 / 18 Z3 , 6 / 12 18 /{0} Z2 , 3 / 6 3/6 Z2 , 3/3 18 / 18 {0}, Z36 / 3 Z36 / 3 Z3 21. Chain {0} ≤ ≤ ≤ (3) 12 ≤ 12 ≤ 12 12 ≤ 12 ≤ 4 2 ≤ Z24 ≤ Z24 Z2 , Chain {0} ≤ ≤ ≤ (4) 12 ≤ 12 ≤ 6 6≤6≤3 3 ≤ Z24 ≤ Z24 /6/6 {0}, Isomorphisms: 12 /{0} 12 /{0} 12 / 12 35. Series of Groups 12 / 12 12 / 12 2/4 Z24 /Z24 3/3 6/6 6 / 12 Z24 /Z24 {0}, {0}, Z2 , {0} 12 / 12 4 / 12 Z24 / 2 12 / 12 {0}, Z24 / 3 Z3 , 3/6 Z2 , 121 22. Let a ∈ H ∗ ∩ K and let b ∈ H ∩ K . Then b ∈ H and a ∈ H ∗ so bab−1 ∈ H ∗ because H ∗ is a normal in H . Also b ∈ K and a ∈ K so bab−1 ∈ K . Thus bab−1 ∈ H ∗ ∩ K , so H ∗ ∩ K is a normal subgroup of H ∩ K . 23. We use induction to show that Hi  = s1 s2 · · · si for i = 1, 2, · · · n. For n = 1, s1 = H1 /H0  = H1 /{e} = H1  because each coset in H1 /{e} has only one element. Now suppose that Hk  = s1 s2 · · · sk for k < i ≤ n. Now Hi /Hi−1 consists of si cosets of Hi−1 , each having Hi−1  elements. By our induction assumption, Hi−1  = s1 s2 · · · si−1 . Thus Hi  = Hi−1 si = s1 s2 · · · si−1 si . Our induction is complete and the desired assertion follows by taking i = n. 24. By Deﬁnition 35.1, a composition series for G contains a ﬁnite number of subgroups of G. If G is inﬁnite and abelian, and {e} = H0 < H1 < H2 < · · · < Hn = G is a subnormal series, the factor groups Hi /Hi−1 cannot all be of ﬁnite order for i = 1, 2, · · · , n, or G would be ﬁnite by Exercise 23. Suppose Hk /Hk−1  is inﬁnite. Now every inﬁnite abelian group has a proper nontrivial subgroup and hence a normal subgroup. To see this we need only consider the cyclic subgroup a for some a = e in the group. If a is ﬁnite, we are done. If a is inﬁnite cyclic, then a2 is a proper subgroup. Thus we see that Hk /Hk−1 , as an inﬁnite abelian group, has a proper nontrivial subgroup, so it is not simple and our series is not a composition series. 25. Let G = G1 × G2 ×· · ·× Gm and suppose that Gi is solvable for i = 1, 2, · · · , m. We form a composition series for G as follows: Start with H0 = {e1 } × {e2 } × · · · × {em } where ei is the identity of Gi . Let H1 = H11 × {e2 } × · · · × {em } where H11 is the smallest nontrivial subgroup of G1 in a composition series {e1 } < H11 < H12 < · · · < H1n1 = G1 for G1 . Continue to build the composition series for G by putting these subgroups H1i in sequence in the ﬁrst factor of the direct product series until you arrive at G1 × {e2 } × · · · × {en }. Then start putting the sequence of subgroups H21 , H22 , · · · , H2n2 in a composition series for G2 into the second factor until you arrive at G1 × G2 × {e3 } × · · · × {em }. Continue in this way across the factors in the direct product until you arrive at G = H1n1 × H2n2 × · · · × Hmnm = G1 × G2 × · · · × Gm . A factor group formed from two consecutive terms of this series for G is naturally isomorphic to one of the factor groups in a composition series for one of the groups Gi by our construction. Thus these factor groups are all simple so we have indeed constructed a composition series for G. Because all the factor groups in the composition series for Gi are abelian for i = 1, 2, · · · , m we see that the factor groups of the composition series for G are abelian, so G is a solvable group. 26. Following the hint, Exercise 22 shows that K ∩Hi is a normal subgroup of K ∩Hi+1 for i = 0, 1, · · · , n−1, so the subgroups K ∩ Hi+1 form a subnormal series for K . Taking N = Hi−1 and H = K ∩ Hi as subgroups of Hi , and applying Theorem 34.5, we see that HN/N = [(K ∩ Hi )Hi−1 ]/Hi−1 H/(H ∩ N ) = (K ∩ Hi )/(K ∩ Hi−1 ). Now (K ∩ Hi )Hi−1 ≤ (K ∩ Hi )Hi = Hi so [(K ∩ Hi )]/Hi−1 can be viewed as a subgroup of Hi /Hi−1 . Because Hi /Hi−1 is a simple abelian group, we see that [(K ∩ Hi )Hi−1 ]/Hi−1 is either the trivial group or is isomorphic to Hi /Hi−1 , and hence is simple and abelian because G is solvable. Thus the distinct groups among the K ∩ Hi form a composition series for K with abelian factor groups, and consequently K is solvable. 122 36. Sylow Theorems 27. Following the hint, we show that Hi−1 N is normal in Hi N . Let hi−1 n1 ∈ Hi−1 N and hi n2 ∈ Hi N where the elements belong to the obvious sets. Using the fact that Hi−1 is normal in Hi and that − N is normal in G, we obtain (hi n2 )hi−1 n1 (hi n2 )−1 = hi n2 hi−1 n1 n2−1 hi−1 = hi hi−1 n3 n1 n2 1 hi−1 = hi−1 hi n4 hi−1 = hi−1 hi hi−1 n5 = hi−1 n5 ∈ Hi−1 N . Thus Hi−1 N is a normal sugroup of Hi N . The hint does the rest of the work for us, except to observe at the end that Hi /Hi−1 being simple implies that [Hi ∩ (Hi−1 N )]/Hi−1 is either trivial or isomorphic to Hi /Hi−1 . Thus (Hi N )/(Hi−1 N ) is either isomorphic to Hi /Hi−1 or is trivial. Because N = H0 N is itself simple, it follows at once that the distinct groups among the Hi N for i = 0, 1, 2, · · · , n form a composition series for G. 28. First we show that ψ is well deﬁned. Let hi n1 and hi n2 be the same elements of Hi N . Then hi n1 = hi n2 so hi = hi n2 n1−1 = hi n3 . Because γ has kernel N , we see that ψ (hi n1 ) = γ (hi n1 )γ [Hi−1 ] = (hi N )γ [Hi−1 ] = (hi n3 N )γ [Hi−1 ] = (h1 N )γ [Hi−1 ] = γ (h1 n2 )γ [Hi−1 ], so ψ is well deﬁned. We show that ψ is a homomorphism. This follows from γ (hi n1 hi n2 ) = γ (hi n1 )γ (hi n2 ) because γ is a homomorphism. The kernel of ψ consists of all x ∈ Hi N such that γ (x) ∈ γ [Hi−1 ] = Hi−1 N and ψ is clearly an onto map. By Theorem 34.2, γ [Hi ]/γ [Hi−1 ] is isomorphic to (Hi N )/(Hi−1 N ). Exercise 27 shows that these factor groups are simple, and the desired result follows immediately. 29. Let H0 = e < H1 < H2 < · · · < Hn = G be a composition series for G, and let φ : G → G be a group homomorphism of G onto G with kernel N . Then G G/N . Exercise 28 shows that the distinct groups among the groups Hi N for i = 0, 1, · · · , n form a composition series for G/N , and Exercise 27 shows that a factor group of this composition series is isomorphic to one of the factor groups in the composition series of groups Hi for G. Because G is a solvable group, it follows at once that all the factor groups in this composition series for G/N , composed of some of the groups Hi N , are also abelian, so that G/N is solvable 36. Sylow Theorems
1. 3 2. 27 3. A Sylow 2subgroup of a group of order 24 = 8 · 3 has order 8. By Theorem 36.11, the number of them must be conguent to 1 modulo 2, and hence is an odd number. It must also divide 24, and the only odd divisors of 24 are 1 and 3 so the group has either one or three Sylow 2subgroups. 4. The only numbers congruent to 1 modulo 3 that divide 255 = 3 · 5 · 17 are 1 and 5 · 17 = 85. The only numbers congruent to 1 modulo 5 that divide 255 are 1 and 3 · 17 = 51. 5. Because S4  = 24, the Sylow 3subgroups have order 3 and are thus cyclic and generated by a single 3cycle. The possibilities are (1, 2, 3) , (1, 2, 4) = (3, 4)(1, 2, 3)(3, 4) , (1, 3, 4) = (2, 4)(1, 2, 3)(2, 4) , and (2, 3, 4) = (1, 4)(1, 2, 3)(1, 4) . 6. A Sylow 2subgroup of S4 has order 8 and by Theorem 36.11, there must be either 1 or 3 of them. The group of symmetries of the square has order 8 and can be viewed as a subgroup of S4 if we number the vertices 1, 2, 3, and 4. 36. Sylow Theorems 123 If we number the four vertices in order 1, 2, 3, 4 counterclockwise, we obtain the group H = {(1), (1, 2, 3, 4), (1, 3)(2, 4), (1, 4, 3, 2), (1, 3), (2, 4), (1, 2)(3, 4), (1, 4)(2, 3)}. If we number the four vertices in order 1, 3, 2, 4 counterclockwise, we obtain the group K = {(1), (1, 3, 2, 4), (1, 2)(3, 4), (1, 4, 2, 3), (1, 2), (3, 4), (1, 4)(2, 3), (1, 3)(2, 4)}. If we number the four vertices in order 1, 3, 4, 2 counterclockwise, we obtain the group L = {(1), (1, 3, 4, 2), (1, 4)(2, 3), (1, 2, 4, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (1,3)(2, 4), (1, 2)(3, 4)}. Because there can be at most three of them, we have found them all. We see that K = (2, 3)H (2, 3) and L = (3,4)H (3,4) 7. The deﬁnition is incorrect. The order may be a power of p. Let p be a prime. A pgroup is a group with the property that the order of each element is some power of p. 8. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Elements of the normalizer are elements of G, not maps of G onto G. The normalizer N [H ] of a subgroup H of a group G is the set of all g ∈ G such that {ghg −1  h ∈ H} = H. 9. The deﬁnition is misleading. A Sylow psubgroup need not be unique, so replace the ﬁrst two occurrences of “the” by “a”. Also refer to the group as G after it is deﬁned. The word “largest” also implies uniqueness, so replace it by “maximal”. Let G be a group whose order is divisible by a prime p. A Sylow psubgroup of G is a maximal subgroup P of G with the property that P has some power of p as its order. 10. T T T F T F T T F F 11. Closure: Let a, b ∈ GH . Then aHa−1 = H and bHb−1 = H . Thus (ab)H (ab)−1 = a(bHb−1 )a−1 = aHa−1 = H, so ab ∈ GH . Identity: For all h ∈ H, ehe−1 = ehe = h so eHe−1 = H and e ∈ GH . Inverses: Let a ∈ GH . Then aHa−1 = H . Therefore H = eHe = (a−1 a)H (a−1 a) = a−1 (aHa−1 )a = a−1 Ha, so a−1 ∈ GH . Thus GH is a subgroup of G. 12. Let H be a Sylow psubgroup of G. Because q divides G, we know that H = G. For each g ∈ G, the conjugate group gHg −1 is also a Sylow psubgroup of G. Because G has only one Sylow psubgroup, it must be that gHg −1 = H for all g ∈ G, so that H is a proper normal subgroup of G, and G is thus not a simple group. 13. The divisors of 45 are 1, 3, 5, 9, 15, and 45. Of these, only 1 is congruent to 1 modulo 3, so by Theorem 36.11, there is only one Sylow 3subgroup of a group of order 45. By the argument in Exercise 12, this subgroup must be a normal subgroup. 14. Let G be a pgroup, so that by deﬁnition, every element of G has order a power of p. If a prime q = p divides G then G has an element of order q by Cauchy’s theorem, contradicting that G is a pgroup. Thus the order of G must be a power of p. Conversely, if the order of G is a power of p, then the order of each element of G is also a power of p by the Theorem of Lagrange. Thus G is a pgroup. 124 37. Applications of the Sylow Theory 15. Because N [P ] is a normal subgroup of N [N [P ]], conjugation of P by an element of N [N [P ]] yields a subgroup of N [P ] that is a Sylow psubgroup of G, and also of N [P ]. Such a Sylow psubgroup must be conjugate to P under conjugation by an element of N [P ] by Theorem 36.10, and must therefore be P because P is a normal subgroup of N [P ]. Thus P is invariant under conjugation by every element of N [N [P ]], so N [N [P ]] is contained in N [P ]. Because N [P ] is contained in N [N [P ]] by deﬁnition, we see that N [N [P ]] = N [P ]. 16. By Theorem 36.8, H is contained in a Sylow psubgroup K of G. By Theorem 36.10, there exists g ∈ G such that gKg −1 = P . Consequently gHg −1 ≤ P . 17. The divisors of (35)3 that are not divisible by 5 are 1, 7, 49, and 343, which are congruent to 1, 2, 4, and 3 respectively modulo 5. By Theorem 36.11, there is only one Sylow 5subgroup of a group of order (35)3 , and it must be a normal subgroup by the argument in Exercise 12. 18. The divisors of 255 that are not multiples of 17 are 1, 3, 5, and 15. Of these, only 1 is congruent to 1 modulo 17. By Theorem 36.11, there is only one Sylow 17subgroup of a group of order 255, and it must be a normal subgroup by the argument in Exercise 12. Thus no group of order 255 can be simple. 19. The divisors of pr m that are not divisible by p are 1 and m. Because m < p, of these two divisors of pr m, only 1 is congruent to 1 modulo p. By Theorem 36.11, there is a unique Sylow psubgroup of a group of order pr m where m < p, and this must be a normal subgroup by the argument in Exercise 12. Thus such a group cannot be simple. 20. a. As a Gset under conjugation, we have GG = {g ∈ G  gxg −1 = x for all x ∈ G} = {g ∈ G  gx = xg for all x ∈ G} = Z (G) by deﬁnition of Z (G). b. Let G be a nontrivial pgroup, so that G = pr for r ≥ 1. By Theorem 36.1, we see that G ≡ GG  (mod p). Thus p is a divisor of GG , and hence is a divisor of Z (G) by Part(a). Thus Z (G) is nontrivial. 21. We proceed by induction on n. If n = 1, the statement is obviously true, for H0 = {e} and the entire group G = H1 are the required subgroups. If n = 2, the subgroups are supplied by Theorem 36.8. Suppose the statement is true for n = k , and let G have order pk+1 . Let Z (G) have order pj where j ≥ 1 by Exercise 20. If j = k + 1, then G is abelian and the subgroups provided by Theorem 36.8 are all normal subgroups of G and we are done. If j < k + 1, apply the induction hypothesis to Z (G) to ﬁnd its desired normal subgroups H0 < H1 < · · · < Hj −1 < Hj = Z (G). Then form the factor group G/Z (G) which has order pk+1−j and ﬁnd normal subgroups K1 < K2 < · · · < Kk+1−j of G/Z (G) where the order of Ki is pi . If γ : G → G/Z (G) is the canonical homomorphism, then Hj +i = γ −1 [Ki ] is a normal subgroup of G of order pi+j , and all these subgroups Hi form the desired chain of normal subgroups of G. 22. Let P be a normal psubgroup of G. By Theorem 36.8, there exists a Sylow psubgroup H of G containing P . By Theorem 36.20, every Sylow psubgroup of G is of the form gHg −1 for some g ∈ G. Because gP g −1 = P , we see that P is contained in every Sylow psubgroup of G. 37. Applications of the Sylow Theory
1. a. The conjugate classes are {ρ0 }, {ρ2 }, {ρ1 , ρ2 }, {µ1 , µ2 }, and {δ1 , δ2 }. b. The class equation is 8 = 2 + 2 + 2 + 2. 37. Applications of the Sylow Theory 2. As pgroups, groups of these orders are not simple by Theorem 36.8: 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 27, 32, 49. 125 As groups of order pq, groups of these orders are not simple by Theorem 37.7: 6, 10, 14, 15, 21, 22, 26, 33, 34, 35, 38, 39, 46, 51, 55, 57, 58. As groups of order pr m with m < p, groups of these orders are not simple by Exercise 19 of Section 36: 18, 20, 21, 28, 42, 44, 50, 52, 54. The text showed that groups of these orders are not simple: 30, 36, 48. Order 12: Such a group has either 1 or 3 Sylow 2subgroups of order 4 and either 1 or 4 Sylow 3subgroups of order 3. To have 3 subgroups of order 4 and 4 subgroups of order 3 would require at least 4 elements of order divisible by 2 and at least 8 elements of order 3, which would require 12 elements other than the identity. Thus there is either only one subgroup of order 4 or only one of order 3, which must be normal. Order 24: Such a group has either 1 or 3 subgroups of order 8 and either 1 or 4 subgroups of order 3. If there is a unique subgroup of either order, we are done. Suppose that H and K are diﬀerent subgroups of order 8. By Lemma 37.8, H ∩ K must have order 4, and is normal in both H and K , being of index 2. Thus N [H ∩ K ] contains both H and K so it has order a multiple > 1 of 8 and a divisor of 24. Hence N [H ∩ K ] is of order 24 and H ∩ K is a normal subgroup. Order 40: Theorem 36.11 shows that there is a unique subgroup of order 5, which must be normal. Order 45: Theorem 35.11 shows that there is a unique subgroup of order 9, which must be normal. Order 56: Such a group has either 1 or 7 subgroups of order 8 and either 1 or 8 subgroups of order 7. If there is a unique subgroup of either order, we are done. Eight subgroups of order 7 require 48 elements of order 7, and 7 subgroups of order 8 require at least 8 elements of order divisible by 2, which is impossible in a group of 56 elements. All orders from 2 to 59 that are not prime have been considered. We know that A5 , which has order 60, is simple. 3. T T F T T T T T F F 4. By Theorem 36.11, a group G of order 5 · 7 · 47 contains a unique subgroup H of order 47, which must be normal in G. By the same arguments, there exist unique normal subgroups K and L of orders 7 and 5 respectively. By Lemma 37.8, LK has order 35 because L ∩ K = {e}. By the proof of Lemma 37.8, (LK )H has order 35 · 47, so (LK )H = G. Now LK must be the unique subgroup of G of order 35, because another subgroup would lead to subgroups of orders 7 and 5 other than L and K , which is impossible. By Lemma 37.5, G is isomorphic to LK × H and consequently to L × K × H which is abelian and cyclic. 5. A group of order 96 has either 1 or 3 subgroups of order 32. If there is only one such subgroup, it is normal and we are done. If not, let H and K be distinct subgroups of order 32. By Lemma 37.8, H ∩ K must have order 16, and is normal in both H and K , being of index 2. Thus N [H ∩ K ] has order a multiple > 1 of 32 and a divisor of 96, so the order must be 96. Thus H ∩ K is normal in the whole group. 6. A group G of order 160 has either 1 or 5 subgroups of order 32 and either 1 or 16 subgroups of order 5. If there is only one of order 32 or only one of order 5, it is a normal sbgroup and we are done. Let us suppose that this is not the case. Let H and K be distinct subgroups of order 32. By Lemma 126 37. Applications of the Sylow Theory 37.8, H ∩ K must have order either 16 or 8. If H ∩ K  = 16, then it is normal in both H and K , so N [H ∩ K ] has order a multiple > 1 of 32 and a divisor of 160, so N [H ∩ K ] = G and H ∩ K is a normal subgroup of the group G. If H ∩ K  = 8, then HK has order (32)(32)/8 = 128 by Lemma 37.8, so G has at least 127 elements of order divisible by 2. Then 16 subgroups of order 5 would contribute 64 elements of order 5, and 127 + 64 > 160, which is impossible. Thus G is not simple. 7. By Example 37.12, a group G of order 30 has a normal subgroup of order 5 or of order 3. Suppose that G has a normal subgroup H of order 5. Then G/H is a group of order 6, which has a normal subgroup K of order 3 by Sylow theory. If λ : G → G/H is the canonical homomorphism, then λ−1 [K ] is a normal subgroup of G of order 3 · 5 = 15. If G has no normal subgroup of order 5, then it has a normal subgroup N of order 3, so G/N has order 10 and has a normal subgroup L of order 5. Applying to L the inverse of the canonical homomorphism mapping G onto G/N gives a normal subgroup of G of order 15. 8. a. We have τ στ −1 (τ (ai )) = τ σ (ai ) = τ (ai+1 ) if i < m, τ (a1 ) if i = m. For any element b not of the form τ (ai ), we have τ στ −1 (b) = τ τ −1 (b) = b. Thus τ στ −1 has the desired action on each element of {1, 2, · · · , n}. b. Let σ = (a1 , a1 , · · · , am ) and µ = (b1 , b2 , · · · , bm ) be cycles of length m in Sn . Let τ be any permutation in Sn such that τ (ai ) = bi . Parta then shows that τ στ −1 = µ. c.Let σ and µ be products of s disjoint cycles with the ith cycle in each product of length ri . Let τ be any permutation in Sn that carries the j th element of the ith cycle of σ into the j th element of the ith cycle of µ for 1 ≤ j ≤ ri for each i where 1 ≤ i ≤ s. (That is, if we write µ directly under σ and erase all the parentheses at the ends of the cycles, we get a 2rowed notation for the action of τ on the elements moved by σ .) Fill in the action of τ on the other elements in any way that yields an element of Sn . Repetition of the computation in Part(a) shows that τ στ −1 = µ. d. Let σ be any permutation in Sn . Express σ as a product of disjoint cycles, supplying cycles of length 1 for all elements not moved by σ . The sum of the lengths of these cycles is then n, and the sum yields a partition of n. By Part(c), σ is conjugate to any other permutation that can be expressed similarly as a product of disjoint cycles that yield the same partition of n. The preceding parts of this exercise show that this correspondence between partitions of n and conjugate classes is one to one. e. 1 = 1, so p(1) = 1 2 = 2 = 1 + 1, so p(2) = 2 3 = 3 = 1 + 2 = 1 + 1 + 1, so p(3) = 3 4 = 4 = 1 + 3 = 2 + 2 = 1 + 1 + 2 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1, so p(4) = 5 If p1 (n) is the number of partitions of n having 1 as a summand, then p1 (n) = p(n − 1) for n ≥ 2, for all such partitions of n can be obtained by putting +1 after each partition of n − 1. Thus for n ≥ 2, p(n) =(number of partitions without 1 as a summand) + p(n − 1). 5 = 5 = 2 + 3, so p(5) = 2 + p(4) = 2 + 5 = 7 6 = 6 = 2 + 4 = 3 + 3 = 2 + 2 + 2, so p(6) = 4 + p(5) = 4 + 7 = 11 7 = 7 = 2 + 5 = 3 + 4 = 2 + 2 + 3, so p(7) = 4 + p(6) = 4 + 11 = 15 9. Using Exercise 8, we see the conjugate classes are {ι}, {(1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4), (3, 4)}, 37. Applications of the Sylow Theory {(1, 2)(3, 4), (1, 3)(2, 4), (1, 4)(2, 3)}, {(1, 2, 3), (1, 2, 4), (1, 3, 4), (1, 3, 2), (1, 4, 2), (1, 4, 3), (2, 3, 4), (2, 4, 3)}, {(1, 2, 3, 4), (1, 2, 4, 3), (1, 3, 2, 4), (1, 3, 4, 2), (1, 4, 2, 3), (1, 4, 3, 2)} The class equation is 24 = 1 + 6 + 3 + 8 + 6. 127 10. Class Equation for S5 : Rather than list as we did for Exercise 9, we use combinatorics for S5 . All we want is the class equation. There are (5 ) = 10 transpositions. 2 There are (5 )(3 )/2 = (10)(3)/2 = 15 products of two disjoint transpositions. 22 There are (5 ) · 2 = 10 · 2 = 20 cycles of length 3. 3 By the previous computation, there are 20 · 1 = 20 products of disjoint cycles of lengths 3 and 2. There are 5 · 6 = 30 cycles of length 4. (Five choices for the number not moved by the cycle, and then 6 cycles using the remaining four numbers as shown in Exercise 9.) There are 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 = 24 cycles of length 5. (Put 1 in left position, and ﬁll the remaining four positions in 4! ways.) The class equation is 120 = 1 + 10 + 15 + 20 + 20 + 30 + 24. Class Equation for S6 : We continue to use combinatorics. There are (6 ) = 15 transpositions. 2 There are (6 )(4 )/2 = (15)(6)/2 = 45 products of two disjoint 2cycles. 22 There are (6 )(4 )(2 )/6 = (15)(6)(1)/6 = 15 products of three disjoint 2 cycles. 222 There are (6 ) · 2 = 20 · 2 = 40 cycles of length 3 3 There are 40 · (3 ) = 120 products of a 3cycle and a disjoint 2cycle. (40 choices for the 3 cycle by the 2 last computation, times (3 ) choices for a tranposition from the remaining three elements.) 2 There are (40 · 2)/2 = 40 products of two disjoint 3cycles. (Choose one of the 40 3cycles, there are only two choices for the other 3 cycle, and divide by 2 because the order of their choice doesn’t matter.) There are (6 ) · 6 = 15 · 6 = 90 4cycles. (Choose 4 of the 6 numbers as those to be moved, and there 4 are 6 diﬀerent 4cycles moving on them as shown in the solution of Exercise 9.) There are 90 · 1 = 90 products of a 4cycle and a disjoint 2cycle. (Choose 1 of the 90 4cycles, and there is only one choice for the disjoint 2cycle.) There are (6 ) · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 = 6 · 24 = 144 5cycles. (Choose the 5 elements to be moved, list the smallest 5 of them at the left, and then ﬁll in the remaining 4 position in 4! ways.) There are 5! = 120 6cycles. (Put 1 in left position, and ﬁll the remaining 5 positions in 5! ways.) The class equation is 720 = 1 + 15 + 45 + 15 + 40 + 120 + 40 + 90 + 90 + 144 + 120. 11. Exercise 8 shows that the number of conjugate classes in Sn is the number p(n) of partitions of n. By Theorem 11.12, the number of abelian groups of order pn is also the number of partitions of n; it is the number of ways that pn can be split up into a product of powers of p, where the order of the product doesn’t matter. It is determined by how split the exponent n into a sum of exponents for the factors; that is, by how to partition n. 128 38. Free Abelian Groups 12. Each element of the center of a group G gives rise to a 1element conjugate class of G. It is clear from Exercise 8a that for n > 2, every permutation in Sn having an orbit with more than one element is conjugate to some other permutation in Sn . Thus if n > 2, the identity in Sn is the only element that is conjugate only to itself. 38. Free Abelian Groups
1. {1, 1, 1), (1, 2, 1), (1, 1, 2)} is a basis. (Note that the 2nd  1st gives (0, 1, 0) and the 3rd  1st gives (0, 0, 1), so it is clear that this set generates, and it has the right number of elements for a basis by Theorem 38.6. 2. Yes, {(2, 1), (3, 1)} is a basis. Now (1, 0) = (3, 1) + (1)(2, 1) and (0, 1) = 3(2, 1) + (2)(3, 1) so {(2, 1), (3, 1)} generates Z × Z. If m(2, 1) + n(3, 1)+ = (0, 0), then 2m + 3n = 0 and m + n = 0. Then m = −n so 2(−n) + 3n = 0, n = 0, and m = 0. Thus the conditions for a basis in Theorem 38.1 are satisﬁed. 3. (See the answer in the text.) 4. By Cramer’s rule, the equations ax + cy = e bx + dy = f have a unique solution in R if and only if ad − bc = 0. The solution is then x= ed − f c ad − bc and y= af − be . ad − bc These values x and y are integers for all choices of e and f if and only if D = ad − bc divides each of a, b, c, and d. Let a = ra D, b = rb D, c = rc D, and d = rd D. Then D = ad − bc = (ra rd − rb rc )D2 so that D is an integer which is an integer multiple of its square. The only possible values for D are ±1, so we obtain the condition ad − bc = 1. 5. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Change “generating set” to “basis”. The rank of a free abelian group G is the number of elements in a basis for G. 6. The deﬁnition is correct. 7. 2Z is a proper subgroup of rank r = 1 of the free abelian group Z of rank r = 1. 8. T T T T T F F T T F 9. Let φ : G → Z × Z × · · · × Z be the map described before the statement of Theorem 38.5. Note that φ is well deﬁned because each a ∈ G has a unique expression in the form n1 x1 + n2 x2 + · · · + nr xr where each ni ∈ Z. Suppose b ∈ G, and b = m1 x1 + m2 x2 + · · · + mr xr . Then φ(a + b) = φ[(n1 + m1 )x1 + (n2 + m2 )x2 + · · · + (nr + mr )xr ] = (n1 + m1 , n2 + m2 , · · · , nr + mr ) = (n1 , n2 , · · · , nr ) + (m1 , m2 , · · · , mr ) = φ(a) + φ(b)
r factors 38. Free Abelian Groups 129 so φ is a homomorphism. If φ(a) = φ(b), then ni = mi for i = 1, 2, · · · , r so a = b; this shows that φ is one to one. Clearly φ is an onto map because n1 x1 + n2 x+ · · · + nr xr is in G for all integer choices of the coeﬃcients ni , for i = 1, 2, · · · , r. Thus φ is an isomorphism. 10. Let G be free abelian with a basis X . Let a = 0 in G be given by a = n1 x1 + n2 x2 + · · · + nr xr where xi ∈ X and ni ∈ Z for i = 1, 2, · · · , r. If a has ﬁnite order m > 0, then ma = mn1 x1 + mn2 x2 + · · · + mnr xr = 0. Because G is free abelian and X is a basis, we deduce that mn1 = mn2 = · · · = mnr = 0, so n1 = n2 = · · · = nr = 0 and a = 0, contradicting our choice of a. Thus no element of G has ﬁnite order > 0. 11. Suppose that G and G are free abelian with bases X and X respectively. Let X = {(x, 0)  x ∈ X } and X = {(0, x )  x ∈ X }. We claim that Y = X ∪ X is a basis for G × G . Let (g, g ) ∈ G × G . Then g = n1 x1 + · · · + nr xr and g = m1 x1 + · · · + ms xs for unique choices of ni and mj , except for possible zero coeﬃcients. Thus (g, g ) = n1 (x1 , 0) + · · · + nr (xr , 0) + m1 (0, x1 ) + · · · + ms (0, xs ) for unique choices of the ni and mj , except for possible zero coeﬃcients. This shows that Y is a basis for G × G , which is thus free abelian. 12. If G is free abelian of ﬁnite rank, then G is of course ﬁnitely generated, and by Exercise 10, G has no elements of ﬁnite order. Conversely, if G is a ﬁnitely generated torsionfree abelian group, then Theorem 11.12 shows that G is isomorphic to a direct product of the group Z with itself a ﬁnite number of times, so G is free abelian of ﬁnite rank. 13. Because Q is not cyclic, any basis for Q must contain at least two elements. Suppose n/m and r/s are in a basis for Q where n, m, r, and s are nonzero integers. Then mr n r + (−ns) = rn − nr = 0, m s which is an impossible relation in a basis. Thus Q has no basis, so it is not a free abelian group. 14. Suppose pr a = 0 and ps b = 0. Then pr+s (a + b) = ps (pr a) + pr (ps b) = ps 0 + pr 0 = 0 + 0 = 0, so a + b is also of ppower order. Also 0 = pr 0 = pr [a + (−a)] = pr a + pr (−a) = 0 + pr (−a), so −a also has ppower order. Thus all elements of T of ppower order, together with zero, form a subgroup Tp of T . 15. Given the decomposition in Theorem 11.12, it is clear that the elements of T of ppower order are precisely those having 0 in all components except those of the form Zpr . (Recall that the order of an element in a direct product is the least common multiple of the orders of its components in the individual groups.) Thus Tp is isomorphic to the direct product of those factors having ppower order. 16. Suppose that na = nb = 0 for a, b ∈ G. Then n(a + b) = na + nb = 0 + 0 = 0. This shows that G[n] is closed under the group addition. If na = 0, then 0 = na = n[a + (−a)] = na + n(−a) = 0 + n(−a), so n(−a) = 0 also. Of course n0 = 0. Thus G[n] is a subgroup of G. 17. Let x ∈ Zpr . If px = 0, then px, computed in Z, is a multiple of pr . The possibilities for x are 0, 1pr−1 , 2pr−1 , 3pr−1 , · · · , (p − 1)pr−1 . Clearly these elements form a subgroup of Zpr that is isomorphic to Zp . 130 39. Free Groups 18. This follows at one from Exercise 17 and the fact that for abelian groups Gi , we have (G1 × G2 × · · · × Gm )[p] = G1 [p] × G2 [p] × · · · × Gm [p]. This relation follows at once from the fact that computation in a direct prodct is performed in the component groups. 19. a. By Exercise 18, both m and n are logp Tp [p]. b. Suppose that r1 < s1 . Then the primepower decomposition of the subgroup pr1 Tp computed using the ﬁrst decomposition of Tp would have less than m factors, while the decomposition of the same subgroup computed using the second decomposition of Tp would still have m = n factors. But applying Part(a) to this subgroup, we see that this is an impossible situation; the number of factors in the primepower decomposition of an abelian ppower group H is well deﬁned as logp H [p]. Thus r1 = s1 . Proceeding by induction, suppose that ri = si for all i < j , and suppose rj < sj . Multiplication of elements of Tp by prj annihilates all components in the ﬁrst decomposition given of Tp through at least component j , while the component Zpsj of the second decomposition given is not annihilated. This would contradict the fact that by Part(a), the number of factors in the primepower decomposition of any abelian ppower group, in particular of prj Tp , is well deﬁned. Thus rj = sj and our induction proof is complete. 20. If m = p1r1 p2r2 · · · pkrk for distinct primes pi , then we know that Zm Zp1 r1 × Zp2 r2 × · · · × Zpk rk from Section 11. If we form this decomposition of each factor in a torsioncoeﬃcient decomposition, we obtain the unique (up to order of factors) primepower decomposition . 21. Following the notation deﬁned in the exercise, we know that if the unique primepower decomposition is formed from a torsioncoeﬃcient decomposition, as described in Exercise 20, then cyclic factors of order pihi must appear for each i = 1, · · · , t. Because each torsion coeﬃcient except the ﬁnal one must divide the following one, the ﬁnal one must contain as factors all these prime powers pihi for i = 1, · · · , t. Because the pi for i = 1, · · · , t are the only primes that divide T , we see that mr and nr must both be equal to p1h1 p2h2 · · · ptht . 22. If we cross oﬀ the last factors Zmr and Znr in the two given torsioncoeﬃcient decompositions of T , we get torsioncoeﬃcient decompositions of isomorphic groups, because both decompositions must, by Exercises 19 and 20, be isomorphic to the group obtained by crossing oﬀ from the primepower decomposition of T , one factor of order pihi for i = 1, · · · , t. (We are using the notation of Exercise 21 here.) We now apply the argument of Exercise 21 to these torsioncoeﬃcient decompositions of this group, and deduce that mr−1 = nr−1 . Continuing to cross oﬀ identical ﬁnal factors, we see that we must have the same number of factors, that is, r = s, and mr−i = nr−i for i = 0, · · · , r − 1. 39. Free Groups
1. a. We obtain a2 b2 a3 c3 b−2 whose inverse is b2 c−3 a−3 b−2 a−2 . b. We obtain a−1 b3 a4 c6 a−1 whose inverse is ac−6 a−4 b−3 a. 2. For the product in Part(a) of Exercise 1, it reduces to a5 c3 and its inverse reduces to a−5 c−3 in the abelian case. For Part(b), the product reduces to a2 b3 c6 and its inverse reduces to a−2 b−3 c−6 . 39. Free Groups 131 3. a. There are 4 · 4 = 16 homomorphisms, because each of the two generator can be mapped into any one of four elements of Z4 by Theorem 39.12. b. There are 6 · 6 = 36 homomorphisms by reasoning analagous to that in Part(a). c. There are 6 · 6 = 36 homomorphisms by reasoning analagous to that in Part(a). 4. a. Let the free group have generators x and y . By Theorem 39.12, x and y can be mapped into any elements to give a homomorphism. The homomorphism will be onto Z4 if and only if not both x and y are mapped into the subgroup {0, 2}. Because 4 of the 16 possible homomorphisms map x and y into {0, 2}, there are 16  4 = 12 homomorphisms onto Z4 . b. Arguing as in Part(a), we eliminate the 4 homomorphisms that map x and y into {0, 3} and the 9 that map x and y into {0, 2, 4}. The homomorphism mapping both x and y into {0} is counted in both cases, so there are a total of 12 of the possible homomorphisms to eliminate, so 36  12 = 24 are onto Z6 . c. Arguing as in Part(a), we eliminate the 4 homomorphisms that map x and y into {ρ0 , µ1 }, the 4 that map x and y into {ρ0 , µ2 }, the 4 that map x and y into {ρ0 , µ3 }, and the 9 that map x and y into {ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 }. The homomorphism that maps x and y into {0} is counted four times, so we have found a total of 4 + 4 + 4 + 9  3 = 18 homomorphisms to eliminate, leaving 36  18 = 18 that are onto S3 . 5. a. There are 16 homomorphisms by the count in Exercise 3a. b. There are 36 homomorphisms by count in Exercise 3b. c. Because a homomorphic image of an abelian group is abelian, the image must be {0}, {ρ0 , µ1 }, {ρ0 , µ2 }, {ρ0 , µ3 }, or {ρ0 , ρ1 , ρ2 }. The count made in Exercise 4c shows that there are 18 such homomorphisms. 6. a. There are 12 homomorphisms onto Z4 as in Exercise 4a. b. There are 24 homomorphisms onto Z6 as in Exercise 3b. c. There are no homomorphisms onto S3 , because the homomorphic image of an abelian group must be abelian, and S3 is not abelian. 7. The deﬁnition is correct. 8. The deﬁnition is incorrect. The group must be free on the set of generators. The rank of a free group G is the number of elements in a generating set A such that G is free on A. 9. Our reaction to these instances was given in the text. You have to give your reaction. 10. T F F T F F F T F T 11. a. We have 3(2) + 2(3) = 0 but 3(2) = 0 and 2(3) = 0. A basis for Z4 is {1}. b. We see that {1} is a basis for Z6 because the group is cyclic with generator 1, and because m1 = 0 if and only if m1 = 0. If m1 2 + m2 3 = 0 in Z6 , then in Z, we know that 6 divides m1 2+ m2 3. Thus 3 divides m1 2+ m2 3, and hence 3 divides m1 2. Because 3 is prime and does not divide 2, it must be that 3 divides m1 . Thus 6 divides m1 2 in Z, so m1 2 = 0 in Z6 . A similar argument starting with the fact that 2 divides m1 2 + m2 3 shows that m2 3 = 0 in Z6 . Thus {2, 3} is a basis for Z6 . 132 39. Free Groups c. Yes it is, for if xi is an element of a basis of a free abelian group, then ni xi = 0 if and only if ni = 0, so we stated the “independence condition” in that form there. d. By Theorem 38.12, a ﬁnite abelian group G is isomorphic to a direct product Zm1 × Zm2 ×· · ·× Zmr where mi divides mi+1 for i = 1, 2, · · · , r − 1. Let bi be the element of this direct product having 1 in the ith component and 0 in the other components. The computation by components in a direct product shows at once that {b1 , b2 , · · · , br } is a basis, and because the order of each bi is mi , we see that the orders have the desired divisibility property. 12. a. We proceed as suggested by the hint, and use the notation given there. Let x ∈ G1∗ . Because φ1 is onto, we have x = φ1 (y ) for some y ∈ G. Then θ2 (x) = θ2 φ1 (y ) = φ2 (y ) and θ1 θ2 (x) = θ1 φ2 (y ) = ∗ φ1 (y ) = x. In a similar fashion, starting with z ∈ G2 , we can show that θ2 θ1 (z ) = z . Thus both θ1 θ2 and θ2 θ1 are identity maps. Because θ2 θ1 is the identity, θ2 must be an onto map and θ1 must be one to one. Because θ1 θ2 is the identity, θ1 is an onto map and θ2 is one to one. Thus both θ1 and θ2 are one to one and onto, and hence are isomorphisms. Thus G1∗ and G2∗ are isomorphic groups. b. Let C be the commutator subgroup of G and let φ : G → G/C be the canonical homomorphism (which we have usually called γ ). Let ψ : G → G be a homomorphism of G into an abelian group G . Then the kernel K of ψ contains C by Theorem 15.20. Let θ : G/C → G be deﬁned by θ(aC ) = ψ (a) for aC ∈ G/C . Now θ is well deﬁned, for if bC = aC , then b = ac for some c ∈ C and θ(bC ) = ψ (b) = ψ (ac) = ψ (a)ψ (c) = ψ (a)e = ψ (a) because C is contained in the kernel K of ψ . Now θ((aC )(bC )) = θ((ab)C ) = ψ (ab) = ψ (a)ψ (b) = θ(aC )θ(bC ), so θ is a homomorphism. Finally, for a ∈ G, we have θ(φ(a)) = θ(aC ) = ψ (a), so θφ = ψ , which is the desired factorization. Thus G∗ = G/C is a blip group of G. c. A blip group of G is isomorphic to the abelianized version of G, that is, to G modulo its commutator subgroup. 13. a. Consider the blop group G1 on S and let G be the free group F [S ], with f : S → F [S ] given by f (s) = s for s ∈ S . Because f is one to one and f = φf g1 , we see that g1 must be one to one. By a similar argument, g2 must be one to one. To see that g1 [S ] generates G1 , we take G = G1 and let f (s) = g1 (s) for all s ∈ S . Clearly the identity map ι : G1 → G1 is a homomorphism and f (s) = g1 (s) = ι(g1 (s)) = (ιg1 )(s), so f = ιg1 , and the unique homomorphism φf mapping G1 into G1 is ι. Let H1 be the subgroup of G1 generated by g1 [S ]. Thinking of H1 as G for a moment, we see that by hypothesis, there exists a homomorphism, φH1 : G1 → H1 and satisfying f = φH1 g1 . Now φH1 also maps G1 into G1 , and can also serve as the required homomorphism φf for the case where G = G1 . By the uniqueness of φf , we see that φH1 = ι. Because φH1 [G1 ] = H1 and ι[G1 ] = G1 , this can only be the case if H1 = G1 . Therefore g1 [S ] generates G1 , and of course changing subscripts from 1 to 2 shows that g2 [S ] generates G2 . Taking G = G2 and f = g2 , we obtain a homomorphism φg2 : G1 → G2 such that φg2 g1 = g2 . Taking G = G1 and f = g1 , we obtain a homomorphism φg1 : G2 → G1 such that φg1 g2 = g1 . Then for s ∈ S , we have φg1 φg2 g1 (s) = φg1 g2 (s) = g1 (s). Thus φg1 φg2 is a homomorphism mapping G1 into itself and acts as the identity on a generating set g1 [S ] of G1 , so it is the identity map of G1 onto G1 . By a symmetric argument, φg2 φg1 is the identity map of G2 onto G2 . As in Exercise 12, we conclude that φg1 and φg2 are isomorphisms, so that G1 G2 . b. Let G = F [S ], the free group on S , and let g : S → G be deﬁned by g (s) = s for all s ∈ S . Let a group G and a function f : S → G be given. Let φf : G → G be the unique homomorphism given by Theorem 39.12 such that φf (s) = f (s). Then φf g (s) = φf (s) = f (s) for all s ∈ S , so φf g = f . c. A blop group on S is isomorphic to the free group F [S ] on S . 40. Group Presentations 133 14. The characterization is just like that in Exercise 13 with the requirement that both G and G be abelian groups. 40. Group Presentations
1. Three presentations of Z4 are (a : a4 = 1), (a, b : a4 = 1, b = a2 ), and (a, b, c : a = 1, b4 = 1, c = a). 2. Thinking of a = ρ1 , b = µ1 , and c = ρ2 , we obtain the presentation (a, b, c : a3 = 1, b2 = 1, c = a2 , ba = cb). Starting with this presentation,the relations can be used to express every word in one of the forms 1, a, b, a2 , ab, or a2 b, so a group with this presentation has at most 6 elements. Because the relations are satisﬁed by S3 , we know it must be a presentation of a group isomorphic to S3 . (Many other answers are possible.) 3. (See the answer in the text.) 4. Let G be a nonabelian group of order 14. By Sylow theory, there exists a normal subgroup H of order 7. Let b be an element of G that is not in H . Because G/H Z2 , we see that b2 ∈ H . If b2 = 1, then b has order 14 and G is cyclic and abelian. Thus b2 = 1. Let a be a generator for the cyclic group H . Now bHb−1 = H so bab−1 ∈ H , so ba = ar b for some value of r where 1 ≤ r ≤ 6. If r = 1, then ba = ab and G is abelian. By Exercise 13, Part(b), the presentation (a, b : a7 = 1, b2 = 1, ba = ar b) gives a group of order 2 · 7 = 14 if and only if r2 ≡ 1 (mod 7). Of the possible values r = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, only r = 6 satisﬁes this condition. Thus every nonabelian group of order 14 is isomorphic to the group with presentation (a, b : a7 = 1, b2 = 1, ba = a6 b). We know then that this group must be isomorphic to the dihedral group D7 . Of course, Z14 is the only abelian group of order 14. 5. Let G be nonabelian of order 21. By Sylow theory, there exists a normal subgroup H of order 7. Let b be an element of G that is not in H . Because G/H Z3 , we see that b3 ∈ H . If b3 = 1, then b has order 21 and G is cyclic and abelian. Thus b3 = 1. Let a be a generator for the cyclic group H . Now bHb−1 = H so bab−1 ∈ H , so ba = ar b for some value of r where 1 ≤ r ≤ 6. If r = 1, then ba = ab and G is abelian. By Exercise 13, Part(b), the presentation (a, b : a7 = 1, b3 = 1, ba = ar b) gives a group of order 3 · 7 = 21 if and only if r3 ≡ 1 (mod 7). Of the possible values r = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, both r = 2 and r = 4 satisfy this condition. To see that the presentations with r = 2 and r = 4 yield isomorphic groups, consider the group having this presentation with r = 2, and let us form a new presentation of it, taking the same a but replacing b by c = b2 . We then have a7 = 1 and c3 = 1, but now ca = b2 a = a4 b2 = a4 c. Thus in terms of the elements a and c, this group has presentation (a, c : a7 = 1, c3 = 1, ca = a4 c). This shows the two values r = 2 and r = 4 lead to isomorphic presentations. Thus every group of order 21 is isomorphic to either Z21 or to the group with presentation (a, b : a7 = 1, b3 = 1, ba = a2 b). 6. The deﬁnition is incorrect. A consequence may be any element of the normalizer of the group generated by the relators in the free group on the generators. Also, one should say, “the relators in a presentation of a group”. 134 40. Group Presentations A consequence of the set of relators in a group presentation is any element of the least normal subgroup, containing the relators, of the free group on the generators of the presentation. 7. The deﬁnition is incorrect. See Example 40.3 and the deﬁnition (in bold type within the text) that follows. Two group presentations are isomorphic if and only if the groups G and G presented by them are isomorphic. 8. T T F F F T T F T F (Concerning the answer to Part(a), for any group G, the presentation F [G] with relators the elements of the kernel of the homomorphism φ : F [G] → G where φ(g ) = g for g ∈ G, as described in Theorem 39.12, is a presentation of G. Concerning the answer to Part(j), the presentation (a, b, c : c = b) is a free group on two generators.) 9. Let G be nonabelian of order 15. By Sylow theory, there exists a normal subgroup H of order 5. Let b be an element of G that is not in H . Because G/H Z3 , we see that b3 ∈ H . If b3 = 1, then b has order 15 and G is cyclic and abelian. Thus b3 = 1. Let a be a generator for the cyclic group H . Now bHb−1 = H so bab−1 ∈ H , so ba = ar b for some value of r where 1 ≤ r ≤ 4. If r = 1, then ba = ab and G is abelian. By Exercise 13, Part(b), the presentation (a, b : a5 = 1, b3 = 1, ba = ar b) gives a group of order 3 · 5 = 15 if and only if r3 ≡ 1 (mod 5). But none of 23 , 33 , or 43 is congruent to 1 modulo 5, so there are no nonabelian groups of order 15. 10. Exercise 13, Part(b), shows that the given presentation is a group of order 2 · 3 = 6 if and only if 22 ≡ 1 (mod 3), which is the case. Thus we do have a group of order 6. Because the elements 1, a, b, a2 , ab, a2 b are all distinct and because ba = a2 b, the group is not abelian, for if ba = ab, then a2 b = ab from which we deduce that a = 1. 11. Let G be nonabelian of order 6. By Sylow theory, there exists a normal subgroup H of order 3. Let b be an element of G that is not in H . Because G/H Z2 , we see that b2 ∈ H . If b2 = 1, then 2 = 1. Let a be a generator for the cyclic group b has order 6 and G is cyclic and abelian. Thus b H . Now bHb−1 = H so bab−1 ∈ H , so ba = ar b for some value of r where 1 ≤ r ≤ 2. If r = 1, then ba = ab and G is abelian. Thus ba = a2 . The preceding exercise shows that the presentation (a, b : a3 = 1, b2 = 1, ba = a2 b) gives a nonabelian group of order 6, and this exercise shows that a nonabelian group of order 6 is isomorphic to one with this presentation. Thus every nonabelian group of order 6 is isomorphic to S3 . 12. Every element of A4 can be written as a product of disjoint cycles involving some of the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4 and each element is also an even permutation. Because no product of such disjoint cycles can give an element of order 6, we see that A4 has no elements of order 6, and hence no subgroup isomorphic to Z6 , the only possibility for an abelian subgroup of order 6. Therefore, any subgroup of order 6 of A4 must be nonabelian, and hence isomorphic to S3 by the preceding exercise. Now S3 has two elements of order 3 and three elements of order 2. The only even permutations in S4 of order 2 are products of two disjoint transpositions, and the only such permutations are (1,2)(3,4) and (1,3)(2,4) and (1,4)(2,3). Thus a subgroup of A4 isomorphic to S3 must contain all three of these elements. It must also contain an element of order 3: we might as well assume that it is the 3cycle (1, 2, 3). Then it must contain (1, 2, 3)2 = (1, 3, 2), and the identity would be the sixth element. But this set is not closed under multiplication, for (1, 2)(3, 4)(1, 2, 3) = (2, 4, 3). Thus A4 has no nonabelian subgroup of order 6 either. 40. Group Presentations 135 13. a. We know that when computing integer sums modulo n, we may either reduce modulo n after each addition, or add in Z and reduce modulo n at the end. The same is true for products, as we now show. Suppose c = nq1 + r1 and d = nq2 + r2 , both in accord with the division algorithm. Then cd = n(nq1 q2 ) + n(q1 r2 + r1 q2 ) + r1 r2 , showing that the remainder of cd modulo n is the remainder of r1 r2 modulo n. That is, it does not matter whether we ﬁrst reduce modulo n and then multiply and reduce, or whether we multiply in Z and then reduce. Turning to our problem and delaying reduction modulo m and n of sums and products in exponents to the end, we have as bt [(au bv )(aw bz )] = as bt [au+wr bv+z ] = as+(u+wr and [(as bt )(au bv )]aw bz = [as+ur bt+v ]aw bz .
t v v )r t bt+v+z (1) (2) Before we can continue this last computation, we must reduce the exponent t + v modulo n, for in the next step t + v will appear as an exponent of an exponent, rather than as a sum or product of ﬁrst exponents where we are allowed to delay our reduction modulo n to the end. Let t + v = nq1 + r1 by the division algorithm. Note that because both t and v lie in the range from 0 to n  1, either q1 = 1 or q1 = 0. Continuing, we see the expression (2) is equal to as+ur
t +wr r1 bt+v+z . (3) Comparing (1) and (3), we see the associative law holds if and only if s + (u + wrv )rt ≡ s + urt + wrr1 (mod m) and t + v + z ≡ t + v + z (mod m). Of course this second condition is true, and the ﬁrst one reduces to wrv+t ≡ wrr1 (mod m). Now this relation must hold for all w where 0 ≤ w < m and for all v and t from 0 to n  1. Taking w = 1 and v + t = n so that r1 = 0, we see that we must have rn ≡ 1 (mod m). On the other hand, if this is true, then wrv+t = wrnq1 +r1 = w(rn )q1 rr1 ≡ wrr1 (mod m). This completes the proof. b. Part(a) proved the associative law, and a0 b0 is the identity for multiplication. Given au bv , we can ﬁnd as bt such that (as bt )(au bv ) = a0 b0 by determining t and s is succession so that t ≡ −v (mod n) and s ≡ −u(rt ) (mod m). The “left group axioms” hold, so we have a group of order mn. 136 41. Simplicial Complexes and Homology Groups 14. Let G be a group of order pq for p and q primes, q > p, and q ≡ 1(mod p). By Sylow theory, G contains a normal subgroup H of order q which is cyclic, being of prime order. Let a be a generator of H and let b ∈ G, b ∈ H . Now G/H has order p, so bp ∈ H . If bp = 1, then b is of order pq and G / is cyclic and thus abelian, so for nonabelian G, we must have bp = 1. Now bab−1 ∈ H . If bab−1 = a, then ba = ab and G is abelian. Thus bab−1 must be one of a2 , a3 , · · · , aq−1 . By Exercise 13, Part(b), the exponents x from 2 to q − 1 such that the presentation (a, b : aq = 1, bp = 1, ba = ax b) gives a group of order pq are those such that xp ≡ 1(mod q ). By Corollary 23.6, the integers 1, 2, 3, · · · , q − 1 form a cyclic group Zq∗ , · of order q − 1 under multiplication modulo q . Because q ≡ 1(mod p) and p < q , we see that p divides q − 1, so there is a cyclic subgroup r of Zq∗ , · having order p, so that (rj )p ≡ 1 (mod q ) for j = 0, 1, · · · , p − 1. Thus by Exercise 13, the presentations (a, b : aq = 1, bp = 1, ba = a(r ) b) give groups of order pq for j = 1, 2, · · · , p − 1. The hint in the exercise concludes with the demonstration that these p − 1 presentations are isomorphic.
j 41. Simplicial Complexes and Homology Groups.
1. a. We have ∂2 (c) = 2∂2 (P1 P3 P4 ) − 4∂2 (P3 P4 P6 ) + 3∂2 (P3 P2 P4 ) + ∂2 (P1 P6 P4 ) = 2(P3 P4 − P1 P4 + P1 P3 ) − 4(P4 P6 − P3 P6 + P3 P4 ) + 3(P2 P4 − P3 P4 + P3 P2 ) + (P6 P4 − P1 P4 + P1 P6 ) = 2P1 P3 − 3P1 P4 + P1 P6 − 3P2 P3 + 3P2 P4 − 5P3 P4 + 4P3 P6 − 5P4 P6 . b. No, ∂2 (c) was just computed, and is nonzero. c. Yes, it is a 1cycle because ∂ 2 = 0, that is, ∂1 (∂2 (c)) = 0. 2. We have ∂2 (∂3 (P1 P2 P3 P4 )) = ∂2 (P2 P3 P4 − P1 P3 P4 + P1 P2 P4 − P1 P2 P3 ) = P3 P4 − P2 P4 + P2 P3 − P3 P4 + P1 P4 − P1 P3 + P2 P4 − P1 P4 + P1 P2 − P2 P3 + P1 P3 − P1 P2 =0 3. For i > 0, all four of these groups are zero. We have B0 (P ) = 0 while C0 (P ) = Z0 (P ) = {nP  n ∈ Z} Z, and H0 (P ) = {{nP }  n ∈ Z} Z. 4. For i > 0, all four of these groups are zero. We have B0 (X ) = 0 while C0 (X ) = Z0 (X ) = {mP + nP  m, n ∈ Z} Z × Z, and H0 (X ) = {{mP + nP }  m, n ∈ Z} Z × Z. 5. For i > 1, all four of these groups are zero. We have C1 (X ) = {nP1 P2  n ∈ Z} Z. Because ∂1 (P1 P2 ) = −P1 + P2 = 0, we have Z1 (X ) = B1 (X ) = H1 (X ) = 0. For dimension 0, we have C0 (X ) = Z0 (X ) = {mP1 + nP2  m, n ∈ Z} Z × Z and B0 (X ) = {n(P2 − P1 )  n ∈ Z} Z. Because rP1 + sP2 + (−s)(P2 − P1 ) = (r + s)P1 , we see that every coset of B0 (X ) in Z0 (X ) contains a unique element of the form mP1 for m ∈ Z, so H0 (Z ) = Z0 X/B0 (X ) = {mP1 + B0 (X )  m ∈ Z} Z. 6. T F T T T T F T T T 41. Simplicial Complexes and Homology Groups 137 7. a. An oriented n simplex σ = P1 P2 · · · Pn+1 is an ordered sequence of n + 1 vertices in Rm where m ≥ n. If the nsimplex µ = Pk1 Pk2 · · · Pkn+1 contains the same vertices as σ in a diﬀerent order, then µ = σ if the permutation 1 2 ··· n + 1 k1 k2 · · · kn+1 is even and µ = −σ if the permutation is odd. b. We have
n+1 ∂n (P1 P2 · · · Pn+1 ) =
i=1 (−1)i+1 P1 P2 · · · Pi−1 Pi+1 · · · Pn+1 . c. Each summand of the boundary of an nsimplex is a face of the simplex. 8. They are already deﬁned in the text in terms of a general integer n ≥ 0. Take them just as they stand. 9. Let σ = P1 P2 · · · Pn+1 . The ith face of ∂n (σ ) is (−1)i+1 P1 · · · Pi−1 Pi+1 · · · Pn+1 and the j th face is (−1)j +1 P1 · · · Pj −1 Pj +1 · · · Pn+1 . Let us suppose that i < j . Applying ∂n−1 to the ith face produces an (n2)chain containing the term mi P1 · · · Pi−1 Pi+1 · · · Pj −1 Pj +1 · · · Pn+1 where mi = (−1)i+1 (−1)j , for the vertex Pj became the (j − 1)st vertex in the ith face after its predecessor Pi was removed. On the other hand, applying ∂n−1 to the j th face produces this same (n − 2)simplex with coeﬃcient mj = (−1)j +1 (−1)i+1 , for Pi was still the ith vertex in the j th face since i < j . Thus these two terms cancel each other in the computation of ∂n−1 (∂n (σ )). 10. a.Because P1 is a summand of ∂1 of P2 P1 , P3 P1 , and P4 P1 , we have δ (0) P1 = P2 P1 + P3 P1 + P4 P1 . Similarly, δ (0) (P4 ) = P1 P4 + P2 P4 + P3 P4 . b. Note that P3 P2 is a summand of both ∂2 of P1 P3 P2 and ∂2 of P3 P2 P1 . However, as stated in the text, these 2simplexes are the same because we consider P1 P3 P2 = P3 P2 P1 = P2 P1 P3 . Thus δ (1) (P3 P2 ) = P1 P3 P2 + P4 P3 P2 . c. We have δ (2) (P3 P2 P4 ) = P1 P3 P2 P4 . 11. a. We deﬁne δ (n) : C (n) → C (n+1) by δ (n)
i mi σi =
i mi δ (n) (σi ). b. It suﬃces to show that δ (n+1) (δ (n) (σ )) = 0 for every nsimplex σ . In the case where σ is not a face of a face of an (n+2)simplex, the conclusion is obvious. Otherwise, let σ be a face of a face of an (n+2)simplex that contains two additional vertices, Pi and Pj . Now δ (n) (σ ) contains both Pi σ and Pj σ as summands. Then δ (n+1) (δ (n) (σ )) contains both Pj Pi σ and Pi Pj σ as summands. Because the reordering of the vertices of Pj Pi σ to produce Pi Pj σ is accomplished by an odd permutation, namely the single transposition (i, j ), we see that the second simplex is the negative the the ﬁrst, so these two terms cancel each other in C (n+2) (X ). Thus δ 2 = 0. 138 42. Computations of Homology Groups 12. We deﬁne the group Z (n) (X ) of n cocycles of X to be the kernel of the coboundary homomorphism δ (n) . We deﬁne the group B (n) of n coboundaries of C (n) (X ) to be the image of δ (n−1) , that is, it is δ (n−1) [C (n−1) (X )]. Because δ (n) [B (n) ] = δ (n) (δ (n−1) [C (n−1) (X )]) = 0, we see that B (n) (X ) ≤ Z (n) (X ). 13. The n dimensional cohomology group H (n) (X ) of X is Z (n) (X )/B (n) (X ). Computing H (0) (S ): We have B (0) (S ) = 0 because C (−1) (S ) = 0. Now δ (0) (P1 ) = P2 P1 + P3 P1 + P4 P1 , and all these summands would have to be “cancelled” for a 0cocycle. The term P2 P1 can only be eliminated by another summand P1 P2 , which appears in δ (0) (P2 ) = P1 P2 + P3 P2 + P4 P2 , and similar observations hold for the summands P3 P1 and P4 P1 . Thus our only hope for a 0cocycle is a multiple of P1 + P2 + P3 + P4 . Computing, we have δ (0) (P1 + P2 + P3 + P4 ) = P2 P1 + P3 P1 + P4 P1 + P1 P2 + P3 P2 + P4 P2 + P1 P3 + P2 P3 + P4 P3 + P1 P4 + P2 P4 + P3 P4 = 0. Thus H (0) (S ) Z and is generated by (P1 + P2 + P3 + P4 ) + {0}. Computing If a coset of B (1) (S ) in Z (1) (S ) contains a 1cochain c having mP4 P1 as a summand, then it also contains c − mδ (0) (P1 ), which is a 1cochain c that does not contain a multiple of P4 P1 . By a similar argument, we can adjust terms of c involving P2 P4 and P3 P4 by coboundaries of P2 and P3 , and we see that the coset contains a 1cochain of the form c = rP1 P2 + sP2 P3 + tP3 P1 . Computing, δ (1) (c ) = r(P3 P1 P2 + P4 P1 P2 )+ s(P1 P2 P3 + P4 P2 P3 )+ t(P2 P3 P1 + P4 P3 P1 ). Now the three 2simplexes containing the vertex P4 are all diﬀerent, so we see that δ (1) (c ) = 0 unless r = s = t = 0, which means c = 0. Thus there are no 1cocycles that are not 1coboundaries, so Z (1) (S ) = B (1) (S ) and H (1) (S ) = 0. Computing H (2) (S ): Because C (3) (S ) = 0, every 2cochain is a cocycle. Examining the coboundaries in B (2) (S ), we take the 1simplex P1 P2 and ﬁnd that δ (1) (P1 P2 ) = P1 P2 P3 + P1 P2 P4 . Thus if z is a 2cycle having mP1 P2 P4 as a summand, we can subtract mδ (1) (P1 P2 ) from Z and obtain another representative of the coset z +B (2) (S ) in which P1 P2 P4 does not appear. Now δ (1) (P1 P3 ) = P1 P3 P2 +P1 P3 P4 and δ (1) (P2 P3 ) = P1 P2 P3 + P2 P3 P4 . Thus by subtracting suitable multiples of these coboundaries, we can ﬁnd an element of the coset z + B (2) (S ) in which no simplex involving P4 appears. Thus we see that every coset of B (2) (S ) contains a unique element of the form mP1 P2 P3 for m ∈ Z. Clearly H (2) (S ) is then inﬁnite cyclic, generated by P1 P2 P3 + B (2) (S ), and isomorphic to Z. H (1) (S ): 42. Computations of Homology Groups
1. The space X is connected, so H0 (X ) Z. Each of the two tangent 1spheres (circles) is a 1cycle that is not a 1boundary, because there is nothing of dimension 2. Thus H1 (X ) Z × Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 1. 2. The space X is connected, so H0 (X ) Z. Every 1cycle is also a 1boundary. That is, if you cut along the 1cycle, the surface falls into two disconnected pieces, and the 1cycle is the 1boundary of each piece. Thus H1 (X ) = 0. Each of the two 2spheres is a 2cycle, which is not a 2boundary because there is nothing of dimension 3, so H2 X Z × Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 3. The space X consists of two disconnected surfaces, the 2sphere and the annular ring. If P1 is a vertex in the 2sphere and P2 is a vertex in the annular ring, there is no 1chain having P2 − P1 as its boundary. Thus H0 (X ) is generated by two elements, P1 + B0 (X ) and P2 + B0 (X ); we see that H0 (X ) Z × Z. There are no 1cycles on the 2sphere that are not 1boundaries. As we showed 42. Computations of Homology Groups 139 in Example 42.10, any 1cycle of the annular ring that is not a lboundary can be “pushed to the outer rim 1cycle z ” in the homology group, so H1 (X ) is generated by z + B1 (X ). Thus H1 (X ) Z. Finally, there are no 2boundaries, and the only 2cycles are multiples of the 2sphere, so H2 (X ) Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 4. The space X is connected, so H0 (X ) Z. This time the 1cycle z which is the outer rim of the annular ring is the 1boundary of X . There are no 1cycles that are not 1boundaries, so H1 (X ) = 0. The only 2cycles are multiples of the 2sphere, so H2 (X ) Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 5. The space X is connected, so H0 (X ) Z. The only 1cycles that are not 1boundaries are multiples of the circle (1sphere), so H1 (X ) Z. The only 2cycles are multiples of the 2sphere, so H2 (X ) Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 6. This space is homeomorphic to the torus in Fig. 42.13. (Just let air out of the sphere until it collapses down to be the other half of the “doughnut” surface.) Thus the homology groups are the same as the ones we computed in Example 42.12, namely, H0 (X ) = 0, H1 (X ) Z × Z, and H2 (X ) Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 7. T F F F T F T F F T 8. If P1 is a vertex on one torus and P2 is a vertex on the other, then there is no 1cycle with boundary P2 − P1 , so the 0cycles are the elements of the cosets (mP1 + nP2 ) + B0 (X ) for m, n ∈ Z. Thus H0 (X ) Z × Z. Let a and b be the 1cycles on the ﬁrst torus as shown in Fig. 42.13, and let a and b be the corresponding 1cycles on the second torus. The 1cycles of X that are not 1boundaries are the elements of cosets (ma + nb + m a + m b ) + B1 (X ) for m, n, m , n ∈ Z not all zero. Thus we see that H1 (X ) Z × Z × Z × Z. Each torus is a 2cycle, and there are no 2boundaries, so clearly H2 (X ) Z × Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 9. The space X is connected, so H0 (X ) Z. Let b be the 1cycle which is the circle of intersection of torus 1 with torus 2. Every 1cycle going that same long way around a torus, like the 1cycle b in Fig. 42.13, is homologous to our 1cycle b. (If you cut the surface apart on two circles of this type, the surface will fall into pieces, one of which will have boundary consisting of both circles, so their diﬀerence lies in B1 (X ). Equivalently, you can “push” one circle, keeping it on the surface, into the other.) We also have two 1cycles a and a , one on each torus, going the short way around like the circle a in Fig. 42.13. These are not homologous to each other nor to b. Thus the elements of Z1 (X ) are the elements of the cosets (ma + m a + nb) + B1 (X ) for m, m , n ∈ Z, so H1 (X ) Z × Z × Z. Each torus is a 2cycle and there are no 2boundaries. We see that H2 (X ) Z × Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 10. The space X is connected, so H0 (X ) Z. Let b be the 1cycle that is the intersection of the torus with the 2sphere. Now a every 1cycle that is a circle going the long way around the torus, like the circle b in Fig. 42.13, is homologous to this 1cycle that is the circle of intersection. (It can be “pushed” into this circle of intersection.) However, if you cut along this circle of intersection, you ﬁnd that it is the 1boundary of a hemisphere of S2 , so every 1cycle of type b is homologous to 0. Thus the only one cycles are those in the cosets ma + B1 (X ) for m ∈ Z, where a is a 1cycle going the short way around the torus, like the 1cycle a in Fig. 42.13. We see that H1 (X ) Z. Turning to H2 (X ), each 140 43. More Homology Computations and Applications of the 2sphere and the torus is a 2cycle, and there are no 2boundaries, so H2 (X ) is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. Z × Z. There 11. The space X is connected, so H0 (X ) Z. Each of the two handles has a 1cycle that is a circle around the handle, like the circle a in Fig. 42.13. We let a be such a 1cycle on the left handle and a an analogous one on the right handle. Then we have 1cycles b on the left handle and b on the right handle, which go along the handle, onto the sphere, and then back on the handle at its other end. These are analogous to the circle b on the annulus in Fig. 42.13. We should also consider the 1cycle z that is the “equator” of the sphere in Fig. 42.18, going through the holes made by the handles. If we cut the space along this equatorial circle z , it does not fall into two pieces; the handles hold it together, and the boundary of the resulting 2ﬁgure consists of two copies of the circle with opposite orientation, whose algebraic sum in Cn (X ) is then zero, so the equatorial circle z is not a 1boundary. However, if we slice the entire ﬁgure into two pieces with a horizontal slash which cuts the sphere on the equatorial circle z and cuts the handles at their extreme left and right points, the space does fall into two pieces, and the boundary of each consists the equatorial circle z and two 1cycles of type a and a . Thus, assuming proper orientation, we have (z + a + a ) ∈ B1 (X ), so z is in the coset (−a − a ) + B1 (X ). Thus the cosets (ma + m a + nb + n b ) + B1 (X ) include the 1cycles homologous to z , and we see that H1 (X ) Z × Z × Z × Z. The 2cycles consist of sums of multiples of the entire space, so H2 (X ) Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 12. The space X is connected, so H0 (X ) Z. An analysis similar to the one we made in the solution of Exercise 42.11 indicates that H1 (X ) Z × Z × · · · × Z. Multiples of the entire space are the only
2n factors 2cycles so H2 ((X ) Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 43. More Homology Computations and Applications
1. 2triangle triangulation: n0 = 4, n1 = 5, n2 = 2, n3 = 0. χ(X ) = 4 − 5 + 2 − 0 = 1. 6triangle triangulation: n0 = 7, n1 = 12, n2 = 6, n3 = 0. χ(X ) = 7 − 12 + 6 − 0 = 1. 2. a. From Fig. 42.11 we have n0 = 10, n1 = 20, n2 = 10, and n3 = 0 so χ(X ) = 10 − 20 + 10 − 0 = 0. From the homology groups computed in Example 42.10, we have β0 = 1, β1 = 1, β2 = 0, and β3 = 0 so β0 − β1 + β2 − β3 = 1 − 1 + 0 − 0 = 0. b. From Fig. 42.14 we have n0 = 9, n1 = 27, n2 = 18, and n3 = 0 so χ(X ) = 9 − 27 + 18 − 0 = 0. From the homology groups computed in Example 42.13, we have β0 = 1, β1 = 2, β2 = 1, and β3 = 0 so β0 − β1 + β2 − β3 = 1 − 2 + 1 − 0 = 0. c. Taking the triangulation in Fig. 42.14 with the arrow on the top edge reversed for the Klein bottle, we see by Part(b) that χ(X ) = 0. From the homology groups computed in Example 43.1, we have β0 = 1, β1 = 1, β2 = 0, and β3 = 0, so β0 − β1 + β2 − β3 = 1 − 1 + 0 − 0 = 0. 3. The theorem will hold for a square region, for such a region is homeomorphic to E 2 . It obviously does not hold for two disjoint 2cells, for each can be mapped continuously into the other, and such a map has no ﬁxed points. 4. The space X is connected so H0 (X ) Z. The 2sphere contains no 1cycles that are not 1boundaries, while the Klein bottle has 1cycles mb for all m ∈ Z, none of which are 1boundaries, and a 1cycle a 43. More Homology Computations and Applications 141 which is not a 1boundary although 2a is a 1boundary, as shown in Example 43.1 Thus we see that H1 (X ) Z2 × Z. The 2sphere is a 2cycle, while the Klein bottle is not, as shown in Example 43.1. Thus H2 (X ) Z. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 5. If P1 is a vertex on one Klein bottle and P2 is a vertex on the other, then there is no 1cycle with boundary P2 −P1 , so the 0cycles are the elements of the cosets (mP1 +nP2 )+B0 (X ) for m, n ∈ Z. Thus H0 (X ) Z × Z. Each Klein bottle contributes a homology class b + B1 (X ) of inﬁnite order in H1 (X ) and a homology class a+B1 (X ) of order 2, as explained in Example 43.1. Thus H1 (X ) Z2 ×Z2 ×Z×Z. Neither Klein bottle is a 2cycle, as explained in Example 43.1, so H2 (X ) = 0. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 6. F T T F T T T T T F 7. By Exercise 12 of Section 42, the nonzero homology groups of a 2sphere with n handles are H0 (X ) Z, H1 (X ) Z × Z × · · · × Z, and H2 (X ) Z. Using Theorem 43.7, we obtain β0 = 1, β1 = 2n, and
2n factors β2 = 1, so χ(X ) = β0 − β1 + β2 = 1 − 2n + 1 = −2n + 2. 8. We describe a trianglation. Viewing the circle in Fig. 43.14 as the usual face of a 12 hour clock, mark points Q on the circle at 10:30 and 4:30, and mark points R at 1:30 and 7:30. Draw lines joining the two points P , joining the two points Q, and joining the two points R. They meet at a vertex C in the center of the circle. Then draw the lines from Q at 10:30 to P at 3:00, from P at 3:00 to R at 7:30, and from R at 7:30 to Q at 10:30; they contribute 3 more vertices where lines intersect. This gives us a triangulation of the projective plane. Because the projective plane X is connected, H0 (X ) Z. Every 1cycle can be “pushed” (by subtracting 1boundaries) to the arcs on the circle. More speciﬁcally, starting with the triangle having as bottom edge the line from C to 3:00 P and going around counterclockwise, we can eliminate that bottom edge, the right edge of the next triangle having C as vertex, etc., until we have eliminated the edge from C to 7:30 R. This leaves the line from C to 4:30 Q. Then we start with some triangle having an arc of the circle as edge and go around counterclockwise in a similar way, eliminating the righthand edges. We are left with our 1cycle having edges only on the arcs except for one or two single edges sticking in from the circle or out from the center, which also must have coeﬃcient 0 in our 1cycle, so really all edges are on the circle; note there are only three of them, P R, RQ and QP , not six of them. Because it is a 1cycle, they must all occur with the same coeﬃcients. Let a = P R + RQ + QP , as indicated on your ﬁgure. Now the boundary of the projective plane X is clearly 2a, due to the same counterclockwise orientation of the two arcs labeled a. Thus 2a is a 1boundary, and we see that H1 (X ) Z2 . Let c be the 2chain consisting of the sum of all 2simplexes oriented the same way. Because the boundary of ∂2 (c) = 2a, we see that Z2 (X ) = 0 so H2 (X ) = 0. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. 9. The space X is connected so H0 (X ) Z. Computation of H1 (X ) is our toughest job so far. As suggested in the exercise, view the space as the disk in Fig. 21.8 with q − 1 circular holes in it to be sewn up by sewing diametrically opposite points. Let us number these holes from 1 to q − 1, and let ai be the top semicircle of the ith hole with counterclockwise orientation. Note that in view of the identiﬁcation to take place in the sewing, we can also consider the bottom semicircle of the ith hole to be ai with counterclockwise orientation. We consider the top and bottom semicircles of the rim of the disk in Fig. 21.8 to be aq rather than a. They will form the q th crosscap in the ﬁnal sewing. Now consider a circle on the 2sphere that encircles only the ith crosscap of X for i < q . This corresponds to a circle going around the ith hole but not containing any other hole in our disk model of X . Without 142 43. More Homology Computations and Applications making a triangulation, we can consider this circle, oriented counterclockwise, to be a 1cycle zi . Now zi is not a 1boundary, for if we cut our sphere along this circle, it falls into two pieces, neither of which has boundary zi on account of the crosscaps contained in each piece. The piece that contains the ith crosscap, corresponding to the piece containing the ith hole in our disk model, has boundary zi − 2ai . Doing this for each i where 1 ≤ i ≤ q − 1, we obtain cycles zi such that (zi − 2ai ) ∈ B1 (X ) for i = 1, 2, · · · , q − 1. (Remember that zi could be any 1cycle encircling only crosscap number i on the 2sphere X .) Let c be the 2chain consisting of the sum of all 2simplexes oriented the same way. Another element of B1 (X ) is ∂2 (c), and Exercise 8 indicates that ∂2 (c) = 2a1 + 2a2 + · · · + 2aq . As indicated in Exercise 8, each ai is a cycle for i = 1, 2, · · · , q, but no ai is a 1boundary, and indeed no mai is a 1boundary. It is only the sum of all the m(2ai ) that is a 1boundary for all m ∈ Z. We take as generators for the 1cycles in X the 1cycles a1 , a2 , · · · , aq−1 , and a1 + a2 + · · · + aq . Note that the coset 2mai + B1 (X ) contains the 1cycle mzi for all m ∈ Z, because mzi − 2mai = m(zi − 2ai ) ∈ B1 (X ). Since the generators ai have inﬁnite order for 1 ≤ i ≤ q − 1 and the generator a1 + a2 + · · · + aq has order 2, we see that H1 (X ) Z × Z × · · · × Z ×Z2 .
q 1 factors Let c be the 2chain consisting of the sum of all 2simplexes oriented the same way. Because ∂2 (c) = 0, there are no 2cycles so H2 (X ) = 0. There is nothing of higher dimension, so Hi (X ) = 0 for i > 2. You may be bothered by the apparent lack of symmetry in our computation of H1 (X ). What was special about the q th crosscap, that didn’t have a 1cycle zq around it? The answer is, it did. Remember that zi could be any 1cycle containing the ith crosscap. We can take for z1 and z2 two 1cycles that have an edge in common. In their sum, z1 + z2 , that edge cancels and we get a 1cycle containing both the ﬁrst and second crosscaps. Continuing in the obvious way, we can get a cycle z1 + z2 + · · · + zq−1 containing all the crosscaps but the q th. Viewed on the 2sphere, we realize that we can view this as a 1cycle −zq that contains only the q th crosscap. Note that from the 1boundaries zi − 2ai for i = 1, 2, · · · , q − 1 and 2a1 + 2a2 + · · · + 2aq that we found in B1 (X ), we can deduce that B1 (X ) contains (z1 − 2a1 ) + (z2 − 2a2 ) + · · · + (zq−1 − 2aq−1 ) + (2a1 + 2a2 + · · · + 2aq ) = −zq + 2aq , so zq − 2aq is in B1 (X ) and everything really is symmetric. 10. Let Q be a vertex of X on a, and let c be the 2chain consisting of all 2simplexes of X , all oriented the same way, so that c ∈ Z2 (X ). a. f∗0 : H0 (X ) → H0 (X ) is given by f∗0 (Q + B0 (X )) = Q + B0 (X ), that is, f∗0 is the identity map. f∗1 : H1 (X ) → H1 (X ) is given by f∗1 ((ma + nb) + B1 (X )) = (ma + 2nb) + B1 (X ), reﬂecting the fact that f maps X twice around itself in the θ direction. f∗2 : H2 (X ) → H2 (X ) is given by f∗2 (c + B2 (X )) = 2c + B2 (X ), reﬂecting the fact that each point of X is the image of two points of X under f . b. f∗0 is as in Part(a). 43. More Homology Computations and Applications f∗1 : H1 (X ) → H1 (X ) is given by f∗1 ((ma + nb) + B1 (X )) = (2ma + nb) + B1 (X ), reﬂecting the fact that f maps X twice around itself in the φ direction. f∗2 is as in Part(a). c. f∗0 is as in Part(a). f∗1 : H1 (X ) → H1 (X ) is given by f∗1 ((ma + nb) + B1 (X )) = (2ma + 2nb) + B1 (X ), reﬂecting the fact that f maps X twice around itself in both the θ and the φ directions. f∗2 : H2 (X ) → H2 (X ) is given by f∗2 (c + B2 (X )) = 4c + B2 (X ), reﬂecting the fact that each point of X is the image of four points of X under f . 143 11. Let Q be a vertex of b, and let c be the 2chain consisting of all 2simplexes of X , all oriented the same way, so that c ∈ Z2 (X ). a. f∗0 : H0 (X ) → H0 (b) is given by f∗0 (Q + B0 (X )) = Q + B0 (b). f∗1 : H1 (X ) → H1 (b) is given by f∗1 ((ma + nb) + B1 (X )) = nb + B1 (b). f∗2 : H2 (X ) → H2 (X ) is given by f∗2 (c + B2 (X )) = 0. b. f∗0 is as in Part(a). f∗1 : H1 (X ) → H1 (b) is given by f∗1 ((ma + nb) + B1 (X )) = 2nb + B1 (b). f∗2 is as in Part(a). 12. The answers are the same as for Exercise 11 with Bi (b) replaced by Bi (X ). 13. Let Q be a vertex on b. f∗0 : H0 (X ) → H0 (b) is given by f∗0 (Q + B0 (X )) = Q + B0 (b). f∗1 : H1 (X ) → H1 (b) is given by f∗1 ((ma + nb) + B1 (X )) = nb + B1 (b), where m = 0, 1. f∗2 is trivial, because both H2 (X ) and H2 (b) are 0. 144 44. Homological Algebra 44. Homological Algebra
1. Because the sequence is exact, the image of the map 0 → A, which must be 0, is the kernel of f : A → B . Because all these maps are homomorphism, this means that f is one to one. The kernel of B → 0 is certainly B , which, by exactness, must be the image f [A] of A under f . Thus f is a homomorphism mapping A one to one onto B , and is thus an isomorphism. 2. a. The map C → 0 had kernel C , which must, by exactness at C , be the image j [B ], that is, j maps B onto C . b. The map 0 → A has image 0, which must be the kernel of i by exactness at A. Thus the map i : A → B has kernel 0, so i maps A one to one into B . c. Exactness at B means that the image i[A] is the kernel of j . Because j is a homomorphism, we then know that j [B ] B /i[A]. But j [B ] = C by Part(a), so we have C B /i[A]. 3. By exactness at B , the map i is onto B if and only if the kernel of j is B , which is true if and only if j maps B onto 0. We have shown (1) if and only if (2). By exactness at C , we see that j maps B onto 0 if and only if the kernel of the map k is 0, which holds if and only if k is a one to one map. This shows (2) if and only if (3). 4. Now exactness at C and means that h maps everything onto 0 if and only if kernel of i is 0 , which is true if and only if i is one to one. Now j maps everything onto zero if and only if the the kernel of j is D which is true, by exactness at D, if and only if the image of i is D. Thus h and j both map everything onto 0 if and only if i is one to one and maps C onto D, in other words, if and only if i is an isomorphism. We have shown (1) if and only if (2). Now h maps everthing onto 0 if and only the kernel of h is B , which, by exactness at B , holds if and only if g [A] = B that is if and only if g maps A onto B . Also exactness at E means that j maps everything onto 0 if and only if the kernel of k is 0, which is true if and only if k is one to one. Thus h and j both map everything onto 0 if and only if g is onto B and k is one to one. We have shown (1) if and only if (3). 5. (See the answer in the text.) 6. Let X be the torus complex and let Y be the subcomplex consisting of the 1cycle a. Let P be a vertex on a and let Q be a vertex on the torus such that Q is not a vertex on a but P Q is a 1simplex. Then Q + C0 (Y ) generates Z0 (X, Y ) and ∂ 1 (P Q + C1 (Y )) = ∂1 (P Q) + C0 (Y ) = (Q − P ) + C0 (Y ) = Q + C0 (Y ) because P ∈ C0 (Y ). Thus our generator of Z0 (X, Y ) is a relative 0boundary, so H0 (X, Y ) = 0. The generators of H1 (X ) are the cosets a + B1 (X ) and b + B1 (X ). Because a ∈ Y , we see that b + B1 (X, Y ) generates H1 (X, Y ), which is thus isomorphic to Z. Let c be the 2chain consisting of the sum of all 2simplexes oriented the same way. Because ∂2 (c) = 0, we see that ∂ 2 (c + C2 (Y )) = ∂2 (c) + C 1(Y ) = 0 + C1 (Y ), and C1 (Y ) = 0 in C1 (X, Y ). Thus H2 (X, Y ) 7. (See the answer in the text.) Z. Of course Hn (X, Y ) = 0 for n > 2. 44. Homological Algebra 145 8. Let X be the Klein bottle complex and let Y be the subcomplex consisting of the 1cycle a. Let P be a vertex on a and let Q be a vertex on the Klein bottle such that Q is not a vertex on a but P Q is a 1simplex. Then Q + C0 (Y ) generates Z0 (X, Y ) and ∂ 1 (P Q + C1 (Y )) = ∂1 (P Q) + C0 (Y ) = (Q − P ) + C0 (Y ) = Q + C0 (Y ) because P ∈ C0 (Y ). Thus our generator of Z0 (X, Y ) is a relative 0boundary, so H0 (X, Y ) = 0. The generators of H1 (X ) are the cosets a + B1 (X ) and b + B1 (X ). Because a ∈ Y , we see that b + B1 (X, Y ) generates H1 (X, Y ), which is thus isomorphic to Z. Let c be the 2chain consisting of the sum of all 2simplexes oriented the same way. Because ∂2 (c) = 2a ∈ C1 (Y ), we see that ∂ 2 (c + C2 (Y )) = ∂2 (c) + C1 (Y ) = 2a + C1 (Y ) = C1 (Y ), and C1 (Y ) = 0 in C1 (X, Y ). Thus H2 (X, Y ) 9. (See the answer in the text.) 10. Let P be a vertex in Y and let R be a vertex on the annular ring such that R is not a vertex in Y but P R is a 1simplex. Then R + C0 (Y ) generates Z0 (X, Y ) and ∂ 1 (P R + C1 (Y )) = ∂1 (P R) + C0 (Y ) = (R − P ) + C0 (Y ) = R + C0 (Y ) because P ∈ C0 (Y ). Thus our generator of Z0 (X, Y ) is a relative 0boundary, so H0 (X, Y ) = 0. We saw in Example 42.10 than any 1cycle in Z1 (X ) could be pushed to the outer rim of the annulus. This outer rim is now part of Y , so this 1cycle in Z1 (X ) becomes homologous to 0 in Z1 (X, Y ). However, the 1simplex P1 Q1 from the inner rim to the outer rim in Fig. 42.11, which was not a 1cycle in Z1 (X ), now becomes a 1cycle in Z1 (X, Y ), because its boundary Q1 − P1 lies in Y . In fact, for any triangulation, every sequence R1 R2 + R2 R3 + · · · + Rm−1 Rm where the Ri are vertices with R1 , Rm ∈ Y is in Z1 (X, Y ). However, if R1 and Rm are both in the outer rim or both in the inner rim of the annulus, then the 1cycle is in B1 (X, Y ). In terms of the triangulation in Fig. 42.11, We see that H1 (X, Y ) is generated by P1 Q1 + B1 (X, Y ), so H1 (X, Y ) Z. Finally, let c be the 2chain consisting of the sum of all 2simplexes oriented the same way. Then ∂2 (c) ∈ C1 (Y ), and C1 (Y ) = 0 in C1 (X, Y ). Thus c + C2 (Y ) becomes a 2cycle in Z2 (X, Y ), and c + B2 (X, Y ) is a generator of H2 (X, Y ) which is isomorphic to Z. Of course Hn (X, Y ) = 0 for n > 2. 11. Because H2 (X ) = 0, the image of i∗2 and kernel of j∗2 are both zero, so we have exactness there. Let a be the inner rim of the annular ring, oriented clockwise and let b be its outer rim oriented counterclockwise in Fig. 42.11. Let c be the 2chain consisting of the sum of all 2simplexes oriented counterclockwise. Then ∂∗2 maps the generator c + B2 (X, Y ) of H2 (X, Y ) onto (a + b) + B1 (Y ) which is a nonzero element of H1 (Y ), so the kernel of ∂∗2 and image of j∗2 are both 0, and we have exactness at H2 (X, Y ). We can take −a + B1 (Y ) and b + B1 (Y ) as generators of H1 (Y ), and i∗1 maps these generators into −a + B1 (X ) and b + B1 (X ) respectively. Because b + a = b − (−a) is in B1 (X ), we see that −a + B1 (X ) and b + B1 (X ) are the same homology class, which generates H1 (X ). Thus the image of ∂∗2 consists of all m(a + b) + B1 (Y ) for m ∈ Z, which are precisely the elements mapped into 0 in H1 (X ), because Z. Of course Hn (X, Y ) = 0 for n > 2. 146 44. Homological Algebra a + b generates B1 (X ). Thus we have exactness at H1 (Y ). (Note that in the identiﬁcation of H1 (Y ) with Z × Z and the identiﬁcation of H1 (X ) with Z, the kernel of the homomorphism corresponding to i∗1 is (1, 1) , so that (Z × Z)/ (1, 1) Z.) Now j∗1 maps the generator b + B1 (X ) of H1 (X ) into 0 + B1 (X, Y ) because b is in Y . We saw that b + B1 (X ) = H1 (X ) is the image under i∗1 , so we have exactness at H1 (X ). Referring to Fig. 42.11, we see that H1 (X, Y ) is generated by P1 Q1 + B1 (X, Y ), and ∂ (P1 Q1 ) = Q1 − P1 , so ∂∗1 maps P1 Q1 + B1 (X, Y ) into (Q1 − P1 )+ B0 (Y ), and Q1 − P1 ∈ B0 (Y ) because P1 Q1 ∈ Y. / / Thus the kernel of ∂∗1 and the image of j∗1 are both zero, so we have exactness at H1 (X, Y ). NowH0 (Y ) has as generators P1 + B0 (Y ) and Q1 + B0 (Y ). These are mapped by i∗0 into P1 + B0 (X ) and Q1 + B0 (X ) respectively. However, these are the same homology class in H0 (X ) because (Q1 − P1 ) ∈ B0 (X ). Thus the image m(Q1 − P1 ) + B0 (Y ) under ∂∗1 is the kernel of i∗0 , so we have exactness at H0 (Y ). Finally, j∗0 maps the generator P1 + B0 (X ) of H0 (X ) onto 0 + B0 (X, Y ) because P1 ∈ Y. Thus the image mP1 + B0 (X ) under i∗0 is the kernel under j∗0 , so we have exactness at H0 (X ). 12. Let c ∈ Ak . Then (∂jk )(c) = ∂ (jk (c)) = ∂ (c + A k ) = ∂ (c) + A k−1 = jk−1 (∂ (c)) = (jk−1 ∂ )(c), so ∂jk = jk−1 ∂. 13. Let h ∈ Hk (A/A ). Let z1 , z2 ∈ Zk (A/A ) be such that h = z1 + Bk (A/A ) = z2 + Bk (A/A ), so that (z2 − z1 ) ∈ Bk (A/A ). Let z1 = c1 + A k and z2 = c2 + A k To show that ∂∗k is well deﬁned, we must show that ∂k (c1 ) + Bk−1 (A ) = ∂k (c2 ) + Bk−1 (A ). Now z2 − z1 = c2 − c1 + A k is in Bk (A/A ). Consequently there is some r ∈ Ak+1 such that ∂k+1 r = c2 − c1 + a for some a ∈ A k . Then 0 = ∂k ∂k+1 (r) = ∂k (c2 − c1 + a ) = ∂k (c2 ) − ∂k (c1 ) + ∂k (a ). Now ∂k (a ) ∈ Bk−1 (A ), so we see that ∂k (c2 ) ∈ ∂k (c1 ) + Bk−1 (A ). This shows that ∂∗k is well deﬁned. Let h1 , h2 ∈ Hk (A/A ), and now let z1 , z2 ∈ Zk (A/A ) be such that h1 = z1 + Bk (A/A ) and h2 = z2 + Bk (A/A ), so that h1 + h2 = (z1 + z2 ) + Bk (A/A ). Let z1 = c1 + A k and z2 = c2 + A k , so that z1 + z2 = c1 + c2 + A k . Then ∂∗k (h1 + h2 ) = ∂k (c1 + c2 ) + Bk−1 (A ) = (∂k (c1 ) + ∂k (c2 )) + Bk−1 (A ) = (∂k (c1 ) + Bk−1 )(A )) + (∂k (c2 ) + Bk−1 (A )) = ∂∗k (h1 ) + ∂∗k (h2 ). Thus ∂∗k is a homomorphism. 14. Let z + Bk (A ) be an element of Hk (A ). Then i∗k (z + Bk (A )) = z + Bk (A). Now j∗k (z + Bk (A)) = (z + A ) + Bk (A/A ) = 0 because z ∈ A . Thus j∗k i∗k = 0. Let z + Bk (A) be an element of Hk (A). Then j∗k (z + Bk (A)) = (z + A ) + Bk (A/A ). Now ∂∗k ((z + A ) + Bk (A/A )) = ∂k (z ) + Bk−1 (A ) = Bk−1 (A ) because z is a k cycle in Ak , and Bk−1 (A ) is the zero element of Hk−1 (A ). Thus ∂∗k j∗k = 0. Let h = (c + A ) + Bk (A/A ) be an element of Hk (A/A ). We have ∂∗k (h) = ∂k (c) + Bk−1 (A ) where ∂k (c) ∈ A . Then we have i∗k−1 (∂k (c) + Bk−1 (A )) = ∂k (c) + Bk−1 (A) = Bk−1 (A) because c ∈ A implies ∂k (c) is in Bk−1 (A). Now Bk−1 (A) is the zero element of Hk (A), so i∗k−1 ∂∗k = 0. 15. a. We must show that j∗k i∗k = 0. Let h ∈ Hk (A ). Then h = z + Bk (A ) for some z ∈ Ak , and i∗k (h ) = z + Bk (A), and j∗k (z + Bk (A)) = (z + Ak )+ Bk (A/A ). But z ∈ Ak so (z + Ak ) ∈ Bk (A/A ), because Bk (A/A ) = {∂k+1 (ak+1 ) + Ak  ak+1 ∈ Ak+1 }, 44. Homological Algebra and taking ak+1 = 0, we get Ak ⊆ Bk (A/A ). Thus j∗k (i∗k (h )) = 0 in Hk (A/A ). 147 b. Let h ∈ Hk (A) and let j∗k (h) = 0 in Hk (A/A ). Now if h = z + Bk (A), we have j∗k (h) = (z + Ak ) + Bk (A/A ), and j∗k (h) = 0 implies that (z + Ak ) ∈ Bk (A/A ). Now Bk (A/A ) = {∂k+1 (ak+1 ) + Ak  ak+1 ∈ Ak+1 }. Thus z = ∂k+1 (ak+1 ) + ak for some ak+1 ∈ Ak+1 and ak ∈ Ak . Because z is a k cycle, we have 0 = ∂k (z ) = ∂k (∂k+1 (ak+1 ) + ∂k (ak )) = 0 + ∂k (ak ), so ak is a k cycle in A . Therefore we see that i∗k (ak + Bk (A )) = ak + Bk (A) = (z − ∂k+1 (ak+1 )) + Bk (A) = z + Bk (A) = h, because ∂k+1 (ak+1 ) ∈ Bk (A). We have shown that h ∈ (kernel j∗k ) is also in (image i∗k ). c. We must show that ∂∗k j∗k = 0. Let (z + bk (A)) ∈ Hk (A). Then ∂∗k (j∗k (z + Bk (A))) = ∂∗k ((z + A ) + Bk (A/A )) = ∂k (z ) + Bk−1 (A ) = Bk−1 (A ) because z is a k cycle so ∂k (z ) = 0. Because Bk−1 (A ) is the 0element of Hk−1 (A ), we are done. d. Let h ∈ Hk (A/A ) be such that ∂∗k (h) = 0, and let h = (z + A ) + Bk (A/A ). Then ∂∗k (h) = ∂k (z ) + Bk−1 (A ), which must be the zero element of Hk−1 (A ), so ∂k (z ) ∈ Bk−1 (A ). Let ak ∈ Ak be such that ∂k (ak ) = ∂k (z ). Then ∂k (z − ak ) = ∂k (z ) − ∂k (ak ) = ∂k (z ) − ∂k (z ) = 0, so z − ak is a k cycle in Ak . Then we have j∗k ((z − ak ) + Bk (A)) = (z − ak ) + Bk (A/A ). We saw in Part(a) that Ak ⊆ Bk (A/A ) so (z − ak ) + Bk (A/A ) = z + Bk (A/A ) = h. Thus h ∈ (image j∗k ). e. We must show that i∗k−1 ∂∗k = 0. Let h ∈ Hk (A/A ) and let h = (z + A ) + Bk (A/A ). Now ∂∗k (h) = ∂k (z ) + Bk−1 (A ), and i∗k−1 (∂k (z ) + Bk−1 (A )) = ∂k (z ) + Bk−1 (A). But ∂k (z ) ∈ Bk−1 (A) and Bk−1 (A) is the zero element of Hk−1 (A). Thus i∗k−1 (∂∗k (h)) = 0. f. Let h ∈ Hk−1 (A ) and suppose that i∗k−1 (h ) = 0. Let h = z + Bk−1 (A ). Then i∗k−1 (h ) = z +Bk−1 (A), and this is zero in Hk−1 (A) if and only if z ∈ Bk−1 (A). Let c ∈ Ak be such that ∂k (c) = z . Then c + A is a k cycle in Hk (A/A ) because ∂k (c + A ) = z + A = A . Then ∂∗k ((c + A ) + Bk (A/A )) = z + Bk−1 (A ) = h , which is what we wished to show. 16. Let zk be a k cycle in Ak . Using the relation in the text, we have fk (zk ) − gk (zk ) = ∂ k+1 (Dk (zk )) + Dk−1 (∂k (zk )). Because zk is a k cycle, we have ∂k (zk ) = 0, and because Dk−1 is a homomorphism, we then know that Dk−1 (0) = 0 in Ak . Also, ∂ k+1 (Dk (zk )) is some element bk of Bk . Thus we have fk (zk ) − gk (zk ) = bk , so fk (zk ) = gk (zk ) + bk for some bk ∈ Bk . Consequently f∗k (zk + Bk ) = fk (zk ) + Bk = (gk (zk ) + bk ) + Bk = gk (zk ) + (bk + Bk ) = gk (zk ) + Bk = g∗k (zk + Bk ), showing that f∗k and g∗k are the same homomorphism of Hk (A) into Hk (A ). 148 45. Unique Factorization Domains 45. Unique Factorization Domains
1. Yes, 5 is an irreducible in Z. 3. No, 14 = 2 · 7 is not an irreducible in Z. 5. No, 2x − 10 = 2(x − 5) is not an irreducible in Z[x]. 2. Yes, 17 is an irreducible in Z. 4. Yes, 2x − 3 is an irreducible in Z[x]. 6. Yes, 2x − 3 is an irreducible in Q[x]. 7. Yes, 2x − 10 is an irreducible in Q[x], for 2 is a unit there. 8. Yes, 2x − 10 is an irreducible in Z11 [x], for 2 is a unit there. 9. (See the answer in the text.) 10. In Z[x], 4x2 − 4x + 8 = (2)(2)(x2 − x + 2). The quadratic polynomial is irreducible because its zeros are complex numbers. In Q[x], 4x2 − 4x + 8 is already irreducible because 4 is a unit and the zeros of the polynomial are complex numbers. In Z11 [x], 4x2 − 4x + 8 = (4x + 2)(x + 4). We found the factorization by discovering that 4 and 5 are zeros of the polynomial. Note that 2 is a unit. 11. We proceed by factoring the smallest number into irreducibles, and using a calculator, discover which irreducibles divide the larger numbers. We ﬁnd that 234 = 2 · 117 = 2 · 9 · 13. Our calculator shows that 9 does not divide 3250, but 2 and 13 do, and both 2 and 13 divide 1690. Thus the gcd’s are 26 and 26. 12. We proceed by factoring the smallest number into irreducibles, and using a calculator, discover which irreducibles divide the larger numbers. We ﬁnd that 448 = 4 · 112 = 4 · 4 · 28 = 26 · 7. Our calculator shows that 7 divides both 784 and 1960, and that the highest power of 2 dividing 784 is 16 while the highest power dividing 1960 is 8. Thus the gcd’s are 8 · 7 = 56 and 56. 13. We proceed by factoring the smallest number into irreducibles, and using a calculator, discover which irreducibles divide the larger numbers. We ﬁnd that 396 = 6 · 66 = 6 · 6 · 11 = 22 · 32 · 11. Our calculator shows that both 11 and 9 divide divides the other 3 numbers, but 2178 and 594 are not divisible by 4, but are divisible by 2. Thus the gcd’s are 11 · 9 · 2 = 198 and 198. 14. 18x2 − 12x + 48 = 6(3x2 − 2x + 8). 15. Because every nonzero q ∈ Q is a unit in Q[x], we can “factor out” any nonzero rational constant as the (unit) content of this polynomial. For example, (1)(18x2 − 12x + 48) and are two of an inﬁnite number of possible answers. 16. The factorization is (1)(2x2 − 3x + 6) because the polynomial is primitive. 17. Because every nonzero a ∈ Z7 is a unit in Z7 [x], we can “factor out” any nonzero constant as the (unit) content of this polynomial. For example, (1)(2x2 − 3x + 6) and (5)(6x2 + 5x + 4) are two of an inﬁnite number of possible answers. 1 (36x2 − 24x + 96) 2 45. Unique Factorization Domains 18. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Quotients may not exist in D. 149 Two elements a and b in an integral domain D are associates in D if and only if there exists a unit u ∈ D such that au = b. 19. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Neither factor can be a unit. A nonzero element of an integral domain D is an irreducible of D if and only if it cannot be factored into a product of two elements of D, neither of which is a unit. 20. The deﬁnition is incorrect; there may be no notion of size for elements of D. A nonzero element p of an integral domain D is a prime of D if and only if p is not a unit, and p does not divide a product of two elements in D unless p divides one of those two elements. 21. T T T F T F F T F T 22. The irreducibles of D[x] are the irreducibles of D, together with the irreducibles of F [x] which are in D[x] and are furthermore primitive polynomials in D[x]. (See the paragraph following Lemma 45.26.) 23. The polynomial 2x + 4 is irreducible in Q[x] but not in Z[x]. 24. Not every nonzero nonunit of Z × Z has a factorization into irreducibles. For example (1, 0) is not a unit, and every factorization of (1,0) has a factor of the form (±1, 0), which is not irreducible because (±1, 0) = (±1, 0)(1, 9). The only irreducibles of Z × Z are (±1, p) and (q, ±1), where p and q are irreducibles in Z. 25. Let p be a prime of D, and suppose that p = ab for some a, b ∈ D. Then ab = (1)p, so p divides ab and thus divides either a or b, because p is a prime. Suppose that a = pc. Then p = (1)p = pcb and cancellation in the integral domain yields 1 = cb, so b is a unit of D. Similarly, if p divides b, we conclude that a is a unit in D. Thus either a or b is a unit, so p is an irreducible. 26. Let p be an irreducible in a UFD, and suppose that p divides ab. We must show that either p divides a or p divides b. Let ab = pc, and factor ab into irreducibles by ﬁrst factoring a into irreducibles, then factoring b into irreducibles, and ﬁnally taking the product of these two factorizations. Now ab could also be factored into irreducibles by taking p times a factorization of c into irreducibles. Because factorization into irreducibles in a UFD is unique up to order and associates, it must be that an associate of p appears in the ﬁrst factorization, formed by taking factors of a times factors of b. Thus an associate of p, say up, appears in the factorization of a or in the factorization of b. It follows at once that p divides either a or b. 27. Reﬂexive: a = a · 1, so a ∼ a. Symmetric: Suppose a ∼ b, so that a = bu for a unit u. Then u−1 is a unit and b = au−1 , so b ∼ a. Transitive: Suppose that a ∼ b and b ∼ c. Then there are units u1 and u2 such that a = bu1 and b = cu2 . Substituting, we have a = cu2 u1 = c(u2 u1 ). Because the product u2 u1 of two units is again a unit, we ﬁnd the a ∼ c. 28. Let a and b be nonunits in D∗ − U . Suppose that ab is a unit, so that (ab)c = 1 for some c ∈ D. Then a(bc) = 1 and a is a unit, contrary to our choice for a. Thus ab is again a nonunit, and ab = 0 because D has no divisors of zero. Hence ab ∈ (D∗ − U ) also. We see that D∗ − U is not a group, for the multiplicative identity is a unit, and hence is not in D∗ − U. 150 45. Unique Factorization Domains 29. Let g (x) be a nonconstant divisor of the primitive polynomial f (x) in D[x]. Suppose that f (x) = g (x)q (x). Because D is a U F D, we know that D[x] is a U F D also. Factor f (x) into irreducibles by factoring each of g (x) and q (x) into irreducibles, and then taking the product of these factorizations. Each nonconstant factor appearing is an irreducible in D[x], and hence is a primitive polynomial. Because the product of primitive polynomials is primitive by Corollary 45.26, we see that the content of g (x)q (x) is the product of the content of g (x) and the content of q (x), and must be the same (up to a unit factor) as the content of f (x). But f (x) has content 1 because it is primitive. Thus g (x) and q (x) both have content 1. Hence g (x) is a product of primitive polynomials, so it is primitive by Corollary 45.26. 30. Let N be an ideal in a PID D. If N is not maximal, then there is a proper ideal N1 of D such that N ⊂ N1 . If N1 is not maximal, we ﬁnd a proper ideal N2 such that N1 ⊂ N2 . Continuing this process, we construct a chain N ⊂ N1 ⊂ N2 ⊂ · · · ⊂ Ni of proper ideals, each properly contained in the next except for the last ideal. Because a PID satisﬁes the ascending chain condition, we cannot extend this to an inﬁnite such chain, so after some ﬁnite number of steps we must encounter a proper ideal Nr that contains N and that is not properly contained in any proper ideal of D. That is, we attain a maximal ideal Nr of D that contains N . 31. We have x3 − y 3 = (x − y )(x2 + xy + y 2 ). Of course x − y is irreducible. We claim that x2 + xy + y 2 is irreducible in Q[x, y ]. Suppose that x2 + xy + y 2 factors into a product of two polynomials that are not units in Q[x, y ]. Such a factorization would have to be of the form x2 + xy + y 2 = (ax + by )(cx + dy ) with a, b, c, and d all nonzero elements of Q. Consider the evaluation homomorphism φ1 : (Q[x])[y ] → Q[x] such that φ(y ) = 1. Applying φ1 to both sides of such a factorization would yield x2 + x + 1 = (ax + b)(cx + d). But x2 + x + 1 is irreducible in Q[x] because its zeros are complex, so no such factorization exists. This shows that x2 + xy + y 2 is irreducible in (Q[x])[y ] which isomorphic to Q[x, y ] under an isomorphism that identiﬁes y 2 + yx + x2 and x2 + xy + y 2 . 32. We show that ACC implies MC, that MC implies FBC, and that FBC implies ACC. ACC implies MC: Suppose that MC does not hold for some set S of ideals of R; that is, suppose it is not true that S contains an ideal not properly contained in any other ideal of S . Then every ideal of S is properly contained in another ideal of S . We can then start with any ideal N1 of S and ﬁnd an ideal N2 of S properly containing it, then ﬁnd N3 ∈ S properly containing N2 , etc. Thus we could construct an inﬁnite chain of ideals N1 ⊂ N2 ⊂ N3 ⊂ · · · which contradicts the ACC. Hence the ACC implies the MC. MC implies FBC: Suppose the FBC does not hold, and let N be an ideal of R having no ﬁnite generating set. Let b1 ∈ N and let N1 = b1 be the smallest ideal of N containing b1 . Now N1 = N or {b1 } would be a generating set for N, so ﬁnd b2 ∈ N such that b2 ∈ N1 . Let N2 be the intersection / of all ideals containing b1 and b2 . Because N contains b1 and b2 , we see that N2 ⊆ N, but N2 = N because {b1 , b2 } cannot be a generating set for N. We then choose n3 ∈ N but not in N2 , and let N3 be the intersection of all ideals containing b1 , b2 , and b3 . Continuing this process, using the fact that N has no ﬁnite generating set, we can construct an inﬁnite chain of ideals N1 ⊂ N2 ⊂ N3 ⊂ · · · of R. But then the set S = {Ni  i ∈ Z+ } is a set of ideals, each of which is properly contained in another ideal of the set, for Ni ⊂ Ni+1 . This would contradict the MC, so the FBC is true. FBC implies ACC: Let N1 ⊆ N2 ⊆ N3 ⊆ · · · be a chain of ideals in R, and let N = ∞ Ni . It is i=1 easy to see that N is an ideal of R. Let BN = {b1 , b2 , · · · , bn } be a ﬁnite basis for N. Let bj ∈ Nij . If r is the maximm of the subscripts ij , then BN ⊆ Nr . Because Nr ⊆ N and N is the intersection of all ideals containing BN , we must have Nr = N. Hence Nr = Nr+1 = Nr+2 = · · · so the ACC is satisﬁed. 46. Euclidean Domains 151 33. DCC implies mC: Suppose that mC does not hold in R, and let S be a set of ideals in R where the mC fails, so that every ideal in S does properly contain another ideal of S . Then starting with any ideal N1 ∈ S , we can ﬁnd an ideal N2 ∈ S properly contained in N1 , and then an ideal N3 of S properly contained in N2 , etc. This leads to an unending chain of ideals, each properly containing the next, which would contradict the DCC. Thus the DCC implies the mC. mC implies DCC: Let N1 ⊇ N2 ⊇ N3 ⊇ · · · be a descending chain of ideal in R. Let S = {Ni  i ∈ Z+ }. By the mC, there is some ideal Nr of S that does not properly contain any other ideal in the set. Thus Nr = Nr+1 = Nr+2 = · · · so the DCC holds. 34. Now Z is a ring in which the ACC holds, because Z is PID. However, Z ⊃ 2Z ⊃ 4Z ⊃ · · · ⊃ 2i−1 Z ⊃ · · · is an inﬁnite descending chain of ideals, so the DCC does not hold in Z. 46. Euclidean Domains
1. Yes, it is a Euclidean norm. To see this, remember that we know   is a Euclidean norm on Z. For Condition 1, ﬁnd q and r such that a = bq + r where either r = 0 or r < b. Then surely we have either ν (r) = 0 or ν (r) = r2 < b2 = ν (b), because r and b are integers. For Condition 2, note that ν (a) = a2 ≤ a2 b2 = ν (ab) for nonzero a and b, because a and b are integers. 2. No, ν is not a Euclidean norm. Let a = x and b = 2x in Z[x]. There are no q (x), r(x) ∈ Z[x] satisfying x = (2x)q (x) + r(x) where the degree of r(x) is less than 1. 3. No, ν is not a Euclidean norm. Let a = x and b = x + 2 in Z[x]. There are no q (x), r(x) ∈ Z[x] satisfying x = (x + 2)q (x) + r(x) where the absolute value of the coeﬃcient of the highest degree term in r(x) is less than 1. 4. No, it is not a Euclidean norm. Let a = 1/2 and b = 1/3. Then ν (a) = (1/2)2 = 1/4 > 1/36 = ν (1/6) = ν (ab), so Condition 2 is violated. 5. Yes, it is a Euclidean norm, but not a useful one. Let a, b, ∈ Q. If b = 0, let q = a/b. Then a = bq + 0, which satisﬁes Condition 1. For Condition 2, if both a and b are nonzero, then ν (a) = 50 ≤ 50 = ν (ab). 6. We have 23 = 3(138)  1(391), but 138 = 3,266  8(391), so 23 = 3[3, 266 − 8(391)] − 1(391) = 3(3, 266) − 25(391). Now 391 = 7(3,266)  22,471, so 23 = 3(3, 266) − 25[7(3, 266) − 22, 471] = 25(22, 471) − 172(3, 266). 7. Performing the division algorithm, we obtain 49, 349 = (15, 555)3 + 2, 684 15, 555 = (2, 684)6 − 549 2, 684 = (549)5 − 61 549 = (61)9 + 0 so the gcd is 61. 152 46. Euclidean Domains 8. We have 61 = 5(549)  2,684, but 549 = 6(2,684)  15,555, so 61 = 5[6(2, 684) − 15, 555] − 2, 684 = 29(2, 684) − 5(15, 555). Now 2,684 = 49,349  3(15,555), so 61 = 29[49, 349 − 3(15, 555)] − 5(15, 555) = 29(49, 349) − 92(15, 555). 9. We use the division algorithm.
x4 − 2 x x6 − 3x5 + 3x4 − 9x3 + 5x2 − 5x + 2 x10 − 3x9 + 3x8 − 11x7 + 11x6 − 11x5 + 19x4 − 13x3 + 8x2 − 9x + 3 x10 − 3x9 + 3x8 − 9x7 + 5x6 − 5x5 + 2x4 −2x7 + 6x6 − 6x5 + 17x4 − 13x3 + 8x2 − 9x + 3 −2x7 + 6x6 − 6x5 + 18x4 − 10x3 + 10x2 − 4x − x4 − 3 x3 − 2 x2 − 5 x + 3 −x − 3x − 2x − 5x + 3 4 3 2 −x2 + 6x − 19 x6 − 3x5 + 3x4 − 9x3 + 5x2 − 5x + 2 x6 + 3x5 + 2x4 + 5x3 − 3x2 −6x5 + x4 − 14x3 + 8x2 − 5x −6x5 − 18x4 − 12x3 − 30x2 + 18x 19x4 − 2x3 + 38x2 − 23x + 2 19x4 + 57x3 + 38x2 + 95x − 57 −59x3 − 118x + 59 −x − 3 x + 2x − 1 − x4 − 3x3 − 2x2 − 5x + 3 − x4 − 2x2 + x − 3x3 − 6x + 3 − 3x3 − 6x + 3
3 Multiply by the unit 1/59. 0 A gcd is x3 + 2x − 1. 10. Use the Euclidean algorithm to ﬁnd the gcd d2 of a2 and a1 . Then use it to ﬁnd the gcd d3 of a3 and d2 . Then use it again to ﬁnd the gcd d4 of a4 and d3 . Continue this process until you ﬁnd the gcd dn of an and dn−1 . The gcd of the n members a1 , a2 , · · · , an is dn . 11. We use the notation of the solution of the preceding exercise with a1 = 2178, a2 = 396, a3 = 792, and a4 = 726. We have 2178 = 5(396) + 198 and 396 = 2(198) + 0, so d2 = 198. We have 792 = 4(198) + 0 so d3 = 198. We have 726 = 3(198) + 132, 198 = 1(132) + 66, and 132 = 2(66) + 0. Thus the gcd of 2178, 396, 792, and 726 is d4 = 66. 12. a.Yes, Z[x] is a UFD because Z is a UFD and Theorem 45.29 tells us that if D is a UFD, then D[x] is a UFD. b. The set described consists of all polynomials in Z[x] that have a constant term in 2Z, that is, an even number as constant term. This property of a polynomial is obviously satisﬁed by 0 ∈ 2Z and is preserved under addition, subtraction, and multiplication by every element of Z[x], so the set is an ideal of Z[x]. 46. Euclidean Domains 153 c. Z[x] is not a PID because the ideal described in Part(b) is not a principal ideal; a generating polynomial would to have constant term 2, but could not yield, under multiplication by elements of Z[x], all the polynomials of the form 2 + nx in the ideal because n can be odd as well as even. d. Z[x] is not an Euclidean domain, because every Euclidean domain is a PID by Theorem 46.4, but Part(c) shows that Z[x] is not a PID. 13. T F T F T T T F T T 14. No, it does not. For any integral domain, its arithmetic structure is completely determined by the binary operations of addition and of multiplication. A Euclidean norm, if one exists, can be used to study the arithmetic structure, but it in no way changes it 15. Let a and b be associates of a Euclidean domain D with Euclidean norm ν. Because a and b are associates, there exists a unit u in D such that a = bu. Then u−1 is also a unit of D and b = au−1 . Condition 2 of a Euclidean norm yields ν (b) ≤ ν (bu) = ν (a) ≤ ν (au−1 ) = ν (b). Thus ν (a) = ν (b). 16. Suppose that ν (a) < ν (ab). If b were a unit, then a and ab would be associates, and by Exercise 15, we would have ν (a) = ν (ab). Thus b is not a unit. For the converse, suppose that ν (a) = ν (ab). We claim that then a = ab , for the proof of Theorem 46.4 shows that a nonzero ideal in a Euclidean domain is generated by any element having minimum norm in the ideal. Thus ab also generates a , so a = (ab)c for some c ∈ D. Then, cancelling the a in the integral domain, we ﬁnd that 1 = bc so b is a unit. 17. The statement is false. For example, let D = Z and let the norm be  . Then 2 > 1 and  − 3 > 1, but 2 + (−3) =  − 1 = 1, so the given set is not closed under addition. 18. Let F be a ﬁeld and let ν (a) = 1 for all a ∈ F, a = 0. Because every nonzero element of F is a unit, we see that for nonzero b ∈ F we have a = b(a/b) + 0, which satisﬁes Condition 1 for a Euclidean norm. Also, ν (a) = ν (ab) = 1, so Condition 2 is satisﬁed. 19. a. For Condition 1, let a, b ∈ D∗ where b = 0. There exist q, r ∈ D such that a = bq + r where either r = 0 or ν (r) < ν (b). But then either r = 0 or η (r) = ν (r) + s < ν (b) + s = η (b), so Condition 1 holds. For a, b = 0, we have η (a) = ν (a) + s ≤ ν (ab) + s = η (ab), so Condition 2 holds. The hypothesis that ν (1) + s > 0 guarantees that η (a) > 0 for all a ∈ D∗ , because ν (1) is minimal among all ν (a) for a ∈ D∗ , by Theorem 46.6. b. For Condition 1, let a, b ∈ D∗ where b = 0. There exist q, r ∈ D such that a = bq + r where either r = 0 or ν (r) < ν (b). But then either r = 0 or λ(r) = t · ν (r) < t · ν (b) = λ(b), so Condition 1 holds. For a, b = 0, we have λ(a) = t · ν (a) ≤ t · ν (ab) = λ(ab), so Condition 2 holds. The hypothesis that t ∈ Z+ guarantees that λ(a) > 0 and λ(a) is an integer for all a ∈ D∗ . c. Let ν be a Euclidean norm on D. Then λ(a) = 100 · ν (a) for a ∈ D∗ is a Euclidean norm on D by Part(b). Let s = 1 − λ(1). Then µ(a) = λ(a) + s for a ∈ D∗ is a Euclidean norm on D by Part(a), and µ(1) = λ(1) + s = λ(1) + [1 − λ(1)] = 1. If a = 0 is a nonunit in D, then ν (a) ≥ ν (1) + 1 so λ(a) = 100 · ν (a) ≥ 100 · [ν (1) + 1] and µ(a) = λ(a) + s ≥ 100 · [ν (1) + 1] + 1 − λ(1) = 100 · [ν (1) + 1] + 1 − 100 · ν (1) = 100 + 1 = 101. 20. We know that all multiples of a ∈ D form the principal ideal a and all multiples of b form the principal ideal b . By Exercise 27 of Section 26, the intersection of ideals in a ring is an ideal, so a ∩ b is an ideal, and consists of all common multiples of a and b. Because a Euclidean domain is a PID, this ideal has a generator c. Now a c and b c because c is a common multiple of a and b. 154 47. Gaussian Integers and Multiplicative Norms Because every common multiple of a and b is in a ∩ b = c , we see that every common multiple is of the form dc, that is, every common multiple is a multiple of c. Thus c is an lcm of a and b. 21. The subgroup of Z, + generated by two integers r, s ∈ Z is H = {mr + ns  n, m ∈ Z}. Now H = Z if and only if 1 ∈ H, so H = Z if and only if 1 = mr + ns for some m, n ∈ Z. If r and s are relatively prime, then 1 is a gcd of r and s, and the Euclidean algorithm together with the last statement in Theorem 46.9, show that 1 can be expressed in the form 1 = mr + ns for some m, n ∈ Z. Conversely, if 1 = mr + ns, then every integer dividing both m and n divides the righthand side of this equation and thus divides 1, so 1 is a gcd of r and s. 22. If a and n are relatively prime, then a gcd of a and n is 1. By Theorem 46.9, we can express 1 in the form 1 = m1 a + m2 n for some m1 , m2 ∈ Z. Multiplying by b, we get b = a(m1 b) + (bm2 )n. Thus x = m1 b is a solution of ax ≡ b (mod n). 23. Suppose that the positive gcd d of a and n in Z divides b. By Theorem 46.9, we can express d in the form d = m1 a + m2 n for some m1 , m2 ∈ Z. Multiplying by b/d, we obtain b = a(m1 b/d) + (bm2 /d)n. Thus x = m1 b/d is a solution of ax ≡ b (mod n). Conversely, suppose that ac ≡ b (mod n) so that n divides ac − b, say ac − b = nq. Then b = ac − nq. Because the positive gcd d of a and n divides the righthand side of b = ac − nq, it must be that d divides b also. In Zn , this result has the following interpretation: ax = b has a solution in Zn for nonzero a, b ∈ Zn if and only if the positive gcd of a and n in Z divides b. 24. Step 1. Use the Euclidean algorithm to ﬁnd the positive gcd d of a and n. Step 2. Use the technique of Exercise 6 to express d in the form d = m1 a + m2 n. Step 3. A solution of ax ≡ b (mod n) is x = m1 b/d. We now illustrate with 22x ≡ 18 (mod 42). Step 1. Find the gcd of 22 and 42: 42 = 1(22) + 20, 22 = 1(20) + 2, 20 = 10(2), so 2 is a gcd of 22 and 42. Step 2. Express 2 in the form m1 (22) + m2 (42): 2 = 22 − 1(20) but 20 = 42 − 1(22), 2 = 22 − 1[42 − 1(22)] = 2(22) + (−1)(42), so m1 = 2. Step 3. A solution of 22x ≡ 18 (mod 42) is x = m1 b/d = (2)(18)/2 = 18. 47. Gaussian Integers and Multiplicative Norms
1. Example 47.8 showed that 5 = (1 + 2i)(1 − 2i) is a factorization of 5 into irreducibles. Because Z[i] is a UFD, this factorization of 5 is unique up to unit factors. For example, [i(1 + 2i)][−i(1 − 2i)] = (−2 + i)(−2 − i) is another factorization of 5 into irreducibles. 47. Gaussian Integers and Multiplicative Norms 155 2. If α is a factor of 7 in Z[i], then N (α) must divide N (7) = 49, so N (α) must be 1, 7, or 49. If N (α) = 1, then α is a unit and if N (α) = 49, then the other factor must be a unit, and we are not interested in these cases. Thus we must have N (α) = 7 if α is an irreducible dividing 7 and 7 is not irreducible. Because the equation a2 + b2 = 7 has no solutions in integers, it must be that 7 is already irreducible in Z[i]. 3. Proceeding as in the answer to Exercise 2, if α is an irreducible factor of 4 + 3i, then N (α) must be a divisor of 42 + 32 = 25, and 5 is the only possibility if 4 + 3i is not irreducible. Thus we must have α = a + bi where a is ±1 and b is ±2 or where a is ±2 and b is ±1. A bit of trial and errror shows that 4 + 3i = (1 + 2i)(2 − i), and 1 + 2i and 2 − i are irreducible because they have the prime 5 as norm. 4. Proceeding as in the answer to Exercise 2, if α is an irreducible factor of 6 − 7i, then N (α) must be a divisor of 62 + 72 = 85, so N (α) must be either 5 or 17 if 6 − 7i is not irreducible. If N (α) = 5, then α = a + bi where a2 + b2 = 5, so a = ±1 and b = ±2, or a = ±2 and b = ±1. We compute 6 − 7i 6 − 7i 1 − 2i −8 − 19i = · = 1 + 2i 1 + 2i 1 − 2i 5 and ﬁnd that the answer is not in Z[i]. There is no use trying ±1(1 + 2i) or ±i(1 + 2i), so we try 1 − 2i. We obtain 6 − 7i 6 − 7i 1 + 2 i 20 + 5i = · = = 4 + i. 1 − 2i 1 − 2i 1 + 2 i 5 Thus 6 − 7i = (1 − 2i)(4 + i), and 1 − 2i and 4 + i are irreducibles because their norms are the primes 5 and 17 respectively. √ √ √ 5. We have 6 = 2 · 3 = (−1 + −5)(−1 − −5). The numbers 2 and 3 are both irreducible in Z[ −5] because the equations a2 + 5b2 = 2 and a2 + 5b2 = 3 have no solutions in integers. (See Example √ 47.9 in the text.) If −1 + −5 were not irreducible, then it would be a product αβ where neither α nor β is a unit and N (αβ ) = N (α)N (β ) = 6. This means that we would have to have N (α) = 2 or √ N (α) = 3, which is impossible as we have just seen. Because the only units in Z[ −5] are ±1, we have two essentially diﬀerent factorizations of 6. 6. We compute αβ : 7 + 2i 3 + 4i 13 + 34i 7 + 2i = · = . 3 − 4i 3 − 4i 3 + 4 i 25 Now we take the integer 1 closest to 13/25 and the integer 1 closest to 34/25, and let σ = 1+1i = 1+ i. Then we compute ρ = α − βσ = (7 + 2i) − (3 − 4i)(1 + i) = (7 + 2i) − (7 − i) = 3i. Then α = σβ + ρ where N (ρ) = N (3i) = 9 < 25 = N (3 − 4i) = N (β ). 7. We let α = 5 − 15i and β = 8 + 6i, and compute σ and ρ as in the answer to Exercise 6: 5 − 15i 8 − 6i −50 − 150i 5 − 15i = · = . 8 + 6i 8 + 6i 8 − 6i 100 We take σ = −i, and ρ = α − σβ = (5 − 15i) − (−i)(8 + 6i) = −1 − 7i, so 5 − 15i = (8 + 6i)(−i) + (−1 − 7i). 156 47. Gaussian Integers and Multiplicative Norms Continuing the Euclidean algorithm, we now take α = 8 + 6i and β = −1 − 7i, and obtain 8 + 6i 8 + 6i −1 + 7i −50 + 50i = · = = −1 + i. −1 − 7i −1 − 7i −1 + 7i 50 Because −1 + i ∈ Z[i], we are done, and a gcd of 5 − 15i and 8 + 6i is −1 − 7i. Of course, the other gcd’s are obtained by multiplying by the units 1, ±i, so 1 + 7i, −7 + i, and 7 − i are also acceptable answers. 8. T T T F T T T F T T 9. Suppose that π = αβ. Then N (π ) = N (α)N (β ). Because N (π ) is the minimal norm > 1, one of N (α) and N (β ) must be N (π ) and the other must be ±1. Thus either α or β has norm ±1, and is thus a unit by hypothesis. Therefore π is an irreducible in D. 10. a. We know that in Z[i], the units are precisely the elements ±1, ±i of norm 1. By Theorem 47.7, every element of Z[i] having as norm a prime in Z is an irreducible. Because N (1 + i) = 12 + 12 = 2, we see that 1 + i is an irreducible. The equation 2 = −i(1 + i)2 thus gives the desired factorization of 2. b. Every odd prime in Z is congruent to either 1 or 3 modulo 4. If p ≡ 1 (mod 4), then Theorem 47.10 shows that p = a2 + b2 = (a + ib)(a − ib) where neither a + ib nor a − ib is a unit because they each have norm a2 + b2 = p > 1, so p is not an irreducible. Conversely, if p is not an irreducible, then p = (a + ib)(c + di) in Z[i] where neither factor is a unit, so that both a + bi and c + di have norm greater than 1. Taking the norm of both sides of the equation, we obtain p2 = (a2 + b2 )(c2 + d2 ), so we must have p = a2 + b2 = c2 + d2 . Theorem 47.10 then shows that we must have p ≡ 1 (mod 4). We have shown that an odd prime p is not irreducible if and only if p ≡ 1 (mod 4) so an odd prime p is irreducible if and only if p ≡ 3 (mod 4). 11. Property 1: Let α = a + bi. Then N (α) = a2 + b2 . As a sum of squares, a2 + b2 ≥ 0. Property 2: Continuing the argument for Property 1, we see that a2 + b2 = 0 if and only if a = b = 0, so N (α) = 0 if and only if α = 0. Property 3: Let β = c + di. Then αβ = (a + bi)(c + di) = (ac − bd) + (ad + bc)i, so N (αβ ) = (ac − bd)2 + (ad + bc)2 = a2 c2 − 2abcd + b2 d2 + a2 d2 + 2abcd + b2 c2 = a2 c2 + b2 d2 + a2 d2 + b2 c2 = (a2 + b2 )(c2 + d2 ) = N (α)N (β ). [Of course it also follows from the fact that αβ 2 = α2 β 2 for all α, β ∈ C.] √ √ 12. Let α = a + b −5 and β = c + d −5. Then √ √ √ αβ = (a + b −5)(c + d −5) = (ac − 5bd) + (ad + bc) −5, so N (αβ ) = (ac − 5bd)2 + 5(ad + bc)2 = a2 c2 − 10abcd + 25b2 d2 + 5a2 d2 + 10abcd + 5b2 c2 = a2 c2 + 25b2 d2 + 5a2 d2 + 5b2 c2 = (a2 + 5b2 )(c2 + 5d2 ) = N (α)N (β ). 47. Gaussian Integers and Multiplicative Norms [Of course it also follows from the fact that αβ 2 = α2 β 2 for all α, β ∈ C.] 157 13. Let α ∈ D. We give a proof by induction on N (α), starting with N (α) = 2, that α has a factorization into irreducibles. Let N (α) = 2. Then α itself is an irreducible by Theorem 47.7, and we are done. Suppose that every element of absolute norm > 1 but < k has a factorization into irreducibles, and let N (α) = k. If α is an irreducible, then we are done. Otherwise, α = βγ where neither β nor γ is a unit, so N (β ) > 1 and N (γ ) > 1. From N (βγ ) = N (β )N (γ ) = N (α) = k, we then see that 1 < N (β ) < k and 1 < N (γ ) < k, so by the induction assumption, both β and γ have factorizations into a product of irreducibles. The product of these two factorizations then provides a factorization of α into irreducibles. 14. Now 16 + 7i 16 + 7i 10 + 5i 125 + 150i 6 = · = =1+ i 10 − 5i 10 − 5i 10 + 5i 125 5 so we let σ = 1 + i. Then 16 + 7i = (10 − 5i)(1 + i) + (1 + 2i). We have 10 − 5i 10 − 5i 1 − 2i 0 − 25i = · = = −5i, 1 + 2i 1 + 2 i 1 − 2i 5 so 10 − 5i = (1 + 2i)(−5i). Thus 1 + 2i is a gcd of 16 + 7i and 10 + 5i. Other possible answers are −1 − 2i, −2 + i, and 2 − i. 15. a. Let γ + α be a coset of Z[i]/ α . By the division algorithm, γ = ασ + ρ where either ρ = 0 or N (ρ) < N (α). Then γ + α = (ρ + σα) + α . Now σα ∈ α , so γ + α = ρ + α . Thus every coset of α contains a representative of norm less than N (α). Because there are only a ﬁnite number of elements of Z[i] having norm less than N (α), we see that Z[i]/ α is a ﬁnite ring. b. Let π be an irreducible in Z[i], and let µ be an ideal in Z[i] such that π ⊆ µ . (Remember that Z[i] is a PID so every ideal is principal.) Then π ∈ µ so π = µβ. Because π is an irreducible, either µ is a unit, in which case µ = Z[i], or β is a unit, in which case µ = πβ −1 so µ ∈ π and µ = π . We have shown that π is a maximal ideal of Z[i], so Z[i]/ π is a ﬁeld. c. i. Because 3 contains both 3 and 3i, we see that each coset contains a unique representative of the form a + bi where a and b are both in the set {0, 1, 2}. Thus there are 9 elements in all, and the ring has characteristic 3 because 1 + 1 + 1 = 0. ii. By Part(a), each coset contains a representative of norm less that N (1 + i) = 2. The only nonzero elements of Z[i] of norm less than 2 are ±1 and ±i. Because i = −1 + (1 + i) and −i = 1 − (1 + i), we can reduce our list of possible nonzero cosets to 1 + 1 + i and −1 + 1 + i . But [1 + 1 + i ] − [−1 + 1 + i ] = 2 + 1 + i , and 2 = (1 + i)(1 − i) is in 1 + i . Thus the only cosets are 1 + i and 1 + 1 + i , so the order of the ring is 2, and the characteristic is 2. iii. By Part(a), each coset contains a representative of norm less than N (1 + 2i) = 5. The only nonzero elements of Z[i] of norm less than 5 are of the form a + bi where a and b are in the set {0, 1, −1} or where one of a and b is ±2 and the other is zero. These elements are 1, −1, i, −i, 1 + i, 1 − i, −1 + i, −1 − i, 2, −2, 2i, and −2i. Because i = 2 + (1 + 2i)i, −i = −2 + (1 + 2i)(−i), 2i = −1 + (1 + 2i), −2i = 1 + (1 + 2i)(−1), 1 + i = −2 + (1 + 2i)(1 − i), 158 47. Gaussian Integers and Multiplicative Norms 1 − i = −1 + (1 + 2i)(−i), −1 + i = 1 + (1 + 2i)(i), −1 − i = 2 + (1 + 2i)(−1 + i), we see that every coset contains either 0, 1, 1, 2, or 2 as a representative. The ring has 5 elements and characteristic 5. 16. a. Property 1: Because n > 0, we see that a2 + nb2 = 0 if and only if a = b = 0. √ √ Property 2: Let α = a + b −n and β = c + d −n. Then √ N (αβ ) = N ((ac − bdn) + (ad + bc) −n) = (ac − bdn)2 + n(ad + bc)2 = a2 c2 − 2abcdn + b2 d2 n2 + a2 d2 n + 2abcdn + b2 c2 n = a2 c2 + b2 d2 n2 + a2 d2 n + b2 c2 n = (a2 + nb2 )(c2 + nd2 ) = N (α)N (β ). [Of course it also follows from the fact that αβ 2 = α2 β 2 for all α, β ∈ C.] √ b. By Theorem 47.7, if α ∈ Z[ −n] is a unit, then N (α) = 1. Conversely, suppose that N (α) = 1. Now a2 + nb2 = 1 where n ∈ Z+ if and only if either a = ±1 and b = 0, or a = 0 and n = 1 and b = ±1. In the former case, α = ±1, and of course 1 and 1 are units. In the latter case with n = 1, we are in the Gaussian integers which are a Euclidean domain, and Theorem 46.6 tells us that the elements of norm 1 are indeed units. √ c. The preceding parts show that we have a multiplicative norm on Z[ −n] such that the elements of norm 1 are precisely the units. By Exercise 13, every nonzero nonunit has a factorization into irreducibles. Note that the √ hypothesis that n is square free was not used in this exercise. Because a + 2 n = a + (bm) −n, we see that the squarefree assumption is really no loss of generality. The b −m assumption that n > 0 was used in both Part(a) and Part(b). The squarefree assumption is used in the following exercise, however. √ 17. a. Property 1: If a2 − nb2 = 0, then a2 = nb2 . If b = 0, then a = 0. If b = 0, then n = (a/b)2 , contradicting the hypothesis that n is square free. Thus a = 0 and b = 0. √ √ Property 2: Let α = a + b n and b = c + d n. Then √ N (αβ ) = N ((ac + bdn) + (ad + bc) n) = (ac + bdn)2 − n(ad + bc)2 = a2 c2 + 2abcdn + b2 d2 n2 − a2 d2 n − 2abcdn − b2 c2 n = a2 c2 + b2 d2 n2 − a2 d2 n − b2 c2 n = (a2 − nb2 )(c2 − nd2 ) = (a2 − nb2 )(c2 − nd2 ) = N (α)N (β ). b. As an integral domain with a multiplicative norm, the norm of every unit is ±1 by Theorem 47.7. √ Now suppose that α = a + b n has norm ±1, so that a2 − nb2 = ±1. Then √ √ √ 1 a−b n 1 a−b n √=2 √· = ±(a − b n) = 2 a − nb α a+b n a−b n 48. Automorphisms of Fields √ √ and (a + (−b) n) ∈ Z[ n], so α is a unit. 159 √ c. The preceding parts show that we have a multiplicative norm on Z[ n] such that the elements of norm 1 are precisely the units. By Exercise 13, every nonzero nonunit has a factorization into irreducibles. √ √ 18. Given α and β in Z[ −2], we proceed to construct σ = q1 + q2√ −2 and ρ = α − βσ as described √ √ in the proof of Theorem 47.4. Viewing α = a + b −2 = a + (b 2)i in C, we have a + (b 2)i2 = a2 + 2b2 = N (α). Working in C, with  2 , we compute √ √ √ α a + b −2 c − d −2 √ √ = · = r + s −2 β c + d −2 c − d −2 for r, s ∈ Q. Again, we choose q1 and q2 to be integers in Z as close as possible to r and s respectively. By construction of σ, we see that r − q1  ≤ 1/2 and s − q2  ≤ 1/2. Thus √ √ α N ( − σ ) = N ((r + s −2) − (q1 + q2 −2)) β √ = N ((r − q1 ) + (s − q2 ) −2) ≤ Thus we obtain N (ρ) = N (α − βσ ) = N (β ( α α 3 − σ )) = N (β )N ( − σ ) ≤ N (β ) , β β 4 1 2
2 +2 1 2 2 ≤ 1 1 3 +2· = . 4 4 4 so we do indeed have N (ρ) < N (β ) as claimed. 48. Automorphisms of Fields
√ √ √ 1. The conjugates of 2 over Q are 2 and − 2. √ √ √ 2. Now 2 is the only conjugate of 2 over R because 2 ∈ R. √ √ √ 3. The conjugates of 3 + 2 over Q are 3 + 2 and 3 − 2; they are the zeros of (x − 3)2 − 2 = x2 − 6x + 7. √ √ 4. The conjugates of 2 − 3 over Q are √ √√ √ √ √ √ √ 2 − 3, 2 + 3, − 2 − 3, and − 2 + 3 as indicated by Example 48.17. √ √ √ √ √ 5. The conjugates of 2 + i over Q are 2 + i, 2 − i, − 2 + i, and − 2 − i. This is clear because √ √ Q( 2 + i) = (Q( 2))(i). √ √ √ √ 6. The conjugates of 2 + i over R are 2 + i and 2 − i because 2 ∈ R. √ 7. The conjugates of 1 + 2 over Q are 1+ This clear because Q( 1 + √ √ 2, 1− √ 2, − 1 + √ 2, and − 1− √ 2. √ √ 2) = (Q( 2))( 1 + 2). 160 48. Automorphisms of Fields √ √ √ √ √ √ 8. The conjugates of 1 + 2 over Q( 2) are just 1 + 2 and − 1 + 2 because 2 ∈ Q( 2). √ √ √ √ √ √ 9. τ2 ( 3) = 3. 10. τ2 ( 2 + 5) = − 2 + 5. √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ 11. (τ3 τ2 )( 2 + 3 5) = τ3 [τ2 ( 2 + 3 5)] = τ3 (− 2 + 3 5) = − 2 + 3 5. 12. (τ5 τ3 )
√ √ 2 √ − 3√ 5 2 3− 2 = τ5 τ3 √ √ 2 √ − 3√ 5 2 3− 2 = τ5 √ 2− 3 √ 5 √ −2 3− 2 √ = √ 2+3 √ 5 √ −2 3− 2 √ 13. Note that √ √ 45 = 3 5. We have √ √ √ √ (τ52 τ3 τ2 )( 2 + 45) = τ52 τ3 [τ2 ( 2 + 45)] √ √ = τ52 [τ3 [(− 2 + 45)] √ √ = τ52 (− 2 + 45) √ √ √ √ = τ5 (− 2 − 45) = − 2 + 45. 30 = √√√ √ √ √ 2 3 5. Now τ3 [τ5 ( 2 − 3 + (τ2 τ5 )( 30))] √ √ √ = τ3 [τ5 ( 2 − 3 + τ2 (τ5 ( 30)))] √ √ √ = τ3 [τ5 ( 2 − 3 + τ2 (− 30))] √ √ √ = τ3 [τ5 ( 2 − 3 + 30)] √ √ √ √ √ √ = τ3 ( 2 − 3 − 30) = 2 + 3 + 30. 14. Note that √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √√ 15. a. Because σ1 ( 2) = − 2, σ3 ( 3) = − 3, and σ1 ( 6) = − 6, the only elements of Q( 2, 3) left ﬁxed by both σ1 and σ3 are those in Q, so Q is the ﬁxed ﬁeld. √ √√ √ b. We see that σ3 = σ1 σ2 leaves 6 ﬁxed, because 6 = 2 3 and σ3 acts on this product by √ changing the sign of both factors. Thus the ﬁxed ﬁeld is Q( 6). √ √ √ √ √ √ √√ c. Because σ3 ( 2) = − 2, σ2 ( 3) = − 3, and σ2 ( 6) = − 6, the only elements of Q( 2, 3) left ﬁxed by both σ3 and σ2 are those in Q, so Q is the ﬁxed ﬁeld. √ √√√ √√ 16. Because τ3 moves only 3, the subﬁeld of Q( 2, 3, 5) left ﬁxed by τ3 is Q( 2, 5). √√√ 17. Because τ32 = ι, the identity, the entire ﬁeld Q( 2, 3, 5) is left ﬁxed by τ32 . √ √ √ √ √√√ 18. Because τ2 ( √ = − 2 and τ3 ( 3) = − 3, we see that the subﬁeld of Q( 2, 3, 5) left ﬁxed by 2) {τ2 , τ3 } is Q( 5). √ √ √ √ √ √ 19. Because τ2 ( 2) = − √ and τ5 ( 5) = − 5, we √ that τ5 τ2 leaves both 3 and 10 ﬁxed, so the 2 see √ √√ subﬁeld of Q( 2, 3, 5) left ﬁxed by τ5 τ2 is Q( 3, 10). √√ √ √ √√ 20. We see that τ5 τ3 τ2 leaves 15, 6, and √ ﬁxed. Because 15 = 6 10/2, we see that we can 10 √ describe the ﬁxed ﬁeld of τ5 τ3 τ2 as Q( 6, 10). √√ √ 21. Because every product of one, two or three distinct factors formed from 2, 3, and 5 is moved by √√√ one of τ2 , τ3 , or τ5 , we see that the subﬁeld of Q( 2, 3, 5) left ﬁxed by {τ2 , τ3 , τ5 } is Q. √ √ √ √ √ √ 2) 22. a. Because τ2 ( √ = − 2, we see that τ22 ( 2) = τ2 (τ2 ( 2)) = τ2 (− 2) = 2. Because τ2 moves √ neither 3 nor 5, we see that τ22 = ι, the identity map. Thus τ2 is of order 2 in G(E/Q). Clearly the same argument shows that both τ3 and τ5 are of order 2 in G(E/Q) also. b. H = {ι, τ2 , τ3 , τ5 , τ2 τ3 , τ2 τ5 , τ3 τ5 , τ2 τ3 τ5 }. 48. Automorphisms of Fields ι ι τ2 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ2 τ5 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ2 ι τ2 τ3 τ2 τ5 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ5 τ3 τ5 τ3 τ3 τ2 τ3 ι τ3 τ5 τ2 τ2 τ3 τ5 τ5 τ2 τ 5 τ5 τ5 τ2 τ5 τ3 τ5 ι τ2 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ2 τ3 τ2 τ3 τ2 τ3 τ3 τ2 τ2 τ3 τ5 ι τ3 τ5 τ2 τ5 τ5 τ2 τ5 τ2 τ5 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ5 ι τ2 τ3 τ3 τ3 τ5 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ5 τ5 τ3 τ2 τ5 τ2 τ3 ι τ2 τ 2 τ 3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ5 τ3 τ 5 τ2 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ5 τ3 τ2 ι 161 ι τ2 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ2 τ5 τ3 τ5 τ2 τ3 τ5 √√ √ c. An automorphism in G(E/Q) is completely determined by its values on 2, 3, and 5. Each of these is either left alone or mapped into its negative. Thus there are two possibilities for the value √ √ √ of σ ∈ G(E/Q) on 2, two possibilities for σ ( 3), and two possibilities for σ ( 5), giving a total of 2 · 2 · 2 = 8 automorphisms in all. Because H  = 8, we see that H = G(E/Q). 23. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Insert “irreducible” before “polynomial”. Two elements, α and β, of an algebraic extension E of a ﬁeld F are conjuate over F if and only if they are both zeros of the same irreducible polynomial f (x) in F [x]. 24. The deﬁnition is correct. √ √ 25. a. We have β = 3 − 2 is a conjugate of α = 3 + 2. They are both zeros of the polynomial (x − 3)2 − 2 = x2 − 6x + 7 which is irreducible over Q. b. Because √ √ ψα, β ( 2) = ψα, β (−3 + (3 + 2)) √ = ψα, β (−3) + ψα, β (3 + 2) √ √ √ = −3 + (3 − 2) = − 2 = ψ√2,−√2 ( 2), we see that ψα, β and ψ√2,−√2 are the same map. 26. We have σ2 (0) = 02 = 0, σ2 (1) = 12 = 1, σ2 (α) = α2 = α + 1, and σ2 (α + 1) = (α + 1)2 = α2 + 2 · α + 1 = α2 + 1 = α + 1 + 1 = α. Thus Z2 (α){σ2 } = {0, 1} = Z2 . 27. Using the table for this ﬁeld in this manual, we ﬁnd that σ3 (0) = 03 = 0, σ3 (1) = 13 = 1, σ3 (2) = 23 = 2, σ3 (α) = α3 = 2α, σ3 (2α) = (2α)3 = α, σ3 (1 + α) = (1 + α)3 = 1 + 2α, σ3 (1 + 2α) = (1 + 2α)3 = 1 + α, σ3 (2 + α) = (2 + α)3 = 2 + 2α, and σ3 (2 + 2α) = (2 + 2α)3 = 2 + α. Thus Z3 (α){σ3 } = Z3 . 162 48. Automorphisms of Fields 28. The map σ2 : Z2 (x) → Z2 (x), where x is an indeterminate, is not an automorphism because the image is Z2 (x2 ). Thus σ is not onto Z2 (x), but rather maps Z2 (x) one to one onto a proper subﬁeld of itself. 29. F F T T F T T T T T 30. If α and β are conjugate, then they have the same irreducible polynomial p(x) over F , so both F (α) and F (β ) are isomorphic to F [x]/ p(x) . 31. If ψα, β is an isomorphism of F (α) onto F (β ), then for every polynomial f (x) ∈ F [x], we have f (α) = 0 if and only if f (β ) = 0, so the monic irreducible polyomial for α over F is the same as the one for β over F. 32. By Corollary 48.5, such an isomorphism must map α onto one of its conjugates over F. Because deg(α, F ) = n there are at most n conjugates of α in F , for a polynomial of degree n has at most n zeros in a ﬁeld. On the other hand, Corollary 48.5 asserts that there is exactly one such isomorphism for each conjugate of α over F , so the number of such isomorphisms is equal to the number of conjugates of α over F , which is ≤ n. 33. We proceed by induction on n. For n = 1, Corollary 48.5 shows that σ is completely determined by σ (α1 ), which must be a conjugate of α1 over F . Suppose that the statement is true for n < k , and let n = k . Suppose that σ is known on α1 , α2 , · · · , αk−1 , αk . Let r = deg(αk , F (α1 , · · · , αk−1 )). Then each element β in F (α1 , · · · , αk−1 , αk ) can be written uniquely in the form β = γ0 + γ1 αk + γ2 αk2 + · · · + γr−1 αkr−1 where γi ∈ F (α1 , · · · , αk−1 ) for i = 0, 1, · · · , r − 1 according to Theorem 30.23. By our induction assumption, we know σ (γi ) for i = 0, 1, · · · , r − 1, and we are assuming that we also know σ (αk ). The expression for β and the fact that σ is an automorphism shows that we know σ (β ). This completes our proof by induction. 34. By Corollary 48.5, σ maps each zero of irr(α, F ) onto a zero of this same polyomial. Because σ is an automorphism, it is a onetoone map of E onto E . By counting, it must map the set of zeros in E of this polynomial onto itself, so it is a permutation of this set. 35. Because S ⊆ H , it is clear that EH ⊆ ES . Let α ∈ ES , so that σi (α) = α for all i ∈ I . Then σi−1 (α) = α also. It follows at once that σin (α) = α for all i ∈ I and all n ∈ Z. Theorem 7.6 shows that every element of H is a product of a ﬁnite number of such powers of the σi . Because products of automorphisms are computed by function composition, it follows that α is left ﬁxed by each element in H . Therefore α ∈ EH , so ES ⊆ EH and therefore ES = EH . 36. a. Suppose that ζ i = ζ j for i < j ≤ p − 1. Then ζ j −i = 1 and ζ would be a zero of xj −i − 1 which is of degree less than p − 1, contradicting the fact that Φp (x) is irreducible. Thus these powers ζ i for 1 ≤ i ≤ p − 1 are distinct. Because ζ i = 1 for 1 ≤ i ≤ p − 1 but (ζ i )p = (ζ p )i = 1i = 1, we see that ζ i is a zero of xp − 1 that is diﬀerent from 1 for 1 ≤ i ≤ p − 1, so these distinct powers of ζ must account for all p − 1 zeros of Φp (x). b. Let σ, τ ∈ G(Q(ζ )/Q). Suppose that σ (ζ ) = ζ i and that τ (ζ ) = ζ j . Then (στ )(ζ ) = σ (τ (ζ )) = σ (ζ j ) = [σ (ζ )]j = (ζ i )j = ζ ij = ζ ji = (ζ j )i = [τ (ζ )]i = τ (ζ i ) = τ (σ (ζ )) = (τ σ )(ζ ). 48. Automorphisms of Fields Because (στ )(ζ ) = (τ σ )(ζ ), Corollary 48.5 shows that στ = τ σ . Thus G(Q(ζ )/Q) is abelian. c. We know that B = {1, ζ, ζ 2 , · · · , ζ p−2 } is a basis for Q(ζ ) over Q. Let β ∈ Q(ζ ). We can write β = a0 + a1 ζ + a2 ζ 2 + · · · + ap−2 ζ p−2 ζ for ai ∈ Q for 0 ≤ i ≤ p − 2. Multiplying by ζ , we see that β = a0 ζ + a1 ζ 2 + a2 ζ 3 + · · · + ap−2 ζ p−1 163 (1) so these powers of ζ do span Q(ζ ). They are linearly independent because a linear combination of them equal to zero yields a linear combination of the elements in B equal to zero upon division by ζ . Thus the set {ζ, ζ 2 , · · · , ζ p−1 } is a basis for Q(ζ ) over Q. By Theorem 48.3, and Part(a), there exist automorphisms σi for i = 1, 2, · · · , p − 1 in G(Q(ζ )/Q) such that σi (ζ ) = ζ i . Thus if β in Eq.(1) is left ﬁxed by all such σi , we must have a0 = a1 = · · · = ap−2 so β = a0 (ζ + ζ 2 + · · · + ζ p−1 ) = −a0 because ζ is a zero of Φp (x). Thus the elements of Q(ζ ) left ﬁxed lie in Q, so Q is the ﬁxed ﬁeld of G(Q(ζ )/Q). 37. Yes, if α and β are transcendentals over F , then φ : F (α) → F (β ), where φ(a) = a for each a ∈ F (β ) (α ) and φ f (α) = f (β ) for f (x), g (x) ∈ F [x] and g (x) = 0, is an isomorphism. Both F (α) and F (β ) are g g isomorphic to F (x) as we saw in Case II under the heading Simple Extensions in Section 29. 38. In the notation of Exercise 37, taking α = x, we must ﬁnd all β transcendental over F such that F (x) = F (β ). This means that not only must β be a quotient of polynomials in x that does not lie in the ﬁeld F , but also, we must be able to solve and express x as a quotient of polynomials in β . This +b is only possible if β is a quotient ax+d of linear polynomials in F [x], and for this quotient not to be cx b in F , we must require that ad − bc = 0, so a = d . c 39. a. Let σ be an automorphism of E and let α ∈ E . Then σ (α2 ) = σ (αα) = σ (α)σ (α) = σ (α)2 , so σ indeed carries squares into squares. b. Because the positive numbers in R are precisely the squares in R, this follows at once from Part(a). c. From a < b, we deduce that b − a > 0. By Part(b), we see that σ (b − a) = σ (b) − σ (a) > 0, so σ (a) < σ (b). d. Let σ be an automorphism of R. Let a ∈ R, and ﬁnd sequences {ri } and {si } of rational numbers, both converging to a, and satisfying ri < ri+1 < a < si+1 < si for all i ∈ Z+ . By Part(c), we see that σ (ri ) < σ (ri+1 ) < σ (a) < σ (si+1 ) < σ (si ). (2) The automorphism σ of R must leave the prime ﬁeld Q ﬁxed, because σ (1) = 1. Thus the inequality (2) becomes ri < ri+1 < σ (a) < si+1 < si for all i ∈ Z+ . Because the sequences {ri } and {si } converge to a, we see that σ (a) = a, so σ is the identity automorphism. 164 49. The Isomorphism Extension Theorem 49. The Isomorphism Extension Theorem
1. (See the answer in the text.) 2. Extensions are τ1 given by √ √ √ √ √ √ τ1 ( 2) = 2, τ1 ( 3) = − 3, τ1 ( 5) = 5, and τ2 given by √ √ √ √ √ √ τ2 ( 2) = 2, τ2 ( 3) = 3, τ2 ( 5) = − 5. 3. (See the answer in the text.) √ 4. The extensions are the identity map of Q( 3 2) onto itself, and τ1 given by τ1 (α1 ) = α2 , that is, the map ψα1 , α2 , and τ2 = ψα1 , α3 . 5. (See the answer in the text.) 6. The extensions are √ √ τ1 given by τ1 (i) = i, τ1 ( 3) = − 3, √ √ τ2 given by τ2 (i) = i, τ2 ( 3) = − 3, √ √ τ3 given by τ3 (i) = i, τ3 ( 3) = − 3, √ √ τ4 given by τ4 (i) = −i, τ4 ( 3) = − 3, √ √ τ5 given by τ5 (i) = −i, τ5 ( 3) = − 3, √ √ τ6 given by τ6 (i) = −i, τ6 ( 3) = − 3, τ1 (α1 ) = α1 , τ2 (α1 ) = α2 , τ3 (α1 ) = α3 , τ4 (α1 ) = α1 , τ5 (α1 ) = α2 , τ6 (α1 ) = α3 . 7. (See the answer in the text.) 8. F T F T F T T T T F 9. Now σ : K → K is an isomorphism, so σ −1 : σ [K ] → K is an isomorphism. Because K is algebraically closed and is algebraic over σ [K ], Theorem 49.3 shows that σ −1 has an extension to an isomorphism τ mapping K onto a subﬁeld of K . But σ −1 is already onto K , and because τ must be a onetoone map, we see that it cannot be deﬁned on any elements of K not already in σ [K ]. Thus σ [K ] = K , so σ is an automorphism of K . 10. Let E be an algebraic extension of F and let τ be an isomorphism of E onto a subﬁeld of F that leaves F ﬁxed. Because E is an algebraic extension of F , the ﬁeld F is an algebraic extension of E and is an algebraic closure of E . By Theorem 49.3, τ can be extended to an isomorphism σ of F onto a subeld of F . By Exercise 9, such an isomorphism σ is an automorphism of F . 11. By Theorem 49.3, the identity map of F onto F has an extension to an isomorphism τ mapping E onto a subﬁeld of F . By Theorem 49.3, τ can be extended to an isomorphism σ mapping E onto a subﬁeld of F . Then σ −1 is an isomorphism mapping σ [E ] onto F . By Theorem 49.3, σ −1 can be extended to an isomorphism of F onto a subﬁeld of E . Because σ −1 is already onto E and its extension must be one to one, we see that the domain of σ −1 must already be F . Thus σ [E ] = F and σ is an isomorphism of E onto F . 50. Splitting Fields 165 12. We should note that Q(x) is an algebraic closure of Q(x). We know that π is transcendental over √ √ Q. Therefore, π must be transcendental over Q, for if it were algebraic, then π = ( π )2 would be algebraic over Q, because algebraic numbers form a closed set under ﬁeld operations. Therefore the √ √ map τ : Q( π ) → Q(x) where τ (a) = a for a ∈ Q and τ ( π ) = x is an isomorphism. Theorem 49.3 √ shows that τ can be extended to an isomorphism σ mapping Q( π ) onto a subﬁeld of Q(x). Then √ √ σ −1 is an isomorphism mapping σ [Q( π ) ] onto a subﬁeld of Q( π ) which can be extended to an √ √ isomorphism of Q(x) onto a subﬁeld of Q( π ). But because σ −1 is already onto Q( π ), we see that √ σ must actually be onto Q(x), so σ provides the required isomorphism of Q( π ) with Q(x). 13. Let E be a ﬁnite extension of F . Then by Theorem 31.11, E = F (α1 , α2 , · · · , αn ) where each αi is algebraic over F . Now suppose that L = F (α1 , α2 , · · · , αk+1 ) and K = F (α1 , α2 , · · · , αk ). Every isomorphism of L onto a subﬁeld of F and leaving F ﬁxed can be viewed as an extension of an isomorphism of K onto a subﬁeld of F . The extension of such an isomorphism τ of K to an isomorphism σ of L onto a subﬁeld of F is completely determined by σ (αk+1 ). Let p(x) be the irreducible polynomial for αk+1 over K , and let q (x) be the polynomial in τ [K ][x] obtained by applying τ to each of the coeﬃcients of p(x). Because p(αk+1 ) = 0, we must have q (σ (αk+1 )) = 0, so the number of choices for σ (αk+1 ) is at most deg(q (x)) = deg(p(x)) = [L : K ]. Thus {L : K } ≤ [L : K ], that is {F (α1 , · · · , αk+1 ) : F (α1 , · · · , αk )} ≤ [F (α1 , · · · , αk+1 ) : F (α1 , · · · , αk )]. (1) We have such an inequality (1) for each k = 1, 2, · · · , n − 1. Using the multiplicative properties of the index and of the degree (Corollaries 49.10 and 31.6), we obtain upon multiplication of these n − 1 inequalities the desired result, {E : F } ≤ [E : F ]. 50. Splitting Fields
√ 1. The splitting ﬁeld is Q( 3) and the degree over Q is 2. 2. Now x4 − 1 = (x − 1)(x + 1)(x2 + 1). The splitting ﬁeld is Q(i) and the degree over Q is 2. √√ 3. The splitting ﬁeld is Q( 2, 3) and the degree over Q is 4. √ √ 4. The splitting ﬁeld has degree 6 over Q. Replace 3 2 by 3 3 in Example 50.9. 5. Now x3 − 1 = (x − 1)(x2 + x + 1). The splitting ﬁeld has degree 2 over Q. 6. The splitting ﬁeld has degree 2 · 6 = 12 over Q. See Example 50.9 for the splitting ﬁeld of x3 − 2. √ √ √ 7. We have G(Q( 3 2)/Q = 1, because 3 2 ∈ R and the other conjugates of 3 2 do not lie in R (see √ Example 50.9). They yield isomorphisms into C rather than automorphisms of Q( 3 2). √√ √√ 8. We have G(Q( 3 2, i 3)/Q = 6, because Q( 3 2, i 3) is the splitting ﬁeld of x3 − 2 and is of degree 6, as shown in Example 50.9. √√ √ √√ √ 9. G(Q( 3 2, i 3)/Q( 3 2) = 2, because Q( 3 2, i 3) is the splitting ﬁeld of x2 + 3 over Q( 3 2). 10. Theorem 33.3 shows that the only ﬁeld of order 8 in Z2 is the splitting ﬁeld of x8 − x over Z2 . Because a ﬁeld of order 8 can be obtained by adjoining to Z2 a root of any cubic polynomial that is irreducible in Z2 [x], it must be that all roots of every irreducible cubic lie in this unique subﬁeld of order 8 in Z2 . 166 50. Splitting Fields 11. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Insert “irreducible” before “polynomial”. Let F ≤ E ≤ F where F is an algebraic closure of a ﬁeld F . The ﬁeld E is a splitting ﬁeld over F if and only if E contains all the zeros in F of every irreducible polynomial in F [x] that has a zero in E . 12. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Replace “lower degree” by “degree one”. A polynomial f (x) in F [x] splits in an extension ﬁeld E of F if and only if it factors in E [x] into a product of polynomials of degree one. 13. We have 1 ≤ [E : F ] ≤ n!. The example E = F = Q and f (x) = x2 − 1 shows that the lower bound 1 cannot be improved unless we are told that f (x) is irreducible over F . Example 50.9 shows that the upper bound n! cannot be improved. 14. T F T T T F F T T √ 15. Let F = Q and E = Q( 2). Then f (x) = x4 − 5x2 + 6 = (x2 − 2)(x2 − 3) has a zero in E , but does not split in E . 16. a. This multiplicative relation √ not necessarily true. √ is √ Example 50.9 and Exercise 7 show that √√ √ 6 = G(Q( 3 2, i 3)/Q) = G(Q( 3 2, i 3)/Q( 3 2)) · G(Q 3 2)/Q) = 2 · 1 = 2. b. Yes, because each ﬁeld is a splitting ﬁeld of the one immediately under it. If E is a splitting ﬁeld over F then G(E/F ) = {E : F }, and the index is multiplicative by Corollary 49.10. 17. Let E be the splitting ﬁeld of a set S of polynomials in F [x]. If E = F , then E is the splitting ﬁeld of x over F . If E = F , then ﬁnd a polynomial f1 (x) in S that does not split in F , and form its splitting ﬁeld, which is a subﬁeld E1 of E where [E1 : F ] > 1. If E = E1 , then E is the splitting ﬁeld of f1 (x) over F . If E = E1 , ﬁnd a polynomial f2 (x) in S that does not split in E1 , and form its splitting ﬁeld E2 ≤ E where [E2 : E1 ] > 1. If E = E2 , then E is the splitting ﬁeld of f1 (x)f2 (x) over F . If E = E2 , then continue the construction in the obvious way. Because by hypothesis E is a ﬁnite extension of F , this process must eventually terminate with some Er = E , which is then the splitting ﬁeld of the product g (x) = f1 (x)f2 (x) · · · fr (x) over F . 18. Find α ∈ E that is not in F . Now α is algebraic over F , and must be of degree 2 because [E : F ] = 2 and [F (α) : F ] = deg(α, F ). Thus irr(α, F ) = x2 + bx + c for some b, c ∈ F . Because α ∈ E , this polynomial factors in E [x] into a product (x − α)(x − β ), so the other root β of irr(α, F ) lies in E also. Thus E is the splitting ﬁeld of irr(α, F ). 19. Let E be a splitting ﬁeld over F . Let α be in E but not in F . By Corollary 50.6, the polynomial irr(α, F ) splits in E since it has a zero α in E . Thus E contains all conjugates of α over F . Conversely, suppose that E contains all conjugates of α ∈ E over F , where F ≤ E ≤ F . Because an automorphism σ of F leaving F ﬁxed carries every element of F into one of its conjugates over F , we see that σ (α) ∈ E . Thus σ induces a onetoone map of E into E . Because the same is true of σ −1 , we see that σ maps E onto E , and thus induces an automorphism of E leaving F ﬁxed. Theorem 50.3 shows that under these conditions, E is a splitting ﬁeld of F . √ √ other two conjugates of 3 2 do not lie in R, we √ that no map of see 20. √ Because Q( 3 2 ) lies in R and the √ 3 3 2 into any conjugate other than 2 √ itself can give rise to an automorphism of Q( 3 2 ); the other√ two maps give rise to isomorphisms of Q( 3 2 ) onto a subﬁeld of Q. Because any automorphism √ Q( 3 2 ) of must leave the prime ﬁeld Q ﬁxed, we see that the identity is the only automorphism of Q( 3 2 ). [For an alternate argument, see Exercise 39 of Section 48.] 51. Separable Extensions 21. The conjugates of √ 3 √ 2 over Q(i 3 ) are √ 3 2, 167 √ √√ √ Maps of 3 2 into each of them give rise to the only three automorphisms in G(Q( 3 2, i 3 )/Q(i 3 )). √ √ −1+i√3 Let σ be the automorphism such that σ ( 3 2 ) = 3 2 2 . Then σ must be a generator of this group of order 3, because σ is not the identity map, and every group of order 3 is cyclic. Thus the automorphism group is isomorphic to Z3 . 22. a. Each automorphism of E leaving F ﬁxed is a onetoone map that carries each zero of f (x) into one of its conjugates, which must be a zero of an irreducible factor of f (x) and hence is also a zero of f (x). Thus each automorphism gives rise to a onetoone map of the set of zeros of f (x) onto itself, that is, it acts as a permutation on the zeros of f (x). b. Because E is the splitting ﬁeld of f (x) over F , we know that E = F (α1 , α2 , · · · , αn ) where α1 , α2 , · · · , αn are the zeros of f (x). As Exercise 33 of Section 48 shows, an automorphism σ of E leaving F ﬁxed is completely determined by the values σ (α1 ), σ (α2 ), · · · , σ (αn ) that is, by the permutation of the zeros of f (x) given by σ . c. We associate with each σ ∈ G(E/F ) its permutation of the zeros of f (x) in E . Part(b) shows that diﬀerent elements of G(E/F ) produce diﬀerent permutations of the zeros of f (x). Because multiplication στ in G(E/F ) is function composition and because multiplication of the permutations of zeros is again composition of these same functions, with domain restricted to the zeros of f (x), we see that G(E/F ) is isomorphic to a subgroup of the group of all permutations of the zeros of f (x). √ √ 23. a. We have  G(E/Q) = 2 · 3 = 6, because {Q(i 3 ) : Q} = 2 since irr(i 3, Q) = x2 + 3 and √ √ √ √ {Q( 3 2 ) : Q(i 3 )} = 3 because irr( 3 2, Q(i 3 )) = x3 − 2. The index is multiplicative by Corollary 49.10. b. Because E is the splitting ﬁeld of x3 − 2 over Q, Exercise 22 shows that G(E/Q) is isomorphic to a subgroup of the group of all permutations of the three zeros of x3 − 2 in E . Because the group of all permutations of three objects has order 6 and G(E/Q) = 6 by Part(a), we see that G(E/Q) is isomorphic to the full symmetric group on three letters, that is, to S3 . 24. We have xp = (x − 1)(xp−1 + · · · + x +1), and Corollary 23.17 shows that the second of these factors, the cyclotomic polynomial Φp (x), is irreducible over the ﬁeld Q. Let ζ be a zero of Φp (x) in its splitting ﬁeld over Q. Exercise 36a of Section 48 shows that then ζ, ζ 2 , ζ 3 , · · · , ζ p−1 are distinct and are all zeros of Φp (x). Thus all zeros of Φp (x) lie in the simple extension Q(ζ ), so Q(ζ ) is the splitting ﬁeld of xp − 1 and of course has degree p − 1 over Q because Φp (x) = irr(ζ, Q) has degree p − 1. 25. By Corollary 49.5, there exists an isomorphism φ : F → F leaving each element of F ﬁxed. Because the coeﬃcients of f (x) ∈ F [x] are all left ﬁxed by φ, we see that φ carries each zero of f (x) in F into a zero of f (x) in F . Because the zeros of f (x) in F generate its splitting ﬁeld E in F , we see that φ[E ] is contained in the splitting ﬁeld E of f (x) in F . But the same argument can be made for φ−1 ; we must have φ−1 [E ] ⊆ E . Thus φ maps E onto E , so these two splitting ﬁelds of f (x) are isomorphic. √ √ −1 + i 3 3 2 , 2 and √ √ −1 − i 3 3 2 . 2 51. Separable Extensions
√√ √ √√ √ √√ 6 3 1. √ Because 3 2 2 = 21/3 21/2 = 25/6 , we have √ = 2/( √2 2 ) so Q( 6 2 ) ⊆ √ ( 3 2, 2 ). Because 2 Q√ √2 √ √3 √ √ 3 2 =√ 6 2 ) and 2 = ( 6 2 ) , we have Q( 3 2, 2 ) ⊆ Q( 6 2 ), so Q( 6 2 ) = Q( 3 2, 2 ). We can take ( 6 α = 2. 168 51. Separable Extensions √ √ √ √ √ √ 6 2. Because ( 4 2)3 ( 6 2) =√3/4 21/6 = 29/12 22/12 = 211/12 , we see that 12 2 = 2/[( 4 2)3 (√ 2 )] so Q( 12 2 ) ⊆ 2 √√ √ √ √ √√ √ 4 6 Q( √2, √2 ). Because 4 2 = ( 12 √)3 and 6 2 = ( 12 2 )2 , we have Q( 4 2, 6 2 ) ⊆ Q( 12 2 ), so Q( 12 2 ) = 2 Q( 4 2, 6 2 ). We can take α = 12 2. √ √ √√ √ √ 3. We try α = 2 + 3. Squaring and cubing, we ﬁnd that α2 = 5 + 2 2 3 and α3 = 11 2 + 9 3. Because √ √ α 3 − 9α 11α − α3 2= and 3 = , 2 2 √ √ √√ we see that Q( 2 + 3 ) = Q( 2, 3 ). √ √ √ √ √ 4. Of course Q(i 3 2 ) ⊆√ (i, 3 2 ). √ Q Because i = −(i 3 2)3 /2 and 3 2 = −2/(i 3 2 )2 , we see that Q(i, 3 2 ) ⊆ √ √ Q(i 3 2 ). Thus Q(i, 3 2 ) = Q(i 3 2 ), so we can take α = i 3 2. 5. The deﬁnition is incorrect. Replace F [x] by F [x] at the end. Let F be an algebraic closure of a ﬁeld F . The multiplicity of a zero α ∈ F of a polynomial f (x) ∈ F [x] is ν ∈ Z+ if and only if (x − α)ν is the highest power of x − α that is a factor of f (x) in F [x]. 6. The deﬁnition is correct. 7. (See the answer in the text.) 8. F T T F F T T T T T 9. We are given that α is separable over F , so by deﬁnition, F (α) is a separable extension over F . Because β is separable over F , it follows that β is separable over F (α) because q (x) =irr(β, F (α)) divides irr(β, F ) so β is a zero of q (x) of multiplicity 1. Therefore F (α, β ) is a separable extension of F by Theorem 51.9. Corollary 51.10 then asserts that each element of F (α, β ) is separable over F . In particular, α ± β, αβ , and α/β if β = 0 are all separable over F . 10. We know that [Zp (y ) : Zp (y p )] is at most p. If we can show that {1, y, y 2 , · · · , y p−1 } is an independent set over Zp (y p ), then by Theorem 30.19, this set could be enlarged to a basis for Zp (y ) over Zp (y p ). But because a basis can have at most p elements, it would already be a basis, and [Zp (y ) : Zp (y p )] = p, showing that irr(y, Zp (y p )) would have degree p and must therefore be xp − y p . Thus our problem is reduced to showing that S = {1, y, y 2 , · · · , y p−1 } is an independent set over Zp (y p ). Suppose that rp−1 (y p ) p−1 r1 (y p ) r2 (y p ) 2 r0 (y p ) ·1+ ·y+ · y + ··· + ·y =0 s0 (y p ) s1 (y p ) s2 (y p ) sp−1 (y p ) where ri (y p ), si (y p ) ∈ Zp [y p ] for i = 0, 1, 2, · · · , p − 1. We want to show that all these coeﬃcients in Zp (y p ) must be zero. Clearing denominators, we see that it is no loss of generality to assume that all si (y p ) = 1 for i = 0, 1, 2, · · · , p − 1. Now the powers of y appearing in ri (y p )(y i ) are all congruent to i modulo p, and consequently no terms in this expression can be combined with any terms of rj (y p )(y j ) for j = i. Because y is an indeterminant, we then see that this linear combination of elements in S can be zero only if all the coeﬃcients ri (y p ) are zero, so S is an independent set over Zp (y p ), and we are done. 11. Let E be an algebraic extension of a perfect ﬁeld F and let K be a ﬁnite extension of E . To show that E is perfect, we must show that K is a separable extension of E . Let α be an element of K . Because [K : E ] is ﬁnite, α is algebraic over E . Because E is algebraic over F , then α is algebraic over F by 51. Separable Extensions 169 Exercise 31 of Section 31. Because F is perfect, α is a zero of irr(α, F ) of multiplicity 1. Because irr(α, E ) divides irr(α, F ), we see that α is a zero of irr(α, E ) of multiplicity 1, so α is separable over E by the italicized remark preceding Theorem 51.9. Thus each α ∈ K is separable over E , so K is separable over E by Corollary 51.10. 12. Because K is algebraic over E and E is algebraic over F , we have K algebraic over F by Exercise 31 of Section 31. Let β ∈ K and let β0 , β1 , · · · , , βn be the coeﬃcients in E of irr(β, E ). Because β is a zero of irr(β, E ) of algebraic multiplicity 1, we see that F (β0 , β1 , · · · , βn , β ) is a separable extension of F (β0 , β1 , · · · , βn ), which in turn is a separable extension of F by Corollary 51.10. Thus we are back to a tower of ﬁnite extensions, and deduce from Theorem 51.9 that F (β0 , β1 , · · · , βn , β ) is a separable extension of F . In particular, β is separable over F . This shows that every element of K is separable over F , so by deﬁnition, K is separable over F . 13. Exercise 9 shows that the set S of all elements in E that are separable over F is closed under addition, multiplication, and division by nonzero elements. Of course 0 and 1 are separable over F , so Exercise 9 further shows that S contains additive inverses and reciprocals of nonzero elements. Therefore S is a subﬁeld of E . 14. a. We know that the nonzero elements of E form a cyclic group E ∗ of order pn − 1 under multiplication, n so all elements of E are zeros of xp − x. (See Section 33.) Thus for α ∈ E , we have σpn (α) = σpn−1 (σp (α)) = σpn−1 (αp ) = σpn−2 (σp (αp )) = σpn−2 (σp (α))p = σpn−2 ((αp )p ) = σpn−2 (αp ) = · · · = αp = α so σpn is the identity automorphism. If α is a generator of the group E ∗ , then αp = α for i < n, so we see that n is indeed the order of σp . b. Section 33 shows that E is an extension of Zp of order n, and is the splitting ﬁeld of any irreducible polynomial of degree n in Z[x]. Because E is a separable extension of the ﬁnite perfect ﬁeld Zp , we see that G(E/F ) = {E : F } = [E : F ] = n. Since σp ∈ G(E/F ) has order n, we see G(E/F ) is cyclic of order n. 15. a. Let f (x) =
∞ i i=0 ai x
i n 2 and g (x) = ∞ i i=0 bi x . Then
∞ D(f (x) + g (x)) = D
i=0 ∞ (ai + bi )xi (i · 1)(ai + bi )xi−1 =
i=1 ∞ ∞ =
i=1 (i · 1)ai xi−1 +
i=1 (i · 1)bi xi−1 = D(f (x)) + D(g (x)). thus D is a homomorphism of F [x], + . b. If F has characteristic zero, then Ker(D) = F . c. If F has characteristic p, then Ker(D) = F [xp ]. 170 16. a. Let f (x) =
∞ i i=0 ai x . 51. Separable Extensions Then
∞ ∞ D(af (x)) = D
i=0 ∞ aai xi =
i=1 (i · 1)aai xi−1 =a
i=1 (i · 1)ai xi−1 = aD(f (x)). b. We use induction on n = deg(f (x)g (x)). If n = 0, then f (x), g (x), f (x)g (x) ∈ F and D(f (x)) = D(g (x)) = D(f (x)g (x)) = 0 by Part(b) and Part(c) of Exercise 15. Suppose the formula is true for n < k , and let us prove it for n = k < 0. Write f (x) = h(x) + ar xr where ar xr is the term of highest degree in f (x). Similarly write g (x) as g (x) = q (x) + bs xs . Then f (x)g (x) = h(x)q (x) + h(x)bs xs + ar xr q (x) + ar bs xr+s . Of these four terms, all are of degree less than k = r + s except for the last term, so by Part(a) of Exercise 15 and our induction hypothesis, we have D(f (x)g (x)) = h(x)q (x) + h (x)q (x) + h(x)(s · 1)bs xs−1 + h (x)bs xs + ar xr q (x) + (r · 1)ar xr−1 q (x) + [(r + s) · 1]ar bs xr+s−1 . We notice that we have h(x)q (x) + h(x)(s · 1)bs xs−1 = h(x)g (x) and h (x)q (x) + (r · 1)ar xr−1 q (x) = f (x)q (x), so we can continue with D(f (x)g (x)) = h(x)g (x) + f (x)q (x) + h (x)bs xs + ar xr q (x) + (s · 1)ar bs xr+s−1 + (r · 1)ar bs xr+s−1 = h(x)g (x) + f (x)q (x) + ar xr [q (x) + (s · 1)bs xs−1 ] + [h (x) + (r · 1)ar xr−1 ]bs xs = h(x)g (x) + f (x)q (x) + ar xr g (x) + f (x)bs xs = [h(x) + ar xr ]g (x) + f (x)[q (x) + bs xs ] = f (x)g (x) + f (x)g (x). c. We proceed by induction on m. If m = 1, the relation becomes D((f (x))1 ) = ((1 · 1)f (x)0 f (x) which reduces to D(f (x)) = f (x). Thus the relation holds for m = 1. Suppose it is true for m < k where k > 1. We show it holds for m = k . Using Part(b), we obtain D(f (x)k ) = D(f (x)(f (x)k−1 )) = f (x)[(k − 1)f (x)k−2 f (x)] + f (x)f (x)k−1 = [f (x)(k − 1)f (x)k−2 + f (x)k−1 ]f (x) = [(k − 1)f (x)k−1 + f (x)k−1 ]f (x) = kf (x)k−1 f (x) which completes our induction proof. 52. Totally Inseparable Extensions 171 17. In F [x], let f (x) = (x − α)ν g (x) where g (α) = 0 and ν ≥ 1 because f (α) = 0. Then by Exercise 16, we have f (x) = (x − α)ν g (x) + ν (x − α)ν −1 g (x). Remembering that ν ≥ 1 and that g (α) = 0, we see that f (α) = 0 if and only if ν > 1, that is, if and only if α is a zero of f (x) of multiplicity > 1. 18. Let f (x) be an irreducible polynomial in F [x] where F is a ﬁeld of characteristic 0. Suppose that α is a zero of f (x) in F . Because f (x) ∈ F [x] has minimal degree among all nonzero polynomials having α as a zero, we see that f (α) = 0, for the degree of f (x) is always one less than the degree of f (x) in the characteristic 0 case. By Exercise 17, α is a zero of f (x) of multiplicity 1. By Theorem 51.2, all zeros of f (x) have this same multiplicity 1, so f (x) is separable. 19. Let α be a zero of irreducible q (x) in the algebraic closure F . The argument in Exercise 18 shows that q (α) = 0 unless q (x) should be the zero polynomial. Now q (x) = 0 if and only if each exponent of each term of q (x) is divisible by p. If this is not the case, then q (α) = 0 so α has multiplicity 1 by Exercise 17, and so do other zeros of q (x) by Theorem 51.2, so q (x) is a separable polynomial. This proves the “only if” part of the exercise. Suppose now that every exponent in q (x) is divisible by p. Let g (x) be the polynomial obtained from q (x) by dividing each exponent by p. Then α ∈ F is a zero of q (x) if and only if αp is a zero of g (x). Let g (x) factor into (x − αp )h(x) in F [x]. Then q (x) = (xp − αp )h(xp ) = (x − α)p h(xp ) in F [x], showing that α is a zero of q (x) of algebraic multiplicity at least p, so q (x) is not separable. 20. The polynomials f (x) and f (x) have a common nonconstant factor in F [x] if and only if they have a common zero in F , because a zero of the common nonconstant factor must be a zero of each polynomial, and a common zero α give rise to a common factor x − α. Thus by Exercise 17, f (x) and f (x) having a common factor in F [x] is equivalent to f (x) having a zero of multiplicity greater than 1. Therefore there is no nonconstant factor of f (x) and f (x) in F [x] if and only if f (x) has no zero in F of multiplicity greater than 1. 21. If f (x) and f (x) have no nonconstant factor in F [x], then they certainly have no nonconstant factor in F [x]. Suppose now that they have no nonconstant factor in F [x] so that a gcd of f (x) and f (x) in F [x] is 1. By Theorem 46.9, 1 = h(x)f (x) + g (x)f (x) for some polynomials h(x), g (x) ∈ F [x]. Viewing this equation in F [x], we see that every common factor of f (x) and f (x) must divide 1, so the only such common factors are elements of F , and 1 is a gcd of f (x) and f (x) in F [x] also. Thus f (x) and f (x) have no common nonconstant factor in F [x] if and only if they have no common nonconstant factor in F [x]. By Exercise 20, this is equivalent to f (x) having no zero in F of multiplicity greater than 1. 22. Compute a gcd of f (x) and f (x) using the Euclidean algorithm. Then f (x) has a zero of multiplicity > 1 in F if and only if this gcd is of degree > 0. 52. Totally Inseparable Extensions
1. The separable closure is Z3 (y 3 , z 9 ) because (y 3 )4 = u and (z 9 )2 = v and 3 does not divide 4 or 2. The ﬁeld Z3 (y, z ) is clearly totally inseparable over (y 3 , z 9 ). 172 52. Totally Inseparable Extensions 2. Clearly the separable closure contains y 3 . Therefore it must contain (y 2 z 18 )3 /(y 3 )2 = z 54 , and hence must contain z 27 . Because it must also contain y 2 z 18 , we see that the separable closure is Z3 (y 3 , y 2 z 18 , z 27 ). Clearly Z3 (y, z ) is totally inseparable over this ﬁeld. 3. The totally inseparable closure is Z3 (y 4 , z 2 ). 4. The totally inseparable closure must contain y 4 , and therefore (y 2 z 18 )2 /y 4 = z 36 , so it must also contain z 4 . Of course it must also contain y 2 z 18 and therefore y 2 z 18 /(z 4 )4 = y 2 z 2 . We see the totally inseparable closure is Z3 (y 4 , y 2 z 2 , z 4 ). Note that (y 2 z 2 )27 = (y 12 )4 (y 2 z 18 )3 , and that (z 4 )27 = (y 2 z 18 )6 /y 12 . 5. F T F F F F T F T T 6. If E is a separable extension of F , then there are no elements of E totally inseparable over F , so the totally inseparable closure of F in E is just F , which is a subﬁeld of E . Suppose that E does contain some elements totally inseparable over F , and let K be the union of F with the set of all such totally inseparable elements. We need only show that for α, β ∈ K , the elements α ± β, αβ , and 1/α if α = 0, are either in F or are totally inseparable over F . Suppose r that α is not in F , but is totally inseparable over F , so that αp ∈ F . Then for any element b in F, r r r r r r we have (α ± b)p = αp ± bp and this sum or diﬀerence is in F . Also (bα)p = bp αp is in F , and r r (1/α)p = 1/αp is in F if α = 0. This shows that for α in K but not in F and for b in F, the elements α ± b, bα, and 1/α, α = 0, are in K . The other case we have to worry about is where α and β are r both totally inseparable over F , that is, they are both in K , but neither one is in F . Then αp ∈ F s s s s r ps−r s and β p ∈ F for some r, s ∈ Z+ . Suppose that s ≥ r. Then (α ± β )p = αp ± β p = (αp ) ± βp s r ps−r ps is in F , and (αβ )p = (αp ) β is in F . Thus α ± β and αβ are either already in F or are totally inseparable over F . This shows that K is closed under the ﬁeld operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and contains multiplicative inverses of nonzero elements. √ 7. Suppose that F is perfect. If xp − a has no zero in F for some a ∈ F , then F ( p a) is a proper extension of F and is totally inseparable over F , contradicting the hypothesis that F is perfect. Thus xp − a has a zero in F for every a ∈ F , that is, F p = F . Conversely, suppose that F p = F and let f (x) be an irreducible polynomial in F [x]. We must show that f (x) is a separable polynomial. Let E be the separable closure of F in the splitting ﬁeld K of f (x) in F . Let [E : F ] = n. Now the map σp : E → E p is an isomorphism. Because F p = F and σp is one to one, no α ∈ E that is not in F is carried into F . Because σp is an isomorphism, the extension E of degree n over F is carried into an extension E p of F p = F of degree n. Because E p ≤ E , we see that n = [E : F ] = [E : E p ][E p : F ] = [E : E p ]n, so [E : E p ] = 1 and E = E p . But then E has no r totally inseparable extension, for an element α of such an extension must satisfy αp = β ∈ E , where r r α ∈ E . But because E p = E , we see that E p = E and the polynomial xp = β has a zero γ in E , / r r r r so that xp − β = xp − γ p = (x − γ )p , showing that γ is the only zero of this polynomial. Thus no such α ∈ E exists and we must have E = K , so the splitting ﬁeld of f (x) is a separable extension of / F , and therefore f (x) is a separable polynomial. 8. The solution of Exercise 7 showed that if F p = F , then E p = E . Conversely, suppose that E p = E . Let n = [E : F ]. Because σp is an isomorphism, it must be that [E p : F p ] = n. Of course F p ≤ F . Then we have n = [E p : F p ] = [E : F p ] = [E : F ][F : F p ] = n[F : F p ], so [F : F p ] = 1 and F = F p . 53. Galois Theory 173 53. Galois Theory
1. We have {K : Q} = [K : Q] = 8. 2. We have G(K/Q) = [K : Q] = 8 because K is a normal extension of Q. 3. We have λ(Q) = G(K/Q) = 8. √√ √√ 4. We have λ(Q( 2, 3)) = [K : Q( 2, 3)] = 2. √ √ 5. We have λ(Q( 6)) = [K : Q( 6)] = 4. √ √ 6. We have λ(Q( 30)) = [K : Q( 30)] = 4. √ √ √ √ √ √ 7. We have λ(Q( 2 + 6)) = [K : Q( 2 + 6)] = 2, because deg( 2 + 6, Q) = 4. 8. We have λ(K ) = [K : K ] = 1. 9. Now x4 − 1 = (x2 − 1)(x2 + 1) = (x − 1)(x + 1)(x2 + 1) so the splitting ﬁeld of x4 + 1 over Q is the same as the splitting ﬁeld of x2 + 1 over Q. This splitting ﬁeld is Q(i). It is of degree 2 over Q, and its Galois group is cyclic of order 2 with generator σ where σ (i) = −i. 10. Because 729 = 93 , Theorem 53.7 shows that the Galois group of GF(729) over GF(9) is cyclic of order 3, generated by σ9 where σ9 (α) = α9 for α ∈ GF(729). 11. See the answer in the text. The answer to Exercise 23 of Section 50 in this manual explains why the group is isomorphic to S3 . We might explain the statement in the text answer that the notation was chosen to reﬂect the notation in Example 8.7, where S3 consisted of permutations of {1, 2, 3}. Here, we are permuting {α1 , α2 , α3 }, and we deﬁned our permutations so they have the eﬀect on the subscripts 1, 2, and 3 that S3√ has on the numbers 1, 2, and 3. It is worth indicating how this can be veriﬁed. √ √ −1+i 3 π π Note that ζ = = − 1 + i 23 = cos 23 + i sin 23 is a cube root of unity, and −1−i 3 = 2 . Thus 2 2 2 our three zeros of x3 − 2 can be written as α1 , α2 = α1 ζ, and α3 = α1 ζ 2 . According to the deﬁnitions of the six automorphism in the text, we see each ρi maps ζ into ζ , but each µi maps ζ into ζ 2 . We illustrate with two computations how our choice of notation mirrors the eﬀect of our notation for S3 in Example 8.7. In that example, ρ1 maps 1 to 2, 2 to 3, and 3 to 1. Here we have ρ1 (α1 ) = α2 by deﬁnition. Computing we ﬁnd ρ1 (α2 ) = ρ1 (α1 ζ ) = ρ1 (α1 )ρ1 (ζ ) = α2 ζ = (α1 ζ )ζ = α3 , and ρ1 (α3 ) = ρ1 (α1 ζ 2 ) = ρ1 (α1 )(ρ1 (ζ ))2 = α2 ζ 2 = (α1 ζ )ζ 2 = α1 because ζ 3 = 1. For our second illustration, we use µ2 , which we expect to leave subscript 2 alone and swap subscripts 1 and 3. Remember that µ2 (ζ ) = ζ 2 , and µ2 (α1 ) = α3 . Computing, µ2 (α2 ) = µ2 (α1 ζ ) = µ2 (α1 )µ2 (ζ ) = α3 ζ 2 = (α1 ζ 2 )ζ 2 = α1 ζ = α2 and µ2 (α3 ) = µ2 (α1 ζ 2 ) = µ2 (α1 )µ2 (ζ 2 ) = α3 ζ 4 = (α1 ζ 2 )ζ 4 = α1 because ζ 6 = (ζ 3 )2 = 12 = 1. 174 53. Galois Theory √√ 12. Now x4 − 5x2 + 6 = (x2 − 2)(x2 − 3) so the spitting ﬁeld is Q( 2, 3). Its Galois group over Q is isomorphic √ the Klein 4group Z2 × Z2 . See Example 53.3 for a description of the action of each to √ element on 2 and on 3. 13. Now x3 − 1 = (x − 1)(x2 + x + 1). Because a primitive cube root of unity is −1+i 3 , we see that its 2 √ splitting ﬁeld over Q is Q(i 3). The Galois group is cyclic of order 2 and is generated by σ where √ √ σ (i 3) = −i 3. √ 14. Let F = Q, K1 = Q( 2) and K2 = Q(i). The ﬁelds are not isomorphic because the additive inverse of unity is a square in K2 but is not a square in K1 . However, the Galois groups over Q are isomorphic, for they are both cyclic of order 2. 15. F F T T T F F T F T 16. Because F (K/E ) ≤ G(K/F ) and G(K/F ) is abelian, we see that G(K/E ) is abelian, for a subgroup of an abelian group is abelian. Because G(E/F ) G(K/F )/G(K/E ) and G(K/F ) is abelian, we see that G(E/F ) is abelian, for a factor group of an abelian group,where multiplication is done by choosing representatives, must again be abelian. 17. To show that NK/F (α) ∈ F , we need only show that it is left ﬁxed by each τ ∈ G(K/F ). From the given formla and the fact that τ is an automorphism, we have τ (NK/F (α)) =
σ ∈G(K/F ) √ (τ σ )(α). But as σ runs through the elements of G(K/F ), τ σ again runs through all elements, because G(K/F ) is a group. Thus only the order of the factors in the product is changed, and because multiplication in K is commutative, the product is unchanged. Thus τ (NK/F (α)) = NK/F (α) for all τ ∈ G(K/F ), so NK/F (α) ∈ F . Precisely the same argument shows that T rK/F (α) ∈ F , only this time it is the order of the summands in the sum that gets changed when computing τ (T rK/F (α)). √ √√ √ √ √ 18. a. NK/Q ( 2) = 2 2(− 2)(− 2) = 4, because two of the elements of the Galois group leave 2 √ ﬁxed, and two carry it into − 2.√ The computations shown for Part(b)  Part(h) are based similarly √ on action of the Galois group on 2 and 3. √ √ √ √√ √ √ √ √ √ b. NK/Q ( 2 + 3) = ( 2 + 3)( 2 − 3)(− 2 + 3)(− 2 − 3) = (−1)2 = 1. √ √ √ √√ c. NK/Q ( 6) = ( 6)(− 6)(− 6)( 6) = 36 d. NK/Q (2) = (2)(2)(2)(2) = 16 √ √ √ √ √ e. T rK/Q ( 2) = 2 + 2 + (− 2) + (− 2) = 0 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ f. T rK/Q ( 2 + 3) = ( 2 + 3) + (− 2 + 3) + ( 2 − 3) + (− 2 − 3) = 0. √ √ √ √ √ g. T rK/Q ( 6) = 6 + (− 6) + (− 6) + 6 = 0 h. T rK/Q (2) = 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 8 19. Let f (x) = irr(α, F ). Because K = F (α) is normal over F , it is a splitting ﬁeld of f (x). Let the factorization of f (x) in K [x] be f (x) = (x − α1 )(x − α2 ) · · · (x − αn ) (1) where α = α1 . Now G(K/F ) = n, and α is carried onto each αi for i = 1, 2, · · · , n by precisely one element of G(K/G). Thus NK/F (α) = α1 α2 · · · αn . If we multiply the linear factors in (1) 53. Galois Theory 175 together, we see that the constant term a0 is (−1)n α1 α2 · · · αn = (−1)n NK/F (α). Similarly, we see that T rK/F (α) = α1 + α2 + · · · + αn . If we pick up the coeﬃcient an−1 of xn−1 in f (x) by multiplying the linear factors in (1), we ﬁnd that an−1 = −α1 − α1 − · · · − αn = −T rK/F (α). 20. Let α1 , α2 , · · · , αr be the distinct zeros of f (x) in F and form the splitting ﬁeld K = F (α1 , α2 , · · · , αr ) of f (x) in F . Note that r ≤ n because f (x) has at most n distinct zeros. Because all irreducible factors of f (x) are separable, we see that K is normal over F . Now each σ ∈ G(K/F ) provides a permutation of S = {α1 , α2 , · · · , αr } and distinct elements of G(K/F ) correspond to distinct permutations of S because an automorphism of K leaving F ﬁxed is uniquely determined by its values on the elements of S . Because permutation multiplication and multiplication in G(K/F ) are both function composition, we see that G(K/F ) is isomorphic to a subgroup of the group of all permutations of S , which is isomorphic to a subgroup of Sr . By the Theorem of Lagrange, it follows that G(K/F ) divides r! which in turn divides n! because r ≤ n. 21. Let K be the splitting ﬁeld of f (x) over F . Because each σ ∈ G(K/F ) carries a zero of f (x) into a zero of f (x) and is a onetoone map, it induces a permutation of the set S of distinct zeros in F of f (x). The action of σ ∈ G(K/G) on all elements of K is completely determined by its action on the elements of the set S . Because permutation multiplication and multiplication in G(K/F ) are both function composition, we see that G(K/F ) is isomorphic in a natural way to a subgroup of the group of all permutations of S . 22. a. Exercise 17 of Section 51 shows that xn − 1 has no zeros of multiplicity greater than 1 as long as n · 1 is not equal to zero in F . Thus the splitting ﬁeld of xn − 1 over F is a normal extension. If ζ is a primitive nth root of unity, then 1, ζ, ζ 2 , · · · , ζ n−1 are distinct elements, and are all zeros of xn − 1. Thus the splitting ﬁeld of xn − 1 over F is F (ζ ). b. The action of σ ∈ G(F (ζ )/F ) is completely determined by σ (ζ ) which must be one of the conjugates ζ s of ζ over F . Let σ, τ ∈ G(F (ζ )/F ), and suppose σ (ζ ) = ζ s and τ (ζ ) = ζ t . Then (στ )(ζ ) = σ (τ (ζ )) = σ (ζ t ) = [σ (ζ )]t = (ζ s )t = ζ st = ζ ts = (ζ t )s = [τ (ζ )]s = τ (ζ s ) = τ (σ (ζ )) = (τ σ )(ζ ) so στ = τ σ and G(F (ζ )/F ) is abelian. 23. a. Because K is cyclic over F , we know that G(K/F ) is a cyclic group. Now G(K/E ) is a subgroup of G(K/F ), and is thus cyclic as a subgroup of a cyclic group. Therefore K is cyclic over E . Because E is a normal extension of F , we know that G(E/F ) G(K/F )/G(K/E ) so G(E/F ) is isomorphic to a factor group of a cyclic group, and is thus cyclic. (A factor group of a cyclic group A is generated by a coset containing a generator of A.) Therefore E is cyclic over F . b. By Galois theory, we know that there is a onetoone correspondence between subgroups H of G(K/F ) and ﬁelds E = KH such that F ≤ E ≤ K . Because G(K/F ) is cyclic, it contains precisely one subgroup of each order d that divides G(K/F ) = [K : F ]. Such a subgroup corresponds to a ﬁeld E where F ≤ E ≤ K and [K : E ] = d, so that [E : F ] = m = n/d. Now as d runs through all divisors of n, the quotients m = n/d also run through all divisors of n, so we are done. 24. a. For τ ∈ G(K/F ), we have a natural extension of τ to an automorphism τ of K [x] where τ (α0 + α1 x + · · · + αn xn ) = τ (α0 ) + τ (α1 )x + · · · + τ (αn )xn . Clearly the polynomials left ﬁxed by τ for all τ ∈ G(K/F ) are precisely those in F (x). For f (x) = σ∈G(K/F ) (x − σ (α)), we have τ (f (x)) =
σ ∈G(K/F ) (x − (τ σ )(α)). 176 54. Illustrations of Galois Theory Now as σ runs through all elements of G(K/F ), we see that τ σ also runs through all elements because G(K/F ) is a group. Thus τ (f (x)) = f (x) for each τ ∈ G(K/F ), so f (x) ∈ F [x]. b. Because σ (α) is a conjugate of α over F for all σ ∈ G(K/F ), we see that f (x) has precisely the conjugates of α as zeros. Because f (α) = 0, we know by Theorem 29.13 that p(x) = irr(α, F ) divides f (x). Let f (x) = p(x)q1 (x). If q1 (x) = 0, then it has as zero some conjugate of α whose irreducible polynomial over F is again p(x), so p(x) divides q1 (x) and we have f (x) = p(x)2 q2 (x). We continue this process until we ﬁnally obtain f (x) = p(x)r c for some c ∈ F . Because p(x) and f (x) are both monic, we must have f (x) = p(x)r . Now f (x) = p(x) if and only if deg(α, F ) = G(K/F ) = [K : F ]. Because deg(α, F ) = [F (α) : F ], we see that this occurs if and only if [F (α) : F ] = [K : F ] so that [K : F (α)] = 1 and K = F (α). 25. In the onetoone correspondence between subgroups of G(K/F ) and ﬁelds E where F ≤ E ≤ K , the diagram of subgroups of G(K/F ) is the inverted diagram of such subﬁelds E of K . Now E ∨ L is the smallest subﬁeld containing both E and L, and thus must correspond to the largest subgroup contained in both G(K/E ) and G(K/L). Thus G(K/(E ∨ L)) = G(K/E ) ∩ G(K/L). 26. Continuing to work with the onetoone corespondence and diagrams mentioned in the solution to Exercsie 25, we note that E ∩ L is the largest subﬁeld of K contained in both E and L. Thus its group must be the smallest subgroup of G(K/F ) containing both G(K/E ) and G(K/L). Therefore G(K/E ∩ L)) = G(K/E ) ∨ G(K/L), which is deﬁned as the intersection of all subgroups of G(K/F ) that contain both G(K/E ) and G(K/L), and is called the join of the subgroups G(K/E ) and G(K/L). 54. Illustrations of Galois Theory
1. Recall that if x4 + 1 has a factorization into polynomials of lower degree in Q[x], then it has such a factorization in Z[x]; see Theorem 23.11. The polynomial does not have a linear factor, for neither 1 nor 1 are zeros of the polynomial. Suppose that x4 + 1 = (x2 + ax + b)(x2 + cx + d) for a, b, c, d ∈ Z. Equating coeﬃcients of x3 , x2 , x, and 1 in that order, we ﬁnd that a + c = 0, ac + b + d = 0, ad + bc = 0, and bd = 1. If b = d = 1, then ac + 2 = 0 so ac = −2 and a2 = 2, which is impossible for an integer a. The other possibility, b = d = −1, leads to a2 = −2 which is also impossible. Thus x4 + 1 is irreducible in Q[x]. 2. The ﬁelds corresponding to the subgroups G(K/Q), H2 , H4 , H7 , and {ρ0 } are either derived in the text or are obvious. We turn to the other subgroups, H1 , H3 , H5 , and H8 . Both H1 and H3 have order 4 and must have ﬁxed ﬁelds of degree 2 over Q. Recalling that the ﬁxed√ ﬁeld of H2 is Q(i), we see √ that the other two obvious extensions of √ degree 2, namely Q( √2) and Q(i 2), must be ﬁxed ﬁelds of √ √ √ H1 and H3 . We ﬁnd that δ1 ( 2) = δ1 (( 4 2)2 ) = (i 4 2)2 = − 2 = 2. Thus H3 , which contains δ1 , √ √ must have Q(i 2) as its ﬁxed ﬁeld, and H1 must have Q( 2) as its ﬁxed ﬁeld. 54. Illustrations of Galois Theory 177 For the ﬁxed ﬁeld of H5 = {ρ0 , µ2 } we need to ﬁnd some elements left ﬁxed by µ2 . Because √ µ2 (α) = −α and µ2 (i) = −i, the product iα is an obvious choice. Now i 4 2 is a zero of x4 − 2 which √ is irreducible, so Q(i 4 2) is of degree 4 over Q and left ﬁxed by H5 . √ Because ρ2 leaves i ﬁxed and maps α into −α, it leaves i and α2 = 2 ﬁxed. Thus the ﬁxed √ ﬁeld of H6 = {ρ0 , ρ2 } is Q(i, 2). To ﬁnd an element left ﬁxed by H8 = {ρ0 , δ2 }, we form β = ρ0 (α) + δ2 (α) = α − iα = √ 4 2(1 − i). (Note that because H8 is a group, this sum of elements of H8 applied to any one element in the ﬁeld is sure to be left ﬁxed by H8 .) Now β 4 = 2(−4) = −8, so β is a zero of x4 + 8. This polynomial does not have ±1, ±2, ±4, or ±8 as a zero, so it has no linear factors. If x4 + 8 = (x2 + ax + b)(x2 + cx + d), then a + c = 0, ac + b + d = 0, ad + bc = 0, and bd = 8. From a + c = 0 and ad + bc = 0, we ﬁnd that ad − ba = 0 so a(d − b) = 0 and either a = 0 or b = d. Because bd = 8, we do not have b = d, so a = 0. √ then b + d = 0 so b = −d, which again cannot satisfy bd = 8. Thus x4 + 8 is irreducible, But and Q( 4 2(1 − i)) has degree 4 over Q and is left ﬁxed by H8 , so it is the ﬁxed ﬁeld of H8 . 3. The choices for primitive elements given in the text answers, the corresponding polynomials and the irreducibility of the polynomials are obvious or proved in the text or the preceding solution, except for the ﬁrst and fourth answers given. √ √ For the case Q( 2, i), let β = 4 2 and γ = i. The proof of Theorem 51.15 shows that for a ∈ Q, β + aγ is a primitive element if (βi − β )/(γ − γj ) = a where βi can be any conjugate of β and γj is any conjugate other than γ of γ . Now γ − γj is always √ i − (−i) = 2i, and because β = α = 4 2 in Table 54.5, it is clear from the table that [(conjugate of √ α) − α]/(2i) is never a nonzero element of Q. Thus we can take a = 1, and we ﬁnd that 4 2 + i is a √ √ primitive element. Let δ = 4 2 + i. Then δ − i = 4 2 so (δ − i)4 = δ 4 − 4δ 3 i − 6δ 2 + 4δi + 1 = 2 so δ 4 − 6δ 2 − 1 = (4δ 3 − 4δ )i Squaring both sides, we obtain δ 8 − 12δ 6 + 34δ 4 + 12δ 2 + 1 = −16δ 6 + 32δ 4 − 16δ 2 so δ 8 + 4δ 6 + 2δ 4 + 28δ 2 + 1 = 0. Thus δ is a zero of x8 + 4x6 + 2x4 + 28x2 + 1 = 0. Because we know that Q(δ ) is of degree 8 over Q, this must be irr(Q, δ ). √ √ √ √ For Q( 2, i), we have [(conjugate of 2) − 2]/2i is never a nonzero element of Q, so 2 + i √ √ is a primitive element. If δ = 2 + i, then δ − i = 2 and δ 2 − 2δi − 1 = 2. Then δ 2 − 3 = 2δi so δ 4 − 6δ 2 + 9 = −4δ 2 and δ 4 − 2δ 2 + 9 = 0. Thus δ is a zero of x4 − 2x2 + 9, and because Q(δ ) is of degree 4 over Q, we see that this polynomial is irreducible. 178 54. Illustrations of Galois Theory 4. a. If ζ is a primitive 5th root of unity, then 1, ζ, ζ 2 , ζ 3 , and ζ 4 are ﬁve distinct elements of Q(ζ ), and (ζ k )5 = (ζ 5 )k = 1k = 1 shows that these ﬁve elements are ﬁve zeros of x5 = 1. Thus x5 − 1 splits in Q(ζ ). b. We know that x5 − 1 = (x − 1)Φ5 (x) where Φ5 (x) = x4 + x3 + x2 + 1 is the irreducible (Corollary 23.17) cyclotomic polyonomial having ζ as a root. Every automorphism of K = Q(ζ ) over Q must map ζ into one of the four roots ζ, ζ 2 , ζ 3 , ζ 4 of this polynomial. c. Let σj ∈ G(K/Q) be the automorphism such that σ (ζ ) = ζ j for j = 1, 2, 3, 4. Then (σj σk )(ζ ) = σj (ζ k ) = (ζ j )k = ζ jk = σm (ζ ) where m is the product of j and k in Z5 . Thus G(K/Q) is isomorphic to the group {1, 2, 3, 4} of nonzero elements of Z5 under multiplication. It is cyclic of order 4, generated by σ2 . d. G(K/Q) = {σ1 , σ2 , σ3 , σ4 } K = K {σ1 } {σ1 , σ4 } √ Q( 5) = Q(cos 72◦ ) = K{σ1 , σ4 } {σ1 } Subgroup diagram Q = K { σ1 , σ 2 , σ 3 , σ 4 } Subﬁeld diagram To ﬁnd K{σ1 , σ4 } , note that ζ = cos 72◦ + i sin 72◦ and that ζ 4 = cos(−72◦ ) + i sin(−72◦ ) = cos(72◦ ) − i sin(72◦ ). Therefore α = σ1 (ζ ) + σ4 (ζ ) = ζ + ζ 4 = 2 cos 72◦ is left ﬁxed by σ1 and σ4 . Alternatively, doing a bit of computation, we ﬁnd that α2 = (ζ + ζ 4 )2 = ζ 2 + 2 + ζ 3 , α = ζ + ζ 4. Now ζ is a zero of Φ5 (x) = x4 + √ + x2 + x + 1, so we see that α2 + α − 1 = 0, so α is a zero of x3 √ x2 + x − 1 which has zeros (−1 ± 5)/2. Thus we can also describe Q(α) as Q( 5). √ √ √ √ √ √ 5. The splitting ﬁeld of x5 − 2 over Q(ζ ) is Q(ζ, 5 2), because 5 2, ζ 5 2, ζ 2 5 2, ζ 3 5 2, and ζ 4 5 2 are the ﬁve zeros of x5 − 2. The Galois group {σ0 , σ1 , σ2 , σ3 , σ4 } is described by the table. √ 5 σ √0 5 2 σ1 √ ζ52 σ2 √ ζ2 5 2 σ3 √ ζ3 5 2 σ4 √ ζ4 5 2 2→ √ √ √ √ We have (σj σk )( 5 2) = σj (ζ k ( 5 2)) = ζ k ζ j ( 5 2) = ζ j +k ( 5 2) from which we see that the Galois group is isomorphic to Z5 , + , so it is cyclic of order 5. 6. a. If ζ is a primitive 7th root of unity, then 1, ζ, ζ 2 , ζ 3 , ζ 4 , ζ 5 , and ζ 6 are seven distinct elements of Q(ζ ), and (ζ k )7 = (ζ 7 )k = 1k = 1 shows that these seven elements are seven zeros of x7 = 1. Thus x7 − 1 splits in Q(ζ ). b. We know that x7 − 1 = (x − 1)Φ7 (x) where Φ7 (x) = x6 + x5 + x4 + x3 + x2 + 1 is the irreducible (Corollary 23.17) cyclotomic polyonomial having ζ as a root. Every automorphism of K = Q(ζ ) over Q must map ζ into one of the six roots ζ, ζ 2 , ζ 3 , ζ 4 , ζ 5 , ζ 6 of this polynomial. 54. Illustrations of Galois Theory 179 c. Let σj ∈ G(K/Q) be the automorphism such that σ (ζ ) = ζ j for j = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Then (σj σk )(ζ ) = σj (ζ k ) = (ζ j )k = ζ jk = σm (ζ ) where m is the product jk in Z7 . Thus G(K/Q) is isomorphic to the group {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} of nonzero elements of Z7 under multiplication. It is cyclic of order 6, generated by σ3 . d. G(K/Q) = {σ1 , σ2 , σ3 , σ4 , σ5 , σ6 }
{σ 1 , σ 2 , σ 4 }
{σ 1 , σ 6 }
{σ1 } Subgroup diagram K = K {σ1 }
√ Q(ζ + ζ 2 + ζ 4 ) = Q(i 7) = K{σ1 , σ2 , σ4 }
Q(ζ + ζ 6 ) = K{σ1 , σ6 }
Q = KG(K/Q) Subﬁeld diagram Clearly α = ζ + ζ 2 + ζ 4 is left ﬁxed by {σ1 , σ2 , σ4 }. Computing, we ﬁnd that α2 = ζ 2 + ζ 4 + ζ + 2ζ 3 + 2ζ 6 + 2ζ 5 , α = ζ + ζ 2 + ζ 4. Thus we ﬁnd that α2 + α = 2(ζ 6 + ζ 5 + ζ 4 + ζ 3 + ζ 2 + ζ ). Because ζ is a zero of Φ7 (x) = x6 + x5 + x4 + x3 + x2 + x + 1, √ we see at once that α2 + α + 2 = 0. The zeros of x2 + x + 2 are (−1 ± i 7)/2, and we see that √ Q(α) = Q(i 7). Working in an analogous way for the subgroup {σ1 , σ6 }, we form the element β = ζ + ζ 6 which is left ﬁxed by this subgroup. Computing, we ﬁnd that β 3 = (ζ + ζ 6 )3 = ζ 3 + 3ζ + 3ζ 6 + ζ 4 , β 2 = (ζ + ζ 6 )2 = ζ 2 + 2 + ζ 5 , β = ζ + ζ 6. Recalling that Φ7 (ζ ) = 0 as above, we ﬁnd that β 3 + β 2 − 2β − 1 = 0. Thus β is a zero of x3 + x2 − 2x +1 which is irreducible because it has no zero in Z. 180 54. Illustrations of Galois Theory 7. Now x8 − 1 = (x4 + 1)(x2 + 1)(x − 1)(x + 1). Example 54.7 shows that the splitting ﬁeld of x4 + 1 contains i, which is a zero of x2 + 1. Thus the splitting ﬁeld of x8 − 1 is the same as the splitting ﬁeld of x4 + 1, whose group was completely described in Example 54.7. This is the “easiest way possible” for us to describe this group. √ 8. Using the quadratic formula to ﬁnd α such that α4 − 4α2 − 1 = 0, we ﬁnd that α2 = (4 ± 20)/2 = √ √ √ 2 ± 5 so the possible values for α are ± 2 + 5 and ±i 5 − 2. We see that the splitting ﬁeld of √ √ √ 4 − 4x2 − 1 = 0 can be generated by adjoining in succession x 5, 5 + 2, and 2 − 5. Thus it has √ √ degree 23 = 8 over Q. It can obviously be generated by adjoining α1 = 5 + 2 and α2 = i 5 − 2. Let K = Q(α1 , α2 ). The eight elements of G(K/Q) are given by this table. ρ0 α1 α2 ρ1 α2 α1 ρ2 −α1 −α2 ρ3 −α2 α1 µ1 α2 α1 µ2 −α2 −α1 δ1 −α1 α2 δ2 α1 −α2 α1 → α2 → The group is isomorphic to D4 and the notation here is chosen to coincide with the notation used in Example 8.10. The subgroup diagram is identical with that in Fig. 54.6(a). Here is the subﬁeld diagram. K = K{ρ0 } = Q(α1 , α2 )
¨ ¨¨ ¨¨ ¨¨ d d d d r rr r rr Q(α1 + α2 ) = KH4
Q(α1 − α2 ) = KH5
√ Q(i, 5) = KH6
Q(α2 ) = KH7
√ Q(α1 ) = KH8
Q(i) = KH1 √ Q(i 5) = KH2
Q( 5) = KH3 Q = KG(K/Q) Subﬁeld diagram We now check most of this diagram.√ Note that α12 is left ﬁxed by H3 = {ρ0 , ρ2 , δ1 , δ2 } and that α12 = √ 5 + 2, so the ﬁxed ﬁeld of H3 is Q( 5). Note also that α1 α2 = i is left √ ﬁxed by H1 = {ρ0 , ρ2 , µ1 , µ2 } so the ﬁxed ﬁeld of H1 is Q(i). Then H6 = H1 ∩ H3 leaves both i and 5 ﬁxed. Also KH2 must be √ the only remaining extension of Q of degree 2, and Q(i 5) ﬁts the bill. The remaining ﬁelds are trivial to check because they are described in terms of α1 and α2 . For example, to see that Q(α1 ) is the ﬁxed ﬁeld of H8 , we need only note that {ρ0 , δ2 } = H8 is the set of elements leaving α1 ﬁxed in the action table shown earlier. 9. We develop some formulas to use in this exercise and the next one. For simple notation, we denote symmetric expressions in the indeterminates y1 , y2 , y3 by the notation S (formula) where the formula indicates the nature of one summand of the expression. Thus we write s1 = y1 + y2 + y3 = S (yi ), s2 = y1 y2 + y1 y3 + y2 y3 = S (yi yj ), s3 = y1 y2 y3 = S (yi yj yk ). 54. Illustrations of Galois Theory 181 Note that the subscripts i, j, k do not run independently through values from 1 to 3; we always have i = j = k . The formula simply indicates the nature of one, typical term in the symmetric expression. a. We now express some other symmetric expression in terms of s1 , s2 , and s3 . Theorem 54.2 asserts that this is possible. If you write them out for subscript values from 1 to 3, you can see why they hold. Equation (1) is the answer to Part(a). y12 + y22 + y32 = S (yi2 ) = [S (yi )]2 − 2S (yi yj ) = s12 − 2s2 . b. We have S (yi2 yj ) = S (yi yj )S (yi ) − 3S (yi yj yk ) = s1 s2 − 3s3 . We can now get the answer to Part(b), using formula (2), y 1 y 2 y 1 y 3 y2 y3 + + + + + =S y 2 y 1 y 3 y 1 y 3 y2 y12 y3 + y22 y3 + y12 y2 + y32 y2 + y22 y1 + y32 y1 y 1 y2 y3 yi yj = (2) (1) = = S (yi2 yj ) y1 y2 y 3 s1 s2 − 3s3 . s3 10. We have x3 − 4x2 + 6x − 2 = (x − α1 )(x − α2 )(x − α3 ). Therefore the elementary symmetric expressions in α1 , α2 , and α3 are given by s1 = α1 + α2 + α3 = 4, s2 = α1 α2 + α1 α3 + α2 α3 = 6, s3 = α1 α2 α3 = 2. We feel free to make use of the formulas (1) and (2) of the solution to the preceding exercise, and using the notation there, we also have the relation S (yi2 yj2 ) = [S (yi yj )]2 − 2S (yi2 yj yk ) = s22 − 2s1 s3 . a. x  4 b. Let x3 + b2 x2 + b1 x + b0 = (x − α12 )(x − α22 )(x − α32 ). Now b2 = −α12 − α22 − α32 = −(s12 − 2s2 ) by formula (1). Evaluating with the values of s1 , s2 , and s3 , we ﬁnd that b2 = −(16 − 12) = −4. Also b1 = α12 α22 + α12 α32 + α22 α32 = s22 − 2s1 s3 by formula (3). Evaluating, we ﬁnd that b1 = 36 − 16 = 20. Finally, b0 = −α12 α22 α32 = −s32 = −4. Thus the answer is x3 − 4x2 + 20x − 4. 11. By Cayley’s Theorem, every ﬁnite group G is isomorphic to a subgroup of Sn where n is the order of G. Now Theorem 54.2 shows that for each positive integer n, there exists a normal extension K of a ﬁeld E such that G(K/E ) Sn . If H is a subgroup of G(K/E ) isomorphic to G, then H is the Galois group of K over KH , where L = KH is the ﬁxed ﬁeld of H . Thus H is isomorphic to G and is the Galois group G(K/L) of K over L. (3) 182 54. Illustrations of Galois Theory 12. a. If ∆(f ) = 0, then αi = αj for some i = j . Thus irr(αi , F ) = irr(αj , F ). Because the irreducible factors of f (x) are all separable and do not have zeros of multiplicity greater than 1, we see that f (x) must have irr(αi , F )2 as a factor. b. Clearly [∆(f )]2 is a symmetric expression in the αi , and hence left ﬁxed by any permutation of the αi , and thus is invariant under G(K/F ). Therefore [∆(f )]2 is in F . c. Consider the eﬀect of a transposition (αi , αj ) on ∆(f ); it is no loss of generality to suppose i < j . The factor αi − αj is carried into αj − αi , so it changes sign. For k > j, αk − αj and αk − αi for k > j are carried into each other, so they do not contribute a sign change. The same is true of αi − αk and αj − αk for k < i. For i < k < j , the terms αk − αi and αj − αk are carried into αk − αj = −(αj − αk ) and into αi − αk = −(αk − αi ), so they contribute two sign changes. Thus the transposition contributes 1+2(j − i − 1) sign changes, which is an odd number, and carries ∆(f ) into ∆(f ). Thus a permutation leaves ∆(f ) ﬁxed if and only if it can be expressed as a product of an even number of transpositions, that is, if and only if it is in An . Hence G(K/F ) ⊆ An if and only if it leaves ∆(f ) ﬁxed, that is, if and only if ∆(f ) ∈ F. 13. Let α and β be algebraic integers and let K be the splitting ﬁeld of irr(α, Q)· irr(β, Q). Now g (x) =
σ ∈ G(K/Q) (x − σ (α)) is a power of irr(α, Q), and thus has integer coeﬃcients and leading coeﬃcient 1 because α is an algebraic integer. The same is true of h(x) =
µ∈ G(K/Q) (x − µ(β )). Now k (x) =
σ, µ∈ G(K/Q) [x − (σ (α) + µ(β ))] [(x − σ (α)) − µ(β )] =
σ ∈ G(K/Q) µ∈ G(K/Q) =
σ ∈ G(K/Q) h(x − σ (α)). Because h(x) has integer coeﬃcients, h(x − σ (α)) is a polynomial in x − σ (α) with integer coeﬃcients. We can view k (x) as a symmetric expression in α and its conjugates over the ﬁeld Q involving only integers in Q. By Theorem 54.2, the symmetric expression in α and its conjugates can be expressed as polynomials in the elementary symmetric functions of α and its conjugates, that is, in terms of the coeﬃcients of g (x) or their negatives. Thus k (x) has integer coeﬃcients. Now one zero of k (x) is α + β , corresponding to the factor where σ and µ are both the identity permutation. Thus irr(α + β, Q) is a factor of the monic polynomial k (x). Because a factorization in Q[x] can always be implemented in Z[x] by Theorem 23.11, we see that irr(α + β, Q) is monic with integer coeﬃcients, and hence α + β is an algebraic integer. If α is a zero of f (x), then −α is a zero of f (−x) which again has integer coeﬃcients and is monic, so −α is again an algebraic integer. One can argue that αβ is an algebraic integer by the same technique that we used for α + β , considering [x − σ (α)µ(β )] =
σ, µ∈ G(K/Q) σ ∈ G(K/Q) µ∈ G(K/Q) [x − σ (α)µ(β )] . 55. Cyclotomic Extensions 183 Thus the algebraic integers are closed under addition and multiplication, and include additive inverses, and of course 0 which is a zero of x. Hence they form a subring of C. 55. Cyclotomic Extensions
1. Let ζ = cos π + i sin π = 4 4
1 √ 2 + 1 √ i. 2 Using the relations √ 2, √ and ζ 3 + ζ 5 = − 2 ζ 8 = 1, ζ + ζ 7 = we have Φ(x) = (x − ζ )(x − ζ 7 )(x − ζ 3 )(x − ζ 5 ) = [x2 − (ζ + ζ 7 )x + 1][x2 − (ζ 3 + ζ 5 )x + 1] √ √ = (x2 − 2x + 1)(x2 + 2x + 1) = x4 + 1. 2. The group is G = {1, 3, 7, 9, 11, 13, 17, 19} under multiplication modulo 20. We ﬁnd that 32 = 9, 33 = 7, and 34 = 1, so 3 and 7 have order 4, and 9 has order 2. Taking their additive inverses, we see that 17 and 13 have order 4, and 11 has order 2. Of course 19 = 1 has order 2. Because G is abelian, it is isomorphic to Z4 × Z2 by Theorem 11.12. 3. a. We have 60 = 22 · 3 · 5, so ϕ(60) = 2 · 2 · 4 = 16. b. Now 1000 = 23 · 53 , so ϕ(1000) = 22 · 52 · 4 = 400. c. Factoring, 8100 = 22 · 34 · 52 , so ϕ(8100) = 2 · 33 · 5 · 2 · 4 = 2160 4. We just use Theorem 55.8 with the Fermat primes 3, 5, and 17, repeatedly multiplying by 2 the numbers 3, 5, 15 = 3 · 5, 17, 51 = 3 · 17, and 85 = 5 · 17 until we have generated the ﬁrst 30 possibilites, which we list in ﬁve columns. (The next Fermat prime, 257, is not needed for the ﬁrst 30 values of n). 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 17 20 24 30 32 34 40 48 51 60 64 68 80 85 96 102 120 128 136 160 170 5. Now 360 and 180 are divisible by 32 , so the 360gon and the 180gon are not constructible. However, 360/3 = 120 = 8 · 3 · 5 so the regular 120gon is constructible, and therefore an angle of 3◦ is constructible. 6. a. We have [K : Q] = ϕ(12) = 4 because the integers ≤ 12 and relatively prime to 12 are 1, 5, 7, and 11. b. The group G(K/Q) is isomorphic to {1, 5, 7, 11} under multiplication modulo 12, and 52 , 72 , and 112 are all congruent to 1 modulo 12. Thus for all σ ∈ G(K/Q), we must have σ 2 = ι, the identity automorphism. The group is isomorphic to Z2 × Z2 by Theorem 11.12. 184
3 55. Cyclotomic Extensions − 7. We have Φ3 (x) = x −11 = x2 + x + 1 for every ﬁeld of characteristic = 3, because ζ and ζ 2 are both x primitive cube roots of unity. In Z3 [x], x8 − 1 = (x4 + 1)(x2 + 1)(x − 1)(x + 1) so the four primitive 8th roots of unity must be zeros of x4 + 1, and Φ8 (x) = x4 + 1 = (x2 + x + 2)(x2 + 2x + 2). 8. In Z3 [x], we have x6 − 1 = (x2 − 1)3 = (x − 1)3 (x + 1)3 , so the polynomial already splits in Z3 , and the splitting ﬁeld has 3 elements. 9. T T F T T F T T F T 10. The nth roots of unity form a cyclic group of order n under multiplication, for if ζ is a primitive nth root of unity, then ζ j ζ k = ζ j +k = ζ j +k (mod n) . Each element ζ j of this group generates a subgroup of some order d dividing n, and is thus a primitive dth root of unity. Also, if d divides n, then ζ n/d is a primitive dth root of unity. Thus the collection of all primitive dth roots of unity for d dividing n contains all the nth roots of unity. Because the primitive dth roots of unity are the zeros of Φd (x) in a ﬁeld of characteristic not dividing d, we see that xn − 1 = dn Φd (x).
+1 11. We have Φ1 (x) = x−1, Φ2 (x) = x+1, and Φ3 (x) = x −1 = x2 +x+1. Also, x4 −1 = (x2 +1)(x−1)(x+1) x so Φ4 (x) = x2 + 1, and Φ5 (x) = x4 + x3 + x2 + x + 1 (see Corollary 23.17). A primitive 6th root of unity is a primitive cube root of 1, and hence a zero of x3 + 1 = (x + 1)(x2 − x + 1). Because there are two primitive 6th roots of unity, we see that Φ6 (x) = x2 − x + 1.
3 12. By Exercises 10 and 11, x12 − 1 = Φ1 (x)Φ2 (x)Φ3 (x)Φ4 (x)Φ6 (x)Φ12 (x) = (x − 1)(x + 1)(x2 + x + 1)(x2 + 1)(x2 − x + 1)Φ12 (x) = (x4 − 1)(x4 + x2 + 1)Φ12 (x) = (x8 + x6 − x2 − 1)Φ12 (x). Polynomial long division yields
x12 −1 x8 + x6 − x2 − 1 = x4 − x2 + 1, so Φ12 (x) = x4 − x2 + 1. 13. Let ζ be a primitive nth root of unity where n is odd. The positive powers of ζ which equal 1 are then n, 2n, 3n, · · ·. Because n is odd, (−ζ )n = −1. Consequently (−ζ )2n = 1, so the multiplicative order r of −ζ is either 2n or < n. If r < n, then 1 = [(−ζ )r ]2 = [(−ζ )2 ]r = (ζ 2 )r = ζ 2r , and we would then have to have n = 2r, contradicting the fact that n is odd. Therefore r = 2n, and −ζ is a primitive 2nth root of unity. We have shown that if ζ is a primitive nth root of unity for n odd, then −ζ is a primitive 2nth root of unity. Now formula (1) in the text shows that for n odd, ϕ(n) = ϕ(2n), so if ζ1 , ζ2 , · · · , ζϕ(n) are all the primitive nth roots of unity for n odd, then their negatives account for all the primitive 2nth roots of unity. Now ζ is a zero of Φn (x) if and only −ζ is zero of Φn (−x), which, by Deﬁnition 55.2, shows that Φ2n (x) must be either Φn (−x) or −Φn (−x), depending on whether the degree ϕ(n) of Φn (x) is even or odd. But formula (1) in the text shows that if n is odd, then ϕ(n) is even. Thus we have Φ2n (x) = Φn (−x). 14. Let ζ be a primitive mnth root of unity. Then ζ m is a primitive nth root of unity and ζ n is a primitive mth root of unity, so the splitting ﬁeld of xmn − 1 contains the splitting ﬁeld of (xm − 1)(xn − 1). 56. Insolvability of the Quintic 185 The splitting ﬁeld of (xm − 1)(xn − 1) contains ζ n and ζ m and thus contains ζ m ζ n . Now = ζ m+n has order the least positive integer r such that mn divides r(m + n). No prime dividing m divides m + n because m and n are relatively prime. Similarly, no prime dividing n divides m + n. Consequently, mn must divide r, so ζ m ζ n is a primitive mnth root of unity. Thus the splitting ﬁeld of (xm − 1)(xn − 1) contains a primitive mnth root of unity, and thus contains the splitting ﬁeld of xmn − 1. This completes the demonstration that the splitting ﬁelds of xmn − 1 and of (xn − 1)(xm − 1) are the same. ζ mζ n 15. Let ζ be a primitive mnth root of unity, so that K = Q(ζ ) is the splitting ﬁeld of xmn − 1. Now form F = Q(ζ n ) and E = Q(ζ m ) as shown in the diagram. K = Q(ζ ) d d ϕ(m) d ϕ(n) dQ ϕ(n) E = Q(ζ m ) F = Q(ζ n ) ϕ(m)d
d Now ζ m is a primitive nth root of unity and ζ n is a primitive mth root of unity. Thus [F : Q] = ϕ(m) and [E : Q] = ϕ(n) as labeled on the lower part of the diagram. Formula(1) for ϕ(n) in the text shows that because m and n are relatively prime, ϕ(mn) = ϕ(m)ϕ(n). Because [K : Q] = ϕ(mn), we see that [K : F ] = ϕ(n) and also that [K : E ] = ϕ(m) as labeled on the upper part of the diagram. Thus G(K/F ) is a subgroup of G(K/Q) of order ϕ(n) and G(K/E ) is a subgroup of order ϕ(m). We check the conditions of Exercise 50 of Section 11 to show that G(K/Q) G(K/F ) × G(K/E ). Because G(K/Q) is abelian (see Theorem 55.4), condition (b) holds. For condition (c), suppose that σ ∈ G(K/Q) is in both G(K/F ) and G(K/E ). Then σ (ζ m ) = ζ m and σ (ζ n ) = ζ n . Suppose that σ (ζ ) = ζ r . Then σ (ζ m ) = ζ rm = ζ m so r ≡ 1(mod n). Also σ (ζ n ) = ζ rn = ζ n so r ≡ 1(mod m). Because n and m are relatively prime, we see that r ≡ 1(mod mn), so r = 1 and σ is the identity automorphism. Thus G(K/F ) ∩ G(K/E ) consists of just the identity automorphism. To demonstrate condition (a) that G(K/F ) ∨ G(K/E ) = G(K/Q), form the ϕ(m)ϕ(n) elements σµ where σ ∈ F (K/E ) and µ ∈ G(K/F ). We claim that these products are all distinct, so that they must comprise all of G(K/Q). Suppose that σµ = σ1 µ1 for σ, σ1 ∈ G(K/E ) and µ, µ1 ∈ G(K/F ). Then σ1−1 σ = µ1 µ−1 is in both G(K/E ) and G(K/F ), and thus must be the identity automorphism. Therefore σ = σ1 and µ = µ1 . Exercise 51 of Section 11 now shows that G(K/Q) F (K/F ) × G(K/E ). 56. Insolvability of the Quintic
1. No, The splitting ﬁeld E cannot be obtained by adjoining a square root of an element of Z2 to Z2 because all elements in Z2 are already squares. However, K is an extension by radicals, for x3 − 1 = (x − 1)(x2 + x + 1) so K is also the splitting ﬁeld of x3 − 1. Thus K = Z2 (ζ ) where ζ is a primitive cube root of unity, and ζ 3 = 1 is in Z2 . 186 56. Insolvability of the Quintic 2. Yes, because if α is a zero of f (x) = ax8 + bx6 + cx4 + dx2 + e then α2 is a zero of g (x) = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e. Because g (x) is a quartic, F (α2 ) is an extension of F by radicals, and thus F (α) is an extension of F by radicals. 3. T T T F T F T F F T 4. We have b f (x) = ax2 + bx + c = a(x2 + x) + c a b2 b2 = a(x + ) +c− if 2 · a = 0. 2·a 4·a Thus if α ∈ F satisﬁes a(α + so that b α+ =± 2·a then α is a zero of ax2 + bx + c. 5. Let α be a zero of ax4 + bx2 + c. Then α2 is a zero of ax2 + bx + c which is solvable by radicals by Exercise 4. If α1 = α, α2 , α3 , and α4 are the zeros of ax4 + bx2 + c, then the tower of ﬁeld starting with F and adjoining in sequence α12 , α22 , α32 , α42 , α1 , α2 , α3 , α4 is an extension where each successive ﬁeld of the tower is either equal to the preceding ﬁeld or is obtained from it by adjoining a square root of an element of the preceding ﬁeld. Thus the splitting ﬁeld is an extension by radicals, so the quartic is solvable. 6. We can achieve any reﬁnement of a subnormal series by inserting, one at a time, a ﬁnite number of groups. Let Hi < Hi+1 be two adjacent terms of the series, so that Hi+1 /Hi is abelian,and suppose that an additional subgroup K is inserted between them so that Hi < K < Hi+1 . Then K/Hi is abelian because it can be regarded as a subgroup of Hi+1 /Hi . By Theorem 34.7, Hi+1 /K is isomorphic to (Hi+1 /Hi )/(K/Hi ), which is the factor group of an abelian group, and hence is abelian. For an alternate argument, note that because Hi+1 /Hi is abelian, Hi must contain the commutator subgroup of Hi+1 , so K also contains this commutator subgroup and Hi+1 /K is abelian. 7. Let Hi < Hi+1 be two adjacent groups in a subnormal series with solvable quotient groups, so that Hi+1 /Hi is a solvable group. By deﬁnition, there exists a subnormal series Hi /Hi < K1 /Hi < K2 /Hi < · · · < Kr /Hi < Hi+1 /Hi with abelian quotient groups. We claim that the reﬁnement of the original series at this ith level to K0 = Hi < K1 < K2 < · · · < Kr < Hi+1 = Kr+1 has abelian quotient groups at this level, for by Theorem 34.7, Kj /Kj +1 (Kj /Hi )/(Kj −1 /Hi ), which is abelian by our construction. Making such a reﬁnement at each level of the given subnormal series, we obtain a subnormal series with abelian quotient groups. 8. a. The generalization of this to an ncycle and a transposition in Sn is proved in the solution to Exercise 39 of Section 9. b 2 b2 − 4 · ac )= 2·a 4·a √ b2 − 4 · ac −b ± b2 − 4 · ac and α = , 4 · a2 2·a APPENDIX: Matrix Algebra 187 b. Let K be the splitting ﬁeld of the irreducible polynomial f (x) of degree 5 over Q. Because each element of G(K/Q) corresponds to a permutation of the ﬁve zeros of f (x) in K , and multiplication is function composition for both automorphisms and permutations, we can view G(K/Q) as a subgroup of S5 . Now G(K/Q) is divisible by 5, for a zero α of f (x) generates Q(α) < K of degree 5 over Q, and degrees of towers are multiplicative. By Sylow theory, a group of order divisible by 5 contains an element of order 5, which we can view as a cycle of length 5 in S5 . The automorphism σ of C where σ (a + bi) = a − bi induces an automorphism of K , which must carry one complex root a + bi of f (x) into the other one a − bi and leave the real roots of f (x) ﬁxed. Thus this automorphism of K is of order 2, so we can view it as a transposition in S5 . c. We ﬁnd that f (x) = 10x4 − 20x3 = x3 (10x − 20), so f (x) > 0 where x > 2 or x < 0, and f (x) < 0 for 0 < x < 2. Because f (−1) = −2, f (0) = 5, and f (2) = −11, we see that f (x) has one real zero between 1 and 0, one beween 0 and 2, and one greater than 2. These are all the real zeros because f (x) increases for x > 2 and for x < −1. Thus f (x) has exactly three real zeros and exactly two complex zeros so the group of the polynomial is isomorphic to S5 and the polynomial is not solvable by radicals. APPENDIX: Matrix Algebra
1. 21 27 31 5 15 1 −i 4 − 6i −2 − 2i 1 −i i1 10 11 0 −1 10
4 2. 4 + i −3 + i 1 7 − i 1 + 2i 2 − i 5 16 −3 0 −18 24 8.
2 −3 + 2i −1 − 4i 2 −i 3. 0 −i 6. Undeﬁned 4. 5. 7. 1 −1 10 8 −8i 8i 8 4 = 0 −1 1 −1 2 = −1 1 −1 0 9. = 01 21 2 −2i 2i 2 = = 10. 11. 01 10 01 , 21 11 22 1/2 0 0 12. 0 1/4 0 0 0 −1 = 11 31 13. (3)(2)(8) = 48 14. Given that A−1 and B −1 exist, the associative property for matrix multiplication yields (B −1 A−1 )(AB ) = B −1 (A−1 A)B = B −1 In B = B −1 B = In so AB is invertible. Similarly, we compute (A−1 B −1 )(BA) = A−1 (B −1 B )A = A−1 In A = A−1 A = In so BA is invertible also. ...
View
Full
Document
This note was uploaded on 03/03/2009 for the course MATH 113 taught by Professor Ogus during the Fall '08 term at University of California, Berkeley.
 Fall '08
 OGUS
 Algebra

Click to edit the document details